F-14 Tomcat Manual
Contents
This documentation contains the manual for the F-14 Tomcat aircraft. The content is grouped per aircraft variant:
- Chapter F-14A/B is the main manual, listing and explaining all
systems. Special focus is given to the variants
- F-14A-95-GR (Export),
- F-14A-135-GR (Early),
- F-14A-135-GR (Late) and
- F-14B.
- Chapter F-14B(U) then goes into details on all changes introduced with the F-14B Upgrade specifically.
This document is available online, as PDF version, embedded in-game as offline website and can be contributed to as open-source project at GitHub.
💡 This manual provides comprehensive details on the F-14 Tomcat. For a more hands-on approach it is recommended to check out Chuck's Guide as well.
Introduction
Origins
U.S. Navy photo by LT J.G. Thomas Prochilo. (DN-SC-83-06680)
The F-14 Tomcat can trace its origin back to the 1950's and the US Navy's need for a carrier based long range interceptor to fill the Fleet Air Defence role. It was decided that it needed an aircraft with a more advanced and longer ranged radar as well as longer ranged air-to-air missile than the F-4 Phantom.
The Navy was directed, by then defense secretary Robert McNamara, to join the Tactical Fighter Experimental or TFX program to procure this aircraft in a joint venture with the US Air Force. The Navy was opposed to this from the beginning and the proposed General Dynamics F-111B did not meet the Navy's expectations.
Grumman, which had been brought on board by General Dynamics for the Navy F-111B, was eventually awarded a contract to begin development of an aircraft more suited to the Navy's requirements. This led to the design that would eventually become the F-14, carrying over the radar (AN/AWG-9) and missiles (AIM-54 Phoenix) from the failed F-111B project.
The F-14 Tomcat first flew on the 21st of December 1970 and entered service on the 22nd of September 1974. The name "Tomcat" follows Grumman's tradition of naming their aircraft after cats and also partially from the nickname "Tom's Cat" for Vice Admiral Thomas F. Connolly who was instrumental for the development of the F-14.
Service Life Upgrades
The first version of the F-14, the F-14A was equipped with the Pratt & Whitney TF30 and carried an IRST system in the chinpod under the nose.
The TF30 engines were generally regarded as temperamental and underpowered for the F-14A and were eventually replaced by the General Electric F110-400 engines in the F-14A+ (later F-14B).
The IRST system was rather quickly determined to be underperforming and replaced with the TCS (Television Camera Set) in the chinpod allowing for greater than visual range identification of radar tracked targets.
Both the F-14A and F-14B received continuous upgrades during their life, including new programmable cockpit displays (PTID and PMDIG) as well as a new INS system, a digital flight control system (DFCS) and an RWR system amongst others.
Eventually the Tactical Reconnaissance mission was also added to the F-14's portfolio, enabled by the TARPS system, allowing the Tomcat to gather photographic reconnaissance material.
Ground Attack Role
Photo by LCDR Dave Parsons. (DN-SC-93-01299)
During the 1990's when the aerial threat to the fleets of the US Navy lessened and with the advent of operations like Desert Storm, the ground attack role was resurrected.
The ability to carry and deliver air-to-ground munitions had been implemented in the F-14 from the beginning but ruled out by the Navy as cost and risk ineffective given the F-14's role as a Fleet Air Defence fighter.
With the renewed interest for this role, some of the F-14As and F-14Bs were equipped to carry the LANTIRN targeting pod allowing the RIO to find and designate laser guided bombs for his own aircraft and others. Later on the ability to carry and deliver gps-guided JDAMs was also added.
Most of the LANTIRN equipped aircraft were the ones upgraded with the programmable TID or (PTID) allowing for greater integration of the LANTIRN.
F-14B UPGRADE
Starting in september 1996 the NAVY Upgraded its entire F-14B fleet of 84 aircraft to the F-14B(U) standard.
Aside from numerous avionics improvements, the airframe changes over the standard B model included provision for the emerging capabilities of Night Vision Goggle (NVG) compatibility, LANTIRN provision and carriage/digital image transmission ability of the TARPS-DI pod.
F-14D
In the 1990's the ultimate F-14 version was beginning to see service, the F-14D.
The F-14D used the same engines as the F-14B, the GE F110-400s in addition to using the digital flight control system, which was eventually retrofitted into operational F-14As and F-14Bs as well.
In addition the F-14D also had a newer, more advanced version of the AN/AWG-9, the AN/APG-71, as well as a whole suite of upgraded avionics along with a new chinpod combining the TCS with a new, improved IRST system.
End of Service
The F-14 Tomcat did eventually show its age, forcing the Navy to retire it due to increased maintenance costs and the general status of the now dated airframes. Additionally the Tomcat's primary role, the Fleet Air Defence role, seemingly disappeared with the end of the Cold War.
The Tomcat was finally retired in a ceremony on the 22nd of September 2006 at NAS Oceana.
Iran
IRIAF photo circa 1986
The only other operator of the F-14 Tomcat was the Imperial Iranian Air Force, later the Islamic Republic of Iran Air Force, for which the Shah of Iran, Mohammad Reza Pahlavi acquired 80 Tomcats.
The eventual fall of the Shah and the rise of the Islamic Republic of Iran meant that a country now opposed to the United States had access to one of its most advanced fighter aircraft. This meant that the Iranian F-14s now lost access to new spare parts and missiles, apart from black market sources, greatly increasing the difficulty of maintaining the aircraft.
The F-14 Tomcat was used during the Iran-Iraq war, claiming a great number of air-to-air victories over the Iraqi Air Force, with some sources going so far as to claim that Iraqi pilots at times left the contested air space to avoid facing the AN/AWG-9 - AIM-54 combo.
To this date the IRIAF continues to fly the F-14 Tomcat as the sole operator. It's not entirely known how the Iranians source their spare parts but it's assumed that they've had to cannibalize inoperable aircraft to keep a portion of their fleet flying. In addition rumours exist mentioning black market sources as well as indigenous production of some parts.
The Iranian operated Tomcats are of the earlier F-14A revisions, using the TF30 engines and lacking a TCS or IRST system.
AIM-54 Phoenix
U.S. Navy photo by Capt. Dana Potts. (020924-N-1955P-001)
The AIM-54 long-range air-to-air missile was born from the same TFX program as that which eventually led to the F-14 Tomcat.
It was designed for the F-111B and then adopted for the F-14 as a long-range missile capable of long range engagement of enemy bombers in addition to hostile cruise missiles. That's not to say that the AIM-54 Phoenix was a slouch at engaging other smaller targets as well.
Outstanding features of the AIM-54 missiles were their long range as well as their ability to be launched at up to six simultaneous targets, guided first by the AN/AWG-9 radar in the launching aircraft and then its own active radar seeker independently.
The original AIM-54 Phoenix was the AIM-54A with a mk47 rocket motor. The motor was later on upgraded, creating the mk60 motor, increasing the missile's range. Eventually the AIM-54 itself was also upgraded, resulting in the AIM-54C with, amongst other things, an upgraded seeker head and a newer version of the mk47 producing less smoke, making the missile hard to spot visually.
The US Navy fired only three AIM-54 missiles in combat, all three over Iraq. The missiles never hit their intended targets though as two of the missiles' rocket motors failed with the third also missing its target as it turned tail and ran.
While little is known for certain in the western hemisphere, the IRIAF claims at least 78 air-to-air victories using the AIM-54 against Iraqi MiG-21s, MiG-23s, MiG-25s, Mirage F-1s, Super Etendards and even some anti-ship cruise missiles.
Technical Specifications
F-14A
| Attribute | Value |
|---|---|
| Wingspan (Extended) | 64’1.5" (~19.5 m) |
| Wingspan (Swept) | 38’2.5" (~11.6 m) |
| Wingspan (Oversweep) | 33’3.5" (~10.1 m) |
| Length | 62’8.5" (~19.1 m) |
| Height | 16’ (~4.9 m) |
| Wing Area | 565 ft² (~52.5 m²) |
| Empty Weight | 40,104 lbs (~18,200 kg) |
| Max Weight | 72,000 lbs (~32,700 kg) |
| Max Thrust (Dry) | 34,154 lbf (152 kN) |
| Wing Loading | 92 lb/ft² (449.2 kg/m²) |
| Max Speed | Mach 2.38 (~2,500 km/h) |
| Ceiling | 50,000+ ft (~15,200 m) |
| Range | 1,730 NM (~3,200 km) |
F-14B
| Attribute | Value |
|---|---|
| Wingspan (Extended) | 64’1.5" (~19.5 m) |
| Wingspan (Swept) | 38’2.5" (~11.6 m) |
| Wingspan (Oversweep) | 33’3.5" (~10.1 m) |
| Length | 62’8.5" (~19.1 m) |
| Height | 16’ (~4.9 m) |
| Wing Area | 565 ft² (~52.5 m²) |
| Empty Weight | 41,780 lbs (~19,000 kg) |
| Max Weight | 74,349 lbs (~33,700 kg) |
| Max Thrust (Dry) | 56,400 lbf (251 kN) |
| Wing Loading | 94 lb/ft² (458.9 kg/m²) |
| Ceiling | 53,000+ ft (~16,200 m) |
| Range | 2,050 NM (~3,800 km) |
Variants
F-14A-95-GR (Export)
Early F-14A version as sold to the IIAF (Imperial Iranian Air Force) which later became the IRIAF (Islamic Republic of Iran Air Force).
This version has the early Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A engines, AN/ALR-45 radar warning receiver and lacks the Television Camera Set (TCS) and Link-4 data link system as well as being limited to the earlier air to air missiles available to Iran. In addition these aircraft were never equipped with external fuel tanks and as such lack the ability to carry them.
F-14A-135-GR (Early)
Early US Navy F-14A version.
This version has the early Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A engines and AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50 radar warning receivers.
F-14A-135-GR (Late)
Later US Navy F-14A version.
This version has the early Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A engines and the AN/ALR-67 radar warning receiver.
F-14B
US Navy F-14B (renamed from F-14A+).
This version has the newer General Electrics F110-GE-400 engines, the AN/ALR-67 radar warning receiver as well as having the ability to mount and use the LANTIRN targeting pod.
F-14B(U)
US Navy F-14B Upgrade.
This version retained the newer General Electrics F110-GE-400 engines, the AN/ALR-67 radar warning receiver and LANTIRN. But also added an upgraded navigation system, a Programmable Tactical Information Display (PTID) and the Vertical Display Indicator Group Replacement (VDIG-R), as well as the ability to employ GPS Guided Weapons such as the GBU-31.
Definitions
Should an acronym, such as IRST be unclear at any point, look it up in the exhaustive list provided at the Abbreviations chapter.
The following symbology is used throughout this manual.
General
| Symbol | Meaning | Description |
|---|---|---|
| 💡 | Note | Item that is given special emphasize |
| 🟡 | Caution | Should be followed to prevent damage to equipment |
| 🔴 | Warning | Ignoring might lead to personal injury or loss of life |
| 🚧 | Under Construction | A section is work in progress and will be improved still |
F-14A/B
Main manual for the F-14 Tomcat, special focus is given to the variants
- F-14A-95-GR (Export),
- F-14A-135-GR (Early),
- F-14A-135-GR (Late) and
- F-14B.
Contents
- Introduction
- Cockpit Overview
- Systems Overview
- Weapons & Stores
- Jester & Iceman
- Normal Procedures
- Emergency Procedures
- Abbreviations
- Tutorials
- Imprint
Cockpit Overview
The following chapter gives a detailed overview of the pilot's cockpit, as well as that of the Radar Interceptor Officer (RIO). Each single switch will be outlined and explained briefly, while giving context to the functions.
More in-depth details on the various systems and consequences of using a switch beyond their brief explanation are available in the Systems Overview Chapter.
Pilot Cockpit Overview
Layout
Left Side Console
G-valve Button
The G-valve button is pressed to test inflation of the g-suit.
Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel
Controls ventilation airflow to the pressure suit or seat cushions and controls oxygen flow to the pilot mask.
Vent Airflow Dial
The VENT AIRFLOW dial (
Oxygen Switch
The OXYGEN switch (
- ON — Enables oxygen flow.
- OFF — Disables oxygen flow.
Volume/TACAN Command Panel
Controls pilot headset audio volumes and selects which crewmember is in command of TACAN operation.
F-14B and F-14A (Late)
ALR-67 Volume Knob
The ALR-67 knob (
Sidewinder Tone Volume Knob
The SW knob (
V/UHF 2 Volume Knob
The V/UHF 2 knob (
TACAN Command Switch
The TACAN CMD switch (
F-14A (Early)
ALR-45 Volume Knob
The ALR-45 knob (
ALR-50 Volume Knob
The ALR-50 knob (
Sidewinder Tone Volume Knob (F-14A Early)
The SW knob (
V/UHF 2 Volume Knob (F-14A Early)
The V/UHF 2 knob (
TACAN Command Switch (F-14A Early)
The TACAN CMD switch (
TACAN Control Panel
TACAN control panel used by the pilot when in command of TACAN.
Channel Selector (Dual Rotary Switch)
The dual rotary switch (
The outer dial selects the first two digits and the inner dial selects the final digit.
GO and NO-GO Lights
The GO and NO-GO lights (
BIT Button
The BIT button (
Mode Switches (X/Y and Operating Mode)
The MODE switches (
INVERSE mode is not functional.
TACAN Audio Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
TACAN Mode Selector Knob
The mode knob (
The following modes are available:
- OFF — TACAN off.
- REC — Receive only.
- T/R — Transmit and receive. Enables range readout.
- A/A — Air-to-air TACAN mode.
- BCN — Beacon mode. Not functional.
ICS Control Panel
Control panel for the intercommunications system (ICS).
ICS Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Amplifier Selection Knob
The amplifier selection knob (
The following amplifiers are available:
- B/U — Backup amplifier.
- NORM — Normal amplifier.
- EMER — Emergency amplifier. Uses the RIO’s amplifier and his volume settings and prevents monitoring of pilot-only audio such as Sidewinder tone and engine stall/overtemperature warnings.
ICS Function Switch
The ICS switch (
Available ICS functions are:
- RADIO OVERRIDE — ICS audio overrides radio audio.
- HOT MIC — Enables intercom without pressing PTT. Also allows ground crew communication through the external interphone.
- COLD MIC — Intercom only while PTT is pressed.
AFCS Control Panel
Control panel for AFCS and autopilot control.
💡 All switches are spring-loaded to OFF but held in position by a solenoid, allowing automatic disengagement when applicable.
Pitch Stability Augmentation Switch
The PITCH switch (
Roll Stability Augmentation Switch
The ROLL switch (
Yaw Stability Augmentation Switch
The YAW switch (
VEC/PCD/ACL Switch
The VEC/PCD/ACL switch (
- VEC/PCD — Vector/PCD mode. Data link controls roll and pitch. Engaged using the NWS button on the pilot stick.
- OFF — Remote-control function off.
- ACL — Automatic carrier landing mode. Engaged using the NWS button on the pilot stick.
Altitude Hold Switch
The ALT switch (
Heading Mode Switch
The HDG switch (
- HDG — Heading hold.
- OFF — Heading hold off.
- GT — Ground track mode. Engaged using the NWS button on the pilot stick.
Autopilot Engage Switch
The ENGAGE switch (
- ENGAGE — Autopilot on.
- OFF — Autopilot off.
UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159) Radio
Pilot UHF radio (UHF 1) and controls.
💡 ADF is nonfunctional with the AN/ARC-159. Use V/UHF 2 instead.
Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Squelch Switch
The SQL switch (
- ON — Squelch enabled.
- OFF — Squelch disabled.
Frequency Select Switches
The frequency select switches (
Frequency/Channel Display
The FREQ/(CHAN) display (
Read Button
The READ button (
Brightness Knob
The BRT knob (
Load Button
The LOAD button (
Function Selector Knob
The function selector knob (
Channel Select Knob
The CHAN SEL knob (
Preset Channels Chart
The preset channels chart (
Mode Selector Knob
The mode selector knob (
Tone Button
The TONE button (
ASYM Limiter/Engine Mode Select (F-14B only)
Control panel for the asymmetric thrust limiter system and engine control mode selection.
Asymmetry Limiter Switch
The ASYM LIMITER switch (
- ON — Limiter enabled.
- OFF — Limiter disabled.
Engine Mode Select Switches
The ENG MODE SELECT switches (
Selectable engine modes are:
- PRI — Primary engine control mode.
- SEC — Secondary engine control mode.
Target Designate Switch
The target designate switch is used to designate ground targets on the HUD and to command pilot ACM radar modes (except PLM).
The switch can be moved up, down, and forward (designate).
In air-to-ground mode, up and down move the designator and forward designates.
In other modes, up and down select VSL HI and VSL LO, respectively, and forward selects PAL.
Inlet Ramps/Throttle Control Panel
Control panel for engine systems, throttle settings, and rudder trim.
Throttle Mode Switch
The THROTTLE MODE switch (
- AUTO — Automatic.
- BOOST — Boosted.
- MAN — Manual.
Throttle Temp Switch
The THROTTLE TEMP switch (
- HOT — Hot.
- NORM — Normal.
- COLD — Cold.
Inlet Ramps Switches
The INLET RAMPS switches (
- STOW — Stowed.
- AUTO — Automatic.
Engine Crank Selector
The ENG CRANK selector (
Airstart/Backup Ignition Switch
The Airstart/BACK UP IGNITION switch (
- ON — Airstart/Backup ignition enabled.
- OFF — Airstart/Backup ignition disabled.
Rudder Trim Switch
The RUDDER TRIM switch (
Throttle
The throttle grips contain HOTAS flight controls.
Speed Brake Switch
The speed brake switch (
- EXT — Momentary. Extends the speed brake incrementally while held and holds the achieved position when released.
- RET — Retracts the speed brake.
Wing-Sweep Switch
The wing-sweep switch (
- AUTO — Wing sweep controlled automatically by CADC.
- FWD — Sweeps wings forward manually.
- AFT — Sweeps wings aft manually.
- BOMB — Commands 55° wing sweep if currently forward of 55°. If CADC commanded position is aft of 55°, wing sweep follows CADC instead.
PLM Button
The PLM button (
CAGE/SEAM Button
The CAGE/SEAM button (
Exterior Light Switch
The exterior light switch (
- OFF — Disables exterior lights and increases approach light intensity.
- ON — Enables exterior lights and dims approach lights.
ICS PTT Switch
The ICS PTT switch (
- ICS — Keys intercommunication to the RIO.
- BOTH — Keys UHF 1 and V/UHF 2.
- UHF1 — Keys UHF 1.
- UHF2 — Keys V/UHF 2.
Throttle Quadrant
| Quadrant | Schema |
|---|---|
The throttle quadrant contains the two main engine throttle controls, the flap lever, and the manual wing-sweep handle, in addition to HOTAS controls on the throttles.
The throttles have detents in the OFF, IDLE, and MIL positions.
Moving the throttles from OFF to IDLE arms ignition and disengages fuel cutoff.
The sideways throttle movements are not spring-loaded, allowing the pilot to rest the throttles at MIL during catapult launches and preventing accidental spool-down.
A friction lever for throttle movement friction is located on the left side of the throttle quadrant beneath the flap lever.
The flap lever has a stepless range of motion between up and down and includes two emergency positions, emergency up and emergency down. Both have detents and require moving the lever outboard to continue into the emergency range.
Emergency up forces the flaps up, overriding normal flap logic. Emergency down is non-functional.
The manual/emergency wing-sweep handle is guarded and normally stowed. The handle top is extended for manual operation.
For more information see Wing-Sweep System.
Hydraulic Hand Pump
The hydraulic hand pump is located inboard of the throttle quadrant near the pilot’s left leg.
It is used to manually build hydraulic pressure for brake operation (with the gear handle down) or for refueling probe operation in the event of hydraulic system failure.
Left Vertical Console
Fuel Management Panel
Control panel for fuel system management, CADC master reset, and anti-skid and spoiler brake control.
Quantity Selector Switch
The QTY SEL switch (
The switch is spring-loaded to FEED.
- FEED — Displays respective feed and fuselage tank quantities.
- WING — Displays respective wing tank quantities.
- EXT — Displays respective external tank quantities.
Fuel Feed Switch
The FEED switch (
The guard locks the switch in NORM until lifted.
Wing/External Transfer Switch
The WING/EXT TRANS switch (
- ORIDE — Overrides automatic transfer logic.
- AUTO — Normal automatic operation.
- OFF — Disables fuel feed from wing and external tanks.
Refueling Probe Indicator Light
The refueling probe transition light (
Fuel Dump Switch
The DUMP switch (
Fuel dumping is permitted only when speed brakes are retracted, afterburner is off, and weight is off wheels.
Refueling Probe Switch
The REFUEL PROBE switch (
- ALL EXTD — Extends the refueling probe and allows refueling of all tanks. Also resets the WING/EXT TRANS switch to AUTO.
- FUS EXTD — Extends the refueling probe and allows refueling of fuselage tanks only.
- RET — Retracts the refueling probe.
Anti-Skid / Spoiler Brake Switch
The ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch (
- BOTH — Enables both anti-skid and spoiler brake functions.
- OFF — Disables both systems.
- SPOILER BK — Enables spoiler braking only.
Master Reset Button
The MASTER RESET button (
Control Surface Position Indicator
Provides indication of aircraft control surface positions.
Spoiler Position Indicators
The spoiler indicators (
- DN — Spoilers down and flush with the wing.
- Up-arrow — Spoilers extended above the wing.
- Down-arrow — Spoilers drooped below the wing surface.
Rudder Position Indicators
The rudder indicators (
Horizontal Tail Position Indicators
The horizontal stabilizer indicators (
Launch Bar Abort Panel
The launch bar abort switch is used to abort catapult launches.
When held in ABORT, the launch bar is raised. The switch is spring-loaded back to NORM, which is the standard position.
💡 Not currently used in DCS.
Landing Gear Control Panel
Control panel for landing gear operation and emergency stores jettison.
Landing Gear Handle
The LDG GEAR handle (
For emergency extension with the handle in DOWN, push the handle in, rotate it clockwise, and pull outward. This releases a compressed nitrogen charge to extend the gear.
Down Lock Override
The DOWN LOCK ORIDE indicator (
The indicator may be lifted to override the signal.
Hydraulic Isolation Switch
The HYD ISOL switch (
The switch is automatically moved to T.O./LDG when the landing gear handle is in the DOWN position.
- FLT — In-flight operation. Isolates listed systems.
- T.O./LDG — Takeoff and landing operation. Connects listed systems.
Landing Gear Transition Light
The transition light (
Wheels and Flaps Position Indicator
The wheels-flaps indicator (
Slat Indications
| Indication | State |
|---|---|
| Power off or maneuver slats extended. | |
| Slats extended. | |
| Slats retracted. |
Flap position is shown by a pointer moving between UP and DOWN. The first marked segment represents the maneuver flap range.
Landing Gear Indications
| Indication | State |
|---|---|
| Power off or unsafe gear. | |
| Gear down. | |
| Gear retracted and doors closed. |
Speed Brake Indications
| Indication | State |
|---|---|
| Speed brake system power off. | |
| Speed brake partial extension, not in motion. | |
| Speed brake fully extended. | |
| Speed brake retracted. |
Emergency Stores Jettison Button
The EMERG STORES button (
The button illuminates to indicate activation upon press.
Nose Strut Switch
The NOSE STRUT switch (
- EXTD — Extends the nose strut and raises and locks the launch bar.
- OFF — Turns off nosewheel strut movement. Spring-loaded to this position.
- KNEEL — Releases strut pressure to retract the nose strut, kneeling the aircraft and unlocking the launch bar.
Brake Pull Handle
The BRAKE-PULL handle (
Pull out to apply the parking brake. Push in to release.
Eject Command Indicator
The EJECT CMD indicator (
- PILOT — Pilot ejects both crewmembers; RIO ejects only himself.
- MCO — Either crewmember ejects both crew.
💡 Currently non-functional in DCS.
Left Knee Panel
Hydraulic Pressure Indicator
Shows hydraulic pressure of the combined and flight hydraulic systems.
- SPOIL (Spoiler): ON/OFF-flag indicates pressurization of outboard spoiler module.
- EMER FLT HI: ON/OFF-flags indicates backup flight hydraulic system pressures when HI or LOW is selected respectively.
Oil Pressure Indicator
Displays oil pressure for each engine. Range is 0 - 100 psi, normal range is 25 - 65 psi, varying with engine rpm.
Exhaust Nozzle Position Indicator
Displays position of engine nozzles. Range 0 - 5 with 5 being fully open.
Electronic Instrument Group
Displays engine RPM (High-pressure compressor rotor speed (N2)), EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) and FF (Fuel Flow) for respective engine.
💡 Image shows TF-30 engine instruments, F110 EIG coming soon.
FF is not indicated for the additional fuel used in afterburner.
Left Instrument Panel
Radar Altimeter
Control and indicator for the radar altimeter.
Radar Altimeter Control Knob
The radar altimeter control knob (
Fully counterclockwise turns the radar altimeter off. Rotating clockwise sets the altitude warning level. Depressing the knob initiates radar altimeter BIT.
OFF Flag
The OFF flag (
Low Altitude Warning Light
The low altitude warning light (
Self-Test Light
The self-test light (
During BIT, the readout should display 100 feet ±10.
Low-Altitude Limit Index
The low-altitude limit index (
💡 Radio override does not disable the low-altitude warning tone.
Servopneumatic Altimeter
The servopneumatic altimeter provides altitude indication using both electrical and pressure-based systems.
Altimeter Readout
The altimeter readout (
A pointer on the circular scale provides continuous indication in hundreds of feet.
Baroset Knob
The baroset knob (
This setting only affects the local altimeter display. Other CADC-driven digital indicators use a fixed 29.92 in.Hg reference.
Local Barometric Pressure Window
The local barometric pressure window (
Mode Switch
The mode switch (
- RESET - When CADC power and altitude data are available, holding RESET for approximately three seconds enables normal servoed operation.
- STBY - Selects backup pressure mode.
If CADC data or electrical power is absent for more than three seconds, the system automatically reverts to standby mode.
STBY Flag
The STBY flag is a red standby indication that appears when the altimeter is operating in backup (standby) mode (not visible in this image).
💡 At high speeds and below 10,000 feet, pressure effects can produce significant readout errors: up to 1,200 feet when transonic and up to 4,000 feet when supersonic.
Airspeed Mach Indicator
Indicated airspeed and Mach number display.
Airspeed Dial
The airspeed dial (
Indicated Airspeed Scale (Outer)
The outer indicated airspeed scale (
Indicated Airspeed Scale (Inner)
The inner indicated airspeed scale (
Mach Number Scale
The Mach number scale (
Indicated Airspeed Index Pointer
The indicated airspeed index pointer (
Mach Number Index Pointer
The Mach number index pointer (
Not visible in the image.
Safe Mach Number Index Pointer
The safe Mach number index pointer (
Not visible in the image.
Index Knob
The index knob (
One position adjusts the indicated airspeed index and the other adjusts the Mach number index.
Vertical Velocity Indicator
Displays vertical velocity in thousands of feet per minute.
Sudden or abrupt attitude changes can produce erroneous indications due to airflow changes over the static probe.
Left Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle
Emergency fuel shutoff handle for the left engine.
Pulling the handle shuts off fuel flow to the left engine. Pushing the handle in restores fuel flow.
This handle should not be used to normally secure the engine.
A left engine fire extinguishing button is located behind the handle and is accessible when the handle is pulled out.
Angle-of-Attack Indicator
Displays angle of attack (AOA) on a tape scale from 0 to 30 units.
This corresponds approximately to -10° to +40° rotation of the AOA probe.
Reference markers are provided on the right side for climb (5), cruise (8.5), and stall (29). A reference bar indicates on-speed approach (15).
Left Windshield Frame
Approach Indexer
The approach indexer provides visual indication of aircraft angle of attack relative to on-speed AOA during landing.
Three lights are displayed:
- Green — Indicates aircraft is slow (AOA too high).
- Amber — Indicates on-speed AOA.
- Red — Indicates aircraft is fast (AOA too low).
When the HOOK BYPASS switch is set to CARRIER and the landing gear is down, the indexer lights will flash if the arresting hook is not extended.
These indications are repeated on the nosewheel strut approach lights, allowing the landing signal officer (LSO) to observe aircraft AOA during carrier recoveries.
HUD Caution Lights
Several caution and warning indicators are located to the left of the HUD.
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| WHEELS | Flashes with landing gear not down and locked, flaps below 10° and either throttle below 85%. |
| BRAKES | Indicates antiskid or brake failure. Also lights when parking brake is set. |
| ACLS/AP | Shows that ACLS or autopilot is disengaged. |
| NWS ENGA | Lit when nosewheel steering (NWS) is engaged. |
| AUTO THROT | When shown disengagement of the automatic throttle control mode is not resulting from the throttle mode switch. |
Center Panel
Heads-Up Display
The heads-up display (HUD) projects flight and weapon delivery information onto the forward portion of the canopy/windscreen.
Night mode is selected using the control on the right side of the VDI.
Two engine stall warning lights, L STALL and R STALL, are mounted on the left and right sides of the HUD, respectively. Each light indicates an engine stall condition in the corresponding engine.
💡 For more information see relevant chapters under Navigation and Weapons and Weapons Employment Overview.
Cockpit Television Sensor (CTVS)
The cockpit television sensor (CTVS) records the HUD for registration of weapons delivery. It can be removed/hidden by clicking on it. Realistically, some pilots carried a wrench and removed it for improved visibility during carrier landings.
💡 Recording functionality not currently implemented in DCS.
Air Combat Maneuver Panel
Main pilot armament control panel.
ACM Switch/Cover
The ACM (Air Combat Maneuver) switch/cover (
ACM Jettison Button
The ACM JETT button (
Sidewinders are not jettisoned even if selected.
SEAM Lock Light
The SEAM LOCK light (
The light illuminates during the 4.5-second SEAM acquisition attempt and remains illuminated if the seeker locks onto a target.
Collision Light
The COLLISION light (
Hot Trigger Light
The HOT TRIG light (
Gun Rate Pushbutton
Toggle pushbutton with light indication (
- HIGH - Selects 6,000 rounds per minute. Normally used for air-to-air operation.
- LOW - Selects 4,000 rounds per minute. Normally used for air-to-ground operation.
The gun rate is automatically set to HIGH when ACM mode is selected.
Sidewinder Cooling Pushbutton
Toggle pushbutton with light indication (
Sidewinder cooling is automatically set to ON when ACM mode is selected.
Missile Preparation Pushbutton
Toggle pushbutton with light indication (
Missile preparation is automatically set to ON when ACM mode is commanded.
Missile Mode Pushbutton
Toggle pushbutton with light indication (
- NORM - Normal missile launch mode.
- BRSIT - Boresight missile launch mode.
Controlled by the WCS when in ACM mode.
Master Arm Switch
The MASTER ARM switch (
- OFF - Disables electrical power to release circuitry.
- ON - Enables electrical power to release circuitry. Position is locked until the master arm cover is lifted.
- TNG - Enables in-flight training mode.
💡 The MASTER ARM bus is interlocked with the landing gear control lever, disabling all releases except emergency jettison while the gear is down.
💡 ACM jettison and emergency jettison are not disabled by MASTER ARM.
Station Status Flags
Station status flags (
- BLACK - Station not loaded or weapon not ready.
- WHITE - Station and weapon ready.
- CHECKERBOARD - Weapon selected and ready for launch. While on the ground, this indicates fuselage rails are up and locked and that loaded weapons are armed.
Master Caution Light and Button
The MASTER CAUTION light and reset button (
Press to acknowledge and extinguish the light until the next event.
Engine Fire Warning Lights
The L FIRE and R FIRE lights (
Turn-and-Slip Indicator
The turn-and-slip indicator (
The upper section contains an electrically driven pointer, where one needle deflection corresponds to a 360° turn in four minutes. The lower section contains an inclinometer with a ball suspended in damping fluid.
Vertical Display Indicator (VDI)
The vertical display indicator (VDI) complements the HUD by displaying flight and weapon information.
💡 The VDI has a red night filter that can be installed by clicking in the middle of the VDI screen.
HUD Brightness Control
The HUD BRT control (
VDI Brightness Control
The VDI BRT control (
VDI Contrast Control
The VDI CONT control (
Filter Handle
The FILTER handle (
HUD Trim Control
The HUD TRIM control (
VDI Trim Control
The VDI TRIM control (
VDI Caution Lights
VDI-mounted caution lights (
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| ADJ A/C | Advisory light indicating other aircraft close to own traffic pattern. |
| LANDING CHK | Advisory light indicating carrier has a channel ready for ACL and that the crew should prepare for carrier landing. |
| ACL READY | Warning light indicating CATCC has acquired the aircraft and is transmitting glidepath information to the aircraft. |
| A/P CPLR | Warning light indicating CATCC is ready to control the aircraft. |
| CMD CONTROL | Warning light indicating the aircraft is under data link control for landing. |
| 10 SECONDS | Warning light indicating that carrier motion is added to data link info and commands during landing. Indicates 10 seconds to arrival at the next point in approach pattern in other modes. |
| TILT | Warning light indicating no data link command received for the last 2 seconds during ACL. When not in ACL, it indicates no data link messages during the last 10 seconds. |
| VOICE | Warning light indicating CATCC not ready for ACL, switch to standard voice procedures. |
| A/P REF | Warning light indicating autopilot selected but not engaged. Exception: altitude and heading hold. |
| WAVEOFF | Warning light indicating waveoff commanded. |
| WING SWEEP | Warning light indicating failure in both wing-sweep channels or disengagement of spider detent. |
| REDUCE SPEED | Warning light indicating flap retraction failure with greater than 225 knots indicated airspeed. Also indicates safe Mach number exceeded. |
| ALT LOW | Non-functional, light on radar altimeter is used instead. |
Horizontal Situation Display Indicator (HSD)
The horizontal situation display (HSD) displays navigational information to the pilot and can repeat the RIO’s TID.
HSD Brightness Control
The BRT control (
Heading Bug Control
The HDG control (
Course Control
The CRS control (
Test Button
The TEST button (
BIT Indicator
The BIT indicator (
💡 For more information see relevant chapters under Navigation and for the TID repeat Tactical Information Display (TID) and Associated Controls.
Cabin Pressure Altimeter
Displays cabin pressure in 1,000-foot increments from 0 to 50,000 feet.
Emergency Brake Pressure Indicator
Displays hydraulic pressure available from the emergency brake accumulators to the auxiliary and parking wheel brake systems.
Parking Brake Pressure
The PARK indication shows brake pressure available for parking brakes.
The green segment indicates 2,150 to 3,000 psi and the red segment indicates 1,900 to 2,150 psi. When in the green, sufficient pressure is available for approximately three brake applications.
Auxiliary Brake Pressure
The AUX indication shows brake pressure available for the auxiliary brake system, usable via toe brakes.
The green segment indicates 2,150 to 3,000 psi (approximately 13 to 14 applications) and the red segment indicates 1,900 to 2,150 psi (approximately five applications).
Control Stick
The control stick provides aircraft roll and pitch control and contains additional weapon and aircraft control functions.
Bomb Release Button
The bomb release button (
Pitch and Roll Trim Hat
The pitch and roll trim hat (
Up/down commands pitch trim and left/right commands roll trim.
Weapon Select Hat
Selector hat (
- SP or PH - Selects AIM-7 or AIM-54. Depression toggles between types.
- SW - Selects AIM-9. Depression toggles between stations.
- GUN - Selects M61A1 Vulcan gun.
- OFF - Inhibits weapon release.
DLC and Maneuver Flap Command Wheel
The DLC and maneuver flap command wheel (
With DLC engaged, forward rotation extends spoilers and aft rotation retracts spoilers.
With flaps up and DLC disengaged, forward rotation retracts maneuvering flaps/slats and aft rotation extends them.
The control logic is that pulling the wheel toward the pilot increases lift and pushing it away decreases lift.
DLC Engage/Disengage and Countermeasure Dispense Button
The DLC engage/disengage and countermeasure dispense button (
With flaps up, this button commands the ALE-39 to dispense chaff or flares per RIO settings.
DLC disengages with another momentary press, raising flaps, or advancing either throttle to MIL.
Autopilot Reference and Nosewheel Steering Button
The autopilot reference and nosewheel steering button (
With weight off wheels, it engages enabled autopilot modes.
Autopilot Emergency Disengage Paddle
The autopilot emergency disengage paddle (
With weight on wheels, it additionally reverts throttle mode to MAN (manual) while depressed.
Weapon Firing Trigger
The weapon firing trigger (
The first detent enables CTVS and gun camera. The second detent releases the selected forward-firing weapon.
💡 CTVS and gun camera are not implemented in DCS.
Right Windshield Frame
ECM Warning Lights
Warning lights connected to the ALR-67 indicating different types of threats.
ALR-67
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| SAM | Steady illumination when detecting lock-on from a SAM tracking radar. Flashes when missile launch is detected. |
| AAA | Steady illumination when detecting lock-on from a AAA tracking radar. Flashes when AAA firing is detected. |
| AI | Steady illumination when detecting lock-on from an airborne interceptor radar. |
ALR-45
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| SA TRK | Lights steady whenever a SAM tracking radar is received. |
| SAM | Master SAM warning indication, lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch) |
| AI/AAA | Lights steady whenever an ambiguous AI/AAA radar is received. |
| AI | Lights steady whenever an airborne interceptor radar is received. |
Standby Compass
Conventional standby compass.
Right Instrument Panel
Wing-Sweep Indicator
Indicator detailing status of the wing-sweep system.
Leftmost indicator pointer shows wing-sweep program position which is also the max forward angle at present airspeed and altitude.
Middle tape shows commanded wing-sweep position.
Rightmost tape shows actual wing-sweep position.
The five indicator windows shows current operating mode.
Right Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle
Emergency fuel shutoff handle for the right engine.
Pulling the handle shuts off fuel flow to the right engine. Pushing the handle in restores fuel flow.
This handle should not be used for normal engine shutdown.
The right engine fire extinguishing button is located behind the handle and is accessible when the handle is pulled outward.
Standby Attitude Indicator
Standalone standby attitude indicator.
An OFF flag is visible on the left side when caged or when un-powered.
The knob below and to the right of the indicator cages/un-cages the indicator and allows trim to correct pitch. In pulled out position the indicator is caged. When pushed in un-cages the indicator and allows pitch trim by turning the knob.
UHF/VHF Remote Indicators
Remote indicators display frequency or channel information for UHF 1 and V/UHF 2 radios.
UHF 1 Remote Indicator
The UHF 1 remote indicator (
V/UHF 2 Remote Indicator
The V/UHF 2 remote indicator (
The operation of the DIM and BRT knob as well as TEST button are the same for both indicators.
The DIM and BRT knobs control display brightness.
The TEST button initiates a self-test. A correct test result displays 888.888.
Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI)
Provides azimuth, bearing, and distance information.
No. 2 Bearing Pointer
The No. 2 bearing pointer (
Compass Rose
The compass rose (
No. 1 Bearing Pointer
The No. 1 bearing pointer (
Distance Counter
The distance counter (
ALR-67 Indicator
Displays radar emitters detected by the ALR-67 radar warning receiver.
Threat Display Bands
- Non-lethal band (
2 ) - Displays emitters not considered an immediate threat due to range or lack of weapon capability. - Lethal band (
3 ) - Displays emitters capable of engaging own aircraft but not currently doing so. - Critical band (
4 ) - Displays direct threats to own aircraft. Systems capable of engaging own aircraft and showing current intent of doing so.
System Status Circle
The system status circle (
Area I (upper left quadrant) displays threat prioritization symbols:
- N - Normal.
- I - AI, Airborne interceptors prioritized.
- A - AAA, Anti-air artillery prioritized.
- U - Unknown emitters prioritized.
- F - Friendly emitters displayed in addition to threats.
Area II (upper right quadrant) indicates limited mode status.
- (Blank) - Limited mode not selected.
- L - Limited mode selected. Only the six highest-priority threats are shown.
Area III (lower half) displays system status and offset information:
- (Blank) - Normal operation.
- B - BIT failure.
- T - Thermal overload.
- O - Offset display selected. Threats will be separated to allow readout of overlapping symbols. Bearing accuracy degraded for displaced threats.
Intensity Control Knob
The INT knob (
Canopy Jettison Handle
The canopy jettison handle is used to manually jettison the canopy during emergency egress.
Right Knee Panel
Fuel Quantity Indicator
The fuel quantity indicator displays fuel quantity information for all aircraft tanks.
BINGO Readout
The BINGO readout (
Total Fuel Counter
The TOTAL counter (
Left and Right Tank Counters
The L and R counters (
The displayed tank group (feed, wing, or external) is selected using the QTY SEL switch on the fuel management panel.
Fuselage and Feed Fuel Tapes
The FUS and FEED fuel tapes (
- Left tape — Indicates left feed and aft fuselage tanks.
- Right tape — Indicates right feed and forward fuselage tanks.
BINGO Set Knob
The SET knob (
Rotate the knob to select the required value.
Accelerometer
Instrument showing current aircraft g-load (acceleration along the aircraft vertical axis). It’s graded in g from -5g to +10g. One pointer will show current g-load while the other two will indicate max reached negative and positive g-load. These can be reset by pushing the PUSH TO SET button on the lower left corner of the instrument.
Clock
Mechanical wind-up clock.
The knob on the lower left corner is used to wind up the clock by turning it clockwise and pulled out and turned to set the hour and minute hands.
The control on the upper right corner is used to start, stop, and reset a 1-hour elapsed time counter.
Right Vertical Console
Arresting Hook Panel
Panel controlling arresting hook operation.
Hook Handle
The HOOK handle (
- UP - Electrically commands hydraulic retraction of the hook and locks it in the up-lock.
- DOWN - Electrically releases hydraulic pressure, allowing the hook to extend by dashpot pressure and gravity.
- EMERG DOWN - When the handle is pulled and rotated counter-clockwise, the hook is mechanically released for emergency extension.
Hook Transition Light
The hook transition light (
The light will not extinguish until the hook is fully extended and may remain illuminated during high-speed extension due to hook blowback.
Rounds Remaining Counter
The rounds remaining counter (
The counter normally counts down from 676 rounds and may be manually reset to a desired value using the adjustment knob on the right side.
Displays Control Panel
💡 Image shows an F-14A with AN/ALR-45 having a third option on the HSD MODE and an ECM ORIDE which are not functional but are present in some aircraft with the AN/ALR-67.
Control panel for front cockpit display configuration.
Steering Command Selectors
The STEERING CMD selectors (
The selectors are mutually exclusive and rotate to indicate the active selection.
- TACAN - TACAN provides steering information.
- DEST - Steering commands based on the RIO-selected waypoint.
- AWL/PCD - Selects glideslope guidance (ILS or ACLS) for landing or PCD steering for air-to-ground delivery.
- VEC - Data link vector steering commands.
- MAN - Manual course and heading steering.
Mode Selectors
The MODE selectors (
Selectors are mutually exclusive and rotate to indicate the selected mode.
- T.O. - Takeoff mode.
- CRUISE - Cruise mode.
- A/A - Air-to-air mode.
- A/G - Air-to-ground mode.
- LDG - Landing mode.
HUD Declutter Switch
The HUD DECLUTTER switch (
HUD AWL Switch
The HUD AWL switch (
- ILS - ILS is used as the AWL source.
- ACL - ACLS is used as the AWL source.
VDI Mode Switch
The VDI MODE switch (
- TV - Displays video from TCS or LANTIRN.
- NORM - Displays the standard VDI presentation.
VDI AWL Switch
The VDI AWL switch (
- ILS - ILS-based AWL information.
- ACL - ACLS-based AWL information.
HSD Mode Switch
The HSD MODE switch (
- NAV - Navigation display showing steering information based on selected steering command source.
- TID - Repeats the RIO Tactical Information Display. If the RIO TID is set to TV, the display will be blank.
- ECM - Displays ECM information from AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50 (F-14A with AN/ALR-45/50 only).
Display Power Switches
The POWER switches (
Pitch Ladder Brightness Knob
The PITCH LAD BRT knob (
HSD ECM Override Switch
The HSD ECM ORIDE switch (
- ORIDE - Allows ECM override.
- OFF - Prevents ECM override.
Only functional in aircraft equipped with the AN/ALR-45/50.
Elevation Lead Panel
The elevation lead panel (
Adjustment range is from −263 to +87 mils.
Right Side Console
Spoiler Failure Override
Contains controls to override failed spoiler sections, allowing the remaining spoilers to continue operating after a MASTER RESET.
Inboard and Outboard Spoiler Override Switch
Two-position switch (
Both controls have two positions:
- ORIDE - Overrides spoiler symmetry protection, allowing a functional spoiler to continue to operate after a MASTER RESET if one fails.
- NORM - Normal (guarded position), in this mode, if a spoiler fails up the rest are commanded to drop and the SPOILERS light illuminates on the caution panel.
Liquid Oxygen Quantity Indicator
Contains an indicator showing the remaining quantity of liquid oxygen available. Graduated in 1-liter increments. Also has an OFF flag that is shown in case of power failure to the indicator. The indicator is tested through the INST mode on the MASTER TEST panel and should read 2 liters.
Compass Control Panel
The compass control panel contains controls used to configure AHRS heading reference modes.
Sync Indicator
Indicator (
Hemisphere Selector Switch
The N-S switch (
Correct selection is critical to ensure proper earth-rate correction in both DG and SLAVED modes.
Latitude Selector Knob
The LAT knob (
This input allows the AHRS to apply correct earth-rate compensation in DG and SLAVED modes.
Compass Mode Switch
The mode switch (
- COMP - Compass, uses magnetic azimuth detector directly without stabilization from the directional gyro, used only for emergency operation and the displays automatically uses the manual magnetic variation.
- SLAVED - Normal mode, uses the magnetic azimuth detector stabilized by the directional gyro.
- DG - Directional gyro mode, uses only gyro and not the magnetic azimuth detector.
Heading Knob/Button
The HDG knob and pushbutton (
In SLAVED mode it's used to sync the directional gyro with the magnetic azimuth detector and set magnetic heading on the BDHI. Button should be held until the synchronization indicator needle is over the null mark.
In DG mode the button is depressed and rotated to select desired heading on the BDHI.
The button can also be used to fast erect pitch and roll of the AHRS by depressing the button for up to 3 minutes. A new fast erect attempt can be done if a 1 minute wait is first observed.
ARA-63 Control Panel
Panel used to control the AN/ARA-63 Instrument Carrier Landing System (ICLS).
Channel Selector
Rotary selector (
BIT Button
The BIT pushbutton (
When activated, landing symbology is displayed on the HUD and VDI if configured for ILS operation.
Power Switch
The POWER switch (
The switch must be pulled outward to move to the OFF position.
Power Indicator Light
Indicator light (
Caution - Advisory Indicator
Main pilot caution panel.
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| PITCH STAB 1 & 2 | Caution lights indicating inoperative pitch channels. |
| ROLL STAB 1 & 2 | Caution lights indicating inoperative roll channels (roll SAS failure). |
| YAW STAB OP | Caution light indicating one inoperative yaw channel. |
| YAW STAB OUT | Caution light indicating two inoperative yaw channels (yaw SAS failure). |
| EMERG JETT | Caution light indicating activation of EMERG STORES JETT button. |
| LADDER | Caution light indicating boarding ladder not correctly stowed. |
| ECS TURBINE | Non-functional |
| INLET ICE | Caution light indicating accumulation of ice on the ice detector in the left engine inlet. |
| FLAP | Caution light indicating failure in the flap system or airspeed greater than 225 knots indicated airspeed with flaps down. |
| HZ TAIL AUTH | Caution light indicating failure of lateral tail authority actuator (or CADC failure). |
| RUDDER AUTH | Caution light indicating failure of rudder authority actuators (or CADC failure). |
| SPOILERS | Caution light indicating spoiler system failure causing several or all spoilers to be locked down. |
| AUTO PILOT | Caution light indicating failure in the auto pilot system. |
| L & R INLET | Caution lights indicating AICS programmer and/or system failure. |
| OIL PRESS | Caution light indicating left or right engine oil pressure below 11 psi. |
| BLEED DUCT | Caution light indicating high-temperature air leak in the engine compartments. |
| L & R RAMPS | Caution lights indicating ramps not locked in position during critical flight conditions. |
| START VALVE | Caution light indicating that the starter solenoid air valve is open after start. (F-14B only.) |
| OXY LOW | Caution light indicating low oxygen pressure or less than 2 liters of oxygen remaining. (F-14A only.) |
| L & R ENG SEC | Caution lights indicating that respective engine AFTC is in secondary mode. (F-14B only.) |
| L & R OVSP/VALVE | Caution lights indicating engine starter system malfunction or N1 rotor over-speed in respective engine. (F-14A only.) |
| L & R GEN | Caution lights indicating respective engine generator is inoperative. |
| CANOPY | Caution light indicating that the canopy is not down and locked. |
| BINGO | Caution light indicating aircraft fuel quantity at or below set BINGO quantity. |
| L & R OIL HOT | Caution lights indicating that respective engine oil is too hot. |
| CADC | Caution light indicating failure in the air data computer. |
| HYD PRESS | Caution light indicating pressure in either engine hydraulic pump below 2,100 psi. |
| L & R FUEL PRESS | Caution lights indicating pressure below 9 psi in the respective engine fuel boost pump. |
| L & R FUEL LOW | Caution lights indicating fuel quantity below 1,000 pounds in aft and left or forward and right fuel feed group respectively. |
| WING SWEEP | Advisory light indicating failure of a single channel in the wing-sweep system. |
| RATS | Advisory light indicating RATS enabled. (F-14B only.) |
| TRANS/RECT | Advisory light indicating failure in one or both transformer-rectifiers. |
| MACH TRIM | Advisory light indicating failure in Mach trim actuator. |
| WSHLD HOT | Advisory light indicating central windshield overheat. |
| LAUNCH BAR | Advisory light indicating either: Weight on wheels - Aircraft kneeled, either throttle below MIL and launch bar not up and locked. Weight off wheels - Launch bar not up and locked, launch bar not within 15º of center (cocked nose-gear), or nose strut not fully extended. |
| INTEG TRIM | Advisory light indicating failure in the trim system or computer failure. |
| AHRS | Advisory light indicating unreliable attitude or heading information from AHRS. |
| ENG FIRE EXT | Advisory light indicating low pressure in the fire extinguishing container (90 psi below nominal 600 psi). |
| AUX FIRE EXT | Advisory light indicating low pressure in the auxiliary fire extinguishing container (90 psi below nominal 600 psi). |
Master Generator Control Panel
Panel controlling electrical power generation and emergency generator logic.
Master Generator Switches
The left and right MASTER GEN switches (
The switch must be lifted to move from OFF/RESET.
- NORM - Activates and connects the generator to the main electrical buses.
- OFF/RESET - Disconnects the generator and resets protective circuits.
- TEST - Activates the generator without connecting it to the buses for testing purposes.
Emergency Generator Switch
Guarded EMERG switch (
- NORM - Emergency generator automatically connects if both main generators fail.
- OFF/RESET - Disconnects the emergency generator and resets protection circuits.
Master Light Control Panel
The master light control panel manages most interior and exterior aircraft lighting systems.
Anti-Collision Light Switch
ON/OFF switch (
Position Light Mode Switch
Switch (
With weight on wheels, supplementary lights remain steady regardless of selection.
Tail Position Light Switch
Switch (
Wing Position Light Switch
Switch (
ACM Lighting Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
AoA Indexer Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
Hook Bypass Switch
Switch (
When set to CARRIER with wheels down, AoA lights flash if the arresting hook is not down.
Taxi Light Switch
ON/OFF switch (
Instrument Lighting Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
White Flood Light Switch
Switch (
DIM and BRT positions available. Switch is locked to OFF unless pulled outward.
Console Lighting Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
- 0 - All off
- 1–14 - Increasing console light intensity
Red Flood Light Switch
Switch (
- DIM - Dim red console flood
- MED - Medium red console flood
- BRT - Bright red instrument and console flood
Formation Light Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
Air Conditioning Control Panel
Panel controlling the environmental control system (ECS).
Temperature Switch
Two-position switch (
- AUTO - Temperature is automatically regulated using the TEMP thumbwheel regardless of airspeed and altitude.
- MAN - Temperature is manually controlled using the TEMP thumbwheel and varies with airspeed and altitude.
Cabin Pressure Switch
Two-position switch (
- NORM - Normal pressurization mode. Cabin pressure is maintained at approximately 8,000 feet up to an aircraft altitude of 23,000 feet, after which a constant 5 psi differential is maintained.
- DUMP - Opens the cockpit dump valve, depressurizing the cockpit.
RAM AIR Switch
The RAM AIR switch (
INCR opens the ram air door, decreasing temperature, while DECR closes the door, increasing temperature. The switch is spring-loaded to center.
Air Source Selectors
Five mutually exclusive air source selectors (
- RAM - Closes all other air sources and opens the ram air door. Gun firing is inhibited.
- L & R ENG - Selects either engine as bleed air source.
- BOTH ENG - Selects both engines as bleed air sources. Normal position.
- OFF - Closes all air sources except the ram air door. Pressurization and air conditioning are unavailable. Gun firing is inhibited.
Temperature Thumbwheel
The TEMP thumbwheel (
Master Test Panel
Panel used to control onboard checkout (OBC), on board built-in tests (BIT), and emergency flight hydraulic operation.
Master Test Selector
The MASTER TEST selector (
- OFF - Disables all test functions.
- LTS - Tests cockpit lights.
- FIRE DET/EXT - Tests fire detection and extinguishing systems.
- INST - Tests cockpit instruments.
- OBC - Initiates onboard checkout.
- EMERG GEN - Tests emergency generator.
- MACH LEV - Dynamic Mach lever test. (F-14A only.)
- WG SWP - Wing sweep test.
- FLT GR DN - Ground check of autothrottle interlocks.
- FLT GR UP - External tank pressurization test.
- D/L RAD - Data link converter test.
- STICK SW - Stick and spoiler symmetry switch test.
GO / NO-GO Indicator Lights
The GO and NO-GO lights (
Emergency Flight Hydraulic Switch
The EMERG FLT HYD switch (
- HIGH - Activates the power module (high speed mode), bypassing flight and combined 2,100 psi switches.
- LOW - Activates the backup power module bypassing flight and combined 2,100 psi switches.
- AUTO (LOW) - Automatically activates LOW mode when both flight and combined system pressures are below 2,100 psi.
External Environmental Control Panel
Panel controlling windshield heating and external anti-ice systems.
Windshield Heat Switch
The WIND SHIELD switch (
- AIR - Enables windshield heating using warm air.
- OFF - Disables windshield heating.
ENG/PROBE ANTI-ICE Switch
The ENG/PROBE ANTI-ICE switch (
- ORIDE/ON - Engages engine and probe anti-ice regardless of external conditions and enables the anti-ice setting in AICS.
- AUTO/OFF - Automatically engages engine and probe anti-ice as needed, turns off AICS anti-ice.
- OFF/OFF - Turns off both engine and probe anti-ice and AICS anti-ice.
Hydraulic Transfer Pump Switch
Panel containing the control for the hydraulic transfer pump which equalizes pressure between the combined and flight hydraulic systems in case of a failure in one of them.
The HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch has two positions, SHUTOFF and NORMAL (guarded position).
The NORMAL position (also the standard setting) will have the hydraulic transfer pump pressurize a failed hydraulic system from the other, functioning system, when it drops below 2,100 psi.
The SHUTOFF position (which can be accessed by lifting the guard) is used to turn off the transfer pump in case it can’t supply enough pressure to the failed system as that would risk disabling the still operational system.
HUD - Video Control Panel
Control panel for the CTVS system used to record HUD video.
💡 Not implemented in DCS.
HUD Camera Switch
The HUD CAM(E)RA switch (
- TRG - Trigger, records while the second (firing) detent on the stick trigger is depressed.
- NORMAL - Records while the first detent on the stick trigger is depressed.
- OFF - Disables power to the CTVS.
- RUN - Records continuously.
Switches (
Canopy Defog / Cabin Air Lever
The canopy air diffuser lever controls the flow of cabin air. The normal position, CABIN AIR, directs 70% of the conditioned air through the cockpit air diffusers and 30% through the canopy air diffusers.
The CANOPY DEFOG position directs all airflow through the canopy air diffusers for canopy defog.
Canopy Control Handle
The canopy control handle controls canopy operation and is located on the right cockpit wall. The handle is mounted downwards beneath the box containing the handle mechanism and the handle position texts. The canopy control handle is duplicated in the RIO cockpit.
| Control | Function |
|---|---|
| BOOST | Closes the canopy using boost, used during cold weather or with a strong headwind. |
| CLOSE | Closes the canopy, default position during flight. |
| HOLD | Holds the canopy at the current position for any position other than closed. |
| OPEN | Opens the canopy. |
| AUX OPEN | Allows manual opening of the canopy if system pressure is too low. |
RIO Cockpit Overview
Layout
Left Side Console
G-Valve Button
The G-valve button is pressed to test inflation of the g-suit.
Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel
Panel controlling ventilation airflow and oxygen supply to the RIO.
Vent Airflow Dial
The VENT AIRFLOW dial controls airflow through the pressure suit or seat cushions when no pressure suit is worn.
Oxygen Switch
The OXYGEN switch controls oxygen flow to the RIO oxygen mask.
- ON - Oxygen supplied to mask.
- OFF - Oxygen flow shut off.
Data Stowage Compartment
The data stowage compartment provides storage space for equipment, documents, and mission briefing materials.
TACAN Control Panel
TACAN control panel allowing the RIO to operate TACAN when assigned command.
Channel Selector
The dual rotary selector (
- Outer dial - selects the first two digits.
- Inner dial - selects the final digit.
GO / NO-GO Indicator Lights
The GO and NO-GO lights (
BIT Button
The BIT button (
Mode Switches
The MODE switches (
INVERSE mode is not functional.
TACAN Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
TACAN Mode Selector
The MODE knob (
Available modes are:
- OFF - TACAN off.
- REC - Receive only.
- T/R - Transmit and receive with range readout.
- A/A - Air-to-air TACAN.
- BCN - Beacon mode (not functional).
Communication / TACAN Command Panel
Panel controlling radio selection, antenna routing, and TACAN command authority.
Transmitter Select Switch
The XMTR SEL switch (
- UHF 1 - ARC-159.
- BOTH - Both radios.
- V/UHF 2 - ARC-182.
V/UHF 2 Antenna Switch
The V/UHF 2 ANT switch (
- UPR - Upper antenna.
- LWR - Lower antenna.
TACAN Command Switch
The TACAN CMD switch (
UHF 1 Volume Knob
The UHF 1 VOL knob (
KY Mode Switch
The KY MODE switch (
The simulated aircraft uses KY-28; this switch is non-functional.
V/UHF 2 (AN/ARC-182) Radio
Secondary VHF/UHF radio providing voice communications.
V/UHF 2 Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Squelch Switch
The SQL switch (
Frequency Select Switches
The frequency select switches (
Frequency / Channel Display
The FREQ/(CHAN) display (
UHF Selector Switch
The UHF switch (
Brightness Knob
The BRT knob (
Mode Selector Knob
The MODE knob (
Frequency Mode Knob
The outer frequency mode dial (
Channel Select Knob
The inner CHAN SEL knob (
💡 HAVE QUICK anti-jam functionality is not implemented in DCS.
KY-28 Control Panel
Encryption control panel for secure voice communications.
Zeroize Switch
The ZEROIZE switch (
Power-Mode Switch
The power-mode switch (
Radio Select Switch
The radio select switch (
Radar Beacon Control Panel
Panel controlling the AN/APN-154 radar beacon.
Beacon Mode Selector
The MODE selector (
- SINGLE - Responds to single-pulse interrogation.
- DOUBLE - Responds to double-pulse code.
- ACLS - Enables ACLS augmentation for carrier landings.
ACLS Test Button
The ACLS TEST button (
- Illuminates during successful test.
- Flashes when SPN-42 radar sweep is detected.
- Steady illumination indicates radar lock-on for ACLS.
Power Switch
The PWR switch (
- PWR - Beacon fully active.
- STBY - Warm-up mode; ACLS replies enabled if MODE is ACLS.
- OFF - Beacon off.
Liquid Cooling Control Panel
LIQ COOLING switch controlling the liquid cooling system for the AWG-9 and AIM-54. The AWG-9 circuit can be enabled independently of the AIM-54. This switch needs to be enabled for the respective system before AWG-9 operation or AIM-54 missile preparation.
ICS Control Panel
Intercommunication system control panel.
ICS Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Amplifier Selection Knob
The amplifier selection knob (
- B/U - Backup amplifier.
- NORM - Normal amplifier.
- EMER - Emergency amplifier using pilot’s amplifier and volume settings. Disables RIO-only audio sources.
ICS Function Switch
The ICS switch (
- RADIO OVERRIDE - ICS audio overrides radio audio.
- HOT MIC - Enables continuous intercom without PTT.
- COLD MIC - Intercom only when PTT is pressed.
Eject Command Lever
The EJECT CMD lever determines ejection logic when the RIO ejects.
- PILOT (lever forward) - Only the RIO ejects.
- MCO (lever aft) - Both crewmembers eject.
Pilot-initiated ejection always ejects both crew members.
Sensor Control Panel
Control panel for radar scan geometry, TCS operation, and AVTR recording.
Stabilization Switch
The STAB switch (
Azimuth Center Knob
The AZ CTR knob (
Elevation Center Knob
The EL CTR knob (
VSL Switch
The VSL switch (
- VSL HI
- VSL LO
Azimuth Scan Knob
The AZ SCAN knob (
Elevation Bars Knob
The EL BARS knob (
TCS Trim Knobs
The TCS TRIM knobs (
Slave Switch
The SLAVE switch (
Acquisition Switch
The ACQ switch (
- AUTO SRCH
- MAN
- AUTO
Field of View Switch
The FOV switch (
- WIDE
- NAR
AVTR Mode Knob
The MODE knob (
Minutes Remaining Display
The MIN REMAIN display (
Record Switch
The RECORD switch (
- OFF
- STBY
- ON
AVTR Indicator Lights
The indicator lights (
- STBY
- EOT (end of tape)
- REC
Computer Address Panel (CAP)
The Computer Address Panel is used to enter data into the Weapon Control System.
Clear Button
The CLEAR button (
Enter Button
The ENTER button (
Prefix and Numerical Buttons
The numerical and prefix buttons (
Message Selection Buttons
The MESSAGE buttons (
Message Indicator Drum
The MESSAGE drum (
Program Restart Button
The PRGM RESTRT button (
Category Selector Knob
The CATEGORY knob (
Tune Disable
The TUNE DSBL function (
💡 All CAP buttons include indicator lights that illuminate based on selected function.
Left Vertical Console
Armament Panel
The armament panel provides primary control of air-to-air and air-to-ground weapon employment from the RIO cockpit.
Weapon Type Selector
The WPN TYPE selector (
Attack Mode Selector
The ATTK MODE knob (
Electrical Fuse Selector
The ELEC FUSE knob (
Air-to-Ground Gun Switch
The A/G GUN switch (
- OFF - Gun disabled.
- MIXED - Enables gun in addition to selected A/G ordnance.
Quantity Selectors
The QTY selector wheels (
Interval Selectors
The INTERVAL selector wheels (
Interval is set in milliseconds.
Station 6 Select Switch
The station 6 select switch (
Air-to-Air Launch Button
The A/A LAUNCH button (
Button illumination indicates hot-trigger conditions are met.
Missile Speed Gate Knob
The MSL SPD GATE knob (
Station 8 Select Switch
The station 8 select switch (
- B - Selects lower pylon.
- SW - Non-functional.
Missile Options Switch
The MSL OPTIONS switch (
- Enables AIM-7 pulse-doppler mode.
- Enables AIM-54 active launch mode.
Station 5 Select Switch
The station 5 select switch (
Next Launch Button
The NEXT LAUNCH button (
Station 4 Select Switch
The station 4 select switch (
Station 1 Select Switch
The station 1 select switch (
- B - Selects lower pylon.
- SW - Non-functional.
Tank Jettison Station 7 Switch
The TANK JETT station 7 switch (
Tank Jettison Station 2 Switch
The TANK JETT station 2 switch (
Station 3 Select Switch
The station 3 select switch (
Jettison Options Switch
The JETT OPTIONS switch (
- WPNS - Jettison weapons only.
- MER/TER - Jettison racks in addition to weapons.
This function is non-functional in the modeled F-14.
Selective Jettison Switch
The SEL JETT switch (
- JETT - Normal jettison mode.
- AUX - Backup jettison mode (guarded).
Mechanical Fuse Selector
The MECH FUSE switch (
Delivery Mode Selectors
The DLVY MODE switches (
- One switch selects single or paired weapon release.
- The other selects single-pass or multiple-pass delivery according to quantity and interval settings.
Left Instrument Panel
Servopneumatic Altimeter
The servopneumatic altimeter provides altitude indication using both electrical and pressure-based systems.
Altimeter Readout
The altimeter readout (
A pointer on the circular scale provides continuous indication in hundreds of feet.
Baroset Knob
The baroset knob (
This setting only affects the local altimeter display. Other CADC-driven digital indicators use a fixed 29.92 in.Hg reference.
Local Barometric Pressure Window
The local barometric pressure window (
Mode Switch
The mode switch (
- RESET - When CADC power and altitude data are available, holding RESET for approximately three seconds enables normal servoed operation.
- STBY - Selects backup pressure mode.
If CADC data or electrical power is absent for more than three seconds, the system automatically reverts to standby mode.
STBY Flag
The STBY flag is a red standby indication that appears when the altimeter is operating in backup (standby) mode (not visible in this image).
💡 At high speeds and below 10,000 feet, pressure effects can produce significant readout errors: up to 1,200 feet when transonic and up to 4,000 feet when supersonic.
Airspeed Mach Indicator
The airspeed Mach indicator displays indicated airspeed and Mach number.
Airspeed Dial
The airspeed dial (
Outer Airspeed Scale
The outer indicated airspeed scale (
Inner Airspeed Scale
The inner airspeed scale (
This scale remains covered by the dial until applicable.
Mach Number Scale
The Mach number scale (
Indicated Airspeed Index Pointer
The indicated airspeed index pointer (
Mach Number Index Pointer
The Mach number index pointer (
(Not visible in the referenced image.)
Safe Mach Number Index Pointer
The safe Mach number index pointer (
(Not visible in the referenced image.)
Index Selector Knob
The index knob (
One position adjusts the airspeed index pointer, and the other adjusts the Mach index pointer.
Standby Attitude Indicator
The standby attitude indicator provides independent attitude reference.
OFF Flag
The OFF flag (
Cage and Trim Knob
The cage and trim knob (
- Pulled out - Indicator is caged.
- Pushed in - Indicator is uncaged and pitch trim may be adjusted by rotating the knob.
UHF Remote Indicator
The UHF remote indicator provides a cockpit readout of ARC-159 radio tuning.
The remote display shows the selected frequency or preset channel for UHF 1.
The TEST button initiates an indicator self-test. A successful test results in a display of 888.888.
The DIM knob controls indicator display brightness.
Center Panel
Chaff/Flare Dispense Switches
Two countermeasure switch hats (
The switches are functionally mirrored.
- Up - Initiates a single chaff release.
- Down - Initiates the selected chaff release program.
- Inboard - Initiates the selected jammer release program.
- Outboard - Initiates the selected flare release program.
Detail Data Display Panel
The Detail Data Display (DDD) panel provides primary radar control and display functions for the AWG-9 weapon system.
Target Size Switch
The TGTS switch (
Mainlobe Clutter Switch
The MLC switch (
Automatic Gain Control Switch
The AGC switch (
This function is currently non-functional in DCS.
Parametric Amplification Switch
The PARAMP switch (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
Pulse Video Control
The PULSE VIDEO knob (
This control has no effect on pulse-doppler video.
Radar Track Indicator Lights
The radar track indicator lights (
- ANT TRK - Radar is tracking target angle.
- RDROT - Target is within range or rate gate and being tracked.
- JAT - Radar is tracking a jamming source angle.
- IROT - Indicates TCS angle tracking. Originally used for IRST in early F-14A variants.
Range Display Drum
The RANGE display (
The display may be blank when no range scale is applicable.
Range Selection Buttons
The RANGE buttons (
Brightness Control Knob
The BRIGHT knob (
IR Audio Threshold Knob
The IR AUDIO THRLD knob (
This function is non-functional when using the TCS.
IR Audio Volume Knob
The IR AUDIO VOL knob (
Non-functional with TCS.
IR Gain Knob
The IR GAIN knob (
Non-functional with TCS.
Transmitter Channel Wheel
The XMTR CHAN wheel (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
Missile Channel Wheel
The MSL CHAN wheel (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
Display Selection Buttons
The DISPLAY buttons (
The IR button is non-functional with TCS.
WCS Mode Buttons
The WCS MODE buttons (
WCS Mode Display
The WCS MODE display (
Closing Velocity Scale Switch
The Vc switch (
Erase Control Knob
The ERASE knob (
Pulse Gain Control
The PULSE GAIN knob (
Normally left in the detent position unless adjustment is required due to clutter or jamming.
Aspect Switch
The ASPECT switch (
- Controls expected target aspect.
- Selects edge or centroid tracking in pulse mode.
Elevation Indicator
The EL indicator (
- Left needle - Actual radar antenna elevation.
- Right needle - Commanded radar elevation when RDR is selected on the HCU, or TCS elevation when IR/TV is selected.
Counter-Countermeasure Mode Buttons
The CCM MODES buttons (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
Jam/Jet Threshold Knob
The JAM/JET knob (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
ACM Threshold Knob
The ACM THRLD knob (
Normally left in the detent position, as automatic logic manages this function.
Pulse-Doppler Threshold Knobs
The PD THRLD knobs (
- CLEAR - Upper half of the DDD.
- CLUTTER - Lower half of the DDD.
DDD Radar Display
The DDD radar display (
Center Console
Tactical Information Display (TID)
The Tactical Information Display (TID) presents tactical, navigation, and data link information to the RIO and provides associated navigation and display controls.
INS Status Indicator
The INS status indicator (
- STBY — Power applied but alignment not complete.
- READY — Minimum alignment sufficient for AIM-54 launch criteria.
Both lights extinguish when an INS mode is selected. The indicator may also display fault conditions.
Contrast Knob
The CONTRAST knob (
Data Readout Drum
The DATA READOUT drum (
The drum may be blank for sources that do not generate textual data.
Brightness Knob
The BRIGHT knob (
Steering Indicator Drum
The STEERING indicator drum (
Destination Selector
The DEST selector (
Collision Steering Button
The CLSN button (
Display Selection Buttons
The DISPLAY buttons (
Each button includes an indicator light showing current selection state.
Available display selections include:
- RID DISABLE — Functions as TID Expand.
- ALT NUM — Toggles altitude numerics next to track symbols.
- SYM ELEM — Toggles supplementary track symbology. When deselected, only the track symbol dot is displayed.
- DATA LINK — Toggles display of all data link tracks.
- JAM STROBE — Toggles display of jamming strobes.
- NON-ATTK — Toggles display of non-attackable tracks.
- VEL VECTOR — Toggles display of velocity vectors.
- LAUNCH ZONE — Toggles missile launch zone display. Replaces velocity vectors when applicable. Automatically enabled by the WCS 60 seconds prior to maximum missile launch range.
Range Selector
The RANGE selector (
The selected range corresponds to the diameter distance represented on the display.
TID Mode Selector
The TID MODE selector (
Track Hold Button
The TRACK HOLD button (
When selected, track retention time is increased to two minutes. Normal retention time is approximately 14 seconds.
Navigation Mode Selector
The NAV MODE selector (
Hand Control Unit (HCU)
The hand control unit is the primary control stick for radar and TCS operation.
IR/TV Switch
The IR/TV switch (
- OFF/STBY — Applies power without full operation.
- ON — Enables full TCS operation.
IR/TV Overtemperature Indicator
The IR/TV overtemp indicator (
Light Test Button
The LIGHT TEST button (
Power Reset Indicator
The PWR RESET indicator (
Power Reset Button
The PWR RESET button (
If the fault condition persists, affected supplies will remain inoperative.
WCS Status Indicator
The WCS indicator (
- STBY or XMT selected while radar warmup is incomplete.
- XMT selected while radar transmission remains inhibited.
WCS Power Switch
The WCS switch (
- STBY — Applies power to WCS and begins radar warmup without transmission.
- XMT — Enables radar transmission when warmup is complete.
Display warmup time is approximately 30 seconds. Radar warmup time is approximately three minutes.
Manual Rapid Lockon Button
The MRL button (
This mode overrides all other radar operating modes except PLM and VSL.
Offset Button
The OFFSET button (
Antenna Elevation Thumbwheel
The ELEV thumbwheel (
HCU Trigger
The HCU trigger (
- First detent — HALF ACTION.
- Second detent — FULL ACTION.
Functions include target acquisition and symbol hook.
Hand Control Function Buttons
The hand control function buttons (
The buttons are mutually exclusive and light up when selected.
Available functions are:
- IR/TV — Controls TCS azimuth, elevation, and tracking. Enables display of TCS elevation on the right elevation indicator on the DDD.
- RDR — Controls radar antenna elevation and STT acquisition or return to search. Displays commanded radar antenna elevation on the DDD.
- DDD CURSOR — Controls DDD cursor for marking geographic positions in pulse radar mode.
- TID CURSOR — Controls the TID cursor used to hook symbols on the TID.
Footwells
ICS Foot Button
RIO left footrest containing ICS PTT for COLD MIC intercommunication.
Mic Foot Button
RIO right footrest containing PTT for transmission on UHF 1, V/UHF 2, or both depending on ICS setting.
Right Instrument Panel
Clock
Mechanical wind-up clock.
The wind/set knob (
- Rotate clockwise to wind the clock.
- Pull out and rotate to set the hour and minute hands.
The elapsed-time control (
ALR-67 Indicator
Displays radar emitters detected by the ALR-67 radar warning receiver.
Threat Display Bands
- Non-lethal band (
2 ) - Displays emitters not considered an immediate threat due to range or lack of weapon capability. - Lethal band (
3 ) - Displays emitters capable of engaging own aircraft but not currently doing so. - Critical band (
4 ) - Displays direct threats to own aircraft. Systems capable of engaging own aircraft and showing current intent of doing so.
System Status Circle
The system status circle (
Area I (upper left quadrant) displays threat prioritization symbols:
- N - Normal.
- I - AI, Airborne interceptors prioritized.
- A - AAA, Anti-air artillery prioritized.
- U - Unknown emitters prioritized.
- F - Friendly emitters displayed in addition to threats.
Area II (upper right quadrant) indicates limited mode status.
- (Blank) - Limited mode not selected.
- L - Limited mode selected. Only the six highest-priority threats are shown.
Area III (lower half) displays system status and offset information:
- (Blank) - Normal operation.
- B - BIT failure.
- T - Thermal overload.
- O - Offset display selected. Threats will be separated to allow readout of overlapping symbols. Bearing accuracy degraded for displaced threats.
Intensity Control Knob
The INT knob (
Fuel Quantity Totalizer
The fuel quantity totalizer (
Threat Advisory and Master Caution Lights
Master caution light and ECM/IFF advisory and warning indications.
The MASTER CAUTION light and reset button flashes to indicate a status change on the RIO caution/advisory panel.
Press to acknowledge and extinguish the light until the next event.
ALR-67 Caution Lights
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| IFF | Advisory light indicating received mode 4 interrogation without own system generating a reply. |
| RCV | Advisory light indicating ALQ-126 is receiving a threat identification signal. |
| XMIT | Advisory light indicating ALQ-126 is transmitting. |
| SAM | Warning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from a SAM tracking radar. Flashes when a missile launch is detected. |
| AAA | Warning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from a AAA tracking radar. Flashes when AAA engagement is detected. |
| CW | Warning light indicating detection of a continuous wave emitter. |
| AI | Warning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from an airborne interceptor radar. |
ALR-45 Caution Lights
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| SA TRK | Lights steady whenever a SAM tracking radar is received. |
| SA2 | SA-2 warning - Lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch). |
| SA3/NI | SA-3 / SA-N-1 warning - Lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch). |
| SA4 | SA-4 warning - Lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch). |
| AI/AAA | Lights steady whenever an airborne interceptor and/or an ambiguous AI/AAA radar is received. |
| REC | Lights steady whenever ALQ-100 is receiving signal identified as threat. |
| IFF | Advisory light indicating received mode 4 interrogation without own system generating reply. |
| SA6 | SA-6 warning - Lights steady for MA (missile alert), flashes for ML (missile launch). |
| AI | Lights steady whenever an airborne interceptor radar is received. |
| REP | Lights steady whenever ALQ-100 is transmitting. |
Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI)
Display indicating azimuth and bearing information.
No. 2 Bearing Pointer
The No. 2 bearing pointer (
Compass Rose
The compass rose (
No. 1 Bearing Pointer
The No. 1 bearing pointer (
Distance Counter
The distance counter (
(Not visible in the referenced image.)
Canopy Jettison Handle
The canopy jettison handle (
Right Knee Panel
Caution-Advisory Panel
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| C&D HOT | Caution light indicating overheat in RIO controls and displays. |
| CABIN PRESS | Caution light indicating cabin pressure is too low. |
| FUEL LOW | Caution light indicating fuel below 1,000 pounds in either aft and left or forward and right fuel feed groups. |
| OXY LOW | Caution light indicating oxygen quantity is below 2 liters or pressure too low. |
| CANOPY | Caution light indicating canopy not down and locked. |
| FUSE HV | Caution light indicating AWW-4 electric fuse inoperative. |
| RDR ENABLED | Caution light indicating that radar operation with weight on wheels is possible. |
| COOLING AIR | Advisory light indicating overtemperature condition in the electronic forced air cooling system. |
| MSL COND | Advisory light indicating overtemperature or under-pressure in missile coolant flow, either of which shuts down the missile coolant pump. Can also indicate that the LIQ COOLING switch is not in the AWG-9/AIM-54 position with the WCS in STBY or ON when the Phoenix fairings are installed. |
| AWG-9 COND | Advisory light indicating overheat or overpressure in the AWG-9 coolant flow or that the overtemperature switch has shut down the coolant pump. |
| NAV COMP | Advisory light indicating failure in the INS or CSDC with the NAV MODE switch in INS. |
| FILM LOW | Advisory light indicating low remaining quantity of mission recorder film. |
| IMU | Advisory light indicating a failure in the inertial measuring unit or that the navigation system is in AHRS/AM mode. |
| AHRS | Advisory light indicating that the attitude or heading information from the AHRS is unreliable. |
Right Vertical Console
Electronic Countermeasures Display (ECMD)
Display used for navigational information and AN/ALR-45 ECM (only in F-14A with AN/ALR-45).
Has a brightness control knob, test button and a BIT indicator showing the status of the display (solid black when operational, showing white flags when indicating a fail condition).
Right Side Console
Radar Warning Receiver Panel
Control panel for the ALR-67 radar warning receiver.
Power Switch
The PWR switch (
Display Type Selector
The DISPLAY TYPE selector (
Mode Switch
The MODE switch (
It can be held to the following momentary positions:
- OFST - Enables offset display while held.
- LMT - Enables limited display while held.
Test Switch
The TEST switch (
- BIT - Momentary selection initiates ALR-67 BIT.
- SPL - While BIT page 1 is displayed, holding SPL displays the special BIT status page while held and for three seconds after release.
Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Digital Data Indicator (DDI)
Digital data indicator used to display commands received via the data link.
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| AFT VEC | Aircraft is being vectored to approach target from the rear hemisphere. |
| COL VEC | Aircraft is being vectored on a collision course to target. |
| NO MSG | No message at this time, indicates presence of data link communication while not receiving a command. |
| TO WAY PT | Proceed to the point being indicated by target information. |
| HANDOVER | TDS is handing own aircraft over to another control center. |
| ORBIT | Assume orbit at present position maintaining maximum endurance. |
| CHALNGE | Intercept and visually identify the target. |
| ARM 1 | Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-54. |
| ARM 2 | Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-7. |
| ARM 3 | Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-9. |
| NOT CMD | Ignore currently received heading, speed, and altitude. Also means valid command BIT not yet available. |
| FRE LAN | Free to attack the most suitable target. |
| DIS’GAGE | Cease fire. |
| ABORT | Abort action. |
| BEAC ON | Enable APN-154 tracking beacon. |
| BEAC DUB | Set APN-154 to double-pulse mode. |
| DROP | Command to release a weapon in data link A/G attack, manually or automatically if in data link attack mode. |
| BEAC OFF | Turn off APN-154 tracking beacon. |
| RET BASE | Return to the indicated home base. |
| WAVE OFF | Wave off, automatic AFCS disengagement. |
| LAND CHECK | CATCC has a data link channel available for AFCS, complete landing checklist. |
| ACL BEAC | Directed by carrier to enable APN-154 beacon. |
| ACL RDY | ACL has locked onto aircraft APN-154 beacon and is transmitting zero pitch and bank signals. Glideslope information is now available to the pilot. |
| A/P CPLR | ACL is ready to take control of the aircraft for the ACL approach, autopilot should be engaged. |
| 10 SEC | Indicates 10 seconds to the next action or waypoint. In ACL indicates that the ship's motion is taken into account for ACL. |
| ADJ A/C | Indication from the control station of another aircraft near own aircraft. |
| VOICE | Indicates ACL not available, switch to voice procedures. |
| TILT | Indicates no data link message received in the last 10 seconds. In ACL indicates no messages in the last 2 seconds, will disengage AFCS. |
| CMD CHG | Indicates imminent or recently changed command instructions. |
| ALT CHG | Indicates imminent or recently changed altitude command. |
| MON ALT | Message indicating altitude command not being followed with enough precision. |
| MANUAL | Indicates autopilot should not be engaged. |
| SPD CHG | Indicates imminent or recently changed speed command. |
| MON SPD | Message indicating speed command not being followed with enough precision. |
| CMD CTRL | Indicates aircraft under data link control for landing. |
| CHG CHN | Command to change data link channel. |
| HDG CHN | Indicates imminent or recently changed heading command. |
| CANC RPY | TDS has canceled reply messages. |
| FWD VEC | Aircraft is being vectored to approach the target from the front hemisphere. |
💡 The majority of the DDI lights depend on data link reply messages not currently modelled in DCS.
DECM Control Panel
Control panel for the AN/ALQ-126 DECM jammer.
Standby Light
The STANDBY light (
The light extinguishes after warm-up. Illumination during test or operation indicates a fault.
DECM Selector
The DECM selector (
Selectable modes are:
- OFF - Removes power from the AN/ALQ-126.
- STBY - Standby warm-up mode.
- TEST/HOLD 3 SEC - Hold for three seconds to arm the system test.
- TEST/ACT - Initiates AN/ALQ-126 BIT after the TEST/HOLD 3 SEC step.
- REC - Receive and analyze threat signals. Missile launch detection may force the system into repeat.
- RPT - Repeat mode, transmits programmed responses to detected threats.
Audio Knob
The AUDIO knob (
Data Link Control Panel
Control panel for data link operation.
Transmission Mode Switch
The transmission mode switch (
- TEST - Initiates system test.
- NORM - Normal operational mode.
- A/J - Anti-jam transmission mode.
Frequency Select Wheels
The frequency select thumbwheels (
Data Link Power Switch
The data link power switch (
Data Link Reply and Antenna Control Panel
Panel controlling data link alignment, reply, and antenna selection.
Antenna Switch
The ANTENNA switch (
Reply Switch
The REPLY switch (
- NORM - Reply transmission enabled.
- CANC - Reply transmission disabled (cancelled).
Datalink Mode Switch
The MODE switch (
- CAINS/WAYPT - Enables data link alignment and waypoint update.
- TAC - Enables manual frequency selection and stops alignment/waypoint update.
Address Thumbwheel
The ADDRESS thumbwheel (
This sets the two least-significant digits; remaining digits are set by ground crew.
AN/ALE-39 Control Panel
Controls countermeasure dispensing and operating modes for the AN/ALE-39.
Inventory Counters
The inventory counters (
Counters are manually set by pushing in and rotating the knob beneath each counter.
Power and Mode Switch
The PWR/MODE switch (
- AUTO(CHAFF)/MAN - Enables manual dispensing and automatic chaff dispensing via ECM threat detection.
- MAN - Manual dispensing only.
- OFF - System off.
Salvo Flares Switch
The SALVO FLARES switch (
The switch must be lifted to move to ON.
Flare Mode Switch
The FLARE MODE switch (
- MULT - Each flare command dispenses one flare from each launcher subsection loaded with flares.
- NORM - Each flare command dispenses one flare total.
- PILOT - Pilot DLC button dispenses flares. Other positions cause the pilot DLC button to dispense chaff.
Countermeasure Release Switches
The countermeasure release switches (
- PRGM - Program release. Switch must be lifted to enter PRGM; momentary actuation initiates programmed release.
- STBY - No release.
- SGL - Single release.
AAI Control Panel
AN/APX-76 interrogator control panel.
💡 Due to DCS limitations in regards to IFF the AAI control panel is currently non-functional.
M4 Alarm Override Switch
The M4 ALARM OVERRIDE switch (
Test / Challenge CC Switch
The TEST-CHAL CC switch (
- TEST - Momentary actuation interrogates own transponder. With matching codes, two solid lines appear on the DDD at 3 and 4 miles.
- CHAL CC - Momentary actuation starts a 10-second interrogation cycle. Only returns with correct mode and code are displayed on the DDD.
Code Selector Thumbwheels
The CODE selector thumbwheels (
The first wheel sets mode, and the last four wheels set code.
Challenge Light
The CHAL light (
Fault Light
The FAULT light (
AN/ALE-39 Programmer
Programming panel used to enter countermeasure programs and inventory into the AN/ALE-39.
Jammer Program Thumbwheels
The JAMR thumbwheels (
- QTY - Quantity of jammers released per program.
- INTV - Interval in seconds between jammer releases.
Chaff Program Thumbwheels
The CHAFF thumbwheels (
- B-QTY - Burst quantity per salvo; may be set to C (continuous) or R (random).
- B-INTV - Burst interval; may be set to R (random).
- S-QTY - Number of salvos in the program.
- S-INTV - Interval between salvos.
Flare Program Thumbwheels
The FLARE thumbwheels (
- QTY - Quantity of flares released per program.
- INTV - Interval between flare releases.
Load Control Thumbwheels
The LOAD control thumbwheels (
- L10 - Left 10 subsection load.
- L20 - Left 20 subsection load.
- R10 - Right 10 subsection load.
- R20 - Right 20 subsection load.
Reset Switch
The RESET switch (
Interior Light Control Panel
Panel controlling RIO cockpit lighting.
Instrument Lighting Thumbwheel
The INSTRUMENT thumbwheel (
- 0 - Off
- 1–14 - Increasing brightness
White Flood Switch
The WHITE FLOOD switch (
DIM and BRT settings are available. The switch is locked to OFF unless pulled out.
Console Lighting Thumbwheel
The CONSOLE thumbwheel (
- 0 - Console and red flood off
- 1–14 - Increasing console brightness
Red Flood Switch
The RED FLOOD switch (
- DIM - Dim red console flood
- MED - Medium red console flood
- BRT - Bright red instrument flood and console lights
Data / ADF Switch
The DATA/ADF switch (
- BOTH - Displays ADF bug and navigation data block.
- DATA - Displays navigation data block only.
- OFF - Disables both.
IFF Transponder Control Panel
Control panel for the AN/APX-72 IFF transponder.
Mode 4 Switch
The MODE 4 switch (
Mode 4 Audio/Light Switch
The MODE 4 AUDIO/LIGHT switch (
- AUDIO - Enables Mode 4 audio monitoring and reply light monitoring.
- OUT - Disables audio and light monitoring.
- LIGHT - Enables reply light monitoring only.
Mode 4 Code Selector
The MODE 4 CODE selector (
- ZERO - Erases both ciphers.
- B - Selects B cipher.
- A - Selects A cipher.
- HOLD - Non-functional.
Mode 4 Reply Light
The MODE 4 REPLY light (
The light can be pressed to test.
Test Light
The TEST light (
The light can be pressed to test illumination.
Master Selector
The MASTER selector (
- OFF - No power.
- STBY - Standby for immediate operation when another mode is selected.
- LOW - Low sensitivity replies; responds only to strong nearby interrogators.
- NORM - Normal reply operation.
- EMER - Emergency replies to Mode 1, 2, and 3/A and normal reply to Mode C, regardless of mode switch settings.
Mode Switches
The MODE switches (
- TEST - Tests the respective mode; correct operation indicated by TEST light.
- ON - Enables the mode.
- OUT - Disables the mode.
Rad Test / Out / Mon Switch
The RAD TEST-OUT-MON switch (
- RAD TEST - Not used by aircrew.
- OUT - Disables test and monitoring.
- MON - Monitors Mode 1, 2, 3, and C by illuminating the TEST light when replies are generated and transmitted.
Ident / Out / Mic Switch
The IDENT-OUT-MIC switch (
- IDENT - Momentary; enables IDENT replies for 15–30 seconds after release.
- OUT - IDENT disabled.
- MIC - Transfers IDENT control to crewmember UHF PTT; IDENT replies occur when PTT is keyed.
Code Thumbwheels
The code thumbwheels (
Six thumbwheels are provided.
IFF Antenna Control / Test Panel
Panel containing IFF antenna selection, BIT controls, and ground cooling control.
IFF Antenna Switch
The IFF ANT switch (
- AUTO - Automatic selection.
- LWR - Forces lower antenna selection.
Indicator Light / DDI BIT Switch
The IND LT/DDI BIT switch (
Ground Cooling Switch
The GND CLG switch (
- OBC/CABIN - External air into cabin and electronics cooling with reduced OBC performance.
- OFF - External air not used.
- AWG-9/AIM-54 - External air used to cool AWG-9/AIM-54 more effectively; disables external cabin air.
Mid Compression Bypass Test Panel (F-14A only)
Panel used to verify Mid Compression Bypass (MCB) circuit functionality.
Left and Right Test Lights
The left and right test lights (
MCB Test Switch
The MCB test switch (
Electrical Power System Test Panel
Ground crew test panel for aircraft electrical systems.
💡 Non-functional in DCS.
Canopy Defog / Cabin Air Lever
The canopy air diffuser lever (
- CABIN AIR - Normal position. Directs approximately 70% of airflow through cockpit air diffusers and 30% through canopy diffusers.
- CANOPY DEFOG - Directs all airflow through canopy diffusers for canopy defog.
Canopy Control Handle
The canopy control handle controls canopy operation and is located on the right cockpit wall. The handle is mounted downwards beneath the box containing the handle mechanism and the handle position texts. The canopy control handle is duplicated in the pilot cockpit.
| Control | Function |
|---|---|
| BOOST | Closes the canopy using boost, used during cold weather or with a strong headwind. |
| CLOSE | Closes the canopy, the default position during flight. |
| HOLD | Holds the canopy at the current position for any position other than closed. |
| OPEN | Opens the canopy. |
| AUX OPEN | Allows manual opening of the canopy if system pressure is too low. |
Systems Overview
This chapter gives detailed in-sights and explanations into all major systems of the Tomcat.
From the engine system to fuel flow, control surfaces, how to navigate, use the radar and weapons effectively, or the insights of INS alignments and its gyro system.
Flight Controls and Gear
This chapter contains all necessary information about the flight controls, the controlling computer system, the wing sweep mechanism and systems used on the ground such as the landing gear.
Central Air Data Computer (CADC)
The Central Air Data Computer or CADC is the computer acting as the spider in the web for most aircraft flight sensors and relaying this information to all systems needing them.
In addition, it also controls the wing-sweep via the wing-sweep schedule and also controls the flaps and slats as they are limited by that same schedule.
Flight Controls & AFCS
The flight control system on the F-14 Tomcat is driven by the two main hydraulic circuits, powered by pumps connected to each engine.
For longitudinal (pitch) control both tail stabilizers are deflected in unison, acting in the same way as traditional elevators.
Lateral (roll) control is produced by both the tail stabilizers and the spoilers working in unison. To produce roll the stabilizers are deflected opposite each other to act as ailerons in combination with the spoilers on the side to which roll is commanded.
The rudders on the F-14 is a standard rudder configuration albeit in a two tail, two rudder configuration.
Control surface position is indicated on the Control Surface Position Indicator and can also be used to check trim position with controls at neutral.
💡 Above 15 units AOA, the rudders should be used for lateral (roll) control due to the different airflow along the aircraft control surfaces.
Trim
Longitudinal and lateral trim is accomplished via the trim hat on the Control Stick. This changes the stick neutral position, thus trimming the aircraft. Rudder trim is accomplished via the RUDDER TRIM switch on the Inlet Ramps/Throttle Control Panel, changing the neutral rudder position.
The Mach Trim and ITS (Integrated Trim System) automatically trims to compensate for changes in longitudinal trim. The Mach Trim system compensates for transonic and supersonic trim changes and the ITS for trim changes due to flap and speed-brake position changes.
AFCS Automatic Flight Control System
The AFCS or Automatic Flight Control System provides additional aircraft stability (SAS or Stability Augmentation System) via automatic control surface commands generated from AFCS sensors. The AFCS is controlled by switches on the AFCS Control Panel and pitch, roll and yaw can each be set individually.
The pitch and roll switches are spring-loaded to off but normally held to on by solenoids meaning that if the system is turned off or inoperable the switches return to off. The yaw switch is purely mechanical.
Roll SAS should not be used for situations involving flight at AOA above 15 units and should therefore be set to off for combat maneuvers.
If the autopilot emergency disengage paddle on the control stick is held down the pitch and roll channels will be set to off.
Autopilot
Apart from stability augmentation the AFCS is also used to provide autopilot functionality. To use the autopilot all three stabilization channels must be enabled.
The controls for the autopilot system are situated on the AFCS Control Panel.
Autopilot modes available are attitude hold, heading hold, ground track, altitude hold, vector/pcd (precision course direction) and acl (automatic carrier landing).
By setting the autopilot ENGAGE switch to on the attitude hold is engaged, maintaining current aircraft attitude. Limited to within 30° pitch and 60° roll angles and the aircraft will be automatically moved within this range. Current attitude can be changed with the control stick and will be held when the stick is released.
The ENGAGE switch is also a prerequisite for all other autopilot modes.
The HDG position on the HDG switch enables heading hold, maneuver the aircraft to desired heading and with a bank angle of less than 5° to set heading.
The ground track mode is entered by setting the HDG switch to GT, wait for the A/P REF warning light on the left side of the Vertical Display Indicator (VDI) to illuminate and then press the nosewheel steering button on the control stick. The A/P REF warning light will then turn off and the ground track mode will be enabled, setting the autopilot to follow a ground track by compensating for aircraft wind drift.
The altitude hold mode is set via the ALT, altitude, switch and like the ground track mode the A/P REF warning light will illuminate until the nosewheel steering button is depressed, enabling the mode.
The Data Link Vector - Precision Course Direction mode is used to allow a Link 4 controller to remotely control the aircraft. This is not modelled in DCS.
Finally the ACL or Automatic Carrier Landing mode is used to conduct automatic carrier landings in conjunction with the Link 4 data link and the on-board radar beacon. To enable the ACL, set the VEC/PCD switch to ACL which will cause the A/P REF warning light to illuminate. When intercepting the ACL glideslope and with the ACL READY and A/P CPLR warning lights illuminated on the VDI, depress the nosewheel steering button on the control stick. This engages the ACL and lets the data link control the aircraft. The A/P REF warning light will turn off.
The ACL can be used in conjunction with the APC (see Throttle Controls) for a fully automatic landing. The ACL can be disengaged via the PLM button on the right throttle and the APC via the CAGE/SEAM button on the left throttle.
All the autopilot modes can be overridden by enough force on the control stick or by depression of the autopilot emergency disengagement paddle, automatically resetting all autopilot switches to off.
Spoilers
The spoilers located on the upper surfaces of the wings are used to control roll as detailed above under Flight Control System, for braking on the ground as part of the Antiskid system and as a part of the DLC system (see next section).
The spoilers are only used forwards of 62° wing-sweep as further aft these conflict with the fuselage.
In case of a spoiler malfunction the spoiler symmetry protection logic disables all of the spoilers in the same section as the failed spoiler, either inboard or outboard spoilers. If this occurs the SPOILERS caution light on the Caution - Advisory Indicator illuminates.
To override this the switch corresponding to the relevant section on the Spoiler Failure Override can be set to override by lifting the guard and setting the switch to ORIDE and then depressing the MASTER RESET button on the Fuel Management Panel.
Spoiler position can be seen on the Control Surface Position Indicator.
DLC Direct Lift Control
The DLC or Direct Lift Control is used to control vertical glideslope position without pitch control inputs or engine throttle commands. The DLC uses the two inboard spoiler sections in conjunction with small corrections on the tail stabilizers to control lift.
The DLC is engaged by depression of the DLC switch on the control stick with flaps down and throttles less than MIL. This causes the inboard spoilers to extend to half and enables the DLC & maneuver flap command thumbwheel on the control stick to control them. The DLC also requires the AFCS roll and pitch channels, the inboard spoilers and the hydraulic systems to be operative as well.
Rotation of the thumbwheel forwards extends the spoilers towards the max up position, decreasing lift and adjusting glideslope position downward. Rotation of the thumbwheel aft retracts the spoilers towards the flush position, increasing lift and adjusting glideslope position upward.
Another depression of the DLC switch disengages the system.
Flaps and Slats
The flaps and slats on the F-14 Tomcat can be used in two modes.
The normal flap and slat extension is controlled using the FLAP handle on the Throttle Quadrant. The flaps can be set to anywhere between retracted and fully extended where the flaps will extend to 35° and the slats to 17°. The auxiliary flaps, the innermost section, only have two positions, retracted and extended. They will extend fully when the FLAP handle is at more than 5° extension.
If a fault exists preventing retraction of flaps the FLAP handle should be moved to the UP position and then moved outboard and up to the EMER UP position, overriding faulty interlocks. The EMERG DOWN position has no function.
💡 In DCS, the failures that would necessitate the usage of the EMERG UP position are not modeled. In addition, the EMERG UP position does not fix issues where the flaps are unable to go up due to damage.
The other mode is the maneuver flap system in which the CADC uses the flaps and slats automatically to improve aircraft performance. In this mode the flaps extends to 10° maximum and the slats to 7° maximum and the innermost flap section is disabled.
While normally automatic the maneuver flap system can be manually controlled using the DLC & maneuver flap command thumbwheel on the control stick. Forward thumbwheel rotation retracts the flaps and slats and aft thumbwheel rotation extends them.
When sweeping the wings the flaps are limited by the wing-sweep position. Aft of 21° sweep the auxiliary (inboard flaps) are disabled up. Aft of 50° all flaps are disabled up. The slats are not inhibited by wing-sweep.
Position of the flaps and slats are indicated on the Wheels-Flaps Position Indicator.
The FLAP light on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator indicates a malfunction in the flap system with flaps at non symmetrical positions. The REDUCE SPEED warning light on the left side of the Vertical Display Indicator (VDI) indicates flaps not retracted above 225 knots indicated airspeed.
Speedbrakes
The speedbrakes on the F-14 Tomcat consists of three sections on the tail located between the engines and these are powered by the combined hydraulic system.
The speedbrake controls are located on the right Throttle and can be set to desired position depending on how long the switch is held to the extend position. Retraction always fully retracts the speedbrakes.
To protect the speedbrakes they will start retracting above 400 knots and will continue to do so with increasing airspeed, additionally selection of MIL power or above automatically retracts them.
As the speedbrakes disturb airflow around the tail the fuel dump is disabled with speedbrake extension as to not have the fuel hit the aircraft.
Position of the speedbrakes can be seen on the Wheels-Flaps Position Indicator.
Wing-Sweep System
Wing-sweep schedule as function of Mach number and related flap interlocks.
The wing-sweep system controls the geometry of the F-14’s wings, allowing the wings to move from a 20° to a 68° position in the air. While on the deck an oversweep of 75° is also possible reducing the F-14’s wing span to 33 feet (about 10 meters).
The wings are moved by hydro-mechanical screw-jack actuators which are interconnected mechanically, making sure they’re synchronized. As long as both main hydraulic systems are functioning the maximum wing-sweep change rate is about 15°/s. This can be affected negatively by negative g or large amounts of positive g.
In normal operation the CADC, Central Air Data Computer, controls the wing position as a function of current Mach via the wing-sweep program, this is known as the AUTO mode. The pilot can also select a wing position aft of the wing-sweep program manually or choose the BOMB mode that sets the wings to 55° or further aft depending on the program. Simply put, the CADC wing-sweep program determines the max forward position of the wings. All this is done electrically via two independent channels (for redundancy) to the wing-sweep actuators.
Currently commanded wing position, CADC program wing position and actual wing position can be seen on the wing-sweep indicator next to the ACM panel.
Emergency Mode
While the normal mode controls the wing-sweep electrically, to supplement this it’s also possible to control the wing-sweep mechanically via the emergency mode. This is done via the emergency wing-sweep handle on the right side of the throttle. That handle is connected mechanically to the hydraulic valves in the wing-sweep system, providing a physical back-up control.
Normally this handle is moved with the electronic wing-sweep program by a servo located beneath it, making sure it’s at the actual wing position. To disengage the electric system and enable the emergency mode the guard over the handle is opened and then the handle is extended for additional leverage. Then the handle can be forced out of the spider-detent normally connecting it to the electrical servo and then used to manually set the wing position.
In this mode the pilot has to make sure to follow the following schedule to avoid damage to the wings:
| Speed (Indicated Mach) | Max Forward Wing Position |
|---|---|
| 0.4 | 20° |
| 0.7 | 25° |
| 0.8 | 50° |
| 0.9 | 60° |
| 1.0 | 68° |
To return to the normal mode of operation, the handle should be pushed into the desired position and pressed down and the guard closed. The MASTER RESET button on the fuel management panel should then be depressed and the wing-sweep system set to the same position as the handle. The servo will then drive to the commanded position and re-engage the handle to the spider detent, resuming normal operation.
Oversweep
The emergency wing-sweep handle is also used to select the oversweep position of the wings. The oversweep is only used while on the ground to reduce the wing span to make it easier to spot the aircraft on the carrier deck. As the wing will sweep over the stabilizers on the tail the horizontal tail authority system is enabled to prevent the wings and stabilizers from damaging each other by restricting movement of the stabilizer.
To set the wings to oversweep the emergency wing-sweep handle should be moved to the 68° position and held in the extended position. This will deflate the wing-seal airbags and activate the horizontal tail authority system, indicated by the HZ TAIL AUTH caution light illuminating. When the HZ TAIL AUTH caution light goes out and the OVER flag on the wing-sweep indicator appears the oversweep interlocks are free and the handle can now be moved to the 75° position and stowed.
To move the wings out of oversweep the handle is pulled up and moved forwards of 68°. This will again illuminate the HZ TAIL AUTH caution light. When the wings have physically exited the oversweep the caution light and the OVER flag will turn off.
As with normal emergency mode operation the handle should now be set to the same position as the spider detent and the MASTER RESET button depressed.
Controls and Indicators
The controls for the wing-sweep system are on the right throttle (electrical) and to the right of the right throttle (mechanical). See the Throttle and the Throttle Quadrant.
The wing-sweep hat on the right throttle is normally set to AUTO enabling CADC control of the wings, this is the upper position. The down position sets the wing-sweep to the BOMB mode, 55° or aft.
The AFT and FWD (forward) positions enable manual movement aft of the CADC scheduled position.
The emergency wing-sweep handle on the throttle quadrant is used to control the mechanical emergency mode, see emergency mode above.
The wing-sweep indicator to the right of the ACM panel is used to indicate the current wing-sweep positions. The pointer on the left side shows the CADC scheduled wing position. The left tape shows the manually commanded position and the right tape shows the actual wing position.
The five windows on the right side show:
- OFF: System inoperable.
- AUTO: CADC controlling wing-sweep.
- MAN: Wings set manually with the control on the right throttle.
- EMER: Wings set with the emergency wing-sweep handle.
- OVER: Wings in oversweep.
The relevant warning and advisory lights are located on the Vertical Display Indicator (VDI) and the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator.
The WING SWEEP advisory light on the right side of the VDI illuminates when both wing-sweep electrical channels are inoperable or the emergency mode is in use. If it illuminates without the emergency mode being used that mode should then be used as the electrical system might not work.
The WING SWEEP caution light on the pilot caution - advisory indicator illuminates when at least one electrical wing-sweep channel is inoperable.
Wing-Sweep System Test
The wing-sweep system can be tested on the ground in pre-flight without moving the wings using the Master Test Panel.
To conduct the test, set the wing-sweep mode to AUTO and push the MASTER RESET button. Set the MASTER TEST switch to WG SWP.
The CADC commanded position indicator on the wing-sweep indicator will now move to 44°. The WING SWEEP and FLAP light will illuminate on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator and the REDUCE SPEED warning light on the Vertical Display Indicator (VDI).
💡 The WING SWEEP advisory light will illuminate after 3 seconds into test, turn off and then illuminate again at 8 seconds.
When the CADC commanded position indicator moves forward to the 20° position the test is over and the above light will turn off. The MASTER TEST switch can now be set to OFF and the test is complete. The test will take about 25 seconds to complete.
💡 The RUDDER AUTH and/or MACH TRIM lights might illuminate and the control stick might move. This can be ignored.
💡 The WG SWP test on the Master Test panel is not implemented yet.
Landing Gear System & Ground Handling
The F-14 Tomcat has a tricycle landing gear designed to be fully retractable as well as hardened enough to withstand the rigours of carrier traps. The landing gear extension and retraction is powered by the combined hydraulic system as well as having an emergency extension system. The emergency extension system has a nitrogen bottle that can be used to power a one-shot emergency extension. With the emergency system triggered, the system needs to be reset by technicians on the ground to allow further normal retraction.
For additional information on controls and indicators see Landing Gear Control Panel for controls and Wheels-Flaps Position Indicator for the indicators.
Nosewheel Steering
The nosewheel steering system on the F-14 can be activated with weight on wheels by depression of the nosewheel steering button on the Control Stick. The activation of this system is indicated via the NWS ENGA caution light on the left side of the HUD, see Wheels Warning/Brakes Warnings/ACLS/AP Caution/NWS Engage Caution/Auto Throttle Caution Lights.
Disengagement of this system occurs automatically with weight off wheels (take-off), electrical supply failure or lowering of the launch bar. It’s also possible to deactivate the system by depression of the nosewheel steering button.
The nosewheel, with the system engaged, is controlled via the rudder pedals. It’s capable of a deflection of up to 70° meaning that it will turn tightly enough that the inner wheel will in fact move backwards.
Wheelbrakes
The wheelbrakes can be applied either via the rudder pedals by pressing on the upper part of them, rotating them forwards. The other application is via the parking brake handle located on the Landing Gear Control Panel panel.
The rudder pedals can be used to apply the brakes gradually while the parking brakes are either on or off.
Normally both systems are supplied from the combined hydraulic system but if that system becomes depressurized the brake system automatically switches to the backup accumulators. The Emergency Brake Pressure Indicator shows current pressure in the emergency accumulators.
If fully charged the auxiliary accumulator allows for about 13 to 14 wheelbrake applications from the pedals and the parking brake accumulator 3 parking brake applications minimum. These accumulators can be recharged via the Hydraulic Hand Pump.
The BRAKES warning light on the left side of the HUD indicates either parking brake applied, antiskid system fail or that the brakes are operating in the emergency mode (only when the pedals are depressed).
Antiskid
The antiskid system modulates the wheelbrakes to prevent skidding while on the ground. When armed in the air the system prevents braking until both main wheels are on the ground and the wheels have spun up. Also the system is not operational below 15 knots.
The antiskid system switch also controls the spoiler brake system that deploys the spoilers as brakes when the throttles are set to IDLE while on the ground.
💡 The antiskid should be disabled during taxi as below 15 knots, the system may disturb normal braking even though the antiskid feature is not operational at those speeds.
The ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch on the Fuel Management Panel panel controls the system. OFF disables the system, BOTH enables antiskid and the spoiler brake system and SPOILER BK enables only the spoiler brake system.
Catapult Launch and Arresting Gear
Nosegear Catapult System
The nosegear of the F-14 contains the system allowing for catapult assisted takeoff during carrier based operations.
The three components mounted in or on the nosegear are the nosewheel kneel functionality, the launch bar and the holdback fitting.
To enable the system the aircraft is kneeled using the NOSE STRUT switch on the Landing Gear Control Panel. This is done by holding the switch to the KNEEL position until downward movement stops.
This drains hydraulic fluid from the shock absorber, compressing the nosegear strut 14 inches. When compressed this also releases the lock on the launch bar which can then be lowered manually by the deck crew or by turning the nosegear more than 10° from center.
💡 In DCS, the launch bar is automatically lowered with nosegear kneel.
The aircraft can then be guided onto the catapult and connected to the shuttle, in DCS via default keybind U. The holdback bar is currently not modelled in DCS.
💡 Deselection of nosewheel steering should be done before final movement onto the shuttle and hookup to avoid misalignment.
The final command to launch the aircraft, after proper procedures, is then to salute the "shooter" or officer in command of catapult launch, default keybind LShift + U in DCS.
After the catapult stroke, when the launch bar is released from the shuttle, stored hydraulic energy is released to impart a positive pitch moment to the aircraft. This also automatically raises the launch bar into its stowed position.
Indication of the launch bar status is available on the Caution - Advisory Indicator via the LAUNCH BAR advisory light. The advisory light is on with weight on wheels when the launch bar is not up and locked and turns off if throttles are advanced to MIL to enable a lights out for launch criteria. With weight off wheels the LAUNCH BAR advisory light is on if the nose strut hasn’t fully extended, launch bar is not up and locked or nosewheel hasn’t centered correctly. This inhibits nosegear retraction.
The Launch Bar Abort Panel contains the LAUNCH BAR switch used to disengage the launch bar in case of an aborted launch. This functionality is currently not implemented in DCS, unhooking the launch bar is currently accomplished by another depression of the hookup key, default key U.
Arresting Gear
The arresting hook located on the underside of the tail of the F-14 is used for arrested landings during carrier operations.
The system uses hydraulic power from both flight and combined hydraulic systems and is controlled electrically, thus requiring electrical power as well.
Operation of the system is via the arresting HOOK handle on the Arresting Hook Panel. UP raises the arresting hook and DN, down, lowers it to 37° allowing it to catch the wire during a correctly executed carrier "trap". The transition light next to the arresting HOOK handle illuminates whenever the arresting hook position does not correspond with handle position.
If on board failures do not allow for normal hook lowering it’s possible to use a mechanical backup to deploy the hook. To activate the mechanical backup, pull the handle out and rotate it 90° counterclockwise. This releases the mechanical up-lock and drain the hydraulic pressure keeping the hook up, thus lowering it.
If electrical power and hydraulic power are restored, it’s then possible to retract the hook by rotating the handle 90° clockwise and pushing the handle back in and then setting it in the default UP position.
💡 Hook position also affects the AoA indexer and approach lights, making them flash with gear down if the hook is not also down. This feature can be disabled using the HOOK BYPASS switch on the Master Light Control Panel.
Engines & Fuel Systems
Depending on the variant, the F-14 Tomcat is either equipped with two Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A or two General Electrics F110-GE-400 turbofan engines.
Each engine is fed by an independent fuel system from fuel tanks installed in the airframe.
Engines
The F-14A is powered by two Pratt & Whitney TF30-P-414A while the F-14B is powered by two General Electrics F110-GE-400, both of which are afterburning turbofan engines.
To provide the engines with an even subsonic airflow the F-14 has the AICS or Air Inlet Control System. This system controls the variable geometry intakes by moving the variable ramps mounted in them to slow the airflow. This is accomplished using various sensor inputs run through a calculation using set schedules which decides the positions of the ramps.
In addition, the TF30 uses two systems to improve reliable operation, the Mid Compression Bypass System (MCB) and the Mach Lever.
The MCB helps mitigate high angle of attack airflow onto the compressor fans to reduce the risk of an engine stall. This system vents air from the compressor section to bypass duct to stabilize the airflow for later compressor stages. Normally this system uses angle of attack and Mach number sensor data to activate, but with the landing gear handle in the down position this it is only activated with zone 5 afterburner. Additionally the WCS commands the MCB to activate with extension of the refuelling probe as well as when launching AIM-7 or AIM-9 missiles, air to ground rockets or firing the M61 Vulcan gun.
The Mach Lever also mitigates the risk of an engine stall by controlling min and max rpm allowed as a function of Mach number. In addition it also increases the minimum rpm in high angle of attack regimes while subsonic.
The two F110s in F-14B, on the other hand, are controlled by the AFTC (Augmenter Fan Temperature Control unit). The AFTC is an early engine control computer akin to an early version of a FADEC (Full Authority Digital Engine Control) used on newer turbine engines. This system controls both the engine itself as well as the variable exhaust nozzles controlling the engine exhaust gases and removes the need for the MCB and Mach Lever for the F110. The lack of such a system in the F-14A controlling its TF30s is one of the reasons for them being deemed less reliable than the F110s.
In case of a failure in the AFTC the MEC (Main engine control) is capable of assuming control of the engines to provide a fall-back, mechanical control. The normal mode, AFTC, is the primary mode (PRI) and called as such while the fall-back MEC is the secondary (SEC) mode. The selection of primary or secondary is automatic in case of a failure in the AFTC but can also be manually selected. Of note is that in secondary mode the engine nozzles are fully closed and disabled in addition to the afterburners being disabled with a corresponding loss of engine performance.
In addition both engines also drive separate fuel, hydraulic and electric generators to create redundancy.
💡 The main difference between the TF30 and F110 engines (apart from lesser thrust in the TF30s) is that the TF30s are more sensitive to the quality of the airflow entering the compressor face. In general it is wise to avoid anything less than military power or afterburner while in high angle of attack maneuvers as well as avoiding large rudder inputs or asymmetric engine throttle settings. That said, the TF30s in the HB F-14A module have been extensively tuned using available data and SME expertise, resulting in an accurate modelling of an engine undeserving of its bad reputation. One "advantage" of the TF30’s mechanical fuel control is its high speed thrust, resulting in higher top speeds than the F110 can achieve. If flown within normal parameters, the TF30 engines behave well if a tad underpowered compared to the F110s.
Throttle Controls
The throttles in the F-14 have detents preventing unintentional engine start and shutdown and unintentional selection of afterburner. In addition the throttles also controls several different systems depending on throttle position as shown in the diagram above. The most critical of these being the fuel cutoff and ignition systems in the respective engines.
For throttle operations there are three modes:
The manual mode is a mechanical mode in which the engines are controlled by mechanical linkages directly from the throttles to the engines. The manual mode is designed as a backup mode and may be inexact because of the mechanical nature of the controls.
Boost mode is the normal mode of operation in which electrical paths control actuators moving the same engine controls as the mechanical linkages but more exactly and with lesser force required.
The third mode is the approach power compensator mode or the auto throttle mode which is a system which allows for automatic throttle control for optimal angle-of-attack during approaches.
The controls for the throttle mode are located on the inlet ramps/throttle control panel to the side of the main throttles and allows for selection of all three modes. The auto throttle mode is solenoid held and will revert to boost mode if the criteria for automatic controls are not met.
To allow selection of auto mode the throttles need to be between 75 to 90% rpm, the gear handle needs to be down and with no weight on the wheels. If these criteria are no longer met, the throttles are manually overridden with force or the Cage/SEAM button on the left throttle is depressed the solenoid releases the switch and it reverts to boost.
For additional auto-throttle tune the gain of the system can be set on the inlet ramps/throttle control panel. The settings are hot, normal or cold with hot increasing the throttle gain (and effective thrust) and cold decreasing it. These settings correspond to cold or hot external temperatures but should be set according to observed throttle control.
The RATS or reduced arrestment thrust system is a system limiting engine thrust after touchdown to limit it to levels appropriate for carrier environments. The system is enabled by weight on either main landing gear and is disabled by selection of afterburner on the throttles.
Finally, and implemented only for the F110-GE-400, is the asymmetric limiter, preventing asymmetric afterburner engagement if only one afterburner lights by keeping that afterburner at minimum afterburner thrust until the other afterburner also lights.
Engine and Throttle Control Switches and Indicators
The inlet ramps/throttle control panel contains most other engine related controls.
The inlet ramps/throttle control panel contains most other engine related controls.
The THROTTLE MODE (
The THROTTLE TEMP (
The INLET RAMPS (
The engine crank switch (
The BACK UP IGNITION (
💡 F-14B only.
The ASYM LIMITER (
The other switches on that same panel are the ENG (engine) MODE SELECT
switches (
💡 F-14A only.
The MCB Test Panel, located in the RIO pit on the right horizontal panel, is
used to test if the MCB system functions. The TEST switch (
The ENG/PROBE ANTI-ICE (
Engine Instrument Group (EIG), Related Indicators and Caution Lights
The ENGINE INSTRUMENT GROUP displays engine RPM, TIT (Turbine Inlet Temperature, F-14A) or EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature, F14B) and FF (fuel flow) to the pilot to allow for engine monitoring.
💡 Pictured above are the TF30 engine indicators, F110 EIG coming soon.
The exhaust nozzle position indicators display respective engine’s current engine exhaust nozzle position, with zero being fully closed and full clockwise rotation being fully open. The F-14A indicates 0 to 6 units while the F-14B indicates 0 to 100 percent open (tens indicated on gauge).
The oil pressure indicators display respective engine oil pressure allowing the pilot to check that engine oil pressure is at acceptable levels.
The caution lights relevant to engine operation are located on the pilot’s caution - advisory panel, and at the sides of the HUD.
The caution lights on the sides of the HUD are the engine stall warning lights which flashes at a 3 Hz rate when an engine stall is detected. The warning light on the left side of the HUD indicates an engine stall in the left engine and the one on the opposite side the right engine. This is also combined with an audio warning, a modulated tone at 320 Hz.
Below the left engine stall warning light is, amongst others, the AUTO THROT (auto throttle) caution light which illuminates for 10 seconds when the auto throttle system is disengaged by other means than the throttle mode switch.
On the main caution - advisory panel the relevant engine caution and warnings lights are:
- INLET ICE: Caution light indicating ice detection on the detector in the left engine inlet.
- L & R INLET: Caution lights indicating failure in AICS for respective variable intake system.
- OIL PRESS: Caution light indicating low oil pressure in either engine.
- BLEED DUCT: Caution light indicating hot air leakage in either engine.
- L & R RAMPS: Caution lights indicating respective engine intake ramp not being locked into position when supposed to.
- L & R GEN: Caution lights indicating that respective engine generator is inoperative.
- L & R OIL HOT: Caution lights indicating that respective engine oil is too hot.
- L & R FUEL PRES: Caution lights indicating engine fuel pressure below 9 psi in respective engine fuel boost pump.
F-14A TF30-P-414A only lights:
- L & R OVSP/VALVE: Caution lights indicating engine starter system malfunction or N1 rotor over-speed in respective engine.
F-14B F110-GE-400 only lights:
- START VALVE: Caution light indicating that the starter valve is open. Control engine crank position if lit after engine start completion.
- L & R ENG SEC: Caution lights indicating that respective engine is operating in secondary mode.
- RATS: Caution light indicating that RATS (reduced arrestment thrust system) is enabled.
💡 F-14A specific lights not yet implemented.
Fuel System
1. Refueling Probe, 2. Ground refueling Port (Right Side), 3. Forward Fuselage Tank, 4. Left External Drop Tank, 5. Left Box Beam Tank, 6. Left Wing Tank, 7. Vent Tank, 8. Fuel Dump Mast, 9. Aft Fuselage Tank, 10. Right Box Beam Tank, 11. Right Wing Tank, 12. Right External Drop Tank.
The main fuel storage in the F-14 consists of two feed systems, one for each engine. The right engine feed system consists of the right wing and right box cells and the front fuselage cells while the left engine feed system consists of the left wing and left box cells in addition to the aft fuselage cells. This fact needs to be kept in mind when reading the fuel gauges.
The total useable fuel quantity is roughly 20,000 pounds distributed as in the table below.
| Tank group | Pounds |
|---|---|
| Forward Fuselage | 4,700 |
| Aft Fuselage | 4,400 |
| Right Feed Group | 1,600 |
| Left Feed Group | 1,500 |
| Internal Wings | 4,000 |
| External Tanks | 3,600 |
Fuel Quantity Indicators and Controls
The fuel quantity indicator on the pilot right knee panel displays internal and external fuel carried.
The uppermost indicator (
The TOTAL (
The L and R (
The FUS & FEED tapes (fuselage and feed) shows the AFT & L (aft fuselage and left feed) and FWD & R (forward fuselage and right feed) in thousands of pounds.
Additionally the RIO has a total fuel quantity display on the right instrument panel. This display counter can only show total fuel quantity. (See Fuel Quantity Totalizer.)
The fuel management panel on the pilot’s left vertical console contains the applicable controls for the fuel system.
The QTY SEL (
The FEED switch allows the pilot to correct fuel imbalances caused by single engine operation or feed failures by selecting both engines to feed from either the FWD (forward and right tanks) or AFT (aft and left tanks) instead of from one feed system each as normal NORM. The switch guard locks the switch to the NORM position when down.
The WING/EXT TRANS switch controls fuel transfer from the wing and external tanks into the fuselage feed systems. The normal AUTO position enables this transfer as soon the landing gear is retracted. The ORIDE position enables this transfer regardless of landing gear position, enabling transfer when on the ground or during a malfunction in the electrical system inhibiting landing gear retraction detection. Additionally the OFF position disables this transfer but can be overridden automatically to AUTO when the INST test is performed on the MTS panel, the refuel probe is set to ALL EXTD or when dumping fuel.
The DUMP (
🟡 CAUTION: Even though technically possible to engage the afterburners after a fuel dump is in progress, this is not allowed due to the possibility of igniting the dumped fuel.
In-Flight Refueling
The above panel also contains the control for the in-flight refueling system.
The REFUEL PROBE (
💡 Selecting EXTD ALL resets the WING/EXT TRANS switch to AUTO.
Navigation & Communication
The F-14’s primary navigation system is a multi-unit Carrier Aircraft Inertial Navigation System (CAINS) designated as AN/ASN-92. An INS system measures and integrates sensed inertia forces (acceleration) and rotational velocities to calculate aircraft position and linear velocity. A good navigation system can precisely guide an aircraft on a route to a mission objective hundred or thousand miles-long, and then back to the home base, safely and reliably. Such a system is even more important when an aircraft is designed to operate over the ocean, far away from any ground-based TACAN or visual references.
Designing an INS (IMU) is an engineering challenge, which requires consideration of such problems as calibration, alignment, Earth’s rotational motion, inertia forces, thermal stability, analogue-digital converters precision, all different types of corrections which have to be applied to keep the device precise over extended time, and many more. Simulating an INS platform is very similar - it is a complex undertaking.
At Heatblur, we decided to develop an entirely new mathematical model to simulate the AN/ASN-92 for our F-14. We included all the potential sources of errors contributing to the final precision of the device, and recreated the characteristic behavior of a gimballed INS platform. The result is a set of algorithms providing an authentic representation of the AN/ASN-92 in DCS, yet optimized to have almost no impact on CPU performance.
The main components of the INS are the inertial measurement unit (IMU), the power supply unit and pilot and RIO navigation controls and displays.
Although from the crew member’s point of view, the INS is used mostly for navigation, it is also essential for proper operations of other aircraft equipment. For example, the attitude is necessary for the radar. The attitude and the own position are required for some weapon delivery modes, particularly for long shots. Even more distressing to the crew, a complete failure of the INS renders the more advanced modes of weapons such as the AIM-7 and AIM-54 missiles inoperable.
The same information is used for data-link operations - when using erroneous INS data, own tracks and targets received from cooperating aircraft will not match and result in false contacts being displayed on the TID. These are only a few examples, and the INS data is used whenever aircraft position or attitude is required.
Thus the inertial navigation system (INS) integrates with the AWG-9 computer (WCS computer) and the CSDC, the computer signal data converter. Other related equipment includes the attitude and heading reference system, central air data computer, radar altimeter, instrument landing system, and TACAN.
Navigation System
WCS Computer
The WCS or weapon control system computer and CSDC use several alignment routines stored on a magnetic tape to perform the necessary computations to align the INS.
These stored alignment routines in the WCS computer are called SMAL single mode alignment program. When alignment is initiated, the routines are loaded in the computer’s destructive readout memory from magnetic tape.
This process is called "tape read-in" and is represented by an M on the TID. During the alignment of the IMU platform, the WCS communicates with the CSDC to address specific CSDC navigation routines.
IMU Platform Alignment
When alignment mode is selected, the IMU platform first erects to a coarse alignment with the help of accelerometer output and gives an aircraft heading that represents the angular displacement from true north. This displacement is referred to as wander angle. The CSDC sends inertial velocity data to the WCS during the alignment process.
The second stage – fine alignment – uses the precise measurement of gyroscope drift to calculate the aircraft’s true heading. This is possible because of the Earth’s rotation. At no point of alignment, is the magnetic heading used, and the whole process relies only on the sensing of the non-inertial movement of the platform within the 3d space.
The WCS calculates terms for platform alignment corrections and estimates the value of the wander angle, it then sends this data to the CSDC. The CSDC uses these correction terms in the CSDC inertial equations to generate pulses for the platform torquing that are then transmitted to the IMU. The CSDC in return receives velocity information from the IMU and sends this new inertial velocity data to the WCS alignment program, upon which the cycle repeats. The exchange of data continues until INS is entered.
The leveling process of the platform is achieved by the CSDC generating torquing pulses based on IMU accelerometer off-level indications being sent to the IMU by the CSDC. With each data exchange, the WCS calculates an error value (delta) between the values of the previous and current wander angle. This delta is largest at the beginning of the alignment and smallest at the end of alignment.
The alignment is finished when the delta is near zero and near zero velocity is sensed along the platform X and Y axes. Variable factors required to align the platform are continuously calculated, updated, and saved as calibration data. When the alignment is complete, the system is ready to enter INS. The last used calibration data and wander angle are stored in the CSDC upon entry into INS. When in INS, the WCS accepts the velocity and position data and the wander angle from the CSDC.
Navigation Modes
Three navigation data mode sources are used for general navigation:
-
INS - The primary navigation mode set by the RIO once IMU alignment is complete. The IMU is the primary sensor supplying velocity data that is used to compute all inertial outputs. The IMU is the source for roll and pitch data.
-
IMU/AM - A backup mode that can either be selected by the RIO or is automatically entered when the CSDC determines the IMU inertial velocity data is unreliable. In this mode, true airspeed from the CADC and stored or entered winds are combined to provide ground speed and true heading for general navigation. The IMU is the source for pitch and roll.
-
AHRS/AM - An even further degraded mode that can be either selected by the RIO or automatically entered when the CSDC detects a total INS failure. Heading in this mode is derived from magnetic heading plus entered or stored magnetic variation (MAG VAR). This heading, TAS from the CADC, and entered or stored wind are used for general navigation. The AHRS is the source of pitch and roll.
Navigation Computations
The CSDC and the WCS are aware of the selected navigation mode. The CSDC sends the WCS navigation data parameters (TAS from the CADC, latitude and longitude, inertial velocities, true heading, etc.) required to support general navigation calculations. The WCS uses stored and input navigation data (based on the current navigation mode) to perform the required navigational computations. The WCS also performs additional computations so that the crew is provided with:
- Current latitude and longitude
- Attitude
- Heading true and magnetic
- Own ground speed and ground track
- Ability to store and display three waypoints, a fixed point (FP), an initial point (IP), a surface target (ST), a home base (HB), a defended point, and a hostile area
- Range, bearing, command course, command heading, and time-to-go to a selected destination point
- Calculated wind speed and direction
- Calculated magnetic variation
- Continuous monitoring of the status of the unit, and in case of failure inform the crew with advisory lights and appropriate acronyms displayed on the TID
- Backup navigation modes in case of partial system failure
- Backup present position
Displays
Navigation information is displayed on the TID, HSD, multiple display indicator (MDI), HUD, and VDI, depending on the mode selected by the pilot and RIO. If an IMU or navigation computer failure occurs, two backup modes are available: IMU airmass (IMU/AM) or AHRS airmass (AHRS/AM).
Navigational Controls
To control the INS, use the navigation control and data readout panel and the computer address panel. See Tactical Information Display (TID) and Associated Controls and Associated Controls and Computer Address Panel (CAP) for a more detailed description.
The desired operation mode, alignment mode, and destination point can be selected at the navigation control and data readout panel. The CAP allows entering navigation data and the selected information to be displayed on the TID. The CATEGORY switch on the lower end of the panel determines the function of the MESSAGE button. The categories used for navigation are NAV and TAC DATA. The STBY and READY advisory lights on the navigation control and data readout panel indicate the status of the alignment program and navigation system.
Failure indicators for the main components of the navigation system are on the caution/advisory light panels in both cockpits, however, the NAV COMP and IMU indicators are only present on the RIO cockpit caution/advisory light panel.
The pilot displays (HUD, VDI, and HSD) and the RIO multiple display indicator are controlled with either the pilot display control panel or the multiple display indicator control panel.
💡 For detailed information on CAP operation, refer to Computer Address Panel (CAP).
Navigation Category
If the CATEGORY switch is in NAV, the following matrix appears in the MESSAGE windows:
| OWN A/C | TACAN FIX |
| STORED HDG ALIGN | RDR FIX |
| VIS FIX | |
| WIND SPD HDG | FIX ENABLE |
| MAG VAR (HDG) |
Each window has a designated button. Pressing this button tells the WCS computer which function of the matrix to use. If OWN AC, WIND, or MAG VAR is pressed, data can be entered and displayed for each.
Own-aircraft airspeed and magnetic heading are displayed on the TID. If own-aircraft data file is hooked using the TID cursor, heading will be magnetic. If OWN AC button was selected (hooked) via the CAP, own-aircraft true heading, speed (groundspeed), altitude, or course can be displayed on the TID by depressing the appropriate prefix button:
- LAT or LONG button will display own-aircraft latitude and longitude.
- SPD button displays ground speed and magnetic course.
- True airspeed and true heading are displayed when the HDG prefix button is depressed.
- Altitude is displayed on the left TID readout (right is blank) when the ALT button is used.
- When pressing the WIND button, the TID displays present wind speed (left readout) and magnetic direction (right readout).
- The MAG VAR button is used for displaying and entering magnetic variation (MAG VAR).
In order to change own-aircraft lat, long, true heading, or altitude, press the according prefix button followed by the desired quantity. During entry, the data is displayed on the upper middle readout on the TID. At the same time, existing data is being displayed on the two lower readouts. If new data is correct, the RIO can press the ENTER button and the new values will appear on the readout.
To change wind data entry, press the WIND button, then either the SPD or HDG prefix button and the appropriate numbers: knots (0 to 512) for speed or degrees (000 to 359) for magnetic direction. The multiple display indicator data readout of WIND direction is always displayed as true.
💡 In the INS mode, wind is calculated and updated continuously. The manual entry of wind is ignored by the wind calculations even though the system accepts the entry.
Depressing the MAG VAR button displays alternating values of computed MAG VAR (vC) and manual MAG VAR (vM) on the left readout and displays magnetic heading (MH) on the right readout. The two values alternate every 2 seconds. On the CAP sign/direction buttons, plus (+) corresponds to east variation and minus (-) to west variation.
For manual MAG VAR, press the MAG VAR button. Press HDG, E, or W, the angle in degrees and tenths, and ENTER. Tenths of a degree must be entered even if zero. The TID displays including the NAV GRID will shift appropriately. Computed MAG VAR is constantly calculated in the AWG-9 by comparing the IMU’s true heading with the magnetic heading from AHRS. This difference is saved as computed MAG VAR. The table below shows the MAG VAR source used by the computer for displays and CAP entries.
Computed MAG VAR and manual MAG VAR are compared by the AWG-9 computer. If they differ by a certain value, the acronym MV will alternate with the IN or IM navigation mode acronym on the TID and HSD. The acronym is cleared when the difference falls below 5°.
| Condition | MAG VAR source |
|---|---|
| COMP mode selected. | Manual MAG VAR (vM). |
| RIO updating manual MAG VAR after AHRS selection. | Manual MAG VAR (vM). |
| RIO updating manual MAG VAR after IMU or AHRS failure. | Manual MAG VAR (vM). |
| All other situations. | Current or last computed MAG VAR (vC). |
If the selection of AHRS/AM occurs and no update (or re-entering of the same value) occurs last vC will be used.
💡 When operating in SLAVED or COMP mode near a magnetic disturbance, such as aboard a carrier, the MV acronym should be expected to appear.
The table below shows error source analysis and response to the MV acronym appearing in flight.
| Step | Condition | Action | Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | MV alternates with selected nav mode on TID without a failure light present. | Re-enter new corrected MAG VAR. | MV acronym should disappear. |
| 2 | MV remains after step 1 action. | Compare heading on VDIG with standby compass while in INS, IMU/AM, or slaved compass mode and level un-accelerated flight. | If headings correlate, the problem is likely in the IMU. Continue with step 3. |
| 3 | Source of suspected vC error is the IMU. | Pilot switches to COMP mode on AHRS controller and again compares headings. | If the headings still correlate, the IMU heading is wrong. |
| 4 | IMU heading is wrong. | RIO selects AHRS/AM and enters correct MAG VAR. | MV acronym should disappear. |
| 5 | The VDIG does not agree with the standby compass in step 2. | Synchronize AHRS with depression of the HDG button. If not possible set AHRS to COMP mode. | If now in COMP mode all computer and displays will use IMU true heading with manual MAG VAR. The MV acronym might not disappear and the BDHI using the MAD might not be correct depending on the failure. |
Tactical Data Category
If the CATEGORY switch is in TAC DATA, the following matrix appears in the MESSAGE windows:
| WAY PT 1 | HOME BASE |
| WAY PT 2 | DEF PT |
| WAY PT 3 | HOST AREA |
| FIX PT | SURF TGT |
| IP | PT TO PT |
The functions in this category have a TID symbol each, except the PT to PT FUNCTION. When pressing any one of these MESSAGE buttons, the TID symbol brightens and the activated MESSAGE push button illuminates, indicating a successful hook. The RIO can then use the functions for which hooking was required. Data regarding the hooked point can be displayed on the TID by pressing the according prefix button. Additionally, the latitude, longitude, and altitude of the hooked point can be entered by pressing either the LAT, LONG, or ALT button followed by the desired numbers. Like before, existing data is being displayed on the two lower readouts. If the new data is correct, the RIO can press the ENTER button and the new values will appear on the readout.
Navigational Caution Lights
In addition to the NAV COMP, AHRS, and IMU lights mentioned above, the RIO caution/advisory panel contains two other advisory lights, C&D HOT and AWG-9 COND, that are indirectly related to navigation system operation. Illumination of either or both of these lights could mean degraded navigation operation and would require further investigation of the WCS.
Radar Altimeter System (AN/APN-194)
The radar altimeter is a low-altitude (0 to 5,000 feet), pulsed, range-tracking radar that measures the surface or terrain clearance below the aircraft. Altitude information is obtained by radiating a short-duration RF pulse from the transmit antenna to the Earth’s surface and measuring elapsed time until RF energy returns through the receiver antenna. The altitude is continuously presented to the pilot on an indicator dial in feet AGL. If either Landing or Take off mode is selected on the PDCP, radar altitude is displayed on the HUD from 0 to 1,400 feet.
The radar altimeter can operate in two modes. In the search mode, the system successively examines increments of range until the complete altitude range is searched for a return signal. When a return signal is detected, the system switches to the track mode and tracks the return signal to provide continuous altitude information.
If the radar altimeter drops out of the track mode, an OFF flag appears and the pointer is hidden by a mask. The altimeter will remain inoperative until a return signal is received, at which point the altimeter will display altitude above ground again. Reliable system operation in the altitude range of 0 to 5,000 feet permits close altitude control at minimum altitudes. The system will operate normally in bank angles up to 45° and in climbs or dives except when the reflected signal is too weak.
The system includes a height indicator (altimeter), a test light on the indicator, a low-altitude warning tone, a radar receiver-transmitter under the forward cockpit, and two antennas (transmit and receive), one on each side of the IR fairing, in the aircraft skin. During descent, the warning tone is heard momentarily when the aircraft passes through the altitude set on the limit index. When the aircraft is below this altitude, the red low-altitude warning light on the indicator will stay on.
💡 If radar altitude is unreliable, only the OFF flag is present.
The radar altimeter has a minimum warmup time of 3 minutes. During warmup, failure indications and erroneous readouts should be disregarded.
Radar Altimeter
The only controls for the system are on the Radar Altimeter on the pilot instrument panel. The indicator displays radar altitude above the Earth’s surface on a single-turn dial that is calibrated from 0 to 5,000 feet in decreasing scale to provide greater definition at lower altitudes. The control knob in the lower left corner of the indicator is a combination power switch, self-test switch, and positioning control for the low-altitude limit bug.
Altimeter BIT
To energize the self-test circuitry press and hold the control knob and the green test light will illuminate, the indicator will read 100 ±10 feet, and the HUD altitude scale should read approximately 100 feet. If the indicator passes below the altimeter limit bug setting, the aural and visual warnings are triggered. To resume normal operation simply release the control knob again.
Low-Altitude Audio Warning
A low-altitude 1,000-Hz tone provides an aural warning, modulated at two pulses per second, lasting for 3 seconds. The tone is played to both crew members when the aircraft descends below the altitude set on the low-altitude limit bug.
Navigation System Integration
Navigational Modes
Three navigational modes exist in the F-14:
-
Inertial Navigation Mode (INS)
- The primary navigation mode is inertial and is achieved by the INS, employing the IMU (and PSU) and the CSDC.
- Provides the flight crew with own-aircraft position, velocity, attitude, and heading information.
-
Inertial Measurement Unit/Airmass Mode (IMU/AM)
- Serves as a backup navigation mode.
- Entry into this mode permanently degrades INS platform heading alignment.
-
AHRS/Air Mass Mode (AHRS/AM)
- Utilizes the AHRS attitude and heading information in place of the IMU.
- Serves as an additional backup mode if both INS and IMU/AM modes fail.
Inertial Navigation Mode
INS mode should be entered following an alignment. The READY light illuminates in GND and CVA alignment positions and stays on after launch in CAT alignment, indicating completion of alignment. If the INS mode is selected, both the STBY and READY lights will go out. However, if the INS mode is selected before the caret turns into a diamond, both the STBY and READY lights will illuminate and the system will revert to the IMU/AM backup mode.
In the INS mode, IMU and CSDC provide the following outputs:
- Aircraft latitude and longitude
- Aircraft magnetic or true heading (depending on CAP prefix button selected)
- System altitude (barometric damped inertial altitude)
- Platform wander angle
- Velocity components (x, y, z)
- Vertical acceleration
Aircraft magnetic heading is derived from the AHRS. If the AHRS fails, magnetic heading is then derived by subtracting the MAG VAR from the true heading. The available readouts on the TID can display latitude, longitude, ground speed, ground track, true airspeed, wind (speed and direction), MAG VAR, altitude, and aircraft true or magnetic heading.
The WCS computer makes calculations in true north coordinates for steering and uses the magnetic heading input from the AHRS to update the value. Wind is computed from the difference between inertial velocities and air mass velocities. The WCS and CSDC also provide the steering and cueing functions required for display to the flight crew. The information can be displayed on the TID, HSD, multiple display indicator, HUD, and VDI, depending on the navigation and steering modes selected by the flight crew.
The available destination or navigation points are waypoints 1, 2, or 3, fixed point, home base, surface target, and initial point and may be designated by the DEST switch on the TID.
Additionally, navigational points (latitude and longitude) may also be inserted by the RIO using the CAP or by datalink message (when on the deck) using either cable or the RF link.
The course to set (heading to a selected navigational point), range, bearing, and time-to-go to a point are based on great circle calculations. The time-to-go assumes the aircraft is flown at its present groundspeed along the great circle heading to the selected point.
💡 If INS fails, the RIO should verify MAG VAR calculated and WIND data and update via manual entries as required.
IMU/AM Navigation Mode
If a failure of the navigation computer section of the CSDC or certain failures in the IMU are detected, the IMU/AM mode is entered automatically. The failures are indicated by the STBY and READY lights illuminating and the NAV COMP light illuminating on the RIO CAUTION/ ADVISORY panel.
The switch to IMU/AM is indicated by the IN acronym on the TID and HSD changing to IM. The RIO should select IMU/AM on the NAV MODE switch to extinguish the STBY and READY lights. The IMU/AM mode can be entered manually by selecting IMU/AM with the NAV MODE switch.
If the switch is turned off before selecting IMU/AM mode, the computer cannot enter the IMU/AM mode for approximately 3 to 5 minutes. This is necessary to allow the IMU to level itself after being turned off. During these 3 to 5 minutes, the aircraft must remain stationary on the ground or in level unaccelerated flight. Until the IMU is leveled, the computer will use the AHRS/ AM mode. If the IMU is level (i.e., alignment past coarse align completed), the entry into IMU/AM will occur immediately upon selection.
💡 If an alignment past coarse exists with no NAV COMP failure and the RIO switches to IMU/AM, the READY light will flash, indicating that if the switch is not returned to INS within 5 seconds the INS mode cannot be re-entered without completing a new alignment.
The WCS computer performs dead-reckoning navigation in the IMU/AM mode, using heading information from the IMU and true airspeed from the CADC. The same general navigation functions are performed in the backup mode as for the INS mode. The accuracy of the computer outputs degrades because of the inferior available speed and heading information.
Wind can be applied by either using the wind last computed in the INS mode or wind data manually entered through the CAP. The IMU heading is equally referenced to the last computed INS heading or to manual entry of true heading data via the CAP.
💡 After entering the IMU/AM mode, check wind and MAG VAR values. If MV is in error, enter own-aircraft true heading. If winds are in error, update.
IMU Reset Procedure
- NAV MODE switch - OFF, for a few seconds.
- NAV MODE switch - IMU.
- Fly straight and level for 5 minutes.
- Verify IM acronym.
AHRS/Air Mass Mode
The AHRS/AM mode is another backup mode for navigation. It uses the last known aircraft position, by either taking the last navigation computer value or by manual data entry from the RIO. It then extrapolates the present position of the aircraft.
AHRS/AM mode is automatically selected if the IMU fails or by switching to AHRS/AM on the NAV MODE switch. An IMU failure is indicated by the STBY and READY status lights and the IMU advisory light illuminating. Additionally, the attitude status readout on the TID changes to AH.
🟡 CAUTION: The navigation mode will not automatically switch to AHRS/AM upon an IMU failure when the navigation system is in IMU/AM mode with a failed IMU quantizer and NAV COMP advisory light illuminated. Because the VDIG/TID/DDD are displaying invalid IMU attitudes, the NAV MODE switch should be moved to AHRS/AM.
💡 Although the navigation mode automatically switches to AHRS when the IMU fails, the STBY and READY lights will remain on until the RIO selects AHRS/AM on the NAV MODE switch.
When AHRS/AM is selected on the NAV MODE switch, the AHRS provides heading information required for DR navigation in place of the IMU platform and the CSDC provides barometric altitude, altitude rate, and true airspeed as in the IMU/ AM mode. To update wind speed and direction and magnetic variation, use the CAP.
The AHRS can be operated in any of three subheading modes selected on the compass controller panel:
- SLAVED - Magnetic north referenced (flux value), directional gyro is slaved to flux value, used where reliable magnetic heading reference is available.
- DG - Free azimuth gyro, compensated for drift because of Earth’s (polar operations), used where magnetic reference is unreliable.
- COMP - Magnetic north reference direct (flux value), no gyro damping. The HUD, VDI, HSD, and multiple display indicator use manual magnetic variation (vM) automatically in this mode.
The RIO can switch from either INS mode to AHRS/AM mode or from IMU/AM mode to AHRS/AM mode for comparison, without fear of degradation, since the AHRS is a separate system. This cannot be done with the INS and IMU/AM modes since the IMU is used in both cases and it would result in permanent degradation to the IMU alignment. In the case of an IMU failure the nav system will automatically operate in the AHRS/AM mode with the navigation and data readout panel in INS, as long as the WCS computer receives heading from the AHRS and airspeed from the CADC.
💡 If takeoff is performed in the AHRS/AM mode, MAG VAR and WIND must be manually inserted via CAP for proper navigation computations.
When the platform is aligned and the AHRS/AM backup navigation mode is selected, the STBY light is off but the READY light is on, indicating that the inertial navigation mode can be selected if desired. The same functions and outputs for display are computed as in INS, however since different inputs are used for some calculations a degraded navigation performance is to be expected.
Steering
There are two basic types of steering: navigation and attack. Attack steering modes will be covered in the Weapons and Weapons Employment overview.
Navigation steering is computed on either a great circle course or rhumb line to a fixed point on the Earth’s surface or as a deviation from a selected course or heading. In general, great circle computations are used for long ranges and rhumb line for short distances (where it is close to great circle course).
The point used for steering can be the RIO’s selected destination (three waypoints, fixed point, identification point, surface target, or home base), a TACAN station, ADF information, ACLS information, or a data link waypoint.
Flight Modes and Steering Sub-Modes
The pilot can choose between five VDIG display formats (HUD modes) on the pilot display control panel. These five flight modes are arranged as five vertical, mutually exclusive buttons:
- Take Off (T.O.)
- Cruise (CRUISE)
- Air to Air (A/A)
- Air to Ground (A/G)
- Landing (LDG)
💡 ACM cover open selection overrides all modes, except the T.O. and LDG modes.
Apart from the VDIG displays, the flight mode selections also control AFCS, armament, and WCS logic. In addition to the essential data such as altitude, vertical speed indicator etc. the VDIG format also provides steering cues.
In each of the flight modes, the pilot can choose between the following five types of steering commands:
- TACAN (TACAN)
- Destination (DEST)
- AWL/PCD
- Vector (VEC)
- Manual (MAN)
The five selections are arranged horizontally along the bottom of the PDCP. These steering modes determine the display format on the pilot HSD and the RIO multiple display indicator. The HSD and multiple display indicator present, in a horizontal plane, steering to the selected point. The HSD follows the five submodes when the pilot places the HSD-MODE switch to NAV.
The RIO can do the same by setting the MODE switch on his multiple display indicator control panel to NAV. Also, when LDG is selected, the pilot has the option of displaying ICLS or ACL information via switches on the PDCP that can be used to individually and independently select the HUD and VDI for display. A typical choice would be to select ICLS (SPN-41 /ARA-63) for the HUD and for D/L the VDI.
A/A (air-to-air) and A/G (air-to-ground) modes are further explained in the Weapons and Weapons Employment overview.
💡 The STEERING indicator drum on the navigation control and data readout panel provides a readout for the RIO to inform him of what steering sub-mode the pilot bas chosen.
Takeoff Steering
To enter the takeoff steering mode, press the T.O. button on the display control panel. The VDIG will display a vertical speed indicator on the left side and an altitude scale on the right side in the HUD. Before takeoff, the pilot should check the magnetic heading on top of the HUD and VDI against a known reference (i.e. runway heading and most importantly BRC on the carrier, due to the large magnetic distortion on the ship). The vertical speed indicator should be used to verify a positive climb after takeoff.
After takeoff, the navigation system normally computes wind and magnetic variation, which are needed for steering. For backup modes, the WCS uses the last computed or RIO-entered wind speed, direction, and magnetic variation.
Take-Off-TACAN Steering
The TACAN steering submode works the same, whether used for takeoff, cruise, or landing, by providing the pilot with a TACAN deviation. The pilot can set the course or TACAN radial with the CRS control on the HSD. The TACAN displays are available on the HUD, VDI, HSD, and multiple display indicator. The HSD and the ECMD display TACAN range and the relative bearing to a selected TACAN station.
To enter the submode, press the TACAN button on the PDCP. After selection of TACAN course, the HUD and VDI display the TACAN deviation symbol and a TO and FROM symbology. This indicates whether the TACAN course is toward or away from the TACAN station. On the HSD and multiple display indicator, an arrow on the deviation bar pointing in the same direction as the TACAN course indicates a course toward the station, an arrow pointing in the opposite direction indicates a course away from the station. On the HUD, a dashed line indicates FROM, a solid line indicates TO. On the VDI, a dark bar indicates FROM, a bright bar indicates TO.
On the HUD, the deviation symbol moves 3° (linear) in the field of view for a 6° deviation from the selected TACAN radial. These limits prevent the symbol from leaving the field of view or interfering with the scales on the left and right side. On the VDI, the deviation symbol is scaled to move 1.5 inches (linear) for a 6° deviation.
Takeoff Manual Steering
The manual steering mode is similar to the basic takeoff mode. The mode is entered by pressing the MAN button and selecting a desired course with the CRS control on the HSD. The navigation system will then display a command heading on the VDI as a small diamond under the magnetic heading scale.
Cruise Steering
To enter the cruise flight mode. press the CRUISE button on the PDCP. There are four steering submodes available during cruise operations: TACAN, destination, manual and vector. While it is physically possible to press the AWL/PCD steering button on the display control panel, the action is without function in cruise mode.
💡 Should the AWL/PCD sub-mode be selected while in CRUISE, it will inhibit the display of other steering cues.
Cruise TACAN Steering
This submode works in the same way as take off TACAN steering and provides the same readouts and displays to the flight crew as described under take off TACAN steering.
Cruise Destination Steering
To enter the cruise destination steering mode, press the DEST button on the PDCP. This will provide steering as a command heading symbol on the VDI and HSD to a waypoint selected by the RIO on the navigation control and data readout panel. The RIO can change latitude/longitude of the destination by hooking the point on the TID and inserting new data.
💡 Destination steering to the defended point is provided by the RIO selecting MAN with the TID DEST switch. This option is not available in TARPS.
In the destination steering sub-mode, the destination selected by the RIO and the NAV MODE in use will be alternately displayed on the bottom center of the HSD.
ECMD showing the navigational display for Cruise with Manual steering selected.
VDI and HSD showing navigational displays for Cruise with TACAN steering selected.
HSD showing navigational display for Cruise with Waypoint 1 set as Destination.
Landing Steering Modes
To enter the landing steering mode, press the LDG button on the PDCP. Usually the LDG mode is engaged at any point from marshal point on. In the case of a go around, waveoff or bolter, the pilot can press the T.O. button on the PDCP to engage the take off steering mode.
The landing mode symbology is in general the same as the takeoff mode symbology. Exceptions are the addition of angle-of-attack error symbol on the HUD (the E-bracket, referenced towards the displayed aircraft wings and not the velocity vector) and the velocity vector symbol, as well as 5° pitch increments on the VDI.
💡 In all landing sub-modes, a VDIG breakaway symbol can be displayed upon receipt of a D/L waveoff message.
- There are three steering sub-modes available during landing: TACAN, VEC, and AWL/PCD.
- For the TACAN or VEC sub-modes of LDG, the HUD, VDI, and HSD displays are similar to the same sub-modes in CRUISE except that in LDG the HUD display includes the velocity vector symbol, the radar altitude symbol, and the vertical speed indicator symbol.
AWL Steering
If ICLS information from the ARA-63 is available at the marshalling area, the pilot can select the AWL/PCD sub mode. To observe glideslope displays, the HUD and VDI AWL switches on the pilot display and control panel should be placed in the ILS position.
The HUD and VDIG will then provide vertical and lateral precision course vector symbols, forming crossed pointers that are driven by the ICLS. On the HUD, full-scale vector deflection is limited to 2°. Full-scale vector deflection on the VDI is 1.5°. In the AWL/PCD sub-mode of LDG, the HSD will additionally display TACAN information if the HSD is set to NAV mode on the PDCP.
At the acquisition window, the pilot can either continue with the ILS display, or, if ACL information from the SPN-42 data link is available, he can select ACL of the AWL switches for either the VDI or HUD displays or both. The ACL display uses the same vertical and lateral precision course vector symbols as the ICLS, but these are now driven by the SPN-42 data link. A typical display combination during the final stages of landing is ILS on the HUD and ACL on the VDI. With valid ACL data available, the AFCS may be engaged by selecting ACL on the VEC/PCD, OFF, and ACL switch located on the AFCS control panel.
HUD showing Landing mode display with TACAN set as destination source.
HUD showing Landing mode with AWL/PCD set as Destination source, ACL set as source of glideslope and localizer.
VDI showing Landing mode with AWL/PCD set as Destination source, ILS (ICLS) set as source of glideslope and localizer.
Inertial Navigation System (INS)
An important feature of the INS is its fast alignment capability over a wide range of temperature. The INS is a dead-reckoning system that derives speed as a function of aircraft accelerations. Two accelerometers are used to measure acceleration in the horizontal plane. These outputs result in velocities along the X and Y axes after corrections for the Earth’s rotational velocity (coriolis acceleration) and integration inputs. These X and Y velocities can be resolved in the IMU platform coordinate system through wander angle and put in the Earth referenced north/east/down system. Integration about the north and east axes also provides increments of latitude and longitude. Navigation in such manner gives the flight crew detailed and precise knowledge of the position, direction and velocity of their aircraft at any time.
An INS device like the AN/ASN-92 requires a high precision of measurements of the acceleration and the attitude, because even the smallest inaccuracy can result in a significant error when accumulated over extended time.
Consider an example: the inertial platform is slightly tilted from the nominal position, let’s say by 0.002°. Then, the horizontal accelerometers are no longer parallel to the ground, and this means that they start to be sensitive to gravity. If not corrected, this gravitational component is interpreted by the navigation computer as a horizontal acceleration. If the wrong attitude is kept constant for one hour, it will result in an error of the measured position of over one nautical mile. It is a significant inaccuracy, and it comes as a result of such a minimal alignment error.
The accuracy of the INS degrades with time – usually the longer they operate in the navigation mode, the higher the error they accumulate.
Inertial Measurement Unit
The IMU is a three-axis, four-gimbal, all-attitude unit containing two gyros and three accelerometers. The gyros and the accelerometers are mounted to a platform that is free to rotate with respect to the base (aircraft). The four-gimbal system provides gimbal-lock free rotation and uses torquer motors to correct platform attitude errors. The gyros sense angular rotation about their sensitive axes and are the source of information about the aircraft attitude. They also stabilize the whole platform and keep the constant orientation of the accelerometers with respect to the ground (gravity). Two accelerometers are used to measure acceleration in the horizontal plane; the third accelerometer measures vertical acceleration. The sensitive axes of the accelerometers are orthogonal. Their displacement is sensed by pick-off coils that develop a signal that is amplified, then applied to a torquer that restores the mass to its null position. The magnitude of torquing current required is proportional to the acceleration. The sensed acceleration signal is integrated in the computer and used to calculate aircraft velocity and displacement from the initial position. The attitude of the platform is also corrected continuously to account for the effects associated with the Earth’s rotation and device inaccuracies.
This design is widespread for gimballed inertial navigation systems. It was used for the F-14, but also for the Space Shuttle and many other aircraft of the era.
IMU BIT
In case of IMU failure, the CSDC automatically switches to a backup navigation mode. The IMU BIT monitors the temperature, internal error signals, and electrical characteristics of the IMU.
If the CSDC detects a failure in the IMU, it informs the WCS computer and the IMU acronym indicating the component of the INS that failed is displayed on the TID. The IMU advisory light illuminates on the RIO caution/advisory panel.
NAV COMP Light
If the NAV MODE switch is in INS, and the NAV COMP light illuminates, there is a failure in the INS or CSDC; the navigation system will automatically switch to a backup mode. The NAV COMP light remains illuminated and the RIO should set the NAV MODE switch to IMU/AM position. The NAV COMP advisory light indicates that the INS is operating in a degraded mode as a result of manual selection by the RIO using the NAV MODE switch or automatic selection because of a failure of the CSDC or the IMU.
💡 When an IMU quantizer failure occurs in the INS mode, the system will automatically select the IMU/AM mode and the STBY/READY and NAV COMP lights will illuminate. The RIO should move the NAV MODE switch from the INS to IMU/AM. The STBY/READY lights go out - but the NAV COMP light will remain illuminated.
With a NAV COMP light and a CSI ACRO displayed on the TID, there is no auto-switch to a backup attitude source for the HUD or the VDI nor is the RIO able to manually switch to any backup mode.
IMU Light
If there is a failure in the IMU, the IMU advisory light will illuminate; the navigation system switches to the AHRS/AM mode and accuracy may become degraded Attitude information for the VDIG and missile control system are now provided by the AHRS. The IMU light remains illuminated until the RIO selects AHRS/AM. With an AHRS light computed magnetic variation (vC) should be verified and updated if necessary.
| Standby light | Ready light | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ON | ON | Selected navigational mode not functioning correctly due to failure. Normal during first 45 seconds of alignment initialization. |
| ON | OFF | Alignment underway (after first 45 seconds) or IMU/AM selected prior to coarse align. Leave switch in selected mode to complete alignment or to wait for IMU erection. |
| Flashing | Flashing | Alignment not initialized due to parking brake not being set. |
| Flashing | OFF | Alignment suspended (paused) due to parking brake not being set. |
| OFF | Flashing | Alignment suspended due to parking brake not being set after the second marker. |
| OFF | ON | Alignment good enough for weapons employment (second marker on screen), or INS or IMU/AM available when in AHRS/AM. Wait for complete alignment or select mode as desired. |
| OFF | OFF | System functioning correctly in set mode or system off. |
| OFF | Flashing | If selection of IMU/AM occurs with system aligned the ready light will flash for 5 seconds indicating that INS should be reselected. After this timeframe, the alignment is lost. |
🟡 CAUTION: After RIO selection IMU/AM because of a failure, and a complete IMU failure occurs afterwards, the system will display erroneous attitude information to the pilot. The CSDC will neither automatically exit IMU/AM to the AHRS/AM mode (if a valid AHRS exists) nor remove VDIG/TID/DDD attitude displays. The RIO should manually switch to the AHRS/AM mode.
Whenever the NAV COMP light illuminates the flight crew should be cautious of attitude displays and frequently cross-reference the VDIG/TID/DDD and standby attitude indicator, particularly during non-VFR conditions and be alert for an IMU failure. If an IMU failure is indicated by the IMU light, display of IMU acronym in OBC continuous monitor, removal of the IM acronym in the TID attitude reference source buffer, and the NAV COMP light goes out, the RIO should move the NAV MODE switch from the IMU/AM to the AHRS/AM and disregard the READY light. If a valid AHRS exists, its attitude information will be displayed, otherwise the VDIG/TID/DDD attitude displays will be removed.
AHRS Light
If the AHRS self-test has detected a failure the AHRS Light will illuminate. The magnetic heading on the HUD and VDI is now controlled by the WCS computer. Because it uses the last known value for magnetic variation, the heading will degrade over long distances and time unless new values of magnetic variation are entered by the RIO via the CAP. IFR flight should be avoided completely.
Navigation Power Supply
The NPS provides electrical power for the IMU and CSDC. A nickel-cadmium battery provides power to the IMU and CSDC for up to 10 seconds if there is a power interruption or transient.
INS Alignment Modes
Before INS can be used for navigation, the inertial platform must be aligned so that it is level relative to local vertical and its orientation relative to true north. This is done automatically in two phases: coarse alignment and fine alignment.
The coarse phase begins when the initialization sequence is complete and performs initial coarse estimates of the IMU platform wander angle. The successful completion of this phase requires a minimum local level error in the IMU platform to proceed to the fine alignment phase.
IMU elements that require warmup are being heated by the IMU heaters. In addition, the IMU gimbals (roll, pitch, azimuth) are caged through their respective synchros to the IMU case (airframe reference). The IMU gyros are brought up to running speed, and coarse leveling is performed using the accelerometer outputs.
When power is applied to the NPS and IMU, the SMAL program from the bulk storage tape is read into the WCS computer non-write-protected memory. The alignment program estimates a wander angle, velocity errors, and gyro-torquing correction signals.
These values are sent to the CSDC to align the IMU and to initialize the CSDC NAV program. The following assemblies are used during alignment: IMU, NPS, CSDC, WCS computer, CAP (computer address panel), navigation control and data readout panel. For carrier alignment also the data link receiver-processor is used.
There are four primary alignment modes: SAT ground and carrier alignment, and NON SAT ground and carrier alignment. SAT operation allows OBC testing during the alignment. Either alignment mode can be used in SAT or NON SAT. (SAT modes are not yet implemented in DCS)
The basic TID display formats are represented in the image below. The automatic sequence is the same for all modes, except for CVA ALIGN, where the ship’s motion is inserted by the data link.
The CAT ALIGN overrides the requirement for the parking brake to be on (suspend align). There are two more alignment sub-modes: stored heading and handset. The handset mode is used for CVA ALIGN when SINS data is not available. The stored heading mode is used for rapid alignment, by using a previous alignment (reference alignment) to align the system quickly.
Initialization of any alignment mode requires entry of the following values in either own aircraft or HB (homebase) for the following:
- Latitude
- Longitude
- Corrected pressure altitude.
In addition, if handset alignment is used on the carrier, the following values must also be entered:
- Speed
- Ship’s true heading.
💡 The parking brake must be on during initialization of any alignment. When the parking brake is released during coarse alignment, the STBY and READY lights flash and the align program will reinitialize. If the parking brake is released during fine alignment, a suspend align discrete is sent to the CSDC, the STBY or READY light blinks, and the time into alignment clock on the TID stops.
Non-SAT Alignments
Ground Alignment
For land-based operations, the ground alignment procedure is used to align the IMU. Aircraft or homebase latitude, longitude, and altitude are entered into the WCS computer via the CAP. This may be accomplished before or after selecting GND align. Selecting GND ALIGN on the NAV MODE switch initiates the align operation. However note that whatever has been hooked when switching to ALIGN, is injected as your own coordinates. You can use homebase or preset own aircraft coordinates for example, but if you didn’t, you will have between 90 to 120 seconds to enter your own coordinates and you cannot wait for the alignment to finish, or it will trigger the observable error (O) and alignment will have to be reinitialized.
💡 If fine align has not been achieved, entry of the own aircraft’s latitude will restart the alignment. On completion of the alignment program read-in, the alignment display appears on the TID.
During the initialization, the TID will display an alignment time of 0.7. After 42 to 45 seconds, the NAV COMP light on the caution/advisory panel goes out, indicating that the IMU has entered the ready state; the READY light also goes out. The alignment program will begin with the computation of the alignment parameters.
At this time an alignment status indicator, called a caret (v), will start to move from left to right. The status of the alignment is indicated by where the caret appears in relationship to three alignment-tick indicators. The first tick indicator is called the coarse-align complete marker, the second is the alert launch criteria marker, and the third indicator is the fine-align complete marker. An elapsed time indicator provides alignment time in minutes and tenths.
The clock indicator will begin with 0.7 displayed and continue after a 42-second delay. After 9.9 minutes, the clock display will pass through zero and begin again. If the alignment is suspended (parking brake), the clock will stop counting until alignment is resumed.
Between the first and second ticks are the telltale status indicators that indicate a failure of one of four systems: C = calibration data fail, T = temperature (cold IMU), S = SINS data invalid, and 0 = observable (alignment data bad, i.e., LAT, LONG, SPEED, etc.). The letter that appears indicates which system has a failure.
A C indicates a failure in the transfer of calibration data between the IMU and the CSDC, and the alignment will not progress.
The T appears normally at the start of alignment and disappears when the IMU has reached operating temperature. If the T does not disappear, there is a failure in the system and a non-stored heading alignment will not progress.
The S can appear at the start of any CV alignment and will disappear shortly after. If the S does not disappear, there is a failure and the result will be a bad alignment. The S also appears if incoming SINS data is not valid, in which case the alignment should not be trusted.
💡 The CSDC and IMU outputs as well as data inputs are constantly monitored and if either an excessive value in the X or Y acceleration is sensed, or a bad value from wrong lat or long data input, a 0 (bad observable) is posted on the TID and the alignment stalls (ceases to continue).
The IMU may be preheated by selecting IMU/AM on the TID NAV MODE switch when operating on ground or aircraft power. This energizes the IMU and navigation power supply, which turns on the IMU heater prior to start of a ground or carrier alignment. The IMU should not be preheated for longer than 5 minutes.
During coarse alignment, the alignment caret moves based on the wander angle error. If the parking brake is released during this phase, the alignment will reset.
The V will reach the first tick when coarse alignment is complete. When the program switches to fine alignment, the caret changes into a diamond, which indicates to the pilot that he may release the parking brake (suspend alignment) and taxi, if OBC is complete. After the parking brake is reset, alignment will continue and the diamond will move right as alignment improves.
At the second tick, which indicates that alignment meets the minimum criteria to launch weapons, the STBY light will go off and the READY light will illuminate. The INS mode may be entered at this point. If INS is not selected, the diamond continues to move to the right. When it reaches the third tick, it indicates that fine alignment is completed and a dot will appear in the diamond (<>).
You can leave the system in alignment mode even after fine align is complete, which will provide a progressively more accurate alignment. How much more accuracy is gained depends on the quality of alignment when fine align was completed. This can be rather minimal in some cases, but, when it is further left in alignment for long enough, it will always provide a certain amount of improvement.
💡 If alignment is suspended and the aircraft is taxied over a distance greater than 4000 feet, the quality of the alignment becomes unknown to a point where it might be unreliable. Alignment reinitialization is advised.
If the caret (v) or diamond stop moving, the program has stopped aligning. If they stop between the first and third ticks (coarse and fine), it means that alignment has been suspended. The clock will stop counting if that is the case. If alignment continues, the clock resumes counting until switched out of alignment by NAV MODE switch or if the parking brake is released again.
💡 The alignment display will not go past the coarse align tick until the IMU temperature has reached 165°. When this temperature is reached, the T symbol will disappear. The temperature interlock is bypassed when performing a stored heading alignment. The IMU should be preheated for a stored heading alignment, as it usually completes in under 2 minutes, which could result in a bad alignment.
Selecting INS will turn off the READY light, terminate alignment and the tactical display will appear, and the normal navigation display will become available.
💡 When the NAV MODE switch is set to INS, the CSDC is in navigation mode and the READY light goes out.
After selecting the INS navigation mode, the AWG-9 align program continues for approximately three align data cycles (18 seconds) before entering INS. This also applies if the aircraft takes off before INS is selected.
The RIO and pilot can then observe an IN acronym on the attitude status readout on the TID or TID repeat.
If you want to reinitialize an alignment when observing an acronym during fine alignment or if noting a stalled alignment, the following methods can be used:
- Select both INS mode switch and WCS PWR switch to off. Allow TID displays to collapse. Proceed with normal start sequence.
- INS mode switch to desired align mode.
- INS mode switch to INS. Verify system in INS (IN acronym on TID), cycle mode switch to off and back to desired alignment mode.
Failing to follow above procedures when reinitializing a fine alignment will result in severely degraded alignment quality. To reinitialize the program during coarse align, the RIO has to unselect GND ALIGN, re-enter LAT and LONG and reselect GND ALIGN.
Carrier Alignment
When aligning on a carrier with a changing latitude, longitude, and heading, the carrier alignment procedure is used. INS can be aligned in three different ways on a carrier: with RF data link alignment and manual (handset) alignment - deck-edge cable alignment is not implemented in DCS. TID displays the same information as during a GND ALIGN procedure.
Note that you will get erroneous heading readings on a carrier, even if fine align is complete. The heading can deviate up to 20 or 30 degrees, depending on the parking position on the carrier and the carrier’s heading, due to the carrier’s own magnetic field and induced magnetic field. It is important that the flight crew know the carrier’s BRC. The magnetic variation caused by the carrier’s magnetic distortion will go away shortly after take off. This magnetic distortion does not impact the alignment quality.
Carrier Data Link Alignment
The primary carrier alignment mode is the RF data link alignment (CAINS). This mode uses the ship’s INS (SINS) to align the IMU. Inertial inputs including the ship’s longitude, latitude, north and east velocity as well as roll, pitch, heading, and heading rate are transmitted to the WCS computer via the RF data link.
The data is transmitted by the ship’s data link equipment. To align the INS by the CVA alignment method, follow these steps:
- Turn on the power to the data link system
- Turn the WCS power to STBY
- Set the D/L mode on the DATA LINK control panel to CAINS/WAYPT
- Select CVA ALIGN on the NAV MODE switch.
The received data is processed by the data link equipment in the aircraft and transmitted to the WCS computer. The WCS computer compares the IMU data with the ship’s INS data and sends correction signals to the CSDC to fine align the IMU.
💡 If CVA or CAT ALIGN is selected prior to selecting OBC BIT, data link OBC testing is inhibited. (Not implemented yet)
The fine alignment complete tick mark indicates completion of fine align and whether alignment data is SINS or handset. When good SINS data is not received during a filter cycle, the fine alignment complete tick mark jumps to the left approximately 0.75 inches. The jump indicates the SINS data is intermittent, and handset alignment data is required.
CVA ALIGN is much similar to GND ALIGN, and alignment is suspended, stalled, and reinitialized in the same manner as during GND ALIGN, depending on whether it has been induced during the coarse or fine alignment phase.
💡 If SINS data link is lost during taxi, a flashing HS will appear on the TID. This will disappear when data link is reacquired; however, because of align timing requirements, it may remain flashing up to 8 seconds after data link is reacquired. If the HS flashing does not stop 8 seconds after resetting the parking brake, SINS data is lost but the alignment can continue by entering carrier speed and true heading into the own aircraft file and completing the align in handset mode. If datalink is reacquired during this period, the HS will disappear from the TID and a normal datalink CVA align will continue.
To complete the alignment, set the NAV MODE switch to INS. A successfully aligned INS is indicated by both the STBY and READY lights off and the IN acronym in the status readout on the TID.
💡 Do not switch to INS while the ship is in a turn, even if fine align has been completed. This will degrade the alignment quality significantly. If you wait until the ship’s turn is complete, alignment quality will not be affected. Handset alignment is not affected.
If during a CVA alignment the CAINS/WAYPT-TAC switch is unlatched to TAC by power transient, or data link signal is lost, the INS will revert to a handset alignment (HS).
Carrier Cable Alignment
The deck-edge cable alignment (SINS) is an alternative to the RF data link alignment, where inputs are sent over a secure cable to the data link from the deck-edge outlet box of the carrier. Switching from RF data link to cable inputs is done automatically when the cable is connected. To initiate a CVA align with SINS via cable, use the same steps as for the RF data link alignment. As cable and RF data link alignment are virtually the same, it has not been implemented in DCS.
💡 The SINS-cable is currently not implemented in DCS.
Handset Alignment
The HS alignment mode is a manual alignment option available for carrier alignment, should SINS data from RF data link or cable not be available, inaccurate, or interrupted (indicated by the TILT light on the DDI and/or the fine alignment complete tick mark jumping to the left about 0.75 inches). The HS is also very similar to the GND ALIGN mode, but the RIO has to input more data and the computer takes longer to process because of the ship movement.
IF CVA ALIGN is selected with the NAV MODE switch and no SINS data is available, a flashing HS acronym will appear on the TID. Whenever HS flashes on the TID before alignment starts and the RIO chooses to align the system with handset align, he must enter the according ship’s data in the following order:
- Speed
- Ship’s true heading
- Latitude
- Longitude
- Corrected pressure altitude.
If during coarse align data link is lost (RF or cable) or during any portion of a stored heading alignment, the alignment will reinitialize and the HS acronym will be flashing. The alignment can then be continued with the handset mode as described above.
If the reinitialization occurs during the fine align phase of a stored heading alignment, the CSDC alignment routine must be reset first by turning the AWG-9 OFF for 6 seconds.
If data link is lost during a normal fine align phase, HS will be entered automatically, but the acronym will not flash and the alignment will continue. If data link is regained, the HS acronym will disappear and normal CVA align via RF or cable data link will continue. When data link is regained, the acronym can remain for up to 8 seconds.
💡 If HS is not flashing, valid SINS data has already been entered. If it is flashing, SINS data has to be entered manually.
On the CAP NAV DATA matrix use OWN AC, and the LAT and LONG prefix push buttons; to enter the ships’ heading and speed use own-aircraft HDG and SPD buttons. Once this data has been entered HS will stop flashing and the alignment will progress like a normal GND ALIGN, but can take up to 3 times as long.
💡 The carrier needs to maintain a constant speed and heading during alignment for this method to be successful. Remember that handset alignment quality will always be inferior to a normal CVA ALIGN fine alignment quality.
Reinitialization
To reinitialize an alignment during the fine align phase, if an observable acronym (O) or a stalled alignment has been noticed, the RIO can use any of the following methods:
- Set NAV MODE switch and WCS switch to OFF. Allow TID displays to collapse. Proceed with normal start sequence.
- Set NAV MODE switch to OFF. Set NAV MODE switch to desired align mode.
- Set NAV MODE switch to INS. Verify system in INS (IN acronym on TID). Cycle NAV MODE switch to OFF and back to desired alignment mode.
Failing to follow above procedures when reinitializing a fine alignment will result in severely degraded alignment quality. To reinitialize the program during coarse align, the RIO has to unselect GND ALIGN, re-enter LAT and LONG and reselect GND ALIGN.
Stored Heading Alignment
A feature of the INS that allows for quick-reaction response is the stored-heading alignment. The aircraft has to be parked and tied down in the alert position (wheel-chocks in DCS) for this procedure to be successful. Additionally, the aircraft heading has to be stored with a reference alignment before the aircraft is being powered down (and back up again).
When the aircraft is powered back up, the system takes less than 2 minutes to align the INS from the stored heading, while providing almost the same accuracy like a full, fine ground or carrier alignment. When align is selected and a reference alignment is available, an ASH acronym for automatic stored heading will be displayed on the TID and STORED HDG ALIGN will illuminate on the CAP. The ASH acronym tells the RIO that a stored heading has been entered automatically.
No further action from the RIO is needed, ASH align will continue and ASH will remain on the TID as an advisory. Pressing once on the STORED HDG ALIGN on the CAP will end the ASH align and initiate normal alignment. The ASH acronym will disappear. Pressing the STORED HDG ALIGN a second time will reinitialize the stored heading alignment, however ASH won’t be displayed on the TID anymore.
💡 STBY/READY lights should be monitored for simultaneous illumination. If simultaneous illumination appears after 42 to 45 seconds, a failure has caused the alignment to re-initiate and may result in an erroneous alignment. The RIO must turn NAV MODE switch to OFF for 1 second, then restart the alignment following normal ground or carrier alignment procedures.
The reference alignment can be done with either internal or external power. To do a reference alignment, enter the latitude and longitude via the CAP into the own-aircraft file. This can be achieved by an automatic transfer from homebase entry into own-aircraft before selecting GND ALIGN, or entry into own-aircraft file after GND ALIGN has been selected.
The aircraft’s latitude and longitude can be entered into homebase and transferred into own-aircraft file through the following steps:
- Set the NAV MODE switch to GND ALIGN.
- Select CAP category TAC DATA.
- Depress HOME BASE and enter aircraft longitude and latitude via the CAP data entry buttons.
Aircraft latitude and longitude can be entered directly through the following steps:
- Set the NAV MODE switch to either OFF or GND ALIGN.
- Select CAP category NAV.
- Depress OWN A/C and enter aircraft longitude and latitude via the CAP data entry buttons.
💡 Depressing OWN A/C hooks own aircraft. If longitude and latitude is entered with the NAV MODE switch set to OFF, own aircraft must be hooked when the NAV MODE switch is set from OFF to GND ALIGN again. Be aware that whatever has been hooked (OWN AC or HB) will provide the data that is entered when NAV MODE is set from OFF to GND ALIGN.
For a reference alignment, alignment has to reach fine align complete. Both CVA ALIGN and GND ALIGN can be used to establish a reference alignment. The reference alignment is complete when a dot appears in the diamond.
To establish a reference alignment follow these steps:
- WCS switch - STBY.
- NAV MODE - CVA or GND.
- DATA LINK - ON (CV ops only).
- D/L MODE - CAINS/WAYPT (CV ops only).
- Reference alignment continues to fine align complete.
- NAV MODE switch to INS.
- WCS - OFF.
- NAV MODE - OFF.
💡 Unstable current or temporary loss of power will cause the CAINS to be deselected and will be indicated by a flashing HS acronym. A reference alignment cannot be done through a handset alignment, even if continued to fine align complete. For a successful reference alignment the aircraft must not move and the parking brake must not be cycled after the reference heading has been stored. For a valid reference alignment, it isn’t necessary to switch NAV MODE to INS, instead it can be switched directly to OFF from either CVA or GND ALIGN.
Catapult Alignment
The CAT ALIGN mode is used to prevent suspend align when positioned on the catapult and the parking brake has been released. The purpose of the catapult align mode is to provide normal CVA ALIGN as long as possible. When CAT ALIGN is selected, large roll, pitch, speed, and heading changes of the ship can cause the program to automatically switch to INS.
Navigation Fix Update
An error of latitude or longitude in the computer position of the aircraft can be corrected by a navigation fix update. Updating is especially important in the backup modes (AHRS AM and IMU/ AM) because of the estimated winds and magnetic variation changes. A nav fix is done via a ground-reference-point (latitude and longitude) position. The range and bearing of this position to the present aircraft position is used to update or correct existing values. The nav system may be updated by either a radar fix, a TACAN fix, or a visual fix.
Before performing a nav fix, the latitude and longitude of the desired update point (radar, TACAN, or visual) must be stored in one of eight navigation point locations (three WPs, FIX PT, HOME BASE, HOST AREA, DEF PT, and IP). This data can be stored prior to flight by data link or by manual insertion. Then follow these steps:
- Hook the Waypoint you choose to select for the nav fix.
- Check the stored latitude and longitude on the TID.
- Rotate the CATEGORY switch to NAV and select the desired type of update.
Note that updating the position while in INS, and to a lesser degree while in IMU, can introduce a greater navigational position error than already present, in particular if a radar fix is used to update the nav system. Updates with a visual or TACAN fix provide reasonable accuracy (assuming a good MAG VAR during TACAN updates). Updating your nav system via a nav fix should be primarily used in the AHRS mode.
Radar Update
A RDR FIX may be selected before or after positioning the DDD cursors. If the RDR FIX button is depressed, the computer computes the present position of the aircraft by measuring the range and bearing from the selected point. The delta between the computer position and the position determined by the INS is then displayed on the TID. If entry of this delta into the navigation computations is desired, press the FIX ENABLE button. If the delta does not appear to be correct, the computer and the readout can be cleared by pressing the RDR FIX button. The fix may then be attempted again. The RIO should also perform periodic checks of own aircraft system altitude and update the altitude if necessary.
Radar updating is performed as follows:
- TID CURSOR/CAP - Hook Desired Navigation Point for Update.
- PULSE SRCH button - Depress.
- On sensor control panel: STAB switch - IN. EL BARS switch - 1. AZ SCAN switch - As Desired.
- RDR FIX button - Depress.
- DDD CURSOR button - Depress.
- Action switch - Half Action (first detent).
- Cursor is displayed on DDD.
- Manipulate hand control DDD cursor over desired ground map point.
- Action switch - Full Action and Release. (This will cause the DDD cursor to remain at the selected position.)
- Observe the delta for LAT and LONG on TID.
- If readouts are unsatisfactory, deselect RDR FIX and repeat steps 4 through 12.
- FIX ENABLE button - Depress.
💡 To clear the previous hooked DDD cursor position, go to half action and then release prior to initiating full action for the new position hook.
TACAN Update
To perform a nav fix by TACAN, it requires that a pre-stored waypoint shares identical LAT and LONG values with the TACAN station that will be used for the fix. Select the TACAN channel for the desired station and verify by listening to the coded identifier tone in the headset.
Press the TACAN FIX button to update the aircraft position from a TACAN station. The WCS computer then calculates the own aircraft position error based on the range and bearing from the TACAN station. The delta is then entered in the same manner as with a radar fix.
Perform a TACAN fix following these steps:
- Select a TACAN channel whose latitude and longitude correspond to an update point.
- Hook the desired update point (WAYPT 1, FIX PT, HOME BASE, etc.).
- CATEGORY switch - NAV.
- TACAN FIX button - Depress.
- Observe the present position delta readout.
- If delta is unsatisfactory, deselect TACAN FIX and repeat steps 2 through 7.
- FIX ENABLE button - Depress.
💡 During a TACAN FIX, the MAG VAR must be the same as the TACAN station magnetic variation, or the update will be in error. Given a TACAN station with a range of 100 NM from ownship, a 1°MAG VAR error introduces a 1.74nm error into the ownship’s TACAN update.
Visual Update
To perform a visual fix, fly over a pre-stored waypoint and press the VIS FIX button. Estimate your timing, because the aircraft nose and fuselage can obscure the fix point during overflight. It is also difficult to estimate when directly overhead a waypoint if the aircraft altitude is greater than 10,000 feet. The delta for the visual fix is displayed on the TID. Enter the delta by pressing FIX ENABLE.
To perform a visual fix use the following steps:
- Hook the desired update point (WAY PT, HB, IP, etc.).
- Select NAV category on CAP.
- Overfly the selected pre-stored point and when over the point, depress the VIS FIX button on the cap.
- If the delta is not satisfactory, press VIS FIX again to clear the delta and repeat from step 1.
- If a satisfactory delta is displayed, depress the FIX ENABLE button; this causes the delta correction of own-aircraft position to be inserted into the computer.
Data Link Update
To perform a data link update of the aircraft INS to the TDS frame of reference, the aircraft and TDS must share a pre-briefed waypoint, identical in latitude and longitude. Enter this LAT/LONG data into the HOST AREA pseudo target file. The TDS will uplink the common reference point as a data link waypoint. When the aircraft and TDS INS systems agree, the data link waypoint and host area symbols will be superimposed on the TID. If they drift apart, the two pseudo targets on the TID will drift as well.
To perform an update via data link, use the following steps:
- Hook the data link waypoint corresponding pre-briefed reference point.
- Select the NAV category on CAP.
- Overfly the hooked data link waypoint. When immediately over the point, press VIS FIX button on CAP.
- Observe delta LAT and LONG on TID.
- If deltas are satisfactory and update is desired, depress FIX ENABLE.
After a data link update, HOST AREA and data link waypoint should be superimposed on the TID again.
Fighter-to-Fighter Navigation Update
Net aircraft that use fighter-to-fighter data link can update their navigation system in the FF/DL mode. To update LAT/LONG hook the net aircraft symbol of an aircraft that is in close proximity and select F/F NAV UPDATE on the CAP. This will enter the hooked aircraft’s coordinates into the INS as own-aircraft coordinates. To update the nav system on an aircraft that is not close, first obtain a radar STT on that aircraft, hook the STT-ed aircraft on the TID and then press F/F NAV UPDATE on the CAP.
💡 By updating to the selected aircraft’s INS, its calibration/drift can potentially introduce a larger error into your own INS. Both aircraft will share the same error though.
Position Marking
To mark the position of a pulse radar target, a visual target, or a TACAN station to be displayed on the TID, use the SURF TGT position in the TAC DATA category. Once displayed on the TID, latitude, longitude, range, bearing, and steering data are available, using the CAP or the navigation destination control or both.
💡 Do not use the position SURF TGT to update the navigation computer. The surface target position symbol is repositioned with respect to own aircraft instead of own aircraft being updated in reference to the surface target.
To mark a pulse radar target on the TID, follow these steps:
- Select the SURF TGT button.
- Establish the location via a radar fix.
- Select the DDD CURSOR and use the pulse system for radar mapping.
- Designate the point of interest by placing the cursor over that point.
- Selecting full action.
- Select RDR FIX.
This will display a delta from the hooked point to the surface target. Ignore the delta and select FIX ENABLE to position the surface target over the previously identified radar position. A very accurate readout of latitude, longitude, and steering information will become available for the Surface Target Waypoint.
The method for visual targets is the same, but a visual fix is required. You can also mark a TACAN station by using the same method and following the TACAN fix procedures. After completing any of the above procedures, the SURF TGT symbol will be displayed on the TID at the computed latitude and longitude coordinates.
The surface target symbol can also be used as a destination point. If its position has been previously entered, the symbol will appear on the TID. One method for special position marking is to hook any point on the TID and select SURF TGT. The surface target symbol now appears over the hooked point and its new position will be stored in the WCS computer.
Attitude and Heading Reference Set (AHRS)
The AHRS provides backup pitch and roll information to the CSDC and WCS computer, if attitude data from the INS is not available. At any time, the AHRS provides prime magnetic heading to the BDHI for direct analog display and to the CSDC where it is converted to digital information for the VDIG, MDIG, and the WCS. Additionally, the autopilot gets its heading reference from the AHRS.
💡 The only analog cockpit display for magnetic heading is the BDHI. The HUD, VDI, TID, HSD, and multiple display indicator are digital and receive their inputs from the AHRS through the CSDC. Thus. in case of a CSDC failure, the only magnetic heading is displayed on the BDHI.
The main assemblies of the AHRS are a two-gyro platform (vertical and directional displacement gyros), an electronic control amplifier, a compass controller, a magnetic azimuth detector, and an electronic compensator.
In case of an IMU failure, the CSDC automatically selects AHRS attitude information for display and autopilot control. The directional gyro smoothens the flux valve heading signal in the SLAVED mode or provides a direct heading reference in the DG mode. The resulting heading is transmitted to the BDHI, the CSDC, and the WCS.
💡
- In the INS nav mode IMU true heading is used and must be converted to magnetic heading by adding or subtracting the magnetic variation to have a backup magnetic value, if needed. Under normal operation, AHRS magnetic heading is used for all displays.
- The AHRS is unlimited in roll but limited to 82° in pitch. If the pitch attitude exceeds ±82, it will precess. A gradual precession in roll, pitch, and heading can also be expected in sustained turns at slow rates (less than 6° per minute). Large roll and pitch precession errors can be corrected by flying straight and level, without accelerating, and pressing and holding the HDG set button on the compass controller panel. Pressing and holding this button corrects precession errors at a rate of 12° per minute minimum. The HDG set button should be held for at least 3 minutes. Before repeating the 3-minute cycle, it should be released for at least 1 minute.
Compass Controller Panel
Use the compass controller panel to select one of three compass modes when the AHRS is used as a heading reference. For a description, see Compass Control Panel.
When magnetic heading references are unreliable, operate the system in the DG mode. When the magnetic reference is reliable, operate the system in the SLAVED mode. When DG or SLAVED modes are inoperable, the COMP mode can be used for emergencies.
💡 If both the IMU and the AHRS fail, pitch and roll attitude indications from the HUD, TID, and DDD will be removed, and the IMU and AHRS advisory lights illuminate. Select COMP mode on the compass controller panel to possibly restore valid magnetic heading information to the HUD, VDI, and HSD, the AHRS advisory lights will go off. Disregard the invalid pitch and roll attitude information that will be restored to the HUD and VDI.
AHRS Operation
As a compass, the AHRS operates in three modes:
- The directional gyro (DG) mode provides a free-gyro heading reference with Earth-rate correction.
- The SLAVED mode provides a gyro-stabilized magnetic heading
- And the compass (COMP) mode provides an emergency magnetic heading from the compass transmitter only.
If the COMP mode is selected, the AFCS is automatically disengaged to prevent erratic steering commands. The COMP mode cannot provide a sufficiently stable heading signal for AFCS operation and should only be used for emergencies. To erect the AHRS, press and hold the HDG set button on the compass controller (3 minutes on, 1 minute off cycle) until the needle of the synchronous indicator is bracketing the null mark.
If nav mode is set to INS or IMU/AM, attitude displays will continue to indicate properly when the AHRS pitch limit of 82° is exceeded, but all displays of magnetic heading will be in error and the advisory lights may be on or off. If this is encountered, accurate and stable magnetic heading displays on the HUD, VDI, HSD, TID, and multiple display indicator can be regained immediately by inserting the proper MAG VAR via the computer address panel.
TACAN System (AN/ARN-84)
The TACAN system indicates a slant range accurate to within 0.1 NM and a bearing of 0.5° to any surface station selected. Slant range to airborne stations is provided with an air-to-air (A/A) mode. The operating range is approximately 300 NM, if line of sight is given.
The system offers 126 operating channels in each of 2 modes. Receiving frequencies for surface-to-air operation are 962 to 1024 MHz and 1151 to 1213 MHz, for air-to-air operations, the frequencies are from 1025 to 1150 MHz. The TACAN uses two antennas that automatically switch in a 6-second interval until a threshold signal is received. Note that the TACAN can take up to 2 minutes to warm up when turned on for the first time after a cold start.
TACAN Modes
The system is capable of receiving valid signals from a ground station simultaneously with 99 other aircraft in either REC or T/R mode.
In the A/A mode, the system is capable of transponding with each of five cooperating aircraft, indicating slant range information to each, but the system will interrogate and lock on to only one at a time.
Both pilot and RIO share Identical TACAN control panels on the left consoles. Individual TACAN CMD buttons on both the pilot and RIO left consoles provide transfer of TACAN control between pilot and RIO. Control of TACAN is indicated by a flip-flop indicator in each cockpit showing PLT (pilot) or RIO. Either crewman may adjust the audio level of the identification signal. For TACAN panel description see TACAN Control Panel.
TACAN Displays
Bearing and distance to a TACAN station are displayed on the BDHI, the HSD, and the multiple display indicator. Deviation to the TACAN station is displayed on the HUD and VDI (VDIG) and the HSD and multiple display indicator.
The MDIG displays TACAN bearing marker, deviation ticks, range-to-TACAN station, and course. The HUD and VDI display provide a TACAN deviation bar, which is coded, on the HUD: solid line - TO station, dashed line - FROM station and on the VDI: bright bar - TO station, dark bar - FROM station.
TACAN information is also displayed on both the pilot’s and RIO’s identical BDHI. The bearing and distance functions of the BDHI come alive when the TACAN mode select switch is set to T/R. In the REC and T/R modes, magnetic bearings are displayed by the No.2 (large) needle, which unlocks and enters a search mode (spins) whenever bearing information is unreliable.
Range information received in T/R or A/A mode is displayed in nautical miles on the distance counter. An OFF flag covers the counter window if the range information is unreliable or not available. TACAN information is also displayed on the pilot HSD, HUD, and VDI and on the RIO multiple display indicator in other navigation modes.
TACAN Operation
If after approximately 2 minutes warm up time the range and bearing indications continue to search when a reliable station is selected, check circuit breakers should or select another station. The system has a memory feature so that tracking will not be interrupted by momentary disruption of received signals.
A range signal that is lost and has been previously tracked for at least 10 seconds, will be sustained by memory for 9 to 12 seconds. A bearing signal that has been tracked for at least 15 seconds will be retained for 3 to 8 seconds after signal loss. This allows for automatic antenna switching without a loss of TACAN displays.
During the minimum warmup time, failure indications and erroneous readouts should be disregarded and self-test results may be inconclusive.
TACAN BIT
The TACAN system has a built-in test that continuously monitors the TACAN functionality and provides an interruptive self-test. To start a 22-second interruptive self-test, use the momentary button (BIT switch) and monitor the GO (green) and NO-GO (amber) status lights.
💡 A BIT performed on TACAN stations within 2 NM can give an invalid indication. If a TCN acronym or NO-GO response is observed while tuned to a local station, along with normal TACAN azimuth and range, the acronym and/or the NO-GO should be disregarded.
The normal BIT sequence is as follows:
- Set MODE switch to T/R, allow 2 minutes for warmup.
- Press and hold BIT button.
- Both GO and NO-GO lights illuminate (light test).
- BDHI range OFF flag appears.
- BDHI bearing needle rotates counterclockwise.
- Release button; both lights go out (self-test starts).
- After 5 to 6 seconds, BDHI and HSD range reads 2 NM, BDHI and HSD bearing reads 4° (identify TACAN station).
- After 22 seconds, if good, green GO light illuminates, if bad, amber NO-GO light illuminates.
Bearing Distance and Heading Indicator (BDHI)
A BDHI is on the right side of the pilot and RIO instrument panels, see Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI). It displays aircraft magnetic heading with navigation bearing data and range information. The controls on the compass panel set the BDHI compass card to operate in a slaved or non-slaved (FREE DG) compass mode. A fixed index marker at the 12-o’clock position indicates the magnetic heading.
Two servo-driven bearing needles show magnetic bearings to the selected UHF (ADF) and TACAN stations. The No.1 (single bar) needle receives signals from the UHF (ADF) system, the No.2 (double bar) needle receives signals from the TACAN coupler.
The No.1 needle will continue to point toward the signal source, even if the compass card is misaligned or a malfunction exists, but the bearing to the station is displayed on the indicator as a relative bearing and the top of the indicator bezel will show 000°. The No.2 needle will also continue to show the magnetic bearing to the selected station or may revert to the search mode.
Communications Systems
Antennas
Four VHF/UHF/L-band dual-blade antennas provide omnidirectional coverage for VHF/UHF voice, UHF data link, TACAN, and identification friend or foe/selective identification feature transponder (APX-72) operation. TACAN and VHF/UHF 2 voice communications use one set of antennas; UHF 1 voice communications, the data link, and IFF transponder use another set of antennas. Refer to the general arrangement illustration for antenna locations. The IFF interrogator (APX-76) antenna is an integral part of the AWG-9 WCS antenna.
Each individual system is connected to the appropriate portion of an upper or lower antenna through a coaxial switch and diplexer. The V/UHF 2 ANT switch on the RIO communication TACAN CMD panel must be used to select the upper or lower antenna manually; there is no automatic actuation function in these aircraft. The data link (DIL) antennas are similarly selected manually. Upper or lower antenna is selected by means of ANTENNA switches on the DATA LINK control panel. The UHF 1 voice communication ARC-159 antenna is shared with the DIL antenna system and is always on the opposite antenna from the one selected by the ANTENNA switch.
The upper V/UHF 2/TACAN antenna is the first one aft of the canopy on the turtleback, and the lower antenna is embedded in the bottom of the left ventral fin. Only one antenna is used at a time. Automatic switching between antennas prevents the loss of TACAN information. If a signal is lost or is too weak to hold receiver lockup, the TACAN automatically cycles between the two antennas every 6 seconds seeking a stronger signal.
During this cycling and search period, memory circuits retain range tracking for 8 to 12 seconds and bearing tracking for 8 seconds. The IFF antenna lobing switch is controlled by the IFF ANT switch on the RIO right outboard console. In AUTO, the lobing switch cycles the receiver-transmitter between the upper and lower antenna. In the LWR (lower) position, only the lower antenna is used to receive and transmit signals. The upper antenna pattern has a slight forward tilt; the lower pattern a slight aft tilt.
💡 In real life, it is often necessary to select LWR to improve ground station reception. However, due to the limitations of DCS, antenna switching is not modeled and thus not functional. The use of antennas is automated and/or neglected for the player. All radios and radio functions work through proper keying.
Pilot Volume/TACAN Command Panel
The Volume/TACAN command panel on the pilot left side console has three volume controls for regulating audio signals from the ALR-67, Sidewinder (SW), and V/UHF 2.
| Control/Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| ALR-67 Volume control | Controls volume for pilot ALR-67 indication. |
| SW (Sidewinder) Volume control | Controls volume of the pilot’s Sidewinder tone. |
| V/UHF 2 Volume control | Controls volume of pilot audio from V/UHF 2 (AN/ARC-182). |
| TACAN CMD control switch/indicator | Controls and indicates crewmember in control of TACAN. |
RIO Communication/TACAN Command Panel
Allows RIO to select either UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159), V/UHF 2 (AN/ARC-182), or both radios for transmitting.
💡 BOTH is not functional in DCS.
- The V/UHF 2 ANT switch allows the selection of upper or lower antenna to minimize interference between dual UHF or data link operation. Opposite antenna selection, frequency separation greater than 55 MHz, or turning one radio off is recommended. Additionally, the DATA LINK panel provides lower or upper antenna selection for UHF 1 and DIL operation.
- The TACAN CMD push buttons provide for the transfer of TACAN control functions between pilot and RIO. The crewmember (PLT or RIO) in control illuminates when selected.
- The UHF 1 VOL control allows the RIO to adjust the audio level of the ARC 159 UHF 1 radio. The KY MODE switch is operative only when the KY-58 is installed.
💡 The Heatblur F-14 version uses the KY-28 only.
| Control/Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| XMTR SEL switch | Selects desired VHF/UHF radio for use. UHF 1 - Selects ARC-159 UHF 1 radio. V/UHF 2 - Selects ARC-182 VHF/UHF radio. Both - Selects both radios. (Not functional in DCS) |
| V/UHF 2 ANT switch | UPR - Selects upper antenna for V/UHF 2. LWR - Selects lower antenna for V/UHF 2. |
| TACAN CMD control switch/indicator | Controls and indicates crewmember in control of TACAN. |
| UHF 1 VOL control | Controls volume of RIO audio from UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159). |
| KY MODE switch | Non-functional with KY-28. |
Loading (saving) Preset Channel(s) on UHF 1 and V/UHF 2
- MODE selection- T/R or T/R&G.
- Frequency mode control - PRESET.
- CHAN SEL switch- Select desired channel.
- Frequency mode control- READ.
- Frequency select switches - Slew to desired Frequency.
- Frequency mode control - LOAD (frequency is stored in memory for the selected channel).
- Frequency mode control- READ, Verify frequency display.
- Repeat steps 2 through 7 for subsequent channels.
AN/ARC-159 and AN/ARC-182 Remote Displays
Both the pilot and RIO have remote displays for the currently set channel or frequency of the radios. The pilot has remote displays for both UHF 1 and V/UHF 2 and the RIO only for UHF 1.
| Control/Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| UHF 1 Remote Channel/Frequency Indicator (Pilot) | Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the UHF 1 radio. TEST - Initiates test for the indicator, no fault resulting in 888.888 readout. BRT - Controls display brightness. |
| V/UHF 2 Remote Channel/Frequency Indicator (Pilot) | Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the V/UHF 2 radio. TEST - Initiates test for the indicator, no fault resulting in 888.888 readout. BRT - Controls display brightness. |
| UHF 1 Remote Channel/Frequency Indicator (RIO) | Displays a readout of the frequency or channel set for the UHF 1 radio. TEST - Initiates test for the indicator, no fault resulting in 888.888 readout. BRT - Controls display brightness. |
ICS - Intercommunications System
The ICS provides normal, backup, or emergency communications between crewmembers. It also combines and amplifies audio signals received from other electronic receiving equipment (ECM, Sidewinder tone, IFF/SIF, radar altimeter, and voice radios, etc.). Identical ICS control panels are on the pilot and RIO left side consoles. The ICS consists of four amplifiers, two at each cockpit station, which permit duplex operation during normal operation. If one amplifier fails, it may be bypassed by selecting either the B/U (backup) or EMER (emergency) position on the ICS control panel. This permits continued ICS operation.
💡 If two amplifiers fail at the same station, intercommunication is impossible.
💡 By selecting EMER on the respective ICS control panel and using the other crewmember’s amplifier, you can listen in on audio normally only available at that station (like SW-tone or ALQ-126 PRF) but you lose the ability to control the volume of the audio you listen to.
The external interphone connection is in the nose-wheel well. When the pilot ICS switch is set to HOT MIC, ground personnel can communicate with the cockpit stations. In DCS, this works through selecting the ground crew communication menu in the DCS radio communication menu when activating ICS PTT.
The Pilot Radio ICS button allows for various intercommunication and radio operation modes. When set to ICS, it permits intercommunication when COLD MIC is selected on the function selector, overriding UHF/VHF communications. In the BOTH position, it keys both radios for operation, although this function is not active in DCS. The UHF 1 position keys the ARC-159 radio, and the UHF 2 position keys the ARC-182 radio.
The VOL control is used to control the intercommunication audio level at the specific cockpit station where it is adjusted. The audio levels at other stations remain unaffected by changes to this control.
The Amplifier selector has three positions: B/U (Backup), NORM (Normal), and EMER (Emergency). The B/U position is used to bypass a faulty amplifier, utilizing a backup output amplifier at the current station. The NORM position is for normal operation when all amplifiers are functioning correctly. The EMER position bypasses a faulty amplifier and uses the input amplifier of the other station, though HOT MIC is not available in this mode. It is important to note that with the front cockpit amplifier selector switch in the EMER position, engine stall/overtemperature and Sidewinder tones will not be available to the pilot.
The Function selector has multiple settings to manage radio and intercommunication audio. The RADIO OVERRIDE setting attenuates noncritical radio audio to prioritize intercommunication when urgent. The HOT MIC setting allows for intercommunication without keying, while the COLD MIC setting requires the pilot to actuate the ICS keying switch on the inboard throttle or the RIO to actuate the keying switch on the left footrest for intercommunication.
The RIO’s ICS button located on the left footrest permits intercommunication if COLD MIC is selected on the function selector control, overriding UHF communication. The RIO’s MIC button, found on the right footrest, allows for the transmission of UHF 1 or UHF 2 radios as selected on the communications/TACAN command panel. Note the BOTH function is not active in DCS.
💡 The two RIO foot-pedals have axis bindings in DCS to allow sim rudder pedals to trigger these functions.
TSEC/KY-28 Voice Security Equipment
The security equipment is integrated and operates with the VHF/UHF 2 and UHF 1 communication sets to enable secure voice in a hostile environment. The KY-28 control panel on the RIO left side console is the only cockpit control for operating the KY-28 in either cipher or plain-language modes.
The KY-28 has two basic modes of operation: plain (P) and cipher (C). The plain mode is used during normal UHF communications. The cipher mode is used when secure voice communications are desired. The radio sets must be ON to attain secure operation. The receiving station must be properly equipped to receive transmissions in the proper cipher mode.
| Control/Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| ZEROIZE switch | By lifting the guard the preloaded codes are erased and must be loaded on the ground before the cipher mode can be used again. In DCS this is done via the ground crew communications menu. |
| Power-mode switch | P/OFF - UHF radio is used as a plain-language transceiver. Removes power from the system. C - Used to transmit and receive in secure mode (cipher) using preloaded codes. Also applies power to the system. To preload codes the system must be in this mode and power be applied. DELAY - Provides a time delay between PTT and actual transmission. |
| Radio-select switch | RELAY - Re-transmits information acting as a relay for other stations, increasing their range. (Not functional in DCS) RAD-2 - Selects V/UHF 2 for secure voice. RAD-1 - Selects UHF 1 for secure voice. |
KY-28 Operation
Prelaunch
- Determine that the proper code has been set by personnel qualified in voice security equipment. In DCS and in combination with SRS (Simple Radio) this is done through the ground crew communication menu in the DCS communications menu.
- VHF/UHF radios - ON.
- Power mode switch - C.
- Radio selector - RAD-1 or RAD-2.
- If a ground test of equipment is desired, establish two-way, plain-text radio communications on the plain-voice radio with a suitable remote station and request an equipment check. (In DCS another player is needed)
- After a 2-minute warmup period, on the cipher-selected radio listen for a steady, unbroken tone in the headset followed by a double-pitched broken tone.
- Key the appropriate radio selected for transmission, hold for approximately 2 seconds, and release. The double-pitched broken tone will cease and no sound will be heard.
- Key radio and hold. A single-beep tone will be heard in approximately 1-1/2 seconds. When this tone is heard, the equipment is ready to cipher transmission.
- After the beep tone is heard, establish two-way cipher radio communications with a cooperating ground station and check for readability and signal strength.
- Set power mode and radio selector switches in accordance with the tactical situation.
💡 The above procedures may be used to perform an in-flight check of the equipment.
Postlaunch
The speech security equipment shall be operated as briefed.
💡 If ZEROIZE is pressed during flight, ciphered communication is not possible. The code can only be reset (or changed) through the ground crew communications menu after landing.
After Landing
- ZEROIZE switch - ZEROIZE (as briefed).
- Power switch - OFF.
💡 If ZEROIZE has been pressed and the POWER MODE switch is in C, both crewmembers will be warned by a continuing beeping sound.
AN/ARC-159 (UHF 1) Radio
The UHF 1 (ARC-159) radio provides air-to-air and air-to-surface voice communications. Radio frequency range extends from 225.000 to 399.975 MHz. The equipment allows AM mode transmission and reception on any of the 20 preset channels and a guard channel (243.000 MHz). Guard frequency may be monitored simultaneously with any other frequency selected. The ARC-159 has a possible 7,000 frequencies available by manually tuning in 25-kHz steps. The ARC-159 radio is a solid-state, self-contained unit with a minimum RF output of 10 watts. All controls for operation of the radio are on the front panel of the radio. The radio is located on the pilot left console.
💡 The UHF 1 (ARC-159) ADF position is non-functional in the modeled version of the F-14; use the DF mode of V/UHF 2 ARC-182.
| Control/Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| VOL control | Controls volume of pilot audio for UHF 1. |
| SQL (Squelch) switch | On/off control for radio squelch (noise-blanking when carrier is not present). |
| Frequency Tuning switches | Four frequency tuning switches are used to tune the transceiver when the mode selector switch is set to MANUAL. The left switch controls the hundreds and tens digits, the second switch controls units, the third switch controls tenths, and the right switch controls hundredths and thousandths. Forward deflection of the switch increases the numeric reading, and aft deflection decreases the numeric reading. |
| FREQ/(CHAN) display | Displays frequency when the mode selector switch is in MANUAL and displays UHF channel when the mode switch is in PRESET. |
| READ switch | Deflection of the switch causes the frequency display to show the preset channel frequency. |
| BRT/TEST control | Controls brightness of radio FREQ/(CHAN) display. Turn past max to show 888.888 test display. |
| LOAD button | Depressing button saves displayed frequency to the selected preset channel. |
| Function selector | ADF – The UHF 1 ARC-159 ADF function is not functional; use the DF mode of the V/UHF 2 ARC-182. BOTH – Energizes both the main transceiver and the guard receiver. MAIN – Main transceiver is energized permitting normal transmission and reception. Receive or transmit function is selected by the microphone push-to-talk switch. OFF – Secures UHF 1 radio. |
| CHAN SEL control | Selects one of 20 preset frequency channels to use when the tuning selector switch is set to PRESET. |
| Frequency Chart | Used to record preset channel frequencies. Frequencies preset in the mission editor will be automatically displayed here in DCS. |
| Mode Selector switch | GUARD – Main transceiver is energized and shifted to guard frequency of 243.0 MHz permitting transmission and reception. In this position, both preset and manual frequency selections are not available. MANUAL – Frequency tuning controls are used to tune the main transceiver to any frequency (7,000 available) within the range of the set. The frequency selected is displayed in the readout window. In this position, PRESET selections are not available. PRESET – Used to tune the transceiver to any of 20 preset channels using the PRESET channel selector. The selected channel is displayed in the readout window. |
| TONE button | Depressing button causes a steady tone (1 020 Hz) to be transmitted on the frequency or channel selected. |
💡 UHF communication interference with the D/L may cause the TILT light to illuminate and the autopilot ACL or VEC/PCD mode to disengage. Data link interference with the UHF radios may cause audible chirping at the D/L message reply rate. Although antenna switching is not implemented in DCS, it is still recommended to use a frequency separation greater than 55 MHz, and if necessary along with turning UHF 1 or V/UHF 2 radio OFF to avoid mutual interference between UHF communications.
💡 Transmissions on both UHF 1 and V/UHF 2 radios, while operating on the same frequency, may result in a squeal. This feedback is a normal condition caused by RF interaction between the two radios operating on the same frequency in close proximity to each other.
AN/ARC-182 (V/UHF 2) Radio
The ARC-182 radio provides multi-mode, multichannel, air-to-air/air-to-surface voice and tone communications. The ARC-182 control panel is located on the RIO left console. Frequency range extends in four bands from 30 to 88, 108 to 156, 156 to 174, and 225 to 399.975 MHz on any of 11,960 channels (separated by 25 kHz).
💡 The Have Quick anti-jam function is not implemented in DCS.
Transmission and reception are available in AM or FM bands. The modulation is selected automatically by the radio except in the 225 to 399.975 band (toggle switch). 30 preset channels are available. Guard frequency of each band may be monitored simultaneously with any other frequency selected. The radio is used with the ARA-50 to provide automatic direction finding (ADF) to the transmitting station. The ARC-182 operates with secure-voice equipment (KY-28, the KY-58 is not implemented in DCS). Upper and lower antenna installations provide reliable line-of-sight communications to 200 NM (depending on altitude and atmospheric conditions). A remote indicator on the pilot instrument panel indicates the channel or frequency selected.
| Control/Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| VOL control | Controls volume of RIO audio for V/UHF 2. |
| SQL (squelch) switch | On/off control for radio squelch (noise-blanking when carrier is not present). |
| Frequency Tuning switches | Four frequency tuning switches are used to tune the transceiver when the mode selector switch is set to MANUAL. The left switch controls the hundreds and tens digits, the second switch controls units, the third switch controls tenths, and the right switch controls hundredths and thousandths. Forward deflection of the switch increases the numeric reading, and aft deflection decreases the numeric reading. |
| FREQ/(CHAN) | Displays frequency when the mode selector switch is in MAN and displays V/UHF channel when mode switch is in PRESET. |
| UHF Mode switch | Operational when tuned to frequencies in the 225.000 to 399.000 MHz band. AM – Selects amplitude modulation signals. Varies with atmospheric conditions, susceptible to electromagnetic interference. FM – Selects frequency modulation signals. Reduces electromagnetic interference. |
| BRT control | Controls brightness of radio FREQ/(CHAN) display. |
| MODE selector | OFF – Secures VHF/UHF radio, unless the frequency mode switch is set to 243. T/R – Energizes transmitter and main receiver. T/R&G – Energizes transmitter, main, and guard receivers. DF – Provides automatic direction finding from 108 to 399.975 MHz. TEST – Indicates built-in-test (BIT) AT; displayed on FREQ/(CHAN) indicator. |
| Frequency Mode switch (Outer Dial) | 243 – Turns on the transceiver (takes precedence over (outer dial) operational mode control) and causes the main transceiver, and guard receiver to tune to 243.000 MHz (UHF guard frequency). All functions except VOL SQL and BAT are disabled. MAN – Allows manual selection of an operating frequency using the frequency tuning switches. The transceiver is disabled during a frequency change. G – Tunes the transceiver to the guard frequency in the band to which the radio was last tuned. PRESET – Allows selection of any one of 40 present operating frequencies with the CHAN SEL switch. The selected channel is displayed on the FREQ/(CHAN) display. Channels 31 through 40 are for Have Quick (anti-jam) use and are not implemented in DCS. READ – Displays the frequency (rather than channel) of the preset channel selected. LOAD – Automatically places the displayed frequency into the memory for the selected preset channel. |
| CHAN SEL switch (Inner Dial) | Selects one of 40 preset frequency channels to use when the tuning selector switch is set to PRESET. |
AN/ARC-182 BIT (Built-in Test)
BIT isolates faults in AN/ARC-182. BIT should be started if the FREQ/(CHAN) display blanks, indicates an erroneous readout, or the transceiver otherwise malfunctions.
Proceed as follows:
- MODE selector - TEST.
- BRT control- As Required.
- BIT requires approximately 10 seconds, observe FREQ/(CHAN) display.
- No fault is indicated by 888.888.
- Faults are indicated by a number that identifies the module or modules at fault.
| Mode | Display | Fault | Interpretation |
|---|---|---|---|
| RCV | ' | RMT or RT | Select test mode |
| XMT | ' | LOW PWR | Select test mode |
| TEST | ' | RMT CTRL | Defective control |
| TEST | 888.888 | NONE | RT and CTRL ok |
| TEST | 4 6 5 | RT | Modules 4, 5, or 6 bad |
| TEST | 0 6 1 | VSWR | RT or antenna system |
| TEST | 6 5 1 | FWD PWR | RT or antenna system |
| TEST | 1 5 7 | RT | Modules 1, 5, or 7 bad |
| TEST | 3 3 3 | RT | Module 3 bad |
AN/ARA-50 UHF Automatic Direction Finder
The UHF automatic direction finder is used with the ARC-182 radio. ADF provides relative bearings to transmitting ground stations or other aircraft. It can receive signals on any 1 of 30 preset channels or on any manually set frequency in the 108 to 399.975 MHz range. The system has a line-of-sight range, varying with altitude.
The system requires a 5-minute warmup period. During the warmup time, failure indications should be disregarded. The system uses the AS-909/ARA-48 ADF antenna. Bearing to transmitting stations is displayed on the pilot/RIO BDHI (No. 1 needle), pilot HSD, and RIO multiple display indicator. The ADF signal is interrupted during voice UHF transmissions.
Link 4A & C Data Link
The F-14 Tomcat is equipped with the Link 4 data link system to allow for transmission and reception of target track, waypoint information and steering commands. Link 4 exists in two versions, the first being Link 4A which allows a surface ship or airborne AWACS to control the aircraft and also Link 4C, unique to the F-14, which is a fighter to fighter data link.
The Link 4A or TADIL C data link allows the F-14 to connect to a data link network controlled by a surface ship or an AWACS. The data source (or really its operator) will then provide the F-14 with target tracks, waypoints and control commands. Additionally, it’s also used for the carrier automatic landing system (ACLS).
Link 4C on the other hand allows up to four F-14 Tomcats to interconnect and share target tracks to coordinate their engagements.
The system does not allow an F-14 to use both at the same time as the same transmitter and receiver are used for both A and C links. The Link 4 system itself, operates using the UHF radio band at 5,000 bits per second.
The Link 4 is controlled using the Data Link Control Panel and the Data Link Reply and Antenna Control Panel. Received control signals are displayed on the pilot VDI indicators (Vertical Display Indicator (VDI)) and the RIO DDI panel (Digital Data Indicator (DDI)).
Link 4 Controls
The Data Link Control Panel contains the main Link 4 system power switches and the frequency selection wheels.
The first switch (
The frequency thumbwheels (
The third switch (
The Data Link Reply and Antenna Control Panel is used to select what antenna to use, own aircraft data link address, whether to transmit and which mode the Link 4A is used in.
The ANTENNA switch (
The REPLY switch (
The MODE switch (
The two address thumbwheel sets the least significant bits (two lowest numbers) of the aircraft data link address, the rest has to be set by the ground crew.
Link 4 in DCS
The Link 4 implementation in the Heatblur DCS F-14 implements both the Link 4A and C versions.
To use Link 4A the data link has to be powered on, set to Link 4A mode (ON) and tuned to the correct data link frequency for the desired host which can be found on the kneeboard. On the ground and set to the CAINS/WAYPT mode the data link will receive the ME set waypoints and allow for CVA alignment if on a carrier. The frequency does not need to be set to use CAINS/WAYPT as that frequency is set with jumpers on the actual equipment by the ground crew.
When set to TAC the data link will then receive the 8 target tracks with the highest priority from the TDS controller. The Link 4A also allows for automatic carrier landings with the data link set to use the carrier as a host.
To use Link 4C the data link should be set to Link 4C (AUX) and be tuned to a frequency agreed upon between participating aircraft. Up to four aircraft can participate within a flight and all four aircraft should have different addresses set. The ground crew sets the two most significant bits of the datalink frequency. This is preset automatically for aircraft in the same flight, or can be change in-mission using the kneeboard.
In Link 4C the participating aircraft shares up to 4 target tracks, selected by the RIO using the CAP as well as own aircraft position. The CAP also allows the RIO to update own aircraft INS position to another aircraft on the link to correlate track transmissions.
Identification Systems
The transponder and interrogator can be controlled by the RIO with a panel on the right console.
AN/APX-72 Transponder System
The transponder automatically responds to challenges from surface or airborne radar sets and serves supplementary purposes such as providing momentary identification of position upon request and transmitting a specially coded response to indicate an emergency.
The system operates by receiving coded interrogation signals and transmitting coded response signals to the source of the challenge, with a proper reply indicating the target is friendly.
The system features four modes. Mode 1, Mode 2, and Mode 3 are provided for security identification, personal identification, and traffic identification, respectively.
Codes for Modes 1 and 3 can be set in the cockpit, while the code for Mode 2 must be set on the ground, ranging from 0000 to 7777. Mode 1 is limited to two digits 00 to 77.
The codes for Mode 4 are automatically inserted by Ground Crew before flight, the Crew Chief can be asked to insert them on demand as well.
💡 The Tomcat features a full IFF simulation. In DCS this system also works with any other cooperating aircraft, such as the F-4E, M-2000C, F1, JF-17, F-15E, Harrier and more. Other aircraft, or AI-controlled aircraft fall back to coalition based interrogation, assuming the Tomcats transponder to always be enabled and set to the correct M4 code for the current coalition, ignoring the real state of the transponder.
Self Test operation
To self test Modes 2 and 3, place the master switch (
Mode 1 and Mode C do not have self testing capabilities.
Normal Operation
To operate the IFF system, start by rotating the master switch (
Set the Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4, and Mode C switches (
Interrogation of Position
For Interrogation of Position (I/P) switch operation, place the I/P switch
(
Warning Light
If the IFF warning light and MASTER CAUTION light come on momentarily, check the
Mode 4 selector switch (
Normal IFF operation will be available, after an 80-second warm-up, when the
master switch (
M4 Zero/Hold
The codes for Mode 4 are automatically erased on shutdown, when the IFF system
loses power. This can also be commanded by moving the Mode 4 function switch
(
Codes can be inserted again by the Ground Crew. The HOLD position of the Mode 4 function switch is inoperative on the DSCG variant of the F-4E and was added later for the DMAS only. Holding the switch in that position for 15 seconds will retain the mode 4 codes during the next shutdown, preventing them from automatically getting zeroed.
Emergency Operation
Upon ejection from either cockpit, the IFF emergency operation automatically becomes active.
If the master switch (
In an emergency, rotate the master switch (
Interrogator System AN/APX-76
The AN/APX-76 IFF (Identification Friend or Foe) interrogator is integrated into the AN/AWG-9 operation. Then interrogator antenna itself is located on the AN/AWG-9 antenna gimbal platform.
An IFF system works by sending out an interrogation pulse and then listening for returns from cooperating transponders. In addition to the unencrypted civilian mode the AN/APX-76 is capable of interrogating in the encrypted military mode 4. This ensures that targets replying to mode 4 interrogations are indeed friendly.
The AN/APX-76 can be used both in search radar modes and in STT radar modes. To enable interrogation the IFF switch is depressed on the Detail Data Display Panel which then activates the interrogator for as long as the button is held up to 10 seconds max.
When enabled IFF received IFF returns are then overlaid on the normal AN/AWG-9 radar returns on the DDD. A friendly target will be indicated with two bars, one above and one below the normal radar return. As the AN/APX-76 is a secondary mode radar (transponder radar) apart from the AWG-9 the IFF can sometimes also detect targets not detected by the AWG-9. In this case the IFF return will not have a radar echo inside it.
In the search mode this is overlaid over each target replying and in STT over the STT target. Additionally, if the STT target is hooked on the TID the DDD will switch from normal range display to a ±10 NM display to enable display of multiple returns in case of closely grouped targets.
-
1. M4 ALARM OVERRIDE switch
- Switch disabling the mode 4 tone alarm in the RIO headset.
-
2. TEST-CHAL CC switch
- Switch spring-loaded to center controlling IFF challenge and test.
- TEST: Momentary actuation, tests the AN/APX-76 by interrogating own transponder. If the same codes are set, two solid lines appear on DDD at 3 and 4 miles.
- CHAL CC: Momentary actuation starts a 10-second interrogation cycle, only showing returns with the correct mode and code on DDD.
- Switch spring-loaded to center controlling IFF challenge and test.
-
3. CODE selector thumbwheels
- Thumbwheels controlling mode and code used for interrogation. The first wheel sets the mode, and the last four set the code.
-
4. CHAL light
- Light indicating active interrogation in progress.
-
5. FAULT light
- Light indicating a fault in the AN/APX-76.
To challenge friendly or civilian aircraft using the AN/APX-76, the RIO sets the
interrogation mode on the first roller-display. It can be set to either OFF, or
Mode 1, 2, 3, 4/A or 4/B (
The other four digits are used to set the IFF code to interrogate for Modes 1 to
3 (
Once setup, interrogation can be initiated by either pressing the IFF button on
the DDD or moving the Test/Challenge Switch (
💡 The Test/Challenge switch will only send a challenge via the AN/APX-76 system, while the Challenge Button includes an interrogation by Combat-Tree, if activated.
The radar screen presents the results of the interrogation with lines around the contacts position:
- line above; the aircraft has a matching transponder mode (likely friendly, or at least neutral)
- line below; the aircraft has a matching transponder code (likely friendly)
Each time the AN/APX-76 is sending an interrogation, the challenge light
(
IFF Displays
Display formats for IFF operation are shown below. During IFF interrogation, the radar continues its normal operations. With the radar in a pulse mode (search, track, or acquisitions), the IFF returns are mixed with the radar video and appropriate pulse radar display formats are displayed on the DDD. The IFF range scale is defined by the radar range scale. If the RIO commands an IFF interrogation during any pulse Doppler single target track or pulse single target track mode (PDSTT or PSTT) or when a target is designated (hooked) on the TID, an expanded IFF range display is generated on the DDD. The nominal target range is displayed at the vertical center of the DDD. The range scale is indicated on the range scale indicator at ±10 and it cannot be changed. The azimuth of the current radar mode is retained in the expanded IFF format. By unhooking the single-target track, normal range vs. azimuth is displayed along with the IFF display.
With the radar operating in the pulse Doppler mode, the DDD presentation is switched to a B-scan format. In this format, the pulse Doppler antenna scan pattern is retained but IFF range sweeps are displayed. A computer-generated symbol representing actual target range is displayed along with the IFF video on the DDD. The IFF scale is indicated on the range indicator. It may be changed by pressing the range-select pushbutton. In the pulse-Doppler, STT mode, the attack symbols are retained and the IFF sweep is displayed at the azimuth of the AWG-9 tracking antenna.
When a target is detected, the RIO must tell the computer whether the target is friend or foe. The APX-76 cannot perform this function. It can only determine if IFF is being utilized by the target.
DDD TWS positive IFF response
(
(
(
(
DDD STT positive IFF response
(
(
Hydraulics
The F-14 has two separate hydraulic systems, the flight hydraulic system and the combined hydraulic system.
Both systems are driven by hydraulic pumps connected to each engine, the flight hydraulic system from the right engine and the combined hydraulic system from the left engine. Both systems are pressurized to around 3,000 psi when operating normally.
Flight control surfaces are supplied by both systems while the combined system also supplies pressure to secondary systems such as the flaps, landing gear and the refueling probe. This is so that both systems can drive the control surfaces independently from each other in case of a failure in the other.
Additionally, the hydraulic systems related to systems not necessary while airborne can be isolated by a switch next to the landing gear handle. This is so that damage to those systems won’t affect the combined system pressure and cause fluid loss. The systems that can be isolated are the landing gear, wheel brakes, anti-skid and nosewheel steering. This switch is mechanically locked to not isolating these systems by the landing gear handle when it’s in the down position.
If only one of the hydraulic pumps fail it’s possible to pressurize that system from the other pump via the hydraulic transfer pump. This pump is an omni-directional hydraulically driven pump that can supply either system from the other and will maintain a pressure between 2,400 and 2,600 psi if the driving system is at around 3,000 psi. If one system pressure falls below 500 psi the pump will be secured to prevent pump damage and preserve pressure in the working system. The pump can also be manually disengaged by the pilot.
In case of failure of both hydraulic pumps the flight hydraulic system can be driven by an electrical pump, called the emergency flight hydraulic pump. This pump is capable of independently driving the tail control surfaces, enabling the aircraft to return home and land even without pressure in either main hydraulic system. The electric pump is automatically enabled if both main systems drop below 2,100 psi and shut off if either reaches 2,400 psi again. The automatic pump activation activates the system in the low mode but it can also manually be selected to either low or high operation. The control surfaces will have a reduced deflection rate if driven by this pump, more so in low than high.
There is also a hand driven hydraulic pump that can be used to pressurize the refueling probe and wheel brake accumulator if there’s otherwise no pressure in the combined system. This is mainly for un-powered ground operation but can be used as a backup in the air.
Controls and Indicators
The HYD PRESS, hydraulic pressure indicator, contains two gauges indicating COMB, combined, and FLT, flight system hydraulic pressure in thousands of psi. The scales have markings for the nominal 3,000 psi pressure when the pumps are operating normally.
Below the gauges are flags indicating hydraulic pressure availability to the spoilers SPOIL and the operation of the EMER FLT, emergency flight hydraulic pump. The HI flag indicates on if the emergency flight hydraulic pump is operating in high and the LOW if it’s operating in low.
The BRAKE PRESSURE gauge shows available pressure in the brake accumulators. PARK indicating parking brake pressure and the AUX indicating wheel brake pressure. The green area represents a pressure from about 2,150 psi to 3,000 psi and the red a pressure below that.
The HYD TRANSFER PUMP, hydraulic transfer pump switch is located on its own panel on the pilot’s right side console. The switch allows for manual shut-off of the pump (SHUTOFF) but is normally in the NORMAL position allowing the pump to activate automatically if either hydraulic pump fails. The switch is guarded to the NORMAL position.
The emergency flight hydraulic pump is controlled by a guarded switch on the Master Test Panel. The guarded position, (AUTO)LOW allows the pump to automatically activate as detailed above and the two other positions, HIGH and LOW can manually activate those modes when the guard is up.
On the Caution - Advisory Indicator the only relevant caution light is the HYD PRESS light indicating that either main hydraulic system pressure is below 2,100 psi. It turns off when both systems are again above 2,400 psi.
Environmental Control System
The ECS or environmental control system controls and supplies temperature- and pressure-regulated air to cockpit systems and cooling for electronic equipment and weapons.
The air used is sourced from the engines, one or both, or if needed from the emergency ram air door on the fuselage inboard of the right glove.
Systems using ECS air in the cockpit are cockpit pressurization and canopy seals, anti-g suit inflation, aircrew suit ventilation, seat cushion ventilation and windshield anti-ice and defogging.
Other systems using ECS air outside of the cockpit are pressurization of external drop tanks, wing airbag seals, electronics cooling and cooling of the AN/AWG-9 radar and AIM-54 missiles via an air/liquid heat exchanger.
Air Source and Cockpit Air Controls
Air source for the ECS is set using the controls on the Air Conditioning Control Panel.
The L ENG set air source to left engine, R ENG to right engine and BOTH to both engines which is also the normal position while in use.
RAM and OFF both enable the emergency ram door but OFF turns off pressurization and heating.
During normal operation temperature in the cockpit is controlled using the TEMP switch and thumbwheel on that same panel. The thumbwheel sets the temperature which is automatic regardless of airspeed and altitude if the TEMP switch is set to AUTO. If that switch is set to MAN, manual, it will vary depending on airspeed and altitude.
The CABIN PRESS switch controls the cockpit safety valve, controlling whether the cockpit is pressurized or not. If set to NORM cockpit pressure is at 8,000 feet up to 23,000 feet and after that 5 psi higher than the atmosphere outside. DUMP depressurizes the cockpit by opening the cockpit safety valve.
The RAM AIR switch is used to modulate cockpit air supply temperature when the ram air door is in use by opening and closing the emergency ram air door. This is as in this mode that air is mixed directly with hot bleed air from the engines. INCR, increase, opens the ram door, decreasing temperature and DECR closes the door and increases temperature. spring-loaded to center.
💡 Selection of RAM or OFF inhibits gun firing.
Current cabin air pressure altitude can be seen on the Cabin Pressure Altimeter in front of the pilot control stick.
The CABIN PRESS caution light is present on the RIO Caution-Advisory Panel, indicating less than 5 psi absolute pressure or above 27,000 feet cockpit pressure. On the same panel is also the COOLING AIR advisory light which indicates overheat in the electronics cooling system, indicative of a failure in the ECS which might damage the electronics.
The anti-g suit pressurization can be tested via the G-valve Button for the pilot and G-Valve Button for the RIO. The airflow through the suit, or seats if no suits are worn, are controlled by the VENT AIRFLOW thumbwheel on the pilot Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel and RIO Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel respectively.
Windshield Anti-Ice and Defogging
Windshield anti-ice and defogging is controlled via the External Environmental Control Panel and Canopy Defog/Cabin Air Lever.
The WSHLD, windshield, switch on the external environment panel provides hot bleed air on the outside of the windshield to clear ice and rain on the glass. AIR enables airflow over windshield, OFF disables it.
The Canopy Defog/Cabin Air Lever (for pilot) and Canopy Defog/Cabin Air Lever (for RIO) sets amount of air through the canopy air diffusers to be used to defog the canopy. Lever set fully to CANOPY DEFOG selects all cockpit air to be through the canopy diffusers while lever fully at CABIN AIR redirects 30% through the canopy diffusers and the rest to the cockpit diffusers.
The WSHLD HOT advisory light on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator illuminates when the windshield is warmer than 300° F (149° C). This automatically closes the valve and stops warm air to the windshield until cooled down.
AN/AWG-9 and AIM-54 Cooling
The AN/AWG-9 radar and AIM-54 missiles are liquid cooled via independent liquid/air heat exchangers cooled by ECS air.
The Liquid Cooling Control Panel controls these cooling systems and should be set to AWG-9 to enable only the AN/AWG-9 cooler if no AIM-54 Phoenix missiles are carried. If AIM-54 missiles are loaded AWG-9/AIM-54 should instead be set to enable both systems. OFF turns off both systems and should not be set with systems in use as they will overheat.
The RIO Caution-Advisory Panel contains advisory lights for these systems. The AWG-9 COND advisory light indicates overheat in the AN/AWG-9 cooling system, continuing use of the AN/AWG-9 might damage it. The MSL COND advisory light indicates overheat in the AIM-54 cooling system or operation of the WCS with AIM-54s loaded and liquid cooling switch not set to AWG-9/AIM-54.
External ECS Air Supply
For operation of systems requiring cooling on the ground or on deck it’s possible to connect an external ECS air source to cool them.
The normally used source isn’t able to provide cooling for all systems at the same time though and thus what is to be cooled needs to be set. This is controlled by the GND CLG switch on the IFF Antenna Control/Test Panel panel at the RIO right side console. OBC/CABIN provides the external ECS air to the cabin and all air cooled electronics. This setting disables the AN/AWG-9 transmitter due to inadequate cooling. AWG-9/AIM-54 provides the external ECS air to the AN/AWG-9 and AIM-54 heat exchangers and to related electronics. OFF turns off external ECS air supply and is the normal mode used when the engines are running.
💡 Any setting on the GND CLG other than OFF should not be used when the engines are running.
💡 For the Heatblur F-14 in DCS the external ECS air supply is connected via the same command as the engine starter air.
Utility
Audio Warning Signals
Audio warning signals from the weapon system are available to either or both crewmen through the ICS. Each signal has a distinct tone. A visual display accompanies most audio signals so that the flight crew can expect the tone and interpret its meaning. Most audio signals may be attenuated or turned off if not required, allowing the flight crew to concentrate on more critical tones.
Critical warning tones cannot be attenuated by any mode of ICS operation. The table below provides a glossary of audio warning signals available within the aircraft weapon systems. Approximately 1 minute of warmup is required to achieve normal operating temperature.
| Tone | Position | Controls | Function | Characteristics |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Sidewinder | Pilot | Volume/TACAN Command Panel | Missile lock tone | High frequency, increases with lockon indication. |
| ALR-67 | Pilot & RIO | Volume/TACAN Command Panel (pilot) & Radar Warning Receiver Panel (RIO) | Threat indication | Low to high frequency, determined by threat level. |
| AN/ALQ-126 | RIO | DECM Control Panel | Threat indication | Raw PRF sound. |
| Radar Altimeter | Pilot & RIO | Radar Altimeter Indicator (Pilot) | Low altitude warning | 1 000 Hz tone, modulated at 2 pulses per second for 3 seconds. |
| TACAN | Pilot & RIO | TACAN Control Panel | Station identification | TACAN station Morse code. |
| AN/ARC-159 (UHF 1) | Pilot & RIO | UHF 1 Control Panel (Pilot) & RIO Communication/TACAN Command Panel | Own aircraft DF transmission | 1 020 Hz |
| AN/ARC-182 (V/UHF 2) | Pilot & RIO | V/UHF 2 Control Panel (RIO) & Volume/TACAN Command Panel (Pilot) | Other aircraft DF transmission | 1 020 Hz, Morse code or voice. |
| Engine Stall/Overtemperature | Pilot | None | Engine stall detection & EGT overtemp warning | Modulated 320 Hz for 10 seconds or until fault is removed if before. |
Oxygen System
The F-14 carries one or two 10-liter liquid oxygen bottles providing oxygen to the crew when needed.
The oxygen supply is controlled on the pilot Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel and RIO Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel respectively. Both panels contain an OXYGEN switch that sets oxygen supply to ON or OFF.
Liquid oxygen remaining is shown on the Liquid Oxygen Quantity Indicator on the pilot’s right side console. The gauge shows remaining liters of liquid oxygen up to 20 liters (if two bottles are installed). The indicator is electrically driven and if it receives no power an OFF flag will be visible and it will display 0 liters remaining.
Additionally the RIO Caution-Advisory Panel has the OXY LOW caution light which illuminates when the liquid oxygen quantity is below 2 liters.
During the INST test on the MTPanel the liquid oxygen meter shows 2 liters and the OXY LOW caution light illuminates.
Canopy
The rear-hinged F-14 canopy is operated hydraulically and pneumatically. Controls are present in both the pilot and RIO cockpits.
See Canopy Control Handle or Canopy Control Handle for the controls.
The CANOPY caution light on both the Pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator and the RIO Caution-Advisory Panel illuminates if the canopy is not in the down and locked, secured position.
Electrical Power System
All main electrical power in the F-14 is generated from the two engine driven AC generators. The generators connected to the gearboxes on the engines are each capable of generating enough power to individually drive all aircraft systems.
As for DC power generation the F-14 has two transformer-rectifiers supplying 28 V DC, and again each one is individually capable of driving all aircraft DC appliances.
The F-14 has an external power receptacle for AC power just aft of the nosegear, capable of driving aircraft AC and DC (through the transformer-rectifiers). External power is automatically disconnected from the aircraft power system when one of the internal generators come online.
Emergency Power
The F-14 has an emergency generator driven by the combined hydraulic system generating a limited supply of AC and DC power. If the system loses main power the emergency generator takes over supply of flight critical systems within 1 second.
Controls and Indicators
The controls for the electrical systems are located on the master generator control panel.
The MASTER GEN (
The EMERG (
Associated caution and advisory lights are located on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator. The L GEN and R GEN lights, when illuminated, indicate that the respective generator is not functioning correctly. Either because of a fault or because the engine driving the generator not running.
The TRANS/RECT advisory light indicates that only one or none of the transformer-rectifiers are functioning.
The emergency generator can be tested by selection of EMERG GEN on the MASTER TEST switch on the Master Test Panel. Completion of the test is indicated by the GO light illuminating. In case of a fault the NO GO light illuminates.
Circuit Breakers
The circuit breakers in the F-14 are located on the pilot’s right and left knee panels and behind the RIO’s seat on his left and right sides. The breakers protect aircraft systems from over-current by popping out and isolating the system drawing too much current. This is indicated by a white line becoming visible on the breaker as it pops out. The breaker can be reset by pushing it in and it can also be pulled out manually.
These breakers will be detailed here when implemented in DCS.
Lighting System
The F-14 Tomcat lighting system consists of the internal and the external lights.
The internal lights are the red instrument panel and console lights, red and white floodlights and a moveable utility light at both crew stations.
The external lights are the position lights, the anti-collision lights, the formation lights, the taxi light, the approach lights and the refueling probe light.
Internal Lighting
The red instrument panel and console lights are the normally used lights during nighttime, they back-light all instruments and controls allowing their use while impacting night vision minimally.
The floodlights allow for additional lighting of the cockpit panels but care should be taken to avoid affecting night vision.
The utility lights are movable and can be used to illuminate a specific spot and as a map or reading light.
Controls for the internal lights are on the Master Light Control Panel in pilot cockpit and Interior Light Control Panel in the RIO cockpit, each controlling their own cockpit lighting.
💡 The utility light function is not modeled in DCS, but the flashlight function, default keybind LAlt + L, which moves with the cursor, can be used, providing a similar function.
External Lighting
The position lights on the F-14 are located on the left wing tip (red), right wing tip (green), top aft of left vertical stabilizer (white) and upper and lower lights on the wing gloves on each side (red on left glove and green on right). The glove lights are additional lights supplementing the wing tip lights. When the wings are swept forward of 25° the wing tip lights are active and when aft of 25° the glove lights are active instead.
With the gear down, wings forward of 25° and the position lights in steady mode both the glove and wingtip position lights are lit. When the anti-collision lights are on the the position lights can only operate in the steady mode, otherwise they can be set to flash.
The anti-collision lights are located on the chin pod or TCS pod, top front of the left vertical stabilizer and top aft of the right vertical stabilizer. The anti-collision lights are all red flashing lights. The chin pod mounted lower light only operates while the nosegear wheel door is closed.
The formation lights are dim green lights used for formation flight which can be dimmed gradually. They are located on the aircraft nose (behind the radome), the wing tips, on the fuselage aft of the wings and on the top edge of the vertical stabilizers. All are duplicated on both sides of the aircraft.
The taxi light is a fixed headlight located on the nosewheel strut. It’s automatically turned off with gear retraction if set to on.
The approach lights are also located on the nosewheel strut and replicate the AoA indexer for the LSOs during carrier traps.
The refueling probe light is used to illuminate the refueling probe and is automatically enabled with probe extension.
All external light controls are located on the Master Light Control Panel except for the exterior lights switch on the left throttle (see Throttle) which disables or enables all external lights apart from the approach lights.
AN/AWG-9 Radar
The AN/AWG-9 radar in the F-14 is an all-weather, multi-mode pulse doppler radar using the X-band (X-band being 8-12 GHz). It was designed specifically to be a long range radar system capable of guiding up to 6 AIM-54 Phoenix missiles using its track while scan mode. One originally envisioned scenario was its use as a long range fleet defender intercepting russian bombers and attack aircraft threatening the fleet. During the F-14’s later service life this mission transitioned more towards the anti-fighter side, a mission for which it was very well adapted.
Radar Interface
The AN/AWG-9 weapons control system (WCS) is an integrated system containing the F-14’s main sensors and computer providing detection, tracking, and engagement of targets in the air-to-air and air-to-ground roles.
Detail Data Display (DDD) and Panel
The DDD is the main control panel and display for the radar part of the AN/AWG-9 system. It contains all the controls for the radar except the scan volume and stabilization controls which are on the sensor control panel.
TGTS, MLC, AGC and PARAMP Switches
The upper left part of the DDD panel contains four switches
(
The TGTS (targets) switch selects expected target size which is used by the WCS to calculate missile launch zones and set parameters for target tracking in the radar. It also sets the range at which the missile ATC is sent, SMALL being 6NM, NORM 10NM and LARGE 13NM. The selected position of this switch might negatively affect target tracking and engagement if set incorrectly.
The MLC switch controls how the system suppresses the MLC in the radar system while in pulse doppler mode. The OUT position disables the system while the IN position enables it. The AUTO position automatically enables the MLC filter if the antenna look-up angle is less than 3°.
The AGC switch controls the automatic gain control and is used in the pulse doppler modes to allow control of the time constant used for the AGC. Normally (NORM position) the AGC uses a longer time constant to calculate a mean value used for amplification. If the radar is operating in a jammed environment or heavy clutter is present the AGC can be set to use a faster time constant to mitigate these factors but this setting can also make the radar less sensitive to real targets.
The PARAMP, parametric amplifier switch allows for manual control of the parametric amplifier which is used to amplify weaker targets in all radar modes. Normally the WCS controls when to use the PARAMP depending on range but if tracking an unusually strong target it can be used to disable PARAMP to lessen the effect from background noise. If set to off manually it lessens the detection range by approximately 35%.
💡 AGC and PARAMP switches are currently not implemented.
AWG-9 Range Selection and Tracking Indication
In the upper central part of the DDD panel are located the controls and indicators for setting the radar range in the search modes. Below these are also present the indicators for radar tracking while in the single target track (STT) modes.
The six round buttons (
The range display drum (
Below these are the four radar track indicator lights which are used to indicate how the radar tracks the target in STT.
- ANT TRK: Indicates the radar is tracking the target angle (azimuth and elevation).
- RDROT: Indicates the target is in the range or rate gate.
- JAT: Indicates the antenna is tracking a jamming source’s angle.
- IROT: Indicates target angle tracking via TCS.
IR AUDIO Controls
The IR AUDIO controls (
Radar and Missile Frequency Selectors
The thumbwheels in the upper rightmost part of the DDD panel are used to control
the AN/AWG-9 radar emitter’s frequency (
💡 Non-functional in DCS currently.
Radar Mode Selectors
In the lower right part of the DDD panel are located the controls for display
mode and radar mode and its indicator drum. The display mode buttons
(
The radar mode buttons (
The indicator drum (
Aspect and Vc Switches
On opposite sides of the DDD itself are located the ASPECT and VC switches. The
Vc switch (
The ASPECT switch (
Elevation Indicator
The elevation indicator scale, EL, (
If the HCU is set to RDR the right (IR/TV/EC) needle indicates the currently set elevation center of the antenna scan pattern. This is useful in STT as it enables the RIO to set the antenna elevation center to use when you eventually revert to search.
If the HCU is set to IR/TV the right needle instead displays current TCS elevation.
Counter-Countermeasure Mode Controls
In the lower leftmost corner are located the three counter-countermeasure mode buttons. These controls functionality to counter different jammers affecting the system. (Not currently implemented).
Radar and DDD Control Knobs
Spread out on the DDD panel are eight different knobs controlling differing
functions on the DDD and radar. On the upper left side of the DDD is located the
PULSE VIDEO control knob (
On the upper right side of the DDD is located the BRIGHT control knob
(
On the lower left side of the DDD is located the PULSE GAIN control knob
(
On the lower right side of the DDD is located the ERASE control knob
(
On the left side of the DDD panel are located the PD THRLD (
The JAM/JET control knob selects the threshold of what jamming intensity signal strength is needed to regard an emitter as a jammer and make it indicate a jammer strobe on the TID. The ACM THRLD sets the threshold for what to regard as a target at ACM ranges. Normally left in the counter-clockwise detent, letting the WCS automatically control it.
💡 JAM/JET and ACM THRLD not currently implemented in DCS.
Detail Data Display
| Mode | Search | STT |
|---|---|---|
| Pulse | ||
| Pulse-Doppler |
The DDD screen itself shows either only radar return data or radar returns combined with symbology depending on radar mode.
In the pulse search mode the display shows only radar returns and a visual representation of the radar sweep and erase sweep. The screen shows range vs azimuth in this mode. In pulse doppler modes the AGC TRACE is added on the bottom showing supposed jamming intensity of the detected targets. The screen shows rate vs azimuth in these modes.
In the two STT modes the display shows, in addition to the return from the target, the tracking gates (either range or range rate gate), a closing rate indication on the right side and the attack symbology if in air-to-air mode and a missile is selected.
In pulse STT the target is displayed at the correct azimuth and range while in pulse doppler STT the target is shifted to the left side of the display and a generated target symbol is at the correct azimuth instead. In pulse doppler STT the AGC TRACE is added as well to give an indication of jamming strength. For information about the attack symbology see the VDIG section.
When the IFF interrogator is activated it superimposes the IFF information on top of the normal radar picture if in pulse search. In pulse doppler search the DDD switches to range vs azimuth at the previously set range scale while the IFF information is shown and in PD STT or TWS modes, if the target is hooked on the TID the DDD switches to a ±10 scale centered on the target while the IFF returns are shown.
Tactical Information Display (TID) and Associated Controls
The TID is the main data display for the WCS. It displays a tactical picture to the RIO which is used to identify and select targets for the long range weapons on the F-14 Tomcat. Think of it as a top down map showing the relative coordinates of all presented tracks and symbols, but without a representation of the ground/surface features (map). It is also used in secondary roles as a display for entering data into the WCS, for navigation, for INS alignment and for the on board checkout, OBC.
TID Display Control Knobs
On the upper edge of the TID are two display control knobs (
INS and Navigational Controls
On the upper left corner of the TID is the status display for the INS
(
To the sides of the TID are located two selector knobs. The one on the left side
(
On the right side is the selector knob (
Adjacent to this selector is a readout drum on the upper right edge of the TID
(
Possible steering type shown are: destination (DEST), data link command heading (D/L), azimuth lead collision steering (LD CLSN), collision steering (CLSN), lead pursuit steering (LD PURST), pursuit steering (PURST), TACAN radial (TACAN) and manually set commanded heading (MAN).
TID Data Readout Drum
Above the TID is located the data readout indicator drum (
Symbol indicates that the readout displays data for a hooked symbol on the TID which doesn’t have its own indicator text on the drum. The drum can also show a blank face to indicate the data source as one not having its own indicator text and which has no symbol on the TID.
TRACK HOLD and CLSN buttons
Below the selector knobs on the sides of the TID are two buttons with indicator lights, one on each side. The lights illuminates green to indicate selection.
On the left side is the TRACK HOLD button (
On the right side is the CLSN button (
TID Control Panel
Below the TID is the TID control panel (
| Control/Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| RID DISABLE | Functions as TID Expand. |
| ALT NUM | Altitude numerals, enables display of track altitudes on the left side of track symbols. Shows a single digit representing ten-thousands of feet, 1 as an example indicating an altitude of between 5 000 and 15 000 feet. |
| SYM ELEM | Symbology elements, enables display of all supplementary symbology of tracks and waypoints. If deselected all tracks and waypoints are represented only as dots on the TID. |
| DATA LINK | Enables display of data link tracks. |
| JAM STROBE | Enables display of jam strobes on the TID. Jamming targets exceeding the JAM/JET setting on the DDD are shown if enabled. |
| NON-ATTK | Non-attack, enables or disables display of targets which aren’t possible to engage. Friendly targets being an example. |
| VEL VECTOR | Velocity vector, enables display of velocity vectors on tracks. |
| LAUNCH ZONE | Enables display of weapon launch zones depending on selected missile type. These replace the velocity vectors on relevant targets. This function is automatically enabled by the WCS 60 seconds prior to a target entering maximum launch range. |
The left selector knob on the panel controls displayed TID mode (
GND STAB (ground stabilized) mode stabilizes the display to the ground meaning that the display is fixed while own aircraft moves on the display. True north is used as up on the display.
A/C STAB (aircraft stabilized) mode stabilizes the display to own aircraft meaning that the display moves along with own aircraft which stays put on the display. Own aircraft heading is used as up on the display.
ATTK (attack) functions in the same manner as A/C STAB but superimposes the attack steering symbology.
TV selects the TCS for display on the TID. Disables normal tactical presentation on the TID and on the HSD.
The right selector knob controls the scale on the TID, setting the display
diameter to the selected range (
TID Data Readouts
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| Buffer Register | Shows data that the RIO is currently entering into the WCS. Comparable to a scratchpad in newer aircraft. Functionality further expanded upon in the CAP section. |
| Data Readouts | Readouts showing data selected for readout from the WCS. Can be, as examples, data from hooked tracks or own aircraft. Functionality further expanded upon in the CAP section. |
| Computer Run Indicators | Readouts showing WCS program cycles running. Should continuously cycle numbers, if not this indicates a freeze or lockup in the WCS computer. |
| Antenna Elevation | Shows current AN/AWG-9 radar antenna elevation if in STT or scan pattern elevation center if in a search mode. |
| Scan Pattern Limits | Shows altitude limits of currently selected scan pattern at the current HCU cursor position when half-action is pressed. |
| Navigation Status | Shows current status of the navigation system, IN for INS, AH for AHRS and an alternating MV if the manual magnetic variation differs from calculated magnetic variation. |
| Target Closing Rate | Shows STT target or TWS hooked target closing rate to the closest whole tenth of knots. A plus sign indicates that the track is closing and a minus that the track is opening the distance to own aircraft. |
| Selected Weapon | Indicates currently selected air-to-air weapon. G for gun, SW for sidewinder, SP for sparrow and PH for phoenix. SP and PH also indicates number of missiles of the selected type that are ready for launch. Display is blank in air-to-ground mode. |
TID Symbology
| Element | Shape | Function |
|---|---|---|
| Center Dot | Marks coordinates of symbol, basic component of all symbols representing a coordinate. | |
| Own Aircraft | Symbol representing own aircraft. Antenna scan limits, jamming strobes emanate from this symbol. Moves and has a velocity vector in ground stabilized mode. Stationary in aircraft stabilized and attack modes. If the symbol moves outside of TID presentation a line is drawn from the center of the display to the edge of the display indicating direction of the own aircraft symbol. | |
| TID Cursor | Circle used as a hook cursor. Controlled by the HCU when in TID mode. Half-action on the HCU enables display of the symbol and also enables the HCU stick to move the cursor. The cursor location is set by stick deflection. Full-action on the HCU hooks (selects) the closest symbol if one is present within 0.125 inches of cursor center. The hooked symbol gets brighter to indicate hook. | |
| TWS Steering Centroid | Steering centroid of TWS tracks selected by WCS for weapons engagement. | |
| Unknown Onboard Sensor Target | Unknown sensor track in RWS, TWS, and STT modes. | |
| Hostile Onboard Sensor Target | Track in TWS and STT modes designated as hostile by RIO. | |
| Friend Onboard Sensor Target | Track in TWS and STT modes designated as friendly by RIO. | |
| Angle-Tracked Radar Target | Radar target tracked only in angle (jamming target). | |
| Angle-Tracked Radar Target with Altitude Difference | Radar target being tracked in angle only and range being computed by altitude difference ranging. | |
| TCS-Angle Tracked Target | Target being tracked in angle by TCS. | |
| TCS-Angle Tracked Target with Altitude Difference | Target being tracked in angle by TCS and range being computed by angle difference ranging. | |
| Unknown Data Link Target | Data link track identified as unknown by source. | |
| Hostile Data Link Target | Data link track identified as hostile by source. | |
| Friend Data Link Target | Data link track identified as friendly by source. |
| Manually Entered Reference Points | ||
|---|---|---|
| Home base | Waypoint representing home base, carrier or airfield. | |
| Waypoint | WCS navigational waypoint, supplanted by number indicating waypoint 1, 2 or 3. | |
| Defended Point | Waypoint used to show area to protect. | |
| Fixed Point | Generic fixed-point waypoint. | |
| Hostile Area | Waypoint indicating a hostile area. | |
| Surface Target | Waypoint indicating a surface target. | |
| IP | Waypoint used for air-to-ground engagement, see Computer Initial Point. |
| Data Link Reference Points | ||
|---|---|---|
| Home Base | Data link waypoint representing home base. | |
| Waypoint | Data link generic waypoint. | |
| Data Link Fixed Point | Data link waypoint representing a fixed point. | |
| Data Link Surface Target | Data link waypoint representing a surface target. |
| Position Symbol Modifiers | ||
|---|---|---|
| Mandatory Attack | Additional symbology on a TWS track (horizontal bar through center dot) selected as mandatory attack by the RIO. Only one target can be designated thusly and always receives an engagement priority number. | |
| Data link Destroy | Additional symbology on a data link track (horizontal bar through center dot) designated to be destroyed by data link source. Does not affect target prioritization in WCS. | |
| Do Not Attack | Additional symbology on a TWS or data link track (vertical bar through center dot) designated as do not attack (by RIO) or disengage (via data link). If set by RIO removes target from WCS target prioritization. | |
| Multiple Targets | Additional symbology on a TWS or data link track (horizontal bar on left side of symbol) indicating that the track represents multiple targets. Can be set manually by RIO or received via data link. | |
| Data Link Challenge | Additional symbology on a data link track (small V with apex at center dot) representing data link command to visually identify target. | |
| Track Extrapolated | Additional symbology on TWS or STT track (small X with center at center dot) indicating that no update to target has occurred within 8 seconds. Track will be deleted after 14 seconds or 2 minutes if track hold function is enabled. | |
| Hooked Symbol | Symbol brightens | When a symbol is hooked by HCU or CAP functions it brightens to indicate hook. |
| Target Under Missile Attack | Symbol brightens | In TWS and STT symbols of tracks being engaged by own aircraft brightens during computed missile flight time plus 15 seconds to indicate missile engagement in progress. |
| Target in Optimum Missile Launch Zone | Symbol blinks | In TWS and STT symbols, launch zones and firing order numerics of target tracks blink when time to optimum missile range is less than 8 seconds. |
| Altitude Numerics | When altitude numerics are selected for display a number on the left side of the tracks indicate track altitude to nearest ten thousands of feet. The number four as an example indicates an altitude between 35,000 and 45,000 feet. Available on radar and data link tracks. | |
| Firing Order Numerics | Indicates AIM-54 phoenix target prioritization (1 to 6) in WCS when in the TWS mode. Next missile launch will target track with number 1 and remove the number from that track to advance the other 5 track numbers one step to prepare for next launch. Mandatory attack selection on a target forces the WCS to always include that target in the prioritization. Next launch selection automatically sets hooked target as number one. | |
| Time-to-Impact (TTI) | After AIM-54 launch the firing order number on a track is replaced with the TTI or time-to-impact indication, showing WCS calculated time until missile intercepts the target track. When the AIM-54 active command is sent the TTI numbers flash to indicate this. | |
| Velocity Vector | Velocity vector emanating from center dot of tracks when velocity vector display is selected. Vector direction represents track heading and length represents track speed so that the max indicated speed (1,800 knots) is 1.5 inches on the TID. In TID ground stabilized mode the vector direction represents track true heading and the vector length represents track ground speed. | |
| Launch Zone Vectors | TUMR (Time Until Minimum Range), TUOR (Time Until Optimum Range) and TUIR (Time Until In-Range/Maximum Range). The launch zone vectors are activated manually by the RIO or when time to maximum launch range is less than 60 seconds and replaces the normal track velocity vectors. | |
| Jamming Strobe | Line extending from own aircraft symbol to edge of TID to indicate a jammer exceeding the set JAM/JET threshold. | |
| Radar Antenna Scan Pattern Azimuth Limits | The limits of the radar scan pattern in azimuth is displayed as two dashed lines extending from own aircraft symbol. Each dash and space represent 20 nautical miles each in all radar modes. In STT the two lines converge to a single tracking strobe to indicate that the antenna tracks a single target. | |
| Data Link Jamming Strobe | Jamming strobe received via data link indicated by a line emanating from a data link point towards the jammers direction. | |
| Data Link Pointer | Brightened cursor (circle) around a data link track used to indicate data link operator concern about the specific track. | |
| Data link Priority Kill | Additional symbology on a data link track indicating a target that must be destroyed. Will not by itself affect WCS prioritization. | |
| Artificial Horizon | Artificial horizon on TID representing aircraft roll and pitch. Angle of the line represents roll and vertical deflection on display represents pitch. | |
| Steering Guidance Symbol | Symbol representing steering error from optimal missile launch direction. Should be placed by the pilot as near as possible to the center of the ASE circle and at launch should be inside of that same circle. | |
| Allowable Steering Error Circle | ASE circle used to indicate the allowable steering error for missile launch. Size varies with attack geometry, mode and selected missile. | |
| Breakaway Indication | Large cross appearing in the center of the TID when target range is less than minimum missile launch range or gun firing range. |
💡 Some of these symbols pertain to functions not yet implemented in DCS.
Navigation Command and Control Grid (NAV GRID)
The Navigation Command and Control Grid or NAV GRID was designed to enable easy navigation and CAP control from a common fixed reference point. It enables TID readout of bearing and range from that set reference point, called YY. While NAV GRID is active displayed range and bearing on the TID for hooks and own aircraft is indicated relative YY. Additionally it also displays a grid extending from YY along a set threat axis. The purpose of the grid itself is to allow for quick position reference while a precise readout is available for a hooked target. This is where the name NAV GRID originates.
Lastly it also allows for display of something called Voice Codes. These are displayed for current hook alternating with the altitude readout on the TID if ALT NUM is selected for display. It indicates bearing from YY in tens (15 reading as 150 as an example) followed by a letter indicating range. A would indicate 0-50nm while B indicates 50-100nm and so on for consecutive letters.
The standard NAV GRID display mode is GND STAB and this allows for the grid itself to be visible. If A/C STAB or ATTK display modes are selected only the Voice Code display functionality is retained but it addition to the normal functionality the Ownship Symbol will always display its Voice Code.
As default the grid origin, YY, is positioned at the edge of the TID extending outwards along the set threat axis. The grid can be set to have between 1 and 6 sectors display, all being outlined meaning that the one sector display will have 2 lines delineating the limits and 6 sectors having 7 lines. The size of the sectors depends on the total grid coverage, which can be up to 180 degrees, which is then divided into the selected number of sectors. Range indicator marks are drawn along the sector demarkation lines at 50nm intervals, the 50nm marks being shorter than the even 100nm markers.
The ground stab view as well as the grid can be offset as normal by the RIO via the HCU. To reset the offset, cycle to any aircraft stabilized mode and back to GND STAB.
While the original purpose of this functionality was intended for fleet defence use it works perfectly fine as a bulls-eye reference in DCS with YY set to the bulls-eye. The only real limitation being the grid only displaying along the threat axis and not all around.
Operation
NAV GRID entry
| 1. | Set the TID MODE knob to GND STAB. | |
| 2. | Select D/L category on the CAP CATEGORY knob. | |
| 3. | Select the CAP MESSAGE button corresponding to NAV GRID. | |
| 4. | Enter grid coverage angle using the ALT/4 button on the CAP. | Press CLEAR, ALT/4 and enter desired grid coverage angle followed by ENTER. |
| 5. | Enter numbers of grid sectors using the NBR/2 button on the CAP. | Press CLEAR, NBR/2 and enter desired numbers of sectors followed by ENTER. |
| 6. | Enter YY location using the LAT/1 and LONG/6 or RNG/5 and BRG/0 CAP buttons. | Press CLEAR, LAT/1 and enter desired latitude followed by ENTER. Repeat for longitude using LONG/6 or use RNG/5 and BRG/0 instead of both for YY location referenced from own aircraft position. |
| 7. | Enter the threat axis using the HDG/8 CAP button. | Press CLEAR, HDG/8 and enter desired threat axis extending from YY followed by ENTER. |
💡
- First pressing CLEAR is to make sure to reset any previously selected readout so that a subsequent press of a prefix sets a new readout for display and data entry and not enters new data into a previous readout instead. This is further detailed under Computer Address Panel (CAP).
- Modification and display of the NAV GRID readouts are available in NAV GRID with no hook present, i.e. OWN A/C as hook.
- Enter NAV GRID from the tactical display (GND STAB), do not attempt to enter it during alignment.
NAV GRID exit
- Deselect the CAP MESSAGE button corresponding to NAV GRID under the D/L category on the CAP.
NAV GRID in DCS
When hot spawning in DCS YY will be set to mission bulls-eye for your faction and threat axis will be set from YY to first valid waypoint in the following order: HA, DP, ST, FP, 3, 2, 1 and HB or own aircraft position at spawn if none of those waypoints are present.
When cold starting with Jester he has to be commanded to adjust these parameters via the Jester wheel. He can enter YY using the same methods available for waypoints as well as entering a waypoint’s location as YY.
With a human RIO he/she will have to enter it manually.
Hand Control Unit (HCU)
The hand control unit (HCU), stick and corresponding controls are the main input controlling the RIO WCS displays. It contains the power controls and indicators for the WCS and TCS in addition to the stick and it’s controls.
HCU Power Controls and Indicators
The lights on the upper edge of the HCU are the IR/TV overtemp indicator
(
The IR/TV switch (
The two buttons in the upper middle of the HCU are the LIGHT TEST
(
HCU Mode buttons
The four lighted buttons on the left side (
HCU Control Stick
The controls on the HCU stick are: the action trigger switch (
The elevation vernier control is a thumbwheel on the left side of the stick used in the TCS and radar modes to fine tune sensor elevation ±4° for target acquisition, this elevation deflection is added to the normal sensor elevation control. The OFFSET button on the top of the stick is used to offset any of the TID tactical displays, moving the own aircraft symbol to the TID cursor spot hook (if present) and the rest of the symbology relative to that. This function is reset and all the symbols are moved to the original positions by cycling the TID display mode selector to another mode and back. The MRL button on the right side of the stick is used to enable the manual rapid lockon mode (MRL) for target acquisition. See Manual Rapid Lockon (MRL) for more information.
The stick itself functions differently depending on selected HCU mode. In all cases the stick is only enabled with the action trigger depressed and all modes control sensor or cursor position absolutely meaning that a given deflection of the stick always moves the sensor or cursor to the same position. In the TCS mode X (up/down) controls TCS elevation and Y (left/right) controls TCS azimuth. In the radar mode X controls the range or rate of the radar acquisition gate on the DDD and Y controls the gate in azimuth in a similar fashion. In the two cursor modes X controls up/down of the cursor on the respective screen and Y controls left/right of the same.
Computer Address Panel (CAP)
The computer address panel (CAP) is the RIO’s main interface for controlling and entering/reading data into/from the WCS computer.
Numeric Keypad (3)
The upper part of the CAP contains a numeric keypad with additional buttons for clearing input (CLEAR), entering input (ENTER) and two buttons for selecting S/-/W and N/+/E prefixes for coordinates and other values. Some of the number keys have an additional function selecting a prefix for data display and/or entry. The keys containing functions and what those are:
| Key | Function |
|---|---|
| 1 | LAT - Latitude, selects latitude for display and entry. |
| 2 | NBR - Number, used for IFT and BITs as well as NAVGRID. |
| 3 | SPD - Speed, selects speed for display and entry. |
| 4 | ALT - Altitude, selects altitude for display and entry. |
| 5 | RNG - Range, selects range for display and entry. |
| 6 | LONG - Longitude, selects longitude for display and entry. |
| 8 | HDG - Heading, selects heading for display and entry. |
| 0 | BRG - Bearing, selects bearing for display and entry. |
Some of these keys also makes a corresponding other data be displayed on the TID readouts but entry only affects the selected prefix. As an example LAT also makes the readout display LONG but entry affects LAT only, SPD and HDG are another example of the same thing.
CAP Message Matrix Indicator Drum and buttons
The middle/lower part of the panel contains the message buttons and indicator drum and its CATEGORY selector knob. Its functionality is somewhat akin to the buttons on a MFD in a more modern system except that instead of a screen the drum is used to display the current functionality of the buttons.
The current functionality of the buttons are chosen by selecting a category on the CATEGORY selector knob, movement of the selector turns the display drum to indicate selected category’s button functionality. When a function or symbol hook is in use the corresponding message button illuminates to indicate activation.
The matrixes and corresponding functionality of the different categories are as follows:
Categories
BIT (Built in Test)
The BIT category contains message button functions pertaining to BIT initiation of different aircraft systems. These might be functions normally run during OBC during startup or separate tests only available from here. This will be detailed in a separate chapter about on board tests and BIT when implemented, not currently implemented in this simulation.
SPL (Special)
The SPL category contains various message button functions not contained under the other categories. Currently only the IP TO TGT function is implemented and used for the Computer Initial Point air to ground mode, see Computer Initial Point. It also contains a button for manually initiating the OBC routine (OBC BIT), a button for displaying latest OBC results (MAINT DISP) and a button for clearing the latest OBC results (OBC DISPL). These and the other functions are not yet implemented.
NAV (Navigation)
The NAV category contains message button functions used for navigational fixes and updating data used by for INS operation and alignment. The OWN A/C (own aircraft) button selects own aircraft for data readout and entry, the same as hooking the own aircraft symbol on the TID. Its used to enter data critical for INS alignment like aircraft coordinates and altitude (and heading and speed when performing a handset alignment) and can also be used for readout of the various data available about own aircraft. The STORED HDG ALIGN button is used to store and indicate if a stored heading align is available. It also allows deselection of the function resulting in a normal alignment. The WIND SPD HDG button selects entry and display of wind data, can also be used to enter wind speed and heading manually for backup navigation. The MAG VAR (HDG) button is used to display and enter magnetic variation used by the navigational system. The four FIX buttons, TACAN FIX, RDR FIX (radar), VIS FIX (visual) and FIX ENABLE are used to update aircraft position to correct for INS drift. Basic function is the selection of type of fix followed by FIX ENABLE to enter it into the system. Full procedures for these fixes can be found in the navigational section in this chapter. The two TARPS buttons are non-functional in a non TARPS aircraft.
TAC DATA (Tactical Data)
The TAC DATA category contains message button functionality allowing for hook/selection of the different waypoints available in the WCS navigational system. The same hook can be made via HCU hook on the TID. Hooking the waypoints enables them to be updated via the CAP keypad. The PT TO PT button is non-functional.
DATA LINK
The DATA LINK category contains message button functionality for RIO data link responses to data link controller commands. The WILCO (will comply), CANTCO (can not comply) tells the controller if own aircraft can or can not comply to a command. POINT enables the RIO to mark a hooked track sent to the controller for special attention. ENGAGE likewise indicates own intention to engage a hooked track. The NAV GRID button enables the NAV GRID functionality on the TID, see Navigation Command and Control Grid (NAV GRID). The TID AVIA button enables the AVIA display on the TID. The F/F NAV UPDATE allows for Link-4C fighter to fighter navigational updates. See the navigation chapter. Remaining buttons are non-functional.
TARGET DATA
The TARGET DATA category contains message button functionality used to modify hooked track symbols. The FRIEND, UNK (Unknown), HOST (Hostile) and MULT TGT (Multiple Target) message functions are used to mark a hooked symbol as the respective category (multiple target can be set in addition to the other three). The DO NOT ATTK button sets a target as a do not attack target, removing it from the WCS firing order. The DATA TRANS (Data Transfer) function enables a hooked jam strobe to be correlated with another hooked track symbol. This is used to allow the WCS to better use both data sources to track the target. The strobe needs to be hooked before the symbol. Currently not implemented. TEST TGT (Test Target) calls up a simulated test target in the WCS for test purposes. Currently not implemented. The SYM DELETE (Symbol Delete) allows the RIO to manually drop/remove a track or waypoint from the TID if no longer relevant. Own aircraft and data link track symbols can not be removed. IFT AUX LAUNCH and GND MAP are non-functional.
Program Restart Button
Below the message readout and buttons are two final buttons on the panel. The PRGM RESTRT (Program Restart) button resets the currently running program in case of a computer hang-up. A computer hang-up is indicated when the computer run indicator digits on the TID stops cycling. The last button is the TUNE DSBL button which is non-functional in this F-14 version.
Data Readout/Entry Procedure
Data readout and entry on the TID always follows the following sequence:
- Selection of symbol/function
- Prefix selection for display
- Data entry
Selection of desired symbol or function can be achieved either via TID hook or via the CAP MESSAGE buttons available under the different categories on the CAP DRUM.
Most data readout prefixes display multiple readouts, as an example calling up either latitude or longitude shows both and calling up range also displays bearing and vice versa. Only the selected prefix is the one used for data entry.
To select another prefix for data readout without re-selecting the message function the CLEAR key on the CAP is used, this resets the readout and allows for selection of a new prefix. As it’s possible that depression of a prefix button is read as a data entry if a prefix is already selected it’s normally recommended to reset using CLEAR before re-selecting a new prefix. This makes the recommended sequence:
- Selection of symbol/function
- CLEAR
- Prefix
- selection for display
- Data entry
To enter new data into selected prefix the RIO enters desired data after the prefix selection, checks it is correct and then enters it with the ENTER key. The TID readout is then updated with the new data. To clear the data without entering it, instead use the CLEAR key.
Sensor Control Panel
The sensor control panel contains the main controls for the AN/AWG-9 radar antenna scan patterns. It also contains various TCS controls, a control allowing the RIO to slave the radar to the TCS and vice versa and controls for the airborne video tape recorder (AVTR).
Antenna Search Pattern Selection
The upper half of panel contains controls for the radar antenna scan pattern. The STAB (stabilization) switch controls whether the radar antenna scan pattern is stabilized relative to the horizon (IN) or not. If in OUT instead meaning that the scan pattern is relative to the F-14 aircraft armament datum line (ADL). The WCS computer can override this setting if necessary. The AZ CTR (azimuth control) and EL CTR (elevation control) knobs sets the elevation and azimuth centerpoint of the antenna scan pattern. The azimuth control moves the azimuth scan center within 65° degrees of the aircraft centerline, this is has no effect if azimuth scan width is set to ±65° as it already scans the whole available azimuth range. Do not move the scan pattern so that it scans outside of 65° from aircraft centerline as this might damage the antenna as it might hit the antenna azimuth stops. The elevation control moves the elevation position of the bottom bar of the elevation scan pattern relative to zero elevation. It can move from -76° to +54°. Both control knobs have marked centerpoints, being aircraft centerline and zero elevation respectively.
The AZ SCAN (azimuth scan) and EL BARS (elevation bars) selector knobs control the size of the antenna scan pattern, in degrees either side of center. The AZ SCAN selector knob has four settings, ±10°, ±20°, ±40° and ±65°. The EL BARS selector knob also has four settings, 1, 2, 4 or 8 bars. 1 bar covers 2.3° of elevation, 2 bars 3.6°, 4 bars 6.3° and 8 bars 11.5°. The reason for the elevation coverage not equalling one bar times the number of bars is that the bars overlap slightly.
The last radar control on the panel is the VSL switch. Momentary selection of VSL HIGH or LOW activates the vertical scan lockon acquisition mode (VSL). (See Vertical Scan Lockon (VSL))
The lower part of the panel contains controls for the airborne video tape recorder (AVTR) controlling and indicating power mode and time remaining on tape.
💡 This is currently not modelled in DCS.
General Radar Operation
The AN/AWG-9 radar has two basic operational modes, pulse and pulse doppler, each with its own pros and cons. Below is a table listing function, weapons capability, expected range and target data available.
| Mode | Function | Weapons capability | Detection-range |
|---|---|---|---|
| Pulse | |||
| Pulse Search | Medium range search and detection, secondary air-to-ground. | Boresight missiles. | 60nm |
| Pulse STT | Short to medium range single target track and missile launch. | Gun and missiles, AIM-7 in CW and AIM-54 in active launch. | 50nm |
| Pulse Doppler | |||
| Pulse Doppler Search | Long range search and detection. | Boresight missiles. | 110nm |
| Range While Search | Long range search, detection and ranging. | Boresight missiles. | 90nm |
| Track While Search | Long range search, detection, multiple target track and missile guidance. | AIM-54, multiple target capability. | 90nm |
| Pulse Doppler STT | Long range single target track and missile guidance. | Gun and all missiles. AIM-7 in PD and CW and AIM-54 in PD and active. | 90nm |
💡 Detection-range approximation for a 5m²-target.
Pulse Mode
In the pulse mode of operation the AN/AWG-9 does not use pulse doppler filtering which means that it can be used to detect targets at all aspects and also be used for rudimentary ground mapping. On the pro side this means that the radar in this mode cannot be notched as it does not need to have a relative speed to register the target. The downside however is that the radar does not have an easy way of differentiate between unwanted ground reflections and real targets meaning that aircraft can hide in the ground clutter near the ground. Because of this and the increased difficulty from trying to differentiate real targets from the general background noise without doppler filtering means that the range in the pulse modes are less than in the pulse doppler modes.
The radar has two pulse modes, pulse search and pulse single target track (P-STT).
Pulse Search (PULSE SRCH)
Pulse search is used to search for and find airborne targets at range.
It is possible to use this radar mode as a basic ground mapper as well which can be useful for navigation and navigational fixes and can also be used in a pinch to detect larger surface targets like ships. Keep in mind though that the radar is not built with this as its main function and that a real air-to-ground radar will outperform it handily.
In this mode the radar cannot by itself differentiate targets and generate tracks meaning that the WCS will not generate track files and display anything on the TID. This also means that pulse search is not capable of guiding missiles.
The DDD in this mode will display a radar image indicating the azimuth and range of targets at selected scale and it is possible to transition to P STT using the RDR mode with the HCU stick. It is possible to select ground or aircraft stabilized modes of operation using the STAB switch on the sensor control panel.
Pulse Single Target Track (P-STT)
Pulse STT is used to track a single target, like pulse search mode it is not susceptible to notching but it is to ground clutter. The fact that the STT modes use gates to track the target, in this case range gates, means that it is less susceptible to ground clutter but a target close enough to the ground that the ground return enters the range gates would be likely to shake the lock.
As it is only in the pulse doppler modes that the missile guidance commands can be sent pulse STT is limited to launching AIM-7s in CW mode and AIM-54s in active launch mode limiting their ranges. At short ranges, ACM ranges, it is possible to use the ASPECT switch to set what aspect of the target to track, this is just to counter different types of countermeasures. As an example, if set to NOSE the radar will be less susceptible to chaff as the radar weights its track towards the targets leading edge (nose) away from the chaff being launched behind the target.
A successful track is indicated by the ANT TRK and RDROT indicator lights on the DDD, meaning that the antenna is tracking the target and that the target is within the range gates. If the target is jamming with sufficient strength, negating a range track, the radar will transition to a jam angle track instead, indicated by the JAT indicator light on the DDD illuminating instead of the RDROT. When range tracking is again possible at closer ranges the radar will transition to that instead.
The DDD in this mode will be similar to the pulse search mode but the antenna will be locked onto the target and not scan. Additionally the DDD will show the range gates around the target, a closing rate symbol at the right scale and applicable attack symbology if a valid missile is selected.
Pulse Doppler Mode
In pulse doppler mode the AN/AWG-9 uses doppler filters to filter out unwanted returns, enhancing target detection and thus increasing detection range. The pros of this mode being that, as said, targets can be detected at greater ranges, ground returns mostly eliminated and missile guidance commands be sent to AIM-7 and AIM-54 missiles. The AIM-54 both in TWS and STT and the AIM-7 in STT only. The biggest con of this mode being that it is susceptible to notching as a target returning zero relative speed will be filtered out.
The pulse doppler modes of the AN/AWG-9 are, pulse doppler search, range while search, track while scan and pulse doppler STT. The three search modes have a common DDD display, the main difference being that pulse doppler search has a slightly better range as the other two modes need to process FM-ranging to enable range indication of tracked targets.
Pulse Doppler Search Modes
The DDD in the pulse doppler search modes displays returns at azimuth versus rate (closing speed) meaning that by reading only the DDD the RIO can only discern target closing speed and azimuth. The display indicates observed closure rate vs the ground (with own airspeed subtracted) as opposed to relative closure rate. While this means that a target directly ahead, moving directly towards the radar, will show true target airspeed this speed varies with target aspect and radar antenna azimuth. This reason for this is that the radar itself only reads relative airspeed which is then modified by subtracting own airspeed for display on the DDD.
At the bottom edge of the DDD the AGC-trace is displayed indicating radar return intensity enabling the RIO to discern jamming targets by their return strength. The jamming targets are shown as jamming strobes on the TID if they exceed the set jamming threshold (set by the JAM/JET knob on the DDD).
The scale shown on the DDD (what rate region is shown) can be set by the Vc switch on the DDD panel. X-4 sets the scale to 800 knots opening to 4 000 knots closing, NORM sets the scale to 200 knots opening to 1 000 knots closing and VID sets the scale to 50 knots opening to 250 knots closing. The operating range of the doppler filters can also be configured by the ASPECT switch on the same panel, NOSE sets 600 knots opening to 1 800 knots closing, BEAM sets 1200 knots closing to 1200 knots opening and TAIL sets 1 800 knots opening to 600 knots closing. This allows the RIO to optimize the doppler filters for a known target closing speed and this affects the whole radar processing unlike the Vc switch which only affects the DDD.
Because of the way the radar operates the doppler filters it will have two blind ranges. The main lobe clutter (MLC) region which contains most of the ground returns, including those returning with zero groundspeed and is 266 knots wide, centered around own aircraft groundspeed (133 knots slower and 133 knots faster). This is the reason that the radar can be notched as a target with the same relative groundspeed as the ground will also be filtered out. This is however only true for look-down conditions as when the radar antenna looks up into the sky this filter isn’t necessary and can be turned off. If the MLC switch on the DDD panel is in AUTO the radar will automatically turn off the MLC filter if looking more than 3 degrees above the horizon. It can also be turned off manually by the RIO but if the antenna looks down this can make the displays unusable in RWS and TWS as all of the ground returns will be sent to the computer for tracking. In whichever case, with the MLC filter off, the target cannot notch the AN/AWG-9 if it is above the radar.
The second filter, and second blind spot, of the radar is the zero doppler filter (ZDF). This blind area is centered around a closure rate of negative own ground speed, meaning a target moving away from own aircraft at the same speed as own aircraft. This blind area is a hardware limitation as it is a doppler radar mode it cannot detect targets without a doppler shift. The resulting blind area is 200 knots wide, meaning that a chased target moving at a speed of within 100 knots (+/-) of own groundspeed will be invisible to the radar. This means that when chasing a fleeing target it may very well be necessary to use the pulse modes instead.
💡 If a jamming target enters the zero doppler filter region, the radar will switch to tracking the jamming source and maintain the target track. However, if the target stops jamming while it's in the ZDF, the target track will be lost but the target can get picked up again if the target resumes jamming.
Both filters vary with azimuth as own airspeed relative to target varies with aspect. Relative airspeed from a target at 45° will be less than a target at 0° as own speed vector will be pointing away from it slightly. This is the reason for the mainlobe clutter trace presenting a curve on the DDD as the observed speed of the returning ground returns will vary with azimuth.
Target groundspeed 900 knots, own airspeed 1200 knots. See table below for details, line of sight rate is the sum of target and own aircraft relative rate.
| No. | Look Angle | Line of Sight Rate | Target Heading |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 60° | 1490 | 180° |
| 2 | 45° | 1500 | 120° |
| 3 | 30° | 1428 | 100° |
| 4 | 0° | 1200 | 90° |
| 5 | 30° | 672 | 80° |
| 6 | 45° | 210 | 60° |
| 7 | 60° | -300 | 0° |
💡 Position
4 has the target in a flanking or "notching" position making it disappear inside the MLC filter or MLC ground return. In a look-up situation with the MLC filter disabled the target would still be visible.
Additionally, all pulse doppler search modes use ground stabilization exclusively and thus the STAB switch is inoperative.
Pulse Doppler Search (PD SRCH)
The pulse doppler search mode is used mainly as a kind of early warning mode. It is the search mode with the greatest detection range but it can display no range to the RIO, only closure rate. For this reason, the TID can display no track information.
Range While Search (RWS)
In range while search a frequency measuring ranging mode is added (FM ranging) to allow the radar to measure range of tracked targets in addition to closure rate. This additional processing does however mean that the effective range of the radar is somewhat lesser. The display on the DDD is the same as in pulse doppler search, the TID however also shows tracks in this mode showing the targets as tracks momentarily as they’re scanned and displaying their position and altitude. The targets are shown for a maximum of two seconds or until the antenna again scans the same bar at the same azimuth at which time it is removed unless detected again. Maximum number of concurrently shown tracks are 48.
Hot Range While Search (HRWS)
HRWS functions the same as the RWS, with one notable exception. In HRWS the radar will attempt to STT the first target within the scan limit. HRWS is entered by depressing RWS and PDSTT within 2 seconds of each other.
Track While Scan (TWS)
The track while scan mode uses the same FM ranging as RWS with the same reduction in range compared to pulse doppler search and the DDD display is also the same. The main difference that the computer establishes track files and tracks up to 24 targets concurrently of which 18 can be shown on the TID at any given time.
As the computer routine calculating these tracks need a set track refresh time of 2 seconds this limits available azimuth scan area and bar settings to either 20° 4 bars or 40° 2 bars. When entering TWS the computer automatically selects the ±20° 4 bar scan disregarding the RIO set scan volumes unless those are set to ±40° 2 bars in which case that is used instead.
The TWS mode is also the only mode enabling guidance of the AIM-54 at multiple targets (up to six), and as soon as engageable targets are detected the computer starts assigning them a missile priority number according to optimal missile firing sequence.
The TWS has two sub-modes available, TWS Auto (TWS AUTO) and TWS Manual (TWS MAN), which one is used is selected by the RIO with the corresponding button on the DDD panel. What differs between the two is that in TWS auto the computer takes control of used scan volume and scan pattern azimuth and elevation as soon as target tracks are present. The WCS computer automatically tries to optimize the scan volume and direction so that tracking of the prioritized targets is maximized. If not selected before launch the WCS overrides as soon as the first AIM-54 is launched and selects TWS Auto.
In TWS the pilot is guided to the computed centroid of the tracked targets via the navigational cues and this centroid is also displayed on the TID as a small x-shaped cross.
For additional information about TWS symbology and missile guidance see TWS and TID Symbology.
Pulse Doppler Single Target Track (PD-STT)
The pulse doppler STT works and looks much like the pulse STT mode. It does however have the same advantages and disadvantages compared to pulse STT as the other pulse doppler modes compared to the pulse modes. This means that while much better at tracking a target close to the ground it is however vulnerable to notching.
The DDD display for pulse doppler STT looks like pulse STT display except that the target return and antenna azimuth display is moved to the left side of the screen and a generated synthetic target marker is displayed at the correct azimuth instead. This is so that the targets range can be displayed by the synthetic target unlike the other pulse doppler modes which only shows closure rate. The other symbology on the DDD in this mode are the same as in pulse STT.
Unlike in pulse STT however the AN/AWG-9 can send missile guidance commands in pulse doppler STT enabling launch of AIM-7 and AIM-54 in pulse doppler mode. This is the mode with the greatest launch ranges for those missiles with the disadvantage, in the case of the AIM-54, of only being able to engage one target at a time.
HCU Stick in Radar Mode
When using the AN/AWG-9 radar in the different search modes it’s possible to manually use the HCU stick with radar mode selected to select a target on the DDD for STT lock.
Pressing the HCU trigger to half-action while in radar mode displays the acquisition gates on the DDD and enables the supersearch mode in the radar. In supersearch mode the antenna does a ±10° search pattern at the selected amount of bars around the acquisition gates.
The acquisition gates can then be steered over the detected position of the target with the HCU, left/right used to steer azimuth and up/down used to steer range or rate depending on if pulse or pulse doppler is used. The antenna elevation is then fine-tuned using the elevation vernier on the HCU until the target return is visible within the acquisition gates. At that time the RIO can then select full-action on the HCU trigger, commanding the radar to attempt a lockon at the commanded azimuth, range/rate and elevation.
If successfully executed the radar then transitions into the respective STT mode and the correct indicators on the DDD illuminates. Pulse STT is used if transitioning from pulse search and pulse doppler STT if transitioning from any of the pulse doppler search modes.
Transitional Modes
The transitional modes are the ones used to transition into the single target tracks from the search modes, ACM modes, via TCS or between the two STT modes.
Transition Between the Two STT Modes
If necessary it is possible to transition between pulse STT and pulse doppler STT by pressing the corresponding button. If the transition fails the radar reverts to the respective search mode of the commanded STT mode (pulse search if pulse STT was selected and vice versa).
Transition Back to Search
If the RIO wishes to transition back to a search mode he commands half-action and releases it causing the radar to return to pulse search if in pulse STT and pulse doppler search if in pulse doppler STT.
If the radar loses target lock in STT and cannot reacquire it reverts to the respective search mode as when the RIO transitions manually via half-action.
VSL and MRL can also be reset and returned to search the same way but PLM being prioritized means that the only way to deselect PLM is either target lockon and transition to pulse STT or the pilot selecting the PLM button again telling the radar to return to pulse search.
TWS STT Acquisition
In TWS it is possible to attempt an STT lockon by hooking a track on the TID and then selecting either pulse STT or pulse doppler STT on the DDD panel. The WCS computer then commands the antenna in supersearch to the hooked tracks azimuth, range/rate and elevation and attempts a lockon if a target is detected.
Unlike in a manual HCU acquisition this process is completely automated but its success rate is also less than a manual transition.
ACM Modes
The AN/AWG-9 has three distinct ACM acquisition modes. Pilot lockon mode (PLM), vertical scan lockon (VSL) and manual rapid lockon (MRL).
The ACM modes are listed in priority order, the different modes overriding other modes lower in the prioritization. This means that PLM always overrides VSL and lower modes and VSL overrides PAL and lower modes but not PLM and so on.
All of the modes can be exited by the RIO selecting half-action and release on the HCU except PLM which will be in effect until the pilot releases the PLM button.
Pilot Lockon Mode (PLM)
The PLM is the ACM mode with the highest priority, it always overrides any other radar mode and is enabled when the pilot presses the PLM button on the front of the right throttle. Depression of that button commands the antenna to the armament datum line (ADL) and causes it to lock onto the first target seen out to 5 NM.
Thus the procedure to use PLM is for the pilot to fly the ADL marker on the HUD over the target and then press and hold the PLM button until lockon occurs. The PLM continues until a target is detected and transition to pulse STT occurs or the PLM button is released making the radar transition to pulse search instead.
Vertical Scan Lockon (VSL)
The VSL mode is enabled by the pilot or the RIO and is used to acquire a target at own aircraft's current heading from an elevation of -15° to +55°. The RIO can use the VSL switch on the sensor control panel in the RIO cockpit. Two sub-modes are available by placing the switch into either VSL HI (high) or VSL LO (low) and releasing it back to center. The pilot can enable VSL HI or LO by selecting UP or DN respectively on the target designate switch when not in A/G mode.
This commands the antenna to start a volume 5° wide in a circular fashion. If VSL HI is commanded the vertical area covered is from +15° to +55° and if VSL LO is commanded the area covered is from -15° to +25°. VSL is indicated on the HUD by the diamond moving with antenna line of sight indicating its current position.
When a target is detected within 5 NM the radar transitions into pulse STT, otherwise it continues in VSL until another mode is selected.
Pilot Automatic Lockon (PAL)
PAL is enabled by the pilot selecting DES on the target designate switch when not in A/G mode.
PAL commands the antenna to an 8-bar ±20° scan pattern locking onto the first target detected out to 15 NM. This mode is indicated by the diamond on the HUD following current antenna line of sight.
Manual Rapid Lockon (MRL)
The manual rapid lockon (MRL) mode allows the RIO to quickly acquire a target within the antenna limits out to 5 NM. When the MRL button on the right side of the HCU stick is depressed it commands the radar to start a one-bar supersearch pattern out to 5 NM.
The HCU stick controls the supersearch pattern in azimuth and elevation (left/right controlling azimuth and up/down controlling elevation). The DDD displays a normal supersearch pattern in 5 NM scale and additionally two tick marks are shown at the edge of the scan pattern indicating current elevation.
When the target is visible the RIO commands full-action to acquire the target and transfer to pulse STT. If only half-action is commanded after entering into MRL and then released the radar transfers back to pulse search.
AN/AXX-1 TCS
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate Airman Justin S. Osborne. (030418-N-0382O-591)
The television camera set, or TCS, was constructed as a replacement for the IRST which was present in the first F-14As produced. When the IRST was found to have insufficient capability it was decided to replace it with the TCS giving the F-14 a long range visual identification capability.
The TCS is located underneath and behind the radar radome, just in front of the nose gear well. It contains an aircraft stabilized high resolution (for its time) closed circuit television camera. The sensor has two fields of view (FOV), narrow (NFOV) which is 0.44° or 10X magnification and wide (WFOV) which is 1.42° or 4X magnification. The gimbal limits are +/- 15° except upwards which is limited to +11° and the TCS is capable of independent contrast lock or being slaved to the AN/AWG-9 radar.
The TCS is controlled by the RIO using the sensor control panel, DDD, TID and the HCU. Video from the sensor can be displayed on the TID and the VDI in the front seat. Also, the video can be recorded using the airborne video tape recorder for later review. (Not currently implemented in DCS.)
Controls
The controls for the TCS are located in the RIO cockpit at the sensor control panel, the DDD and the HCU/TID. The pilot display control panel contains a switch allowing display of TCS video on the VDI.
Sensor Control Panel
The controls on the sensor control panel for the TCS are; the TCS trim knobs, the SLAVE switch, the field of view, FOV, switch and the acquire, ACQ, switch.
The TCS TRIM knobs controls TCS sensor line of sight, LOS, calibration relative the AN/AWG-9 radar LOS. If needed these can be used to trim the TCS so that the two sensors LOS correlate. They have a ±2° range of motion and the easiest way to check and calibrate the TCS is to lock up a friendly target in STT and adjust the knobs until the TCS LOS is correctly aimed at the locked target.
The SLAVE switch controls which sensor is controlled by the other. If set to RDR the radar is slaved to the TCS as long as an optical track exists. If set to INDEP each sensor operates independently of the other. And if set to TCS the TCS is slaved to radar LOS as long as an STT track exists.
The FOV, field of view switch controls what FOV is used in the TCS. WIDE sets the 1.42°, 4X magnification FOV and NAR sets the narrow 0.44°, 10X magnification FOV.
Lastly the ACQ, acquire switch controls the acquisition mode in use in the TCS. AUTO SRCH enables an automatic acquisition mode with a search pattern, enabling acquisition of the closest target even if outside current FOV. MAN selects purely manual acquisition with the HCU where the target needs to be pointed at directly. AUTO sets an automatic acquisition mode without a search pattern making the TCS snap to a target as long as it’s inside the TCS FOV.
TCS Controls
The TCS TRIM knobs controls TCS calibration in azimuth (AZ) and elevation (EL). This is used to calibrate the TCS line of sight to be equal to the radar line of sight. Normally this is done by locking a target in STT, setting slave to TCS and then fine-tuning the calibration knobs until the TCS looks directly at the locked target.
The last two switches controlling the TCS are the ACQ (acquisition) and FOV (field of view) switches. The ACQ switch controls how the TCS locks onto targets. AUTO SRCH means the TCS will move by itself in a limited search pattern trying to find a target. MAN (manual) means the TCS only locks onto targets if commanded to by the HCU in TCS mode and AUTO means the TCS automatically tries to lock onto targets entering its field of view. The FOV switch sets whether the WIDE or NAR (narrow) field of view is used by the TCS.
DDD
The DDD contains two indicators pertaining to the TCS.
The DDD EL meter shows current elevation of the TCS sensor LOS as long as the IR/TV mode is selected on the HCU.
The IROT light indicates the presence of a TCS track. The IROT acronym is inherited from the IRST which the TCS replaced.
HCU/TID
The HCU contains the power switch and indicator for the TCS as well as a button enabling selection for using the HCU to control the TCS while the TID itself has a control knob enabling display of the TCS video on the TID as well as a brightness and contrast control for the video on the TID.
The IR/TV power switch is located on the top left corner on the HCU panel and controls power to the TCS. OFF disables all power to the TCS. STBY enables power to the cooling fans and heaters in the TCS. IR/TV supplies power to all systems in the TCS, allow 1-2 minutes for the TCS to spin up and deliver video. TCS symbology on the TID on the other hand will be available directly. There is also no need to select the STBY position first, setting the switch to IR/TV directly works fine.
The indication light next to the power switch indicates a TCS over temperature condition is lit. If present the TCS should be powered off to prevent damage to the system.
The IR/TV button next to the HCU stick enables HCU stick control of the TCS sensor, half-action to manually control sensor LOS and full-action to command target acquisition.
On the TID display control the TID MODE switch set to TV enables display of the TCS video on the TID. Note that this disables the TID repeat on the HSD.
Finally the CONTRAST and BRIGHTNESS knobs on the upper part of the TID can be used to control the TCS video shown on the TID.
Symbology
On the TID in non TV mode a TCS track is indicated by a 1.5" strobe at TCS LOS azimuth with a hollow circle at the end.
The symbology on the video feed from the TCS has indicators for the FOV and two crosshairs indicating TCS LOS relative own aircraft, GACH, and AN/AWG-9 radar LOS relative TCS LOS, RACH. Additionally the track window is indicated by 4 small squares representing each corner of that window.
The field of view lines are shown when in the wide FOV indicating the size of the area visible when switching to the narrow FOV. They consist of two parallel lines together creating the sides of an imaginary box indicating the narrow FOV size.
The gimbal angle crosshairs or GACH, which is a solid cross, indicate deflection of the TCS LOS from the aircraft datum line, ADL. GACH crosshair in center indicates TCS LOS along ADL and deflection towards the edges indicate deflection towards the gimbal limits with the video edges being maximum deflection.
RACH or radar angle crosshairs, a dashed crosshair, indicate radar antenna LOS when inside the current TCS FOV. When the sensors are slaved to one another RACH and GACH will coincide creating a single solid crosshair.
The track window indicates the area that the TCS contrast tracker is currently locked on to if it has acquired a target. When not in an active track these squares collapse into the center of the display being 2% of the screen width when in manual mode and 5% when in an auto mode.
TCS Operation
All acquisition modes of the TCS have in common that they can be controlled using the HCU in IR/TV mode. Selection of the IR/TV button on the HCU enables this mode and also sets the DDD EL meter (right indicator) to show current TCS sensor LOS elevation. Half-action enables the HCU to directly control the LOS of the TCS and full-action commands target acquisition using the selected acquisition mode.
For manual, MAN, TCS acquisition mode this means that the HCU must be used in half-action to position the tracking window indication over the target and then selecting full-action. If successfully acquired the track window will then expand to encompass the target and tracking will begin.
In automatic, AUTO acquisition mode half-action works the same but when selecting full-action for acquisition the TCS will instead automatically try to lock on to the target closest to the center in the current FOV. Automatic search, AUTO SRCH mode further enhances this by enabling a search pattern around the commanded FOV (by moving the sensor LOS) acquiring the first found target.
When using the TCS slave to radar option the two auto modes will automatically try to lock on to the STT target as soon as it exists and the TCS has been slewed to that target, enabling a fully automatic track of a target locked in STT. Additionally, as soon as a track is acquired from an STT lock the TCS will compare its own LOS to the radar LOS to check if the correct target has been locked, if the two LOS differ by more than a couple of degrees during a 3-second window a new acquisition will be attempted. The manual mode will also slave to radar LOS but will not lock on, instead just following the radar LOS.
To unlock a tracked target when not being slaved to radar, select half-action and release.
For information about RDR slaved to TCS check the relevant AN/AWG-9 section.
TCS Slave Radar Acquisition
The TCS can be used to track a target in angle while still using the radar for range and rate. When selecting the radar to be slaved to the TCS line of sight via the sensor control panel (SLAVE in the RDR position) the radar will still be active but pointing in the direction of the TCS line of sight while the TCS has an active track instead of scanning.
From this state it is possible to command half-action and then position the acquisition gates at the target video and then command full-action. This will result in either pulse doppler slaved or pulse slaved mode depending on previous radar mode. It is also possible to switch using the P STT and PD STT button on the DDD panel.
The resulting sub-mode entered is equivalent to an STT mode where the TCS is instead used to track the target's angle rather than the radar itself. The radar is still used to track range and rate, on the DDD the IROT lights instead of the ANT ROT, IROT relating to IR tracking which has been replaced by the TCS in the modeled F-14 versions.
This mode can be used to guide missiles, active and CW modes if in pulse and in PD if in pulse doppler. If the SLAVE switch is set to INDEP from this mode the system reverts to true pulse STT or pulse doppler STT depending on current mode.
LANTIRN
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 2nd Class Felix Garza Jr. (030325-N-4142G-009)
The LANTIRN or Low Altitude Navigation and Targeting Infrared for Night began life as combined targeting and navigation pods designed for the F-15E and F-16. When the US Navy became interested in using the F-14 Tomcat in the A/G role Martin Marietta (now Lockheed Martin) began its own program to show that the LANTIRN could quickly be adapted for F-14 use.
As the pod was adapted for the F-14 the secondary navigational pod was deleted, keeping only the targeting pod. The pod was wired up to its own control panel as the F-14 didn’t have the required 1553-bus for complete integration. The control panel was patched into the TCS to TID video feed allowing it to select either the TCS or the LANTIRN for display on the TID and VDI.
While the pod can read waypoints and selected weapon from the WCS, the pod has its own GPS receiver and is otherwise self-contained and controlled only via its own control panel. Additionally, it also has its own weapons release guidance removing the need to boresight the pod to the aircraft, a time-consuming task.
The FLIR sensor itself has three different zoom levels or fields of view (FoV). The Wide FoV limits are 5.9° and allows a maximum slew rate of 8.5°/s. The Narrow FoV limits are 1.7° and allows a maximum slew rate of 1.8°/s. The last mode, the Expanded FoV is a digital zoom of the Narrow FoV, meaning that the resolution will be worse in this mode. The FoV limits for the Expanded FoV are 0.8° with a max slew rate of 0.7°/s.
Controls and Displays
All the controls for the LANTIRN are situated on its own control panel mounted on the RIO’s left side console when the pod is present, including the switch controlling what video feed the TID and VDI display in the TV mode.
LANTIRN Video Elements
The FLIR (Forward Looking InfraRed) video-feed from the LANTIRN has superimposed data readout for the crew’s use. This video-feed can be viewed both on the TID (in TV-mode) and on the VDI (also in TV-mode) when the FLIR feed is selected on the control panel.
Amongst other things the displays show own aircraft position, target position as well as targeting cues to the crew. When using the LANTIRN for A/G attack these readouts are also used as targeting and release cues.
Own aircraft data is shown in the upper left corner (
On the left side (
The lower left data-block (
💡 IBIT codes are not implemented currently and the clock will show local time.
The lower middle (
The lower right (
Finally,
The commanded heading shows current aircraft heading above the inverted ^, with the commanded heading being displayed as a relative bearing either L (Left) or R (Right) of current aircraft heading below the line. The commanded heading is also indicated by a vertical line bisecting the horizontal one.
The right, bomb release cue, is only shown if the selected Q is QDES and shows a vertical line along which a release cue travels downwards. This release cue is only visible with a valid weapon selection (bomb) and when it reaches the two tick marks, that’s the cue to release. Below the line is the indicated TREL (Time to Release) in seconds, changing to TIMP (Time to Impact) after release.
Around this all is the masking curve, indicating at what angles the pod will be masked by own aircraft (looking into the aircraft hull). This is relative to the FLIR pointing cue, when the cue moves outside the masking curve the sensor will be blocked by the hull.
Control Panel
The control panel contains all the controls for the pod, including the control stick.
The power switch for the LANTIRN pod is located top left (
💡 IMU selection has no current DCS function.
The MODE switch (
The LASER ARMED (
Down right is the VIDEO switch (
The four grouped indicator lights (
💡 The IBIT and fault indicators are not currently implemented in DCS.
Control Stick
The control stick for the LANTIRN operates the LANTIRN’s sensor itself, note though that the stick itself does not move, the buttons and hats on the stick are used to control the pod.
The left four-way hat, S3, (
The center slew hat (
The right four-way hat, S4, (
The red button on top (
The two-way hat on the side (
Located on the left side of the stick head is a two way slider (
Sliding it forwards allows for selection of manual gain while releasing and sliding it forwards again re-selects automatic gain. Change of the manual gain with manual gain already selected can be done by sliding the switch forwards and holding it for 2 seconds. With this mode active up/down on the right hat increases and decreases the gain while left/right decreases and increases level.
Sliding the switch aft momentarily allows selection of used laser code, while sliding it aft and holding allows for focus control. When set to laser code change, the right four-way hat selects digit to change with left/right and increases and decreases the selected digit with up/down. In focus control up/down increases and decreases focus.
Located on the front of the stick (
Lastly on the front side of the stick (
Startup
To start the LANTIRN from cold, set the power switch to POD. This will start the LANTIRN power-up sequence which takes 8 minutes. When ready, this will be indicated by the MODE switch showing STBY.
When at STBY, depression of the MODE button switches the system to OPER (Operational), enabling the LANTIRN sensor after a 30-second initialization.
Lastly, to allow display of LANTIRN FLIR video, select FLIR on the VIDEO switch.
Modes
Sensor Modes and Operation
The LANTIRN has two "master" modes, A/A and A/G. Both work similarly but are optimized for different types of targets. Additionally, the A/G mode allows for bomb release guidance.
The pod has two main ways of controlling the sensor line of sight, either via contrast lock (image following) or via being slaved to a Q designation.
The Area and Point Track modes are the two contrast lock modes in which the LANTIRN locks onto contrast differences in the LANTIRN FLIR video itself. This in itself only allows for angle tracking which gives imprecise ranging using own aircraft position and pod line of sight to calculate target position. It does however allow the system to track moving targets.
💡 Point Track with the LANTIRN can only be engaged on object that appear white on a dark background no matter the polarity mode (WHOT or BHOT). In DCS, due to limitations in simulation, Point Track can only be initiated in WHOT mode. Once Point Track is successfully engaged in WHOT, it is possible to change the polarity to BHOT.
The last tracking mode has the sensor slewed to a stored location/direction, called a Q. The directional Qs do not allow for guidance to a location while the location Qs do.
QSNO and QADL/QHUD are directional. QSNO slaves the sensor to the ground 15 NM directly in front of the aircraft along own aircraft heading. QADL and QHUD slave the sensor to either ADL (in A/A) or the aircraft wings symbol on the HUD (in A/G).
The location Qs have two sources, QWp- and QWp+ on the stick’s left hat can be used to cycle through the WCS waypoints, allowing the RIO to slew to the different waypoints for navigation and target localization.
The other source is via pod designation. By selecting the second detent on the LANTIRN trigger the current sensor track or location is lased and a new location stored using that data. This is called the QDES and is used to designate targets for engagement as well as allowing the RIO to select a new location for navigational reference on the fly. The QDES can not however be automatically transferred to the WCS, but the RIO can enter it manually using the target location information in the pod video feed.
The lower right data-block is enabled for the location Qs only but will remain even when the pod is slewed away in area or point track modes. As soon as another Q is selected however, it will update to that location instead or be removed if a directional Q is selected.
A/G Target Engagement and Designation
The LANTIRN steering cues for ground target engagement are automatically enabled when the LANTIRN is slewed to QDES or a new QDES is designated. The QDES itself will remain even if a new Q is selected and as long as it exists, the steering cues will point towards QDES even if slewed to another point. This is important to keep in mind as it is easy to think that the steering commands are to the current sensor location instead of the QDES.
The laser designation itself can however point to a different location than the QDES as the laser always points to the current track. This can be used to quickly change back to a target marked by the QDES if desired and when lasing a moving target a QDES should be set at an estimated target location at impact (estimated manually) and then the point track mode or manual slew can be used to designate the actual target more precisely.
To change laser code, move the stick left side slider aft and release, this will change right hat (S4) into laser code mode. The currently selected digit will blink and the S4 hat can then be used to set the digits. Left/right change what digit to set and up/down change the value of the digit. Renewed selection of aft on the left slider will then exit the laser code mode.
If the right, S4, hat is depressed while in laser mode the automatic lase mode will be enabled, indicated by the M (for manual) left of the digits changing to an A (auto-lase). Repeat to switch back to manual mode. While activated, the auto-lase mode will begin firing the laser at 10 seconds TIMP until TIMP zero +4 seconds.
The bomb release cue is only visible with a valid weapon (bomb) selected and the selected bomb is read from the weapon selector wheel on the RIO armament panel via the WCS. The actual bomb release can be accomplished using the computer pilot or computer target modes but the manual mode is recommended. In manual mode the pilot follows the cues in the LANTIRN video feed on the VDI and releases the bomb when cued by the LANTIRN.
Tactical Airborne Reconnaissance Pod System (TARPS)
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 3rd Class Brian Fleske. (000304-N-0507F-005)
The Tactical Airborne Reconnaissance Pod System, or TARPS, was developed to provide carrier air wings with an organic tactical reconnaissance capability as dedicated aircraft such as the RA-5C Vigilante and RF-8G Crusader were withdrawn from service. Entering fleet service in the early 1980s, TARPS allowed modified F-14s to perform photographic reconnaissance, mapping, maritime surveillance, and pre- and post-strike damage assessment.
The TARPS pod is carried on weapons station 5, on the starboard side of the tunnel between the engine nacelles. It contains three sensor bays. The forward bay houses a KS-87 serial frame camera configured for either vertical or 45° forward-oblique photography. The center bay normally contains a KA-99 panoramic camera providing wide, horizon-to-horizon coverage, while the aft bay houses an AN/AAD-5 infrared line scanner for night and reduced-visibility reconnaissance. Aircraft position and flight information are recorded alongside the imagery to assist with its interpretation after the mission.
The TARPS is operated primarily by the RIO using a dedicated control panel, while the pilot flies the planned reconnaissance run and can also initiate camera operation when configured. Unlike the TCS, the original TARPS was principally a film-based recording system and did not provide a live sensor image on the TID or VDI. The exposed film was removed and processed after recovery for analysis by intelligence personnel.
TARPS missions frequently required the aircraft to fly predictable routes over or near defended territory while maintaining the altitude, heading, and attitude needed to obtain usable imagery. This exposed reconnaissance aircraft to antiaircraft artillery and surface-to-air missile threats for longer periods than many conventional strike or fighter missions. Consequently, TARPS-equipped Tomcats were often fitted with additional defensive equipment, most notably the Expanded Chaff Adapter and the AN/ALQ-167 electronic-countermeasures pod.
Expanded Chaff Adapter
The Expanded Chaff Adapter, or ECA, was an additional expendable-countermeasure dispenser developed to increase the F-14's relatively limited internal chaff capacity. It provided an significant increase in the countermeasure count of the F-14 before its role was largely replaced with the introduction of the LAU-138 BOL countermeasure rails in the 1990s. It was installed in place of an LAU-93 launcher on the port forward Phoenix pallet and provided space for as many as 120 additional expendable cartridges. On combat reconnaissance missions these were normally loaded primarily or entirely with chaff.
The ECA gave a TARPS crew a substantially larger supply of expendables with which to defend the aircraft during an extended reconnaissance run or withdrawal through a defended area.
The ECA was independent of the TARPS camera system and could technically be carried without the reconnaissance pod. In practice, however, it was strongly associated with TARPS missions because those missions presented a potential high requirement for additional chaff.
In DCS, the ECA can be used only in the A/G mode with chaff dispenses actuated by the Pilot's store release button with the ECA station selected and a bomb or ECA selected on the RIO's Armament panel weapon wheel.
AN/ALQ-167 Electronic-Countermeasures Pod
The AN/ALQ-167 was a modular external electronic-countermeasures pod. It was carried on one of the forward Phoenix pallets as part of the characteristic high-threat TARPS loadout.
Depending on the particular pod variant and its preflight configuration, it could employ selected noise and deceptive jamming techniques against radars associated with airborne intercept and surface-to-air weapon systems.
The pod's operating frequencies and threat-specific parameters were configured before flight according to the preplanned anticipated threats. The AN/ALQ-167 then supplemented the aircraft's built-in electronic-countermeasures equipment by providing additional protection against the radar threats expected along the planned reconnaissance route. Its effectiveness remained dependent on the installed pod configuration and whether the encountered radar fell within the frequencies and techniques for which the pod had been prepared.
A typical high-threat reconnaissance configuration therefore placed the ECA on the port forward Phoenix pallet, the AN/ALQ-167 on the starboard forward Phoenix pallet, and the TARPS pod on the starboard rear station. Together, the ECA and AN/ALQ-167 increased the survivability of a Tomcat that might otherwise have to maintain a predictable flight path inside a hostile radar and missile environment.
💡 Due to engine limitations, the AN/ALQ-167 does not provide any additional jamming effects over the built-in DECM on the F-14, so thus is purely cosmetic in DCS.
In DCS, TARPS functionality is currently limited to the KS-87D camera configured in the vertical, looking straight down position. Photography is initiated and concluded by using the special dedicated keybind. The TARPS control panel, navigation and HUD steering integration, automatic camera sequencing, KA-99 panoramic camera, and AN/AAD-5 infrared line scanner are not currently simulated.
All TARPS imagery are saved in the Saved Games/DCS_F14/TARPS directory. Each
TARPS image is saved with the associated flight data when the image was taken
(Mission Date, Lat Long, Altitude, Drift, Heading, Pitch, Roll).
Defensive Systems
The Tomcat can equip either the ALE-39 or the LAU-138 in order to defend itself against threats by dispensing chaff or flares.
Also installed on the aircraft is either the ALR-67 or ALR-45/50 Radar Warning Receiver to increase passive situational awareness by detecting airborne and surface-to-air radar threats.
For extended protection and radar jamming it can also carry the ECM Pods.
Countermeasures
In order to defend against incoming missile threats the Tomcat can be equipped with either the ALE-39 or LAU-138 countermeasure dispensing system launching chaff and flares.
AN/ALE-39 Countermeasures Dispensing Set
The AN/ALE-39 is the countermeasures dispensing set installed in the F-14 in this simulation. It controls its own set of launchers located between the engine nozzles on the underside of the so called beaver-tail.
The launchers each have two sections, one containing 10 cartridges and the other 20. They are referred to the left and right dispensers even though the left is really the front one and the right the back one with both being mounted in line on the left side of the tail-hook. This is a remnant from the earliest model F-14s carrying the AN/ALE-29.
This all sums up to a capacity of 60 cartridges in the system with each section necessarily holding one type of cartridge meaning that any combination of cartridges is possible as long as each type’s quantity is a multiple of 10. The system itself has no real knowledge of what is loaded where so incorrectly programming the system can lead to the wrong type of cartridge being ejected.
The system itself can be operated manually from the control panel in the RIO pit or the DLC thumbwheel on the pilot stick when the flaps lever is in the up position. It is also capable of running programmed sequences of ejection which in turn can be initiated manually by the RIO from the control panel or the direction hats mounted on the hand hold over the DDD. In addition the AN/ALR-67 can also initiate the chaff ejection program if set up correctly on the AN/ALE-39 control panel.
Controls and Operation
💡 In DCS the F-14 countermeasure loadout is set in the Mission Editor, see DCS Mission Editor Functions Specific to the HB DCS F-14 or controlled through the radio menu under ground crew. The default setting in the mission editor is bypassed. To see the real loadout check the kneeboard.
Programmer
The programmer is used to set up what countermeasure cartridges are loaded where and to set up the different ejection programmes. The panel is located on the right horizontal console of the RIO cockpit.
The left side of the programmer holds the controls (thumbwheels) for the different ejection programmes, one section for each type of cartridge.
The CHAFF section controls how to eject chaff in program mode. The chaff sequences are programmed to launch a number of salvoes, each consisting of a burst of a set amount of cartridges.
- B QTY controls how many cartridges to eject in each burst, selection of 1-4 cartridges and C for continuous and R for random (4-6 cartridges) possible.
- B INTV sets the time in seconds between each individual cartridge ejection in each burst, possible settings being .1 (0.125), .2 (0.25), .5 (0.5), .7 (0.75), 1 and R for random.
- S QTY controls how many salvoes of bursts to eject in each program, settings available are 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 and 15.
- S INT sets the time in seconds between each salvo in the program, available settings are 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10.
When using the random and continuous settings for B special conditions apply.
- B at C QTY and R INTV sets the first 3 cartridges to launch at 0.125 second intervals, the rest at random intervals from 0.25 to 4 seconds. Ejection disregards the S settings and continue until all cartridges are ejected.
- B at R QTY and R INTV sets each burst to have between 4-6 cartridges and to eject at random intervals between 0.25 to 4 seconds. The first burst in a salvo will always launch the first 3 cartridges at 0.125 second intervals.
- B at R QTY and INTV at set number sets each burst to launch between 4-6 cartridges at set interval. First burst will always launch first 3 cartridges at 0.125 sec interval.
- B at fixed QTY and R INTV sets each burst to eject one cartridge disregarding B QTY.
The JAMMER section controls the ejection of jammer cartridges in programmed mode.
- QTY sets how many jammer cartridges to eject, possible settings are 1-4.
- INTV uses all three indicated thumbwheels to set time in seconds between each ejection in the program. Settings from 1 to 299 possible in 1 second increments.
💡 Jammer cartridges not currently implemented in DCS.
The FLARE section controls ejection of flares when using programmed mode.
- QTY sets amount of flare cartridges to eject, possible settings being 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and 10.
- INTV sets time interval between each ejection in seconds, possible settings being 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10.
The right side of the programmer sets the type of cartridge loaded into each section and the reset switch used after loading new cartridges.
The L10, L20, R10 and R20 thumbwheels can be set to C, J or F setting what cartridge is loaded into which section.
💡 Incorrectly setting type of cartridge loaded can result in the launch of the wrong type of cartridge.
The RESET switch needs to be used to reset the system's internal counters after loading new cartridges into the launchers. Needs to be held to reset for at least 5 seconds to reset the system.
Control Panel
The control panel is used to control system power, to set up automatic ejections and to manually eject cartridges and is also located on the RIO right horizontal console.
The mechanical counters on the upper part of the panel are used to indicate remaining cartridges of each type. They need to be set up manually using the knob below each counter but decreases automatically as each cartridge ejection pulse is sent. As they’re set manually it’s possible to end up in a situation were the counter is at 0 but additional cartridges are still available. In this cases ejection pulses will still be sent but the counter will remain at 0.
Below each counter each cartridge type has a switch for manual ejection commands. The switches are momentary and spring-loaded to center, each having three positions. PRGM initiates respective set ejection program, SGL commands ejection of a single cartridge of respective type and STBY is the default center position not commanding manual ejection.
The PWR/MODE switch enables power to the AN/ALE-39 and can enable automatic chaff launch via the AN/ALR-67 RWR. AUTO (CHAFF) / MAN enables power to the system and allows the AN/ALR-67 to initiate the set chaff ejection program but flares remain in manual. Chaff ejection is initiated when the RWR detects a threat actively engaging own aircraft, after each program initiation a 30 second cool-down is present before next program is initiated if such a detection is still present. Manual ejection is still available as normal. MAN enables power to the system and allows for manual initiation of all functions. OFF disables the system.
The FLARE MODE switch controls how flares are ejected and also sets up how the pilot stick DLC button is used. The flaps lever needs to be in the up position to enable DLC button cartridge ejection. The switch has three positions. MULT, multiple, sets the system to eject one cartridge from each section set to flares on the programmer for each ejection pulse.
💡 That this means that if flares are loaded on all four sections this results in 4 flares being launched each time a flare ejection command is sent.
NORM sets normal flare ejection pulse behavior. PILOT enables ejection of one flare cartridge with each depression of the DLC button. Normal flare ejection still possible. If the switch is set a position other than PILOT the DLC button will command ejection of a single chaff cartridge.
Finally the SALVO FLARES switch initiates rapid ejection of all flares using a 0.125 second time interval. Normally spring-loaded to the OFF position. Can’t be stopped once initiated.
🔴 WARNING: All countermeasure cartridge ejection is inhibited while the weight on wheels sensor is active, preventing countermeasure ejection while on the ground.
RIO Hand Hold Switches
Two four-way direction hats are mounted on the RIO hand hold above the DDD to enable quick access to countermeasure ejection. The two switches are mirrored and UP commands ejection of a single chaff cartridge. DOWN initiates the chaff ejection program, INBOARD (towards center) initiates the jammer ejection program and OUTBOARD (towards the sides) initiates the flare ejection program.
LAU-138
The LAU-138 chaff dispenser was developed to meet the need for additional chaff cartridge payload capacity. The launcher itself was developed in Sweden by CelsiusTech as a chaff dispenser integrated into a rail designed to replace the LAU-7 Sidewinder rail. Each rail holds up to 160 chaff packages, each being smaller than a normal chaff cartridge while still enabling the mounting of a single AIM-9 Sidewinder to itself.
On the F-14 the LAU-138 was used mounted on the 1A and 8A stations. While technically able to be mounted on the respective B stations as well, it wasn’t possible to refill the launcher while mounted there so wasn’t used there operationally.
While having the LAU-138s mounted, the R10 and R20 sections in the launcher are both connected to the R20 section and the R10 connected to the LAU-138s. This means that the R20 section type setting on the programmer controls both R10 and R20 and the R10 section type setting should always be set to C for chaff.
Each launcher holds, as mentioned, 160 chaff packages and each ejection impulse ejects four packages from each launcher, each package being about 1/4 the size of a normal chaff cartridge. This results in that each ejection impulse ejects the equivalent of two chaff cartridges in total and that a total of 40 ejections are available from the launchers.
As the launchers use the R10 section of the programmer, mounting two LAU-138s results means that the counter for chaff on the controller should be increased by 40. A chaff only loadout can result in the number of launches available to be in total 100, which is too much for the counter, and that the counter will effectively show one chaff ejection less than what’s really available. The last ejection will still work though.
In summary, this means that when using the LAU-138 an additional 40 chaff ejections are available increasing the total number to anywhere from 100 chaff to 40 chaff and 60 flares when combined with the normal AN/ALE-39 loadout and that the R10 section should always be set to C for chaff when mounted.
Radar Warning Receiver
Two sets of Radar Warning Receivers are available for the Tomcat. The ALR-45/50 and the later ALR-67.
They are capable of passively detect radar threats, increasing situational awareness of the crew.
AN/ALR-67 RWR
The AN/ALR-67 radar warning receiver (RWR) is designed to inform and alert the F-14 crew about radar emitters in their general area. It’s also designed to help the crew defend themselves from hostile threats by indicate radar TRKing and engagement by radar guided weapons.
The AN/ALR-67 was integrated in the F-14 to replace the ageing AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50, at first for the F-14B and later on for parts of the F-14A fleet. Until the advent of the PMDIG upgrade the AN/ALR-67 used its own stand-alone display system only. The RWR is however connected to the AN/ALQ-126 allowing it to send info on threat emitters to the jammer and also display jammed targets on its own display. It can also trigger preprogrammed countermeasure programs set up in the AN/ALE-39 system.
On later F-14B aircraft incorporating the PTID upgrade the AN/ALR-67 was also integrated into the MDIG displays system, allowing for a more detailed threat display on the ECMD.
The AN/ALR-67 on the F-14B has four small spiral high-band antennas, four wide-band high-band quadrant receivers and a low-band array. Connected to these antennas is a narrow-band superheterodyne receiver analyzing the received signals and indicating emitters and threats to both pilot and RIO using two displays, one at each seat and by audio signals played to the ICS of both
Controls
The AN/ALR-67 RWR is controlled by a control panel on the RIO right side horizontal panel.
The PWR (power) switch control power to the RWR and should be set to ON to operate the system.
The VOL (volume) control knob sets RIO audio level for the RWR sound indications. The pilot has a corresponding control on his Volume/TACAN command panel.
The TEST switch has two selectable modes and is spring-loaded to center when not held. Momentary selection of the BIT position initiates the AN/ALR-67 built in test and if the switch is held in the SPL (special) position while on the first BIT page displays the special BIT status page as long as it’s held in that position.
The MODE switch also has two selectable modes used while held in the respective position, spring-loaded to return to center when not held. When not activated enables normal operational mode, OFST enables the offset mode when held and LMT the limit mode when held. The offset mode is indicated by an O in the status ring on the display and separates overlapping threat symbols sacrificing azimuth accuracy to instead show all threats clearly. The limit mode is indicated by an L in the status ring on the display and limits the display to only show the threat symbols of the six highest prioritized threats.
The DISPLAY TYPE selector sets what threat display priority to use on the RWR displays.
- NORM - Normal is indicated by a N in the status ring on the display and shows threat symbology according to the loaded threat library.
- AI - Airborne interceptor is indicated by an I in the status ring on the display and prioritizes all airborne interceptor threats above all other threats.
- AAA - Anti-aircraft artillery is indicated by an A in the status ring on the display and prioritizes all anti-aircraft artillery threats above all other threats.
- UNK - Unknown is indicated by a U in the status ring on the display and prioritizes all unknown threats above all other threats.
- FRIEND - Friendly is indicated by an F in the status ring on the display and allows for the same prioritization as in normal but also displays known friendly emitters.
Displays
The RWR display is identical at both positions in the cockpit and uses three bands (circles) on the display to indicate the threat level of the displayed threat symbols.
- Outermost, critical band: Displays threat symbols belonging to emitters representing an imminent threat to own aircraft, either a locked-on TRKing radar or a radar detected to be actively engaging own aircraft. A threat symbol belonging to a TRK detected as actively engaging own aircraft is enhanced by flashing its symbol.
- Middle, lethal band: Displays threat symbols belonging to emitters representing threat systems deemed within lethal range of own aircraft but not actively TRKing or engaging it.
- Inner, non-lethal band: Displays threat symbols belonging to emitters not representing a system capable of engaging own aircraft or systems capable of but not deemed within range to engage it.
- System status circle: Indicates various system modes in use or the presence of failures. The upper left quadrant displays what display type is set (N, I, A, U, or F), the upper right quadrant showing an L if limited display mode is used, and the lower half indicating either the use of the offset display mode by indicating an O, the presence of a BIT failure by showing B, or that the system is thermally overloaded (too warm) by showing a T.
- Display intensity knob: On the lower right side, it controls display intensity on the display it’s attached to.
💡 The ordering of the three threat bands has changed at least once since the introduction of the AN/ALR-67, and as the modeled AN/ALR-67 represents one of the earlier versions we’ve chosen the present order.
Warning Lights
| Pilot | RIO |
|---|---|
The two crewmembers have warning lights dedicated to specific threats on their front cockpit panels. The pilot warning lights are situated on the right side of the HUD and the RIO warning lights on the right side of the TID. The RIO warning light panel also contains lights for the AN/ALQ-126 and the IFF transponder, those are detailed under their respective section.
The different lights illuminate to indicate the presence of a certain type of threat in the critical band of the RWR and when an active engagement is detected the corresponding light starts flashing. The categories present are SAM (surface-to-air missile), AAA (anti-air artillery), AI (airborne interceptor), and (only in the RIO pit) CW (continuous wave).
Threat Indication Alert Tones
The AN/ALR-67 uses four distinct audio tones to indicate threats and status changes of those threats.
A single short tone is used to indicate the presence of a new emitter or when a threat is moved to another threat band.
A slow warbling, alternating tone is used to indicate the presence of a threat in the critical band.
A fast warbling, alternating tone is used to indicate that a threat is actively engaging own aircraft.
A special four tone audio signal, pitch decreasing with each tone, is used to indicate a special event as programmed by the threat library. In the Heatblur DCS F-14 this represents a new threat tied to a system capable of silently engaging own aircraft, i.e. it can engage own aircraft without causing it’s threat symbol to move to the critical band and thus no additional audio warning tones. This capability is either because of that the launching aircraft is capable of launching missiles in a TWS mode or that a launching SAM system can guide missiles by other means than radar and thus not giving further warning of an active engagement.
BIT
The AN/ALR-67 BIT cycles between different test screens testing the screen, symbology and threat indication tones as well as displaying system revision and threat library information.
The first page displayed shows system and threat library revision and the following screens test the symbol generation of the displays.
The threat indication tones are also tested during the bit, first page tests the status change tone, second page the special tone, third page the threat in critical band tone and the fourth the fast warbling active threat tone.
During the tests the threat warning lights also illuminate for both the pilot and the RIO.
| Threat Symbol | Platform/Sensor | Special Tone |
|---|---|---|
| Ships | ||
| AB | Arleigh Burke class destroyer | |
| AK | Admiral Kuznetsov class aircraft carrier | |
| GR | Grisha 5 class corvette (Albatros) | |
| HP | Oliver Hazard Perry class frigate | |
| J2 | Jiangkai II class frigate (Type 054A) | |
| KK | Krivak 3 class frigate (Rezky) | |
| KV | Kirov class battlecruiser (Pyotr Velikiy) | |
| L1 | Luyang I class destroyer (Type 052B) | |
| L2 | Luyang II class destroyer (Type 052C) | |
| LC | La Combattante IIa class fast attack craft | |
| N | Ships only carrying a navigational radar (civilian ships, submarines) | |
| NE | Neustrashimy class frigate | |
| NZ | Nimitz class aircraft carrier | |
| SV | Slava class cruiser (Moscow) | |
| TC | Ticonderoga class cruiser | |
| TT | Tarantul 3 class corvette (Molniya) | |
| TW | Tarawa class amphibious assault ship | |
| YU | Yuzhao class amphibious transport dock (Type 071) | |
| Aircraft | ||
| 14 | F-14A/B | Yes |
| 15 | F-15C/E | Yes |
| 16 | F-16C | Yes |
| 17 | JF-17 | Yes |
| 18 | F/A-18C | Yes |
| 19 | MiG-19 | |
| 21 | MiG-21bis | |
| 23 | MiG-23MLD | |
| 24 | Su-24M/MR | |
| 25 | MiG-25PD | |
| 29 | Su-27, Su-33, MiG-29A/G/S, and J-11A | Yes |
| 30 | Su-30 | Yes |
| 31 | MiG-31 | |
| 34 | Su-34 | Yes |
| 37 | AJS-37 | |
| 39 | Su-25TM (Su-39) | Yes |
| 50 | A-50 | |
| 52 | B-52 | |
| AN | AN-26B and AN-30M | |
| AP | AH-64D | |
| B1 | B-1B | |
| BE | Tu-95 and Tu-142M | |
| BF | Tu-22M3 | |
| BJ | Tu-160 | |
| E2 | E-2D | |
| E3 | E-3C | |
| F4 | F-4E | |
| F5 | F-5E | |
| HX | Ka-27 | |
| IL | IL-76MD and IL-78M | |
| KC | KC-135 | |
| KJ | KJ-2000 | |
| M2 | Mirage 2000-C and 2000-5 | Yes |
| S3 | S-3B | |
| SH | SH-60B | |
| TO | Tornado | |
| TR | C-130 and C-17A | |
| Air Defense | ||
| 2 | SA-2 Guideline Fan Song track radar (S-75) | |
| 3 | SA-3 Goa Low Blow track radar (S-125) | |
| 5 | SA-5 Gammon Square Pair track radar | |
| 6 | SA-6 Gainful Straight Flush track radar (Kub) | |
| 7 | HQ-7 track radar | |
| 8 | SA-8 Gecko search and track radar (Osa) | |
| 10 | SA-10 Grumble Flap Lid track radar (S-300PS 30N6) | |
| 11 | SA-11 Gadfly Fire Dome track radar (Buk) | |
| 15 | SA-15 Gauntlet Scrum Half search and track radar (Tor 9A331) | |
| 19 | SA-19 Grison Hot Shot search and track radar (Tunguska 2C6M) | Yes |
| A | Gepard, M163 Vulcan, and ZSU-23-4 Shilka track radars | |
| BB | SA-10 Grumble Big Bird search radar (S-300PS 64H6E) | |
| BF | Rapier Blindfire track radar | |
| CS | SA-10 Grumble Clam Shell search radar (S-300PS 5N66M) | |
| DE | Sborka (Dog Ear) search radar | |
| FF | SA-2, SA-3, and SA-5 Flat Face search radar (S-125 P-19) | |
| GR | Roland MPDR-3002 S search radar | |
| HA | Hawk AN/MPQ-50 and AN/MPQ-55 search radars | |
| HK | Hawk AN/MPQ-46 track radar | |
| HQ | HQ-7 search radar | |
| NS | NASAMS AN/MPQ-64 Sentinel search radar | Yes |
| PT | Patriot AN/MPQ-53 search radar | |
| RO | Roland MPDR-16 search radar and Domino 30 track radar | |
| RP | Rapier Dagger search radar | |
| S | 1L13 and 55G6 early warning search radars | |
| SD | SA-11 Gadfly Snow Drift search radar (Buk) | |
| TS | SA-5 Gammon Tin Shield search radar | |
| Missiles | ||
| M | AIM-54, AIM-120, MICA-EM, R-37, R-77, and SD-10 | |
| ATC (Air Traffic Control) | ||
| T | Airport ATC Radar |
💡 Aircraft only flown by own faction in a mission are automatically set as friendly and shown only when setting the DISPLAY TYPE selector to FRIEND. N are shown only in UNK and T only in FRIEND.
Ships symbology is enhanced by being enclosed by an enlarged U symbol.
ALR-45/50 (F-14A Early)
The AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50 combination was introduced during the early 70s as a response to the increasingly lethal SAM and AAA systems introduced during that era. It's purpose is to inform the crew about threats and help them defend against them by indicating reception of threat emissions and when they pose a threat to the aircraft. Similarly to ALR-67 it's working in cooperation with DECM jammer (ALQ-100).
The AN/ALR-45 has four quadrant receiver antennas located on the front sides of the engine intakes as well as the trailing outer edges of the stabilators to provide a 360 degree coverage of the aircraft. It provides a general ECM situational awareness as well as indicating emitters locking onto and attacking the aircraft.
The AN/ALR-50 is a dedicated missile warning system and has one upper antenna located aft of the cockpit and another lower antenna located on one of the nose gear doors. The purpose of the AN/ALR-50 is to detect and warn about possible missile launches. It can identify MA (missile alert) and ML (missile launch) conditions for some of the radars which use missile command-link signals. (Currently in DCS the MA should be interpreted as lock and ML as launch)
Both systems are used as a combined set and can be used to trigger countermeasure program release from the AN/ALE-39 as well as triggering the DECM into transmission.
The system displays threats on the pilot HSD and the RIO ECMD when they are set to ECM. Via the display controls the ECM can be allowed to override the current display if a threat is detected.
Controls
The main ECM control panel for the AN/ALR-45 and AN/ALR-50 is located on the
RIO's right horizontal console. The power switch for both system is located on
the right side of this control panel and is labeled PWR - ALR-45/50
(
The three three-position switches (
The middle volume knob,
The AAA switch (
The UNKNOWN switch (
The three test switches (
The ECM DISPLAY control panel is also located on the RIO's right horizontal console. It controls the RIO's ECMD display as well as generic display settings for both displays.
The ECM - CORR switch (
The ECM - ORIDE switch (
The MODE switch (
The DATA/ADF switch (
The switch controlling display of ECM information to the pilot is located on the Displays Control Panel and the volume controls are located on the Volume/TACAN Command Panel.
Displays
Warning Lights
| Pilot | RIO |
|---|---|
The two crewmembers have warning lights dedicated to specific threats on their front cockpit panels. The pilot warning lights are situated on the right side of the HUD and the RIO warning lights on the right side of the TID. The RIO warning light panel also contains lights for the AN/ALQ-100 and the IFF transponder, those are detailed under their respective section.
The different lights illuminate to indicate the presence of a certain type of threat.
Threat Indication Alert Tones
There are 3 types of sound produced by ALR-45/50:
- ALR-45 Threat radar caution - depends on radar
- ALR-50 MA (missile alert) tone - low frequency warble
- ALR-50 ML (missile launch) tone - high frequency warble
Electronic Countermeasures - AN/ALQ-100 & 126 DECM (Defensive Electronic CounterMeasures)
The AN/ALQ-100 and 126 jammers are designed to detect radar threats, analyze them, select the optimum countermeasure technique available and apply it. Available techniques for jamming are amongst others, mainlobe blanking, inverse con-scan, range-gate pull-off and swept square modes.
In real life these two systems differ greatly with the AN/ALQ-126 being by far the most effective system. In DCS both are modelled as a simple noise jammers due to engine limitations but controlled by the DECM logic as to when it’s on or off and thus work the same.
DECM Controls and Indicators
The controls for the DECM are all located on the right horizontal panel in the RIO pit, panel as image above. In addition there are two indication lights co-located with the RWR threat indicators on the right side of the TID.
The two indication lights on the threat advisory are RCV (recieve) and XMIT (transmit). RCV illuminates up when the system detects and analyzes a threat while the XMIT illuminates up when it's actively jamming a threat.
The control panel itself contains a STANDBY indicator light, a mode selector knob and an AUDIO volume knob.
The STANDBY light indicates that system warmup is not yet completed and when completed turns off. At other times, illumination of this indicator indicates the presence of a fault in the system.
The AUDIO (volume) knob controls the audio volume of the RIO sound from the system. The pilot has no access to this audio unless he put his amplifier selector to EMER (to use RIO amplifier). The audio itself is generated based on radar signal characteristics (mainly PRF).
The mode selector knob controls power and operational mode that the system is in.
- OFF turns off power to the system. STBY begins pre-warming of the system, taking in all around 5 minutes.
- TEST - HOLD 3 SEC is used to prepare the system for BIT, after 3 seconds in this mode, turn the knob to TEST - ACT.
- TEST - ACT starts the BIT in the system. The BIT takes approximately 30 seconds and the RCV light will be illuminated the whole time while the XMIT light will flash twice. If the STANDBY light illuminates it indicates that a no-go condition exists in the system.
- REC enables the system in recieve only mode, enabling analysis of threats and also the threat audio.
- RPT enables full system functionality, in addition to REC it also now tries to jam threats according to selected method.
💡 In DCS jamming is always done with noise jamming, turning on as a threat is detected.
Emergency
Fire Detection and Suppression System
Fire Detection System
The fire detection system in the F-14 has two fire sensing loops, one in each engine.
If these loops detects a temperature over 600 °F (about 316 °C) along its whole length or 1,000 °F (about 538 °C) in a single 6-inch section it triggers the fire detection circuits. The left detection loop illuminates the left fire warning light on the ACM panel and the right detection loop illuminates the right fire warning light, see Air Combat Maneuver Panel.
In addition there are also sensors designed to detect hot air leaks in the engines and illuminate the BLEED DUCT caution light on the pilot caution - advisory indicator (see Caution - Advisory Indicator) if temperatures above 575 °F (about 302 °C) are detected.
| Left | Right |
|---|---|
The fire suppression system in the F-14 contains two bottles filled with a fire suppression agent capable of being discharged into one engine selected by the pilot. Though the system contains two bottles, both are discharged at the same time making the system a one-shot system, capable of extinguishing only one engine.
As the effectiveness of the agent depends on it remaining in the engine until the fire is out the effectiveness is greater at lower airspeed as it takes longer for the agent to be blown clear of the engine. The agent itself is a low toxicity agent, designed to do as little damage to the engine as possible while still being an effective fire suppressant.
To activate the system the pilot pulls the FUEL SHUT OFF handle (pictured above) corresponding to the alight engine and pushes the fire extinguisher button behind that handle. The pull-out of the handle shuts off the fuel to the connected engine and the button behind it releases the fire suppression agent into that engine.
Two advisory lights are connected to this system, each one indicating low pressure in one of the fire suppression agent bottles. The ENG FIRE EXT indicates low pressure in the main bottle and the AUX FIRE EXT the same in the auxiliary bottle. Both are located on the pilot caution - advisory indicator, see Caution - Advisory Indicator.
The advisory lights will both illuminate after a successful application of the system and will also indicate if an error drains the pressure in the bottles.
Fire Detection and Suppression System Test
Both systems can be tested by selection of the FIRE DET/EXT position on the master test panel switch. (See Master Test Panel.) This will illuminate both fire warning lights on the ACM panel if their respective loop is functional and the GO light on the master test panel will illuminate if the suppression system is functional. If the NO GO or no lights illuminate there’s a problem in either the suppression system or the test circuitry.
Ejection System
The F-14 Tomcat is equipped with dual Martin-Baker GRU-7A rocket-assisted ejection seats, one for the pilot, one for the RIO. The ejection system is a zero/zero system, capable of successfully ejecting the crewmembers at zero airspeed, stationary, on the ground.
As the F-14 is a two seat aircraft it has additional controls apart from the ejection handles and arming systems, namely the ejection command lever. This lever, which is located in the RIO cockpit, selects if the RIO ejects the pilot as well when he ejects.
The lever is situated beside the sensor control panel, see Eject Command Lever. When set to PILOT, the pilot ejects both crewmembers, while the RIO ejects only himself. When set to MCO both crewmembers eject both crewmembers.
The system does not allow pilot-only ejection because it would be undesirable for the RIO to remain in the aircraft alone.
The pilot has indication of what position the ejection command lever is at on the Landing Gear Control Panel, the EJECT CMD flip-flop indicator showing PILOT when the lever is in pilot and MCO when in MCO.
If the canopy does not jettison when initiating the ejection sequence it’s possible to manually jettison it using the Canopy Jettison Handle in the pilot cockpit or the Canopy Jettison Handle in the RIO cockpit. If the canopy inhibited ejection after ejection initiation, jettisoning the canopy will most likely restart it. If ejection is needed during a flat spin, it’s also recommended to manually jettison the canopy and allow it to clear before initiating the ejection sequence as the canopy might need longer to clear during a flat spin.
Jettison System
The Jettison system has four modes of operation: emergency, ACM, selective, and auxiliary.
Emergency Jettison
The emergency jettison is selected via the EMERG STORES JETT on the Landing Gear Control Panel. Selection causes the EMERG JETT caution light to illuminate on the pilot Caution - Advisory Indicator.
The emergency jettison requires only no weight on wheels indicated (no master arm) and ejects all stores except for Sidewinders.
ACM Jettison
The ACM jettison is selected via the ACM JETT button under the ACM cover/switch on the Air Combat Maneuver Panel.
The ACM jettison, like the emergency jettison, requires no master arm but instead requires that the landing gear lever is up. Unlike the emergency jettison the ACM jettison only ejects those stations selected by the RIO on the Armament Panel (set to SEL or B for stations 1 and 8).
Selective Jettison
The selective jettison is set and executed by the RIO on the Armament Panel. This mode of jettisoning requires the landing gear handle to be in the up position and the master arm to be on.
The procedure for jettison in selective mode is to set the desired station switches to SEL and hold the SEL JETT switch to JETT.
Auxiliary Jettison
The auxiliary jettison mode is a backup mode to use when the other modes have failed. Like the selective jettison mode it requires the landing gear handle to be up and the master arm to be on.
This mode can only eject air-to-ground stores and ejects them by actuating the normal release hooks. This means that the aircraft needs to fly straight and level as the stores are not ejected forcefully but instead just released and cleared using gravity.
💡 No jettison mode can jettison ITERs or stores loaded on those, they need to be dropped like normal, with or without the fuzes armed.
Weapons & Stores
The F-14's effectiveness is not only attributed to its advanced avionics and airframe design but also to its formidable array of weapons and stores.
The F-14 features four main types of Air-to-Air Weaponry including Heat-Seeking Missiles with the AIM-9 in different variants, the semi-active radar homing missile AIM-7 in different variants, the active radar homing missile AIM-54 in different variants and a M61A1 Vulcan cannon that can be used against both Air and Ground Targets.
The aircraft can be armed with a variety of bombs, rockets, and guided munitions to engage and neutralize ground targets.
In addition to its lethal armament, the F-14 can be configured with external fuel tanks to extend its operational range. The aircraft can also carry specialized stores, including the LANTIRN pod and the Tactical Airborne Reconnaissance Pod System (TARPS).
Loadout
The following diagram gives an overview of all stores that can be loaded on the stations.
💡 In practice, not all combinations might be possible, as there are a lot of technical factors resulting in restrictions.
| Store / Station | 1A | 1B | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8B | 8A | Total |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| AIM-9 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 4 | ||||||
| AIM-7 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 6 | ||||
| AIM-54 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 6 | ||||
| Mk-81 | 2 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 4 | 2 | 18 | ||||
| Mk-82 | 2 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 4 | 2 | 18 | ||||
| Mk-82AIR | 2 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 4 | 2 | 18 | ||||
| Mk-82 Snake Eye | 2 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 4 | 2 | 18 | ||||
| Mk-83 | 1 | 3 | 1 | 1 | 3 | 1 | 10 | ||||
| Mk-84 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 4 | ||||||
| Mk-20 | 2 | 2 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 10 | ||||
| GBU-10 | 1 | 1 | 2 | ||||||||
| GBU-12 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 4 | ||||||
| GBU-16 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 4 | ||||||
| GBU-24 | 1 | 1 | 2 | ||||||||
| BDU-33 | 3 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 4 | 3 | 20 | ||||
| LAU-10 (Zuni) | 2 | 2 | 1 | 2 | 7 (28) | ||||||
| ADM-141A TALD | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 4 | ||||||
| SUU-25 F/A Flare | 2 | 1 | 3 (24) | ||||||||
| LAU-138 Chaff Adapter | 1 | 1 | 2 | ||||||||
| Smokewinder | 1 | 1 | 2 | ||||||||
| TCTS | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 4 | ||||||
| LANTIRN | 1 | 1 | |||||||||
| FPU-1 Fuel Tank | 1 | 1 | 2 | ||||||||
| TARPS Pod | 1 | 1 | |||||||||
| ALQ-167 Pod | 1 | 1 |
M-61 Vulcan Six-Barreled Gatling Cannon
U.S. Navy photo by Photographers Mate Airman Kristopher Wilson. (041129-N-5345W-034)
The M-61 Vulcan is a six-barreled hydraulically driven 20 mm automatic cannon capable of firing over 6,000 rpm (rounds per minute).
The F-14 carries the gun internally mounted beneath the cockpit with the muzzle being located on the lower left side of the fuselage. 676 20 mm rounds are carried in the ammunition drum for the gun and retain the spent cases after the rounds have been fired.
The gun itself is mounted to be elevated slightly more than 3° from the ADL to provide built-in lead for dog-fight situations.
To fire the gun, no input is needed from the WCS, the gun can be fired by the trigger on the pilot stick when selected by the weapons selector on that same stick, provided master arm is on. The WCS can, however, provide symbology on the HUD to increase gun accuracy. For both air-to-air and air-to-ground modes the gun has two sights available. For air-to-air it’s the manual sight and the RTGS (real-time gun sight).
Selection of the gun is indicated on the bottom of the HUD by a capital G with remaining hundreds of rounds indicated below.
Apart from the indication on the HUD, the rounds remaining indicator on the pilot right vertical panel also shows remaining rounds. The indicator counts down from 650 but can manually be reset by rotating the knob below the indicator to the desired quantity.
The gun is capable of a 4,000 rpm or 6,000 rpm mode. The lower rate is normally used for air-to-ground engagement and the higher rate for air-to-air engagement. The gun rate is selected by the GUN RATE switch on the ACM, which also indicates the selected option. Selection of ACM will set it to high automatically. The maximum number of bullets fired by a trigger pull can be set to be either 50, 100, 200, or unlimited. The default value is 200 bullets but can be set otherwise by the ground crew.
💡 In DCS this is set via the kneeboard.
Manual Air-to-Air Sight
In manual mode, the HUD displays the ADL, the armament legend, and the manual pipper. This mode is accessed by depressing and releasing the CAGE/SEAM pushbutton on the left throttle when in the air-to-air mode with the gun selected. In this mode, the pilot has to manually aim the gun using the manual pipper as a reference to hit the target. Real target range and needed deflection need to be estimated by the pilot.
The manual piper is adjustable to enable the selection of the desired lead. The GUN ELEV panel on the pilot right vertical panel sets the lead; normally, this should be set to 53 milliradians to place the manual pipper on the gun sight line.
Real-Time Gunsight (RTGS)
The real-time gunsight mode is the standard gun mode when in the air-to-air mode with the gun selected.
In RTGS, the WCS computes the bullet trajectory and displays the location the bullets will pass through at 1,000 and 2,000 feet, if no target data is available from the WCS. The pipper represents bullet location at 1,000 feet and the diamond represents the bullet location at 2,000 feet.
If target data is available from the WCS (target tracked in an STT mode), the pipper instead displays bullet location at the target’s current range out to 4,000 feet. The diamond will display radar line of sight to the target (target location). This means that when having a target track, the pilot should fly the aircraft to place the pipper over the target to hit it.
In addition to computing the solution to put bullets at the target's location, the RTGS sight will also calculate where the bullets actually are in relation to the target when at target range. When the bullets fired are computed to be at the target’s location, the diamond switches from target indication to indicating bullet position at target range (BATR). This is also indicated by the diamond flashing.
Using this symbology, it’s possible to see where the target would have needed to be to be hit by the bullets. If the gun engagement was executed successfully, this means that the diamond should still be on top of the target, blinking, indicating that the bullets passed through the target’s location.
Manual Air-to-Ground Sight
The manual air-to-ground sight works and looks the same way as the manual air-to-air sight except that it’s set by the RIO using the ATTK MODE selector on the armament control panel that’s located on the RIO left vertical panel. Selecting MAN on that selector enables the same HUD symbology as in the manual air-to-air sight upon the selection of the air-to-ground mode, the only additional HUD symbology being the display of the radar altitude on the right side of the HUD. The gun deflection should instead be set according to a pre-calculated setting depending on airspeed, target range, and dive angle.
Computer/Pilot Mode
Computer/pilot mode is used to have the WCS continuously compute a weapon impact point for, among other air-to-ground weapons, the gun. It is set by the RIO on the ATTK MODE selector, as for manual air-to-ground sight, by selecting CMPTR-PLT.
In this mode, the AN/AWG-9 radar is slaved to the weapon impact point for accurate range measurements and enables the HUD display of that same impact point.
The HUD uses the pipper to indicate a real-time weapon impact point and the diamond to indicate out of range. When the diamond disappears, the gun is in range to engage a target under the pipper. The pull-up cue moves vertically on the HUD and when it’s at or above the weapon impact point (pipper), it indicates that an immediate pull-up is required to avoid striking the ground and that the target is too close to engage safely.
The right side of the HUD displays the barometric altitude scale.
Mixed Gun Mode
The gun can also be used at the same time as another air-to-ground munition is selected by setting the A/G GUN switch on the armament panel (on the RIO left vertical panel) to MIXED. This enables the trigger to fire the gun but no HUD symbology is available for the gun as it’s being used to display release data for the selected munition. In this mode, the pilot needs to estimate the gun impact point manually with the ADL as the only reference on the HUD.
Air to Air
The F-14 Tomcat can equip various air-to-air weapons.
For medium to long range engagements the AIM-54 Phoenix as well as the AIM-7 Sparrow can be used.
In close-quarters engagements, the Tomcat relies on the AIM-9 Sidewinder, a short-range, infrared-guided missile celebrated for its agility and responsiveness.
HUD Symbology for Air-to-Air Missiles
The above image shows the HUD with Phoenixes selected while in air-to-air display mode.
As standard the HUD shows the Closure Rate on the left side in hundredths of
knots, from -200 to +1,000 knots. Current closure rate as displayed by a <.
Additionally it displays the Target Range Scale on the right side, showing
target range at the displayed scale, 10 NM in this case as display at the upper
end. The target range scale shows the current target range with a > and
selected weapon max and minimum ranges as indicated by the dashes (-).
The Movable Reticle (called pipper for air to ground and gun employment) and the Target Designator can show different things depending on current situation.
The Movable Reticle shows current TCS line of sight if it exists at the same time as a radar STT lock except for when AIM-9s are selected. In the AIM-9 case it instead shows current AIM-9 seeker head line of sight.
The Target Designator diamond shows current radar STT line of sight if present and if not it instead shows the current TCS line of sight.
So effectually the TCS line of sight can be shown either by the movable reticle or the target designator depending on if a radar STT is also present and if a radar STT is present with AIM-9 selected it’s not shown at all.
AIM-54 Phoenix
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 2nd Class Felix Garza Jr. (030320-N-4142G-013)
💡 Depicted missile has yet to have the forward fins attached.
The AIM-54 Phoenix is a long-range air-to-air missile originally designed for the F-111B fleet air defense fighter, which never materialized. When the F-111B project was scrapped, the AIM-54 and the corresponding AN/AWG-9 WCS eventually found their way to the F-14.
The F-14 is capable of carrying up to 6 AIM-54 missiles, four on rails on the fuselage and one each on the glove pylons. Because of the missile cooling system used, the two front Phoenix pylons must always be mounted, meaning that the rear fuselage pylons can’t be used if the front ones aren’t present. The glove pylons contain their own cooling systems.
The missile is capable of engagement both against a single target in STT and multiple targets using track-while-search (TWS).
The AIM-54 is available in two different versions, the AIM-54A and the AIM-54C. The Heatblur Simulations F-14 Tomcat models both versions as well as the AIM-54A with both mk47 and mk60 rocket motors. The two motors on the AIM-54A differ in effective range, while the AIM-54C differs by having a digital seeker instead of an analog one, increasing its performance, as well as an improved, smokeless mk47 rocket motor.
The AIM-54 has a range of at least 60 NM against a fighter-sized target at high altitudes in pulse doppler STT. When using TWS for engagement against multiple targets, this drops to about 50 NM. It has a greater range against large targets and vice versa against smaller targets.
If launched in active mode, the range drops to about 10 NM for a fighter-sized target, varying slightly with target size. Notably, the missile will revert to SARH mode if no target is detected if selected for active launch in a SARH mode.
Missile Preparation
The AIM-54 missile preparation is started by selecting the MSL PREP switch on the pilot ACM panel or by activating the ACM. This enables power and cooling to the missile and also starts the built-in tests in the missile (BIT).
As with the AIM-7, the AIM-54 is tuned before launch using a transmitter on the rear end of the missile rail, transmitting to the rear receiver of the missile. The whole missile preparation cycle is completed after around 2 minutes, at which time the AIM-54 missiles are indicated ready in the corresponding missile status windows on the pilot ACM.
Launch Modes
The seeker head used in the AIM-54 is capable of both semi-active radar homing (SARH) and active radar homing (ARH).
Normally, the launch to eject (LTE) cycle of the missile is 3 seconds, meaning the time from trigger depression to missile ejection. The exception is the ACM active mode, where the LTE is shortened to 1 second if within 15° from ADL.
TWS SARH/ARH
In TWS, the AN/AWG-9 is capable of supporting the launch of up to 6 AIM-54 missiles against 6 different targets concurrently. In the first stage of the AIM-54 engagement, the missile is guided semi-actively by the AN/AWG-9 radar using both guidance commands transmitted via the radar and radar energy reflected off the target. Then, when the missile is within range of its seeker’s ARH mode, the AN/AWG-9 commands the missile to switch to ARH.
Absence of this command via the AN/AWG-9 radar means that the missile won’t switch to the ARH mode. The AN/AWG-9, however, continues to transmit guidance commands to the missile as a fallback in case the missile can’t acquire the target autonomously. This means that the AIM-54 isn’t a "fire and forget" missile per se, but it can be considered autonomous after transfer to ARH.
PD STT SARH
In pulse doppler STT, the AIM-54 uses SARH all the way to the target, receiving guidance commands at a greater rate than in TWS and also continuous spotlighting of the target because of the STT mode being used. This increases the effective range of the AIM-54 seeker slightly.
Active-Radar Homing (ARH)
The AIM-54 can also be commanded to go active directly after launch in both TWS and pulse doppler STT modes by setting the MSL OPTIONS switch to PH ACT before launch. This tells the WCS to immediately command the AIM-54 to go active in the first guidance command after launch. If launched at a target within 6 NM in the target's rear hemisphere or 10 NM in its forward hemisphere, the WCS will also automatically command this mode instead of a SARH mode.
If the target is not detected actively by the seeker, it will still fall back to SARH until the seeker can acquire on its own, like in the two SARH modes.
💡 Setting the MSL OPTIONS switch to PH ACT with an AIM-54 in the air will not make it go active; the PH ACT option can only be set before missile launch.
ACM Active
The last mode is ACM active, in which the missile is commanded active before launch, making this the only mode where the missile is truly fire and forget. The AIM-54 missile receives the active message before launch from the WCS in addition to a command pre-positioning the seeker head to have it look at the current WCS track if available.
ACM active is commanded when BRSIT (boresight) is selected on the pilot ACM panel, when having the ACM active without a WCS track, and when using a non-pulse doppler radar mode or TCS track. When using boresight or ACM without a track, the missile will launch along the ADL, locking onto the first target seen while launching at a non-pulse doppler radar track, the seeker head will be pre-positioned onto that track.
ECM Mode
In all of the guidance modes, the seeker head automatically switches to a passive ECM follow if jammed, angle-tracking the target until it can again track the target using SARH or ARH. This is done without crew action and is not indicated to the operator.
Missile Operation
The AIM-54 missile is selected with the weapon selector on the pilot stick by selecting the SP/PH (sparrow/phoenix) position and then depressing the selector to switch from SP to PH. It is possible to switch back to SP by again depressing the weapon selector.
When used in boresight or ACM without a WCS track, the HUD will not indicate any symbology apart from the ADL, which is used to aim the missile.
When selected with a WCS track in STT, the HUD will display the Target Designator, and if a TCS track exists, the Movable Reticle overlaying the target, the former indicating WCS track and the latter TCS line of sight. The range scale on the right side of the HUD indicates range to target and Rmin and Rmax, while the VDI, DDD, and TID display the attack guidance symbology.
TWS
When using the AIM-54 with TWS, the WCS automatically prioritizes the tracked targets, giving them a firing order number indicating missile launch order. As the first target is launched at, the first track’s number is removed, and the other tracks’ numbers are decreased by one.
To continue to engage tracks 2 through 6, the pilot depresses the trigger once for each target, waits until the missile is clear, and then depresses the trigger again for the next missile, and so on until the desired number of missiles are away.
After missile launch, the prioritization numbers on the right side of the targeted tracks are replaced with the TTI or Time to Impact number, showing calculated time until missile hits the target.
Additionally, when the AN/AWG-9 has sent the active command to the missile, the TTI numbers blink, indicating that the missile targeting the track has been commanded to active mode. When this happens depends on the setting of the TGTS switch on the DDD. SMALL equals 6NM, NORM equals 10NM, and LARGE equals 13NM. The setting set before launch is used.
The targets currently under missile attack brighten until estimated time to target plus 15 seconds has elapsed, and when at 15 seconds past estimated time to the last target, the break-away cross is also displayed on the VDI, DDD, and TID.
For more info regarding the applicable TID symbology, see TID Symbology.
It is possible to force the WCS to include a target by setting it to mandatory attack using the CAP and also to exclude a target by setting it to do not attack on the same panel. In addition, it is possible to command the WCS to set a track as priority 1 in the firing order by hooking it and pressing NEXT LAUNCH on the RIO armament panel.
If not already in TWS AUTO, the WCS automatically switches to this mode, thus assuming control over the AN/AWG-9 radar to keep the engaged targets illuminated. In addition to the track numbering, the TID also displays a steering centroid indicating the center weight of the TWS scan pattern.
The HUD and VDI display a steering cue guiding the pilot towards optimal target illumination and also display range and Rmin and Rmax to target number 1. The TID displays the complete attack symbology with target prioritization numbers and individual optimum launch ranges. For more info, see Track While Scan (TWS).
AIM-54 in DCS
The HB DCS F-14 includes custom AIM-54A and AIM-54C missiles, the AIM-54A with a choice of two different rocket motors. The aerodynamics and engine performance for these missiles have been extensively researched and computer simulated to make the included missiles behave as realistically as possible in regards to aerodynamics.
Regarding missile seeker and flight profile, we’ve worked with Eagle Dynamics to enable our F-14 AN/AWG-9 to control the AIM-54 to a degree. In DCS, this means the following:
In TWS, the missiles will fly out using guidance from the AN/AWG-9 until about 16 seconds to impact, at which time the AN/AWG-9 will tell the missile to go active if it’s still within the radar scan zone. The exact distance at which the AN/AWG-9 sends the ATC depends on the setting of the TGTS switch, as detailed above. This results in a silent engagement until the missiles go active, at which time the target’s radar warning receiver will get an indication of an active missile engaging it. If fired at range, the AIM-54 will loft for greater range. Setting the different seeker activation ranges impacts the amount of warning the target will get but also the amount of time the missile needs to be supported.
In PD-STT (Pulse-Doppler Single Target Track), the AIM-54 will be launched in a pure semi-active mode and be guided in that mode all the way to the target without going active. This means that the engaged target will get an immediate engagement warning through its radar warning receiver from the AN/AWG-9 as soon as the AIM-54 leaves the rail. Like in TWS, the missile will loft if fired at range.
For all other modes and within 10NM of the target (or in ACM or PH ACT), the AIM-54 will launch active off the rail, and the targeted aircraft will immediately see the missile’s own radar actively engaging it. It will not loft in this case, and thus the range is less than in the other two cases.
The AIM-54C in DCS currently is not affected by the Target Size Switch.
AIM-7 Sparrow
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 3rd Class Joshua Karsten. (041108-N-8704K-008)
The AIM-7 Sparrow air-to-air missile is a supersonic boost-glide missile capable of engaging both aircraft and missiles in all weather conditions. The AIM-7 Sparrow missile is a medium-range air-to-air missile with a max range of at least 16 NM (30 km) for the AIM-7E and at least 38 NM (70 km) for the AIM-7F and AIM-7M. The all-weather capability comes from the missile being radar-guided, more exactly SARH (semi-active radar homing). This means that the seeker of the Sparrow relies on the AN/AWG-9 painting the targets for it and following the radar emissions being reflected off the target.
The F-14 can carry the AIM-7E, AIM-7F, and AIM-7M on four dedicated recesses on the aircraft fuselage and one each on the glove pylons.
Apart from the various improvements to the missile range, seeker, and warhead, the major difference between the different versions is that the AIM-7F and newer missiles can also be guided via pulse doppler illumination in addition to CW as opposed to only CW.
Missile Preparation
Before launch, the AIM-7 missiles need to be prepared by the selection of the MSL PREP-ON pushbutton on the pilot ACM panel. This commands the WCS to start missile preparation for the AIM-7 and AIM-54.
In the case of the AIM-7, the WCS applies electrical power to the missile to pre-heat the electronics and gyros. It also injects CW radar video from the radar to the missiles via an emitter on the aft end of the rail to a receiver at the aft end of the missile. This video is used to tune the AIM-7 missile to the selected CW frequency on the RIO DDD panel. When the individual missiles are tuned and ready, the corresponding missile status windows turn white to indicate a ready missile.
Launch Modes
The two available launch modes for the AIM-7 on the F-14 are the normal mode and the boresight mode. To select the AIM-7 for launch, the pilot selects the SP/PH (sparrow/phoenix) position on the stick weapon selector. Selection of which Sparrow to launch is done automatically by the WCS.
Depression of the weapon selector switches from SP to PH and vice versa. If an STT target is available, the WCS will automatically use the normal mode for launch unless BRSIT (boresight) is selected on the MSL MODE (missile mode) switch on the ACM panel. In all other cases, the boresight mode will be used.
Normal Mode
As the normal mode is used to engage a target tracked in STT, the WCS is capable of using both CW and pulse doppler for guidance. When using CW in the normal mode, the AN/AWG-9 radar uses a dedicated CW antenna to spotlight the tracked target more directly than via the flood antenna. While CW is the normal guidance mode for all AIM-7 variants, it is possible to select the pulse doppler guidance mode instead when using the AIM-7F and AIM-7M missiles.
This is done on the RIO's armament panel with the MSL OPTIONS switch by setting it to SP DP (sparrow doppler). When selected, this causes the WCS to guide the Sparrow missiles using pulse doppler illumination instead.
Regardless of guidance mode, the WCS calculates the missile LAR (launch acceptance region) and displays the missile launch ranges on the VDI and TID. The HUD shows the target diamond and current target range, Rmin and Rmax, while the VDI, DDD, and TID display the attack guidance symbology as well as the above-mentioned missile LAR indications.
Boresight Mode
The boresight mode uses the CW flood antenna on the AN/AWG-9 radar and will cause the missile to track the strongest target return within the flood area. In addition to when launched in boresight mode, the radar will also switch to flood mode when a target is lost, either before launch or after launch, enabling the pilot to try and save the shot by keeping the target within the flood area.
AIM-9 Sidewinder
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate Airman Kristopher Wilson. (050112-N-5345W-066)
The AIM-9 Sidewinder is a short-range air-to-air missile. It uses an infrared seeker locking on to a target's IR signature, making it capable of tracking a target both during daytime and at night.
The F-14 Tomcat is capable of carrying all Navy versions of the AIM-9 Sidewinder from the AIM-9D up to the AIM-9M. The Heatblur F-14 Tomcat is currently modeled as carrying the AIM-9L and AIM-9M.
The F-14 is capable of carrying the AIM-9 on stations 1A & B and 8A & B. Stations 1 & 8 are the glove pylons, which can each carry two AIM-9s for a total of 4. Station 1A & 8A are dedicated to carry only the AIM-9 and are normally used when only carrying two to allow station 1B & 8B to carry other munitions.
Missile Preparation
The cooling of the AIM-9 seeker head needs to be enabled before launch. This is done by pressing the SW COOL switch on the pilot ACM panel or by selecting the ACM mode on the same panel. This commands cooling of the missile's seeker head. The missile will immediately show ready, but full seeker head performance will take at least 60 seconds.
Seeker Head Modes
The AIM-9G introduced a seeker head capable of the Sidewinder expanded acquisition mode (SEAM), and all later Sidewinders carried by the F-14 are also capable of that mode. SEAM allows the missile seeker head to be uncaged to track a target within the seeker limits (40° from ADL), allowing the pilot to lead the target, improving missile performance. It also allows for the WCS on the F-14 to slave the seeker to a tracked target within 20° from ADL, allowing for off-boresight acquisition.
The AIM-9 on the F-14 can still use the old boresight mode where the seeker head remains slaved to ADL (2.5° field of view), but normally SEAM is used to scan the seeker about either ADL or a tracked target. This scan is not visible to the pilot and is done to increase effective seeker head field of view. As with all Sidewinders, target detection is indicated by an aural tone. That growling tone is present while scanning but increases in intensity while the seeker is looking at an IR source.
Missile Operation
The AIM-9 Sidewinder is selected for launch with the weapon selector on the pilot stick. The weapon selector can be used to cycle which AIM-9 is selected for launch by depressing it, indicating on the ACM panel which missile is selected by a checkerboard indication in the corresponding status window. When using the AIM-9, the HUD uses the diamond to indicate a tracked target and the pipper (crosshair) to indicate current seeker head position. If a WCS track with range is available, the HUD also displays range to target and Rmin and Rmax. The VDI, DDD, and TID display the attack guidance symbology if a WCS track is present.
The basic missile boresight mode without SEAM (no scan) is commanded by depressing the BRSIT (boresight) switch on the pilot ACM panel while not having the ACM mode active. In this mode, the pilot puts the target at ADL and fires when the aural tone is present.
If the BRSIT switch is not used or the ACM mode is active, the AIM-9 will use the SEAM and set the missile to use a scan pattern around the ADL. If a WCS target is present, the seeker head will scan around the radar or TCS line of sight; otherwise, the missile will scan around the ADL.
To enable lock-on to a target in SEAM, the pilot depresses the CAGE/SEAM pushbutton on the left throttle. This illuminates the SEAM LOCK light on the ACM panel and un-cages the seeker for 4.5 seconds, allowing it to track a target present in the seeker's field of view. If no IR source is found, the missile is again caged and the SEAM LOCK light is deactivated.
If lock-on is successful, the aural tone will remain and the SEAM LOCK light stays illuminated, allowing the pilot to launch the missile by pressing the stick trigger. After launch, the next AIM-9 will automatically be selected.
Air to Ground
Despite being primarily designed as an air superiority fighter and an interceptor the F-14 was from the very start cleared and tested to carry all of the modern American general purpose bombs (GP) of the Mk-80 series. In addition it was also cleared to carry the Mk-20 Rockeye cluster bomb and the 5" Zuni folding-fin aircraft rocket (FFAR).
As the F-14’s combat role changed to include the precision ground attack mission it was also cleared to carry several of the guided bomb unit (GBU) versions of the Mk-80 series bombs, more specifically, some of the laser guided versions.
Air-to-Ground Weapon Settings
The air-to-ground weapon delivery is set up by the RIO on his armament panel on the left vertical panel of the RIO cockpit.
The type of munition for delivery is set up by the wheel on the top of the panel, turning it to the correct munition. This configures the WCS with the correct parameters for the selected munition.
💡 The Mk-81, 82, and 83 have both an L and an H option for low-drag and high-drag versions, respectively.
Under DLVY MODE (delivery mode), it is possible to set STP/RPL (step/ripple) and SGL/PRS (single/pairs). The possible combinations are:
- STP and SGL: Releases one store with each depression of the bomb release button on the pilot stick.
- STP and PRS: As with STP and SGL but each depression of the bomb release button on the pilot stick releases a pair of stores. Only works for paired stations, 1 with 8, 3 with 6, and 4 with 5.
- RPL and SGL: Used with all attack modes, each depression of the bomb release button on the pilot stick releases a set amount of stores set by the QTY (quantity) wheels with the interval set by the INTERVAL wheels (in milliseconds).
- RPL and PRS: As RPL and SGL but each release pulse releases a pair of stores, QTY still sets the total amount of stores to be released.
The MECH FUSE switch sets which mechanical fuse to arm on the stores. NOSE arms the nose fuse, SAFE inhibits arming of the fuses, and NOSE/TAIL arms both fuses.
The ELEC FUSE selector knob sets the electrical fuse of the store to be released:
- SAFE: Inhibits electrical bomb fusing.
- VT: Sets air-burst mode at preset burst height for compatible stores.
- INST: Sets instantaneous burst mode.
- DLY 1: Sets preset time delay 1.
- DLY 2: Sets preset time delay 2.
The INTERVAL and QTY (quantity) wheels set the release interval (in milliseconds) and quantity of stores to be released, compatible with the delivery modes as seen above under DLVY MODE.
Lastly, the 6 STA SEL (station select) switches set which pylons to use for store delivery (also used for selection of what stores to jettison). To select a pylon for store delivery, set the corresponding switch to SEL. Stations 1 and 8 should be set to B for selection, SW was used to jettison AIM-9 Sidewinders but is now inoperable.
💡 All F-14 bombs in DCS are assumed to have both types of fuzes, so both the mechanical and electrical fuze need to be set. GBUs, Mk-20s, and Mk-81 to 84s need the mechanical fuze set to either N or N/T settings, the Mk-82AIR (ballute) and Mk-82 Snake-Eye can be dropped in free-fall with N and retarded with N/T.
Air-to-Ground Weapon Delivery
Air-to-ground delivery is initiated by pilot selection of the A/G mode on the display control panel. After tape read-in (about 30 seconds), the WCS initiates the air-to-ground mode and enables relevant symbology on the displays.
The weapon selection automatically switches to ordnance (ORD on the HUD) unless the pilot has selected another weapon. All other options are set by the RIO in the back seat.
The available attack modes in the F-14 are set by the ATTK MODE selector in the RIO pit and are:
- CMPTR TGT: Computer target, a semi-automatic computer-guided mode similar to a CCRP mode in newer aircraft.
- CMPTR IP: Computer initial point, an extended CMPTR TGT mode using a known initial point (IP) as a reference for store delivery. Mostly used in situations where the actual target is expected to be hard to locate visually and is located closely to an easily identifiable reference point/landmark.
- CMPTR PLT: Computer pilot, a manual computer and pilot-guided mode using the WCS for store impact point indication on HUD. Similar to a CCIP mode in newer aircraft.
- MAN: Manual, manual backup mode in which the HUD displays a pipper (crosshair) on the HUD at the deflection set by the pilot. Used in case of a systems failure prohibiting the other modes.
- D/L BOMB: Data-link bomb, an automatic mode in which the pilot is steered via data-link cues for remotely controlled store delivery. (Not implemented in DCS at this point in time.)
Computer Target
The computer target mode allows the pilot to designate a target onto which the WCS then guides the pilot towards store release. This mode is usable for all air-to-ground stores, including rockets.
When selected, the HUD displays the diamond as target designator and the bomb fall line (BFL) through the velocity vector and store impact point pipper (crosshair).
To designate a target, the pilot steers the aircraft in azimuth to place the target along the BFL. Then UP/DN on the target designate switch on the left wall of the pilot cockpit is used to slew the target designator along the BFL until it overlays the target. At that point, the target is designated by pressing the target designate switch to DES.
After designation, the target designation diamond becomes stabilized to the designated position on the ground, and the AN/AWG-9 is slewed to it for range measurements. The BFL now remains overlaying the designated target while the store impact point pipper and aircraft velocity vector continue to follow aircraft movements. In addition, the HUD now displays the upper and lower solution cues on the BFL.
The pilot should now fly the velocity vector and store impact point over the BFL until the solution cues reach them. The lower solution cue indicates imminent store release when passing the velocity vector, and the pilot should by now be holding the bomb release button depressed to authorize WCS store release. When the upper solution cue reaches the velocity vector, the WCS automatically releases set stores on the condition that the bomb release button is depressed.
The pull-up cue (bracket on the HUD) moves upwards on the HUD towards the velocity vector with decreasing altitude. When it reaches the velocity vector, it indicates that the aircraft is below safe altitude for store release.
Computer Initial Point
Functionally identical to the Computer Target mode except that a preset initial point (IP) is designated instead of the actual target. The IP is preset before takeoff using data-link or manually by the RIO using the CAP.
The IP waypoint should be a terrain feature expected to be visually identifiable by the pilot even if the target is not.
To set the CAP, the RIO designates the location of the IP waypoint as per the other waypoints in the system. (See CAP heading under AN/AWG-9 in the General Design and Systems Overview section or the Navigation Systems heading in the same section)
The message (function) IP TO TGT on the CAP under the SPL category is then used with the prefixes ALT, RNG, and BRG to read out and set the following data points:
- ALT: Sets altitude difference of the target relative to the IP waypoint.
- RNG: Sets range to target from the IP waypoint.
- BRG: Sets the bearing to the target from the IP waypoint.
When the pilot designates the IP visually on the HUD, the WCS recalculates the target location using the data set under the IP TO TGT function on the CAP, moves the target diamond to that location, and instead displays guidance towards the real target location.
All other functions of this mode are identical to the Computer Target mode.
Computer Pilot
The computer pilot mode uses the WCS to continually calculate and display an impact point for the configured store on the HUD.
When selected, the HUD displays the current store impact point in real-time using the pipper (crosshair). The target designation diamond is used when the WCS is configured for rockets and overlays the pipper to indicate that the configured store is out of range when displayed. As in the Computer Target and IP modes, the pull-up cue is used to indicate aircraft below safe store release altitude when at or above the velocity vector.
To correctly engage the desired target, the pilot flies the impact point pipper on the HUD over the target and then depresses the bomb release button.
When using rockets, the pilot should wait until the diamond disappears, indicating that the selected store is within range and then use the control stick trigger to fire the rockets.
Manual
The manual air-to-ground mode is used as a backup when the other modes are unavailable.
By principle, it works the same as the Computer Pilot mode in that the pilot should fly the pipper on the HUD over the desired target. The pipper is in this mode not updated by the WCS, however, but instead set at a deflection from the ADL according to desired engagement speed, dive angle, and release altitude.
This is set using the elevation lead panel on the pilot right side vertical panel using weapon engagement tables or by pilot estimation.
Zuni Rockets
The Zuni 5-inch folding-fin aircraft rocket (FFAR) was developed to replace the high-velocity aircraft rocket (HVAR) of World War 2 vintage. As part of its design, it’s modular and capable of using different warheads as well as different fuzes.
The Zuni rockets are carried in LAU-10 pods, each carrying 4 rockets. The pods can fire in either salvo mode or ripple mode, salvo launching one rocket and ripple all.
The F-14 Tomcat can carry LAU-10 rocket pods on stations 1B, 3, 6, and 8B using TERs, each TER holding up to two pods except one of either 3 or 6 which must only carry one as not to clash with a pod on the adjacent station. The TERs are used to gain separation from the station for safe rocket firing, and the reason for not being able to use three pods on the TERs is that on the glove pylons, the inner TER station would conflict with the main landing gear and on stations 3 and 6 with the fuselage.
The Zuni rockets are set up for launch by the RIO on the armament panel as with bombs, the delivery mode (DLVY MODE) switches being used to configure how many pods to activate at a time.
Mk-81, 82, 83, and 84 GP Bombs
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate Airman Justin S. Osborne. (030321-N-0382O-506)
The Mk-80 series bombs are the standard general-purpose bombs used by the US Navy and allies and were first dropped in combat during the Vietnam War. The Mk-82 also has the capability to mount a retardation system using either folding fins or an inflated ballute to brake the bomb after release, allowing them to be dropped at lower altitudes as the dropping aircraft has more time to move away from them. Those versions are called the Mk-82 Snake Eye (fins) and Mk-82AIR (ballute) in DCS.
The F-14 is capable of carrying all the various bombs in the Mk-80s series, 81 through to 84. While the ground attack mission never really materialized for the F-14 in the Navy, it was tested for and cleared to deliver these weapons from the start.
The F-14 uses the Phoenix rails (stations 3-6) and the glove pylons’ lower stations to mount the bombs. The rails themselves can carry all four variants while the 81 to 83 can also be mounted on substations along the sides of the Phoenix rails as well as on TERs on the glove pylons.
All of the Mk-80 bombs have nose fuzes only and should be dropped with the nose (N) fuze setting on the mechanical fuze switch on the RIO armament panel. The Mk-82AIR and Snake Eye variants use the tail fuze wire to enable bomb retardation, meaning that the nose/tail (N/T) mechanical fuze option should be used if retardation is needed.
The total amount of the different bombs carried depends on weapon weight and weapon clearance between the rails; the actual number varies from 18 for the 81s and 82s to just 4 for the 84s as those can only be mounted on the rails themselves. For more info, see the F-14 loadout diagrams.
GBU-10, 12, 16, and 24
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate Airman Milosz Reterski. (040105-N-9742R-001)
The GBU (guided bomb unit) are bombs from the Mk-80s series with an attached seeker unit and fin (control) unit converting them into guided precision bombs, and in the case of the GBU-10, 12, 16, and 24 carried by the F-14, laser-guided bombs to be more precise.
When the F-14B gained the ability to mount and use the LANTIRN pod, it was also cleared to carry some of the GBU variants of the Mk-80 series bombs. It can either deliver them onto designation from a self-carried LANTIRN pod or onto a laser designation from another aircraft or ground source.
The GBUs carried are mounted on the Phoenix rails themselves on stations 3-6 as the additional size of a GBU compared to a normal Mk-80 series bomb makes it impossible to use the substations on the rails for those. Each station is capable of carrying one GBU up to the size of the GBU-16. As for the GBU-10 and 24, the 10 can be carried on the front rails (3 and 6) and the 24 on one front rail and one back rail as they need to be carried on opposite sides of the aircraft due to the larger wing assembly.
💡 GBU laser codes are set as per DCS Mission Editor Functions Specific to the HB DCS F-14 or via the kneeboard.
Mk-20 Rockeye
The Mk-20 Rockeye is a conventional free-fall bomb like the Mk-80 series bombs, but instead of a conventional charge, it carries anti-tank submunitions. The Rockeye contains 247 of these anti-tank submunitions, which are released at a set height using a radar altimeter, the design being that the submunitions are dispersed over a large area for greater effect.
The fuze height itself is set by the ground crew as they’re loaded and can’t be changed by the pilot. To arm the Rockeye correctly, the mechanical fuse should be set to nose (N).
The F-14 can carry up to 10 Mk-20 Rockeyes using the Phoenix rails and substations as well as TERs on the glove pylons.
💡 Additional fuse settings (FMU-140 fuse) pending additional weapon code implementation.
BDU-33 Practice Bombs
The BDU-33 practice bomb is a training round used to simulate a Mk-82 general-purpose bomb for training purposes. They can be carried three to a TER on each of station 3, 4, 5, and 6 on the F-14 Tomcat.
They are set up for release as with the real general-purpose bombs.
ADM-141 TALD
U.S. Navy photo by Photographer’s Mate 3rd Class Mark J. Rebilas. (041018-N-6213R-021)
The ADM-141 tactical air-launched decoy (TALD) is a gliding decoy simulating real aircraft using active and passive means. There are several versions of the TALD, examples being a version equipped to launch chaff and another version using a Luneberg lens to increase its cross-section to simulate a larger aircraft.
All versions are pre-programmed before takeoff and are un-powered, gliding through the air on fold-out wings.
The F-14 can carry up to four ADM-141 TALDs, one each on stations 3 through 6, using a TER each to gain separation from the aircraft fuselage.
💡 In DCS these currently glide straight ahead until they run out of speed and altitude.
LUU-2 Parachute Flare
The LUU-2 parachute flare is an air-launched flare suspended by a parachute used to illuminate the ground during nighttime.
The F-14 can carry up to 16 LUU-2 flares in up to 4 SUU-25 flare dispensers on TERs at stations 4 and 5, each TER capable of carrying up to 2 dispensers in order not to conflict with the fuselage.
The LUU-2 parachute flare is launched and set up in the same way as a general-purpose bomb.
Smokewinder
The Smokewinder is a smoke pod used for aerial displays simulating an AIM-9 missile to the aircraft interface.
To enable and disable a Smokewinder, select AIM-9 for launch using boresight (BRSIT) and select the corresponding weapon station using the weapon selector on the pilot stick. When set up thusly and with master arm on, each pull of the trigger enables or disables the Smokewinder discharging smoke.
Pods
TACTS Pods
The TACTS pod is an analysis pod used during training missions, carried on LAU-7 rails instead of AIM-9s, normally on station 1A and 8A. They are normally carried as a pair of two, one on each side.
💡 In DCS, their functionality is purely cosmetic.
LANTIRN
U.S. Navy photo by Photographers Mate Airman Jason Frost. (030122-N-9403F-002)
The LANTIRN was adapted for use on the F-14 Tomcats during the 1990s as the F-14’s role started to gravitate towards including the precision strike role.
The version carried on the Heatblur DCS F-14B Tomcat represents the earliest integrations of the LANTIRN, the pod being carried only on station 8B and hardwired to the control panel in the RIO cockpit and to the video input on the TID/VDI.
For more information regarding the use of the LANTIRN pod, see the section about it under the General Design and Systems Overview chapter.
TARPS
U.S. Navy photo by Photographers Mate 2nd Class Gloria J. Barry. (980320-N-4541B-008)
The Tactical Airborne Reconnaissance Pod System, or TARPS, was developed to provide carrier air wings with an organic tactical reconnaissance capability as dedicated aircraft such as the RA-5C Vigilante and RF-8G Crusader were withdrawn from service, allowing modified F-14s to perform photographic reconnaissance, mapping, maritime surveillance, and pre- and post-strike damage assessment.
For more information regarding the use of the TARPS pod, see the section about it under the General Design and Systems Overview chapter.
Tanks
FPU-1 Fuel Tank
The FPU-1 fuel tank is carried by the F-14 Tomcat on stations 2 and 7 on each engine nacelle. They each carry up to 2,000 pounds of fuel and can be jettisoned in the same way as other stores using the normal procedures.
Jester & Iceman
Jester
The Jester AI aims to be a functional AI Radar Intercept Officer (RIO) for the Heatblur DCS F-14, enabling a multi-crew experience in a single-player (per aircraft) environment.
He is fully integrated into the rear cockpit, controlling nearly all back seat systems, with a focus on systems not controllable from the pilot seat. He is also modeled to simulate human limitations—his head position, visual spotting range, and hand positions are all accounted for. When controlling systems at the RIO seat, he performs all actions a human RIO would.
To control Jester, a command wheel is used for quick access. This wheel is dynamic based on the selected mode and the current situation. Feedback to the pilot is given via ICS using a library of recorded audio, simulating a RIO actually talking. In addition to acknowledging orders, Jester will provide pertinent information based on the situation.
In multiplayer, if a human RIO disconnects mid-flight, Jester resumes control of the rear cockpit systems in the configuration left by the human player.
Functionality
The Jester menu is opened by default with the A key. Selection of
items (
- The first press brings up a contextual menu based on current aircraft mode and situation.
- A second press opens the Main Menu.
- A third press closes the menu.
Examples:
- Air-to-Air mode (airborne): opens Beyond Visual Range – Radar menu.
- Air-to-Ground mode: opens Air-to-Ground – Weapons menu.
- Take-off/Landing: context-specific menus available.
From these menus, pilots can control RIO systems. Menu contents can change based on prior selections. In some cases, menu petals act as inputs/keypads for entering data like frequencies or waypoints.
You can also:
- Set a waypoint from an F10 map marker (menu shows time and name).
- Lock targets on the TID using options like closest target or specific azimuth/range.
- Run a startup checklist.
Assisted Startup
For aircraft cold start, Jester can either perform his checklist like a real RIO would, or he can also help the pilot with an assisted startup in which he reads the pilot's checklist to him while starting.
To access the normal, unassisted startup, select startup, Jester will then go through his checklist. He will at times ask the pilot if he has completed certain checks or ask for specific tests, this is answered via the Jester menu using the options appearing there. As an example he will start by asking for a comms check which is answered via the Jester menu. Note that after engine startup and EMERG GEN Master test he will ask for what INS alignment to go for, select this via the Jester menu as well.
To access the assisted startup select assisted start on the Jester menu. Jester will now read out the checklist to the pilot and highlight the relevant indicators and switches during startup. Use the Jester menu to tell Jester when a check/step is complete.
Iceman
Iceman is a basic autopilot AI and a subset of the Jester system. It is designed for singleplayer scenarios where a player may switch between the front and rear seats.
When the player switches to the RIO seat:
- Iceman takes control of heading and altitude.
- The Iceman menu allows setting heading, altitude, and speed—either relative to a target or as absolute values.
Normal Procedures
This chapter contains standard procedures for operating the F-14 Tomcat.
The aircrew procedures are separated into individual procedures for the pilot and radar intercept officer. These separate procedures allow the individual crew-member to perform the checks without requiring them to read the checks performed by the other crew-member. The remaining procedures are combined and are coded for applicable crew-member action.
💡 Real procedures and checklists evolved over time. The procedures provided in this manual are tailored to our simulation of the Tomcat specifically. Procedures provided in other resources may differ slightly.
Interior Inspection
Pilot
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | OXYGEN | Check |
| Turn OXYGEN switch ON, check for airflow in mask. | ||
| Turn OXYGEN switch OFF, check for no airflow. | ||
| 2 | VENT AIRFLOW thumbwheel | Set |
| Set thumbwheel to desired cockpit ventilation airflow. | ||
| 3 | Tone VOLUME controls | Set |
| 4 | TACAN function selector | OFF |
| - Channel - Set. | ||
| - Mode switch - Set. | ||
| - VOL knob - Counterclockwise. | ||
| 5 | ICS panel | Set |
| - VOL knob - As desired. | ||
| - Amplifier - NORM. | ||
| - Function selector - COLD MIC. | ||
| 6 | STAB AUG switches | OFF |
| 7 | UHF function selector | OFF |
| 8 | Wing-sweep switch | MAN |
| CAUTION: Wings may move if wing control system fails with electrical and/or hydraulic power on. | ||
| 9 | Left and right throttles | OFF |
| 10 | Speed brake switch | RET |
| 11 | Exterior lights master switch | Set |
| Set in accordance to standard procedures for current situation. | ||
| 12 | FLAP handle | Corresponding |
| Set to current flap position. | ||
| 13 | ASYM LIMITER switch | ON (guard down) |
| 14 | L and R ENG MODE SELECT switches | PRI |
| 15 | BACKUP IGNITION switch | OFF |
| 16 | THROTTLE TEMP switch | NORM |
| 17 | THROTTLE MODE switch | BOOST |
| 18 | L and R INLET RAMPS switches | AUTO |
| 19 | ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch | OFF |
| 20 | FUEL panel | Set |
| - WING/EXT TRANS switch - AUTO. | ||
| - REFUEL PROBE switch - RET. | ||
| - DUMP switch - OFF. | ||
| - FEED switch - NORM (guard down). | ||
| 21 | LDG GEAR handle | DN |
| 22 | NOSE STRUT switch | OFF |
| 23 | Parking brake | Pull |
| 24 | Radar altimeter | OFF |
| 25 | Altimeter | Set |
| Set current elevation. | ||
| 26 | Left and right FUEL SHUT OFF handles | In |
| 27 | ACM panel | Set |
| - ACM switch - OFF (guard down). | ||
| - MASTER ARM switch - OFF (guard down). | ||
| 28 | Weapon select | OFF |
| 29 | HUD and VDI filters | As required |
| 30 | Standby attitude gyro | Caged |
| 31 | G-meter | Reset |
| 32 | Clock | Wind and Set |
| 33 | Fuel Bingo | Set |
| 34 | Circuit breakers | Checked |
| 35 | Brake accumulator pressure | Check in Green |
| 36 | HYD HAND PUMP | Check |
| Check that pumping builds pressure on brake pressure gauge. | ||
| 37 | HOOK handle | Corresponding |
| Set to current hook position. | ||
| 38 | DISPLAYS panel | Set |
| - MODE pushbutton - T.O. | ||
| - HUD DECLUTTER switch - OFF. | ||
| - HUD AWL switch - ACL. | ||
| - VDI MODE switch - NORM. | ||
| - VDI AWL switch - ACL. | ||
| - HSD MODE switch - NAV. | ||
| - STEER CMD pushbutton - DEST. | ||
| - DISPLAYS POWER switches - OFF. | ||
| 39 | ELEV LEAD knob | Set |
| 40 | INBD and OUTBD spoiler switches | NORM (guard down) |
| 41 | L and R generator switches | NORM |
| 42 | EMERG generator switch | NORM (guard down) |
| 43 | Air-condition controls | Set |
| - TEMP mode selector switch - AUTO. | ||
| - TEMP thumbwheel control - As desired (5-7 equals medium setting). | ||
| - CABIN PRESS switch - NORM. | ||
| - AIR SOURCE pushbutton - OFF. | ||
| 44 | WSHLD AIR switch | OFF |
| 45 | ANTI-ICE switch | AUTO/OFF |
| 46 | COMPASS panel | Set |
| - Mode selector knob - SLAVED. | ||
| - Hemisphere N-S switch - Set. | ||
| - LAT knob - Set. | ||
| 47 | ARA-63 panel | OFF |
| - CHANNEL selector - Set. | ||
| - POWER switch - OFF. | ||
| 48 | MASTER LIGHT panel controls | As required |
| 49 | MASTER TEST switch | OFF |
| 50 | EMERG FLT HYD switch | AUTO (guard down) |
| 51 | HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch | SHUT OFF (guard up) |
| 52 | CANOPY air diffuser lever | CABIN AIR |
| 53 | VIDEO CONTROL switch | OFF |
RIO
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | OXYGEN | Check |
| Turn OXYGEN switch ON and check for airflow. | ||
| Turn OXYGEN switch OFF and check that airflow ceases. | ||
| 2 | VENT AIRFLOW thumbwheel | OFF |
| 3 | SYS TEST - SYS PWR ground check panel | Closed |
| 4 | KY-28 or KY-58 | P/OFF |
| 5 | ICS panel | Set |
| - VOL knob - Set. | ||
| - Amplifier - NORM. | ||
| - Function selector - COLD MIC. | ||
| 6 | TACAN function selector | OFF |
| 7 | U/VHF MODE selector | OFF |
| 8 | LIQ COOLING switch | OFF |
| 9 | EJECT CMD lever | Set according to squadron policy. |
| 10 | ARMAMENT control panel | Set |
| - WPN type thumbwheel - OFF. | ||
| - ATTK MODE knob - MAN. | ||
| - DLVY MODE switch - STP. | ||
| - DLVY MODE switch - SGL. | ||
| - ELECT FUZE knob - Safe. | ||
| - A/G GUN switch - OFF. | ||
| - MECH FUZE switch - Safe. | ||
| - SEL JETT switch - Safe. | ||
| - JETT OPTIONS switch - MER TER. | ||
| - INTERVAL - Set. | ||
| - QTY - Set. | ||
| - Station select switches 1 to 8 - Safe. | ||
| - MSL OPTIONS switch - NORM. | ||
| - MSL SPD GATE knob - NOSE QTR. | ||
| 11 | Standby attitude gyro | Caged |
| 12 | NAV MODE knob | OFF |
| 13 | Clock | Set and Wind |
| 14 | WCS switch | OFF |
| 15 | IR/TV power switch | OFF |
| 16 | RECORD switch | OFF |
| 17 | RADAR WARNING RCVR PWR switch | OFF |
| 18 | DECM selector knob | OFF |
| 19 | AN/ALE-39 PWR/MODE switch | OFF |
| 20 | DATA LINK ON-OFF-AUX ON switch | OFF |
| 21 | APX-76 | OFF |
| 22 | INTERIOR LIGHTS panel | Check |
| 23 | IFF MASTER knob | OFF |
| 24 | MODE 4 switch | Out |
| 25 | IFF ANT and TEST panel | SET |
| IFF ANT switch - Off (center). | ||
| IND LT-DDI BIT switch - Off (center). | ||
| GND CLG switch - OFF. | ||
| 26 | RADAR BEACON switch | OFF |
| 27 | RADAR BEACON MODE switch | Single or Double |
| 28 | POWER SYS TEST switch | OFF |
| 29 | DATA/ADF switch | OFF |
Pre-Start
Pilot
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Order plane captain to connect and apply starter air and apply external power | Wait for confirmation. |
| 2 | If wings are not in OV SWP: | |
| WING SWEEP DRIVE NO. 1 and WG SWP DRIVE NO 2/MANUV FLAP cb's (LE1, LE2) - Pull. | ||
| Emergency WINGSWEEP handle - Extend and match captain bars with wing position tape. | ||
| CAUTION: Wings will move to emergency handle position regardless of wing-sweep circuit-breaker (cb) position. | ||
| 3 | ICS | Check |
| 4 | Landing gear indicator and transition light | Check |
| Check gear position indication down and transition light off. | ||
| 5 | MASTER TEST switch | Check |
| - RPM - 96%. | ||
| - EGT - 960 °C. | ||
| - FF - 10500 Pph. | ||
| - AOA - 18±5. | ||
| - Wing sweep - 45°±2.5°. | ||
| - FUEL QTY - 2000±200 Pounds. | ||
| - Oxygen quantity - 2 Liters. | ||
| - L and R FUEL LOW lights - Illuminated. | ||
| - MASTER TEST switch - OFF. | ||
| LTS - Check that all warning, caution and advisory lights illuminate. Coordinate with RIO. | ||
| Set brightness of the ACM panel and indexer lights during test. | ||
| The DATA LINK switch must be on to check DDI lights. | ||
| FIRE DET/EXT - Check that L and R FIRE and GO light illuminate. INST - Check for following responses on instruments after 5 secs: | ||
| Makes L STALL and R STALL warning lights flash. | ||
| Verify RIO FUEL QTY. | ||
| 6 | Ejection seats | Armed |
| Verify RIO seats armed. | ||
| 7 | CANOPY handle | Close |
| 8 | ACM panel | Set |
| - Gun rate - Set and check rounds remaining. | ||
| - SW COOL - OFF. | ||
| - MSL PREP - OFF. | ||
| - MSL MODE - NORM. | ||
| - Station loading status windows - Check. | ||
| Verify consistency with loaded armaments. | ||
| 9 | EMERG STORES JETT pushbutton light | Out |
| 10 | LADDER light | Out |
| Order plane captain to stow boarding ladder and steps. | ||
| 11 | Inform RIO | Ready to start |
RIO
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Verify that external power and air is connected | CAUTION: Starting WCS and or displays without external air can cause damage to those systems as external air is used for cooling when no on-board air is available. |
| 2 | ICS | Check |
| Verify two-way communication between crewmembers and adjust volume. | ||
| 3 | DL, TACAN and U/VHF | Set in accordance with mission parameters. |
| 4 | Fuel quantity | Check |
| 5 | Lights | Check |
| Adjust console and instrument lighting if required. | ||
| 6 | LTS test | Check |
| Check that all caution and advisory lights, ECM lights and DDI lights illuminate. | ||
| This is done when pilot selects LTS test on MASTER TEST switch. | ||
| Note: When pilot selects INST test, RIO fuel counter should decrease to 2000 pounds and MASTER CAUTION, FUEL LOW and OXY LOW lights should illuminate. | ||
| 7 | Ejection seats | Armed |
| Visually check that pilot locking tab is depressed. | ||
| 8 | CANOPY handle | Close |
| Verify that pilot is ready to close canopy. | ||
| 9 | Acknowledge | Ready to start |
| Inform pilot, ready to start. |
Engine Start
Pilot
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Check AIR SOURCE switch is set to OFF | |
| 2 | Set HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch | OFF (Guard up). |
| 3 | EMERG FLT HYD switch to LOW | Check for ON flag in EMER FLT LOW hydraulic pressure window. |
| Verify control over horizontal and rudder control surfaces on surface position indicator. | ||
| 4 | EMERG FLT HYD switch to HIGH | Check for ON flag in EMER FLT HI hydraulic pressure window. |
| Verify control over horizontal and rudder control surfaces on surface position indicator. | Should have a higher deflection rate than LOW. | |
| 5 | EMERG FLT HYD switch to AUTO(LOW) | Check for OFF flags in both EMER FLT LOW and HI. |
| 6 | ENG CRANK switch to R (Right engine). | Check for oil and hydraulic pressure at roughly 20% RPM. |
| Check START/VALVE caution light indication. | ||
| Switch is held in position automatically by solenoid until engine is at roughly 50% RPM. | ||
| 7 | Right throttle to IDLE at 20% RPM | Will automatically actuate ignition system and fuel flow. |
| Light off (EGT temperature rise) should occur within 5-15 secs. | ||
| EGT temperature should peak around 40-50% and not exceed 890 °C which constitutes a hot start. | ||
| 8 | Check ENG CRANK switch returns to OFF around 50% rpm and START/VALVE caution light turns off | If ENG CRANK stays at R manually set it to off before 60% rpm. |
| If START/VALVE caution light is still on, disconnect starter air. | ||
| 9 | Check R GEN caution light turns off | At around 59% rpm. |
| 10 | Check R FUEL PRESS caution light turns off | Before idle rpm. |
| 11 | Check engine idle instrument readings | - RPM - 62 to 78%. |
| - EGT - 500 °C (nominal). | ||
| - FF - 950 to 1400 Pph (nominal). | ||
| - NOZ position - 100%. | ||
| - OIL - 25 to 35 psi (nominal, 15 minimum). | ||
| - FLT HYD PRESS - 3000 psi. | ||
| 12 | Order plane captain to disconnect external electrical power | |
| 13 | ENG CRANK switch to L (Left engine). | When combined hydraulic pressure reaches 3000 psi switch ENG CRANK back to OFF. |
| 14 | HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch to NORMAL. | Will operate from flight side to maintain combined side at between 2400-2600 psi. |
| If it does not pressurize combined side within 10 secs, immediately set HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch to SHUTOFF. | ||
| 15 | HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch to SHUTOFF | |
| 16 | Repeat steps 6 to 11 for left engine | |
| 17 | Order plane captain to disconnect starter air | |
| 18 | Cycle AIR SOURCE switch to L ENG, R ENG, then set it to BOTH ENG | Verify cockpit airflow at all positions. |
| 19 | HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch to NORMAL |
RIO
The RIO monitors pilot procedures and plane captain signals to ensure maximum safety during engine start sequence.
Post-Start
Pilot
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | STAB AUG switches | All ON |
| 2 | MASTER TEST switch | EMERG GEN |
| NO GO light should illuminate for about 1 sec before GO light illuminates. | ||
| When disconnecting AHRS light might illuminate momentarily. | ||
| Advise RIO test complete. | ||
| 3 | VMCU operation - Check. | Following disengagement of MASTER TEST - EMERG GEN the following lights should illuminate for just under 2 secs: |
| - PITCH STAB 1 and 2. | ||
| - ROLL STAB 1 and 2. | ||
| - YAW STAB OP and OUT. | ||
| - SPOILERS. | ||
| - HZ TAIL AUTH. | ||
| - RUDDER AUTH. | ||
| - AUTO PILOT. | ||
| - MACH TRIM. | ||
| RUDDER AUTH light will not go out until reset by MASTER RESET pushbutton and PITCH and ROLL STAB AUG switches will have turned OFF. | ||
| 4 | Advise RIO that test and check is complete | |
| 5 | STAB AUG switches | All ON |
| 6 | AFTC | Check |
| L ENG MODE SELECT switch - SEC. | L ENG SEC light illuminates, left NOZ indicator points below zero. | |
| L ENG MODE SELECT switch - PRI. | L ENG SEC light goes out, NOZ indicator to 100%. | |
| R ENG MODE SELECT switch - SEC. | R ENG SEC light illuminates, right NOZ indicator points below zero. | |
| R ENG MODE SELECT switch - PRI. | R ENG SEC lights goes out, NOZ indicator to 100%. | |
| 7 | Emergency WING SWEEP handle | OV SW |
| - If wings are not in oversweep, move the wing-sweep emergency handle to 68° in raised position. | ||
| - Then raise handle to full extension and hold until HZ TAIL AUTH caution light goes out and OVER flag appears on wing-sweep indicator. | ||
| - Move handle to full aft OV SW and stow. | ||
| 8 | Wing-sweep mode switch | AUTO |
| 9 | WING SWEEP DRIVE NO.1 and WG SW DR NO. 2/MANUV FLAP cb (LE1, LE2) | In |
| 10 | WING/EXT TRANS switch | OFF |
| 11 | MASTER RESET pushbutton | Depress |
| 12 | COMM/NAV/GEAR/DISPLAYS | ON |
| - UHF function selector - TR+G or BOTH. | ||
| - TACAN function selector - T/R. | ||
| - ARA-63 POWER switch - ON. | ||
| - DISPLAYS control switches - ON. | ||
| - RADAR ALTITUDE - ON. | ||
| 13 | Trim | Set 000 |
| 14 | Standby attitude gyro | Erect |
| Do this at least two minutes before take-off. | ||
| 15 | MASTER RESET pushbutton | Depress |
| 16 | MASTER TEST switch | OBC |
| Coordinate with RIO and plane captain. | ||
| 17 | Autopilot | Engage |
| As part of above test. | ||
| 18 | Speed brake switch | EXT, then RET |
| First test partial extension and retraction, then full. | ||
| Check for fluctuations in stabilizer to verify integrated trim operation. | ||
| 19 | REFUEL PROBE switch | All EXT, then RET |
| Check normal function and that transition light illuminates normally. | ||
| 20 | WSHLD AIR switch | Cycle |
| 21 | OBC | OFF |
| If engaged, verify that autopilot disengages. | ||
| 22 | WING/EXT TRANS switch | OFF |
| 23 | Trim | Checked and Set 000 |
| FOR CV OPERATIONS OMIT STEPS 24 - 42. | ||
| 24 | Emergency WING SWEEP handle | 20° |
| CAUTION - WING MOVEMENT | ||
| After moving handle to 20° (full forward), engage spider detent. | ||
| Stow handle and guard. | ||
| HZ TAIL AUTH light will illuminate momentarily coming out of OVSW. | ||
| 25 | MASTER RESET pushbutton | Depress |
| 26 | External lights | Check |
| According to situation. | ||
| 27 | Flaps and slats | DN |
| Check for full deflection and operation of outboard spoiler module. | ||
| Also check for 3° trailing edge up of stabilizer. | ||
| 28 | Flight controls | Cycle |
| Verify full range of motion on control surfaces and normal speed and operation of said surfaces. | ||
| 29 | DLC | Check |
| Verify horizontal tail shift with DLC input. | ||
| 30 | ANTI SKID SPOILER BK. switch | SPOILER BK |
| 31 | MASTER TEST switch | STICK SW |
| SPOILER light illuminates and all spoilers fall down. | ||
| GO light should illuminate with 1 inch of movement of stick in each direction. | ||
| 32 | Spoilers and throttles | Check |
| 33 | ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch | OFF |
| 34 | Flaps and slats | UP |
| 35 | Maneuver flaps | DN |
| 36 | WING SWEEP MODE switch | MAN 50 |
| If sweep does not stop at 50° immediately select AUTO. | ||
| 37 | Maneuver flaps | Crack Up |
| 38 | WING SWEEP MODE switch | BOMB |
| Check maneuver flap retraction. | ||
| 39 | Emergency WING SWEEP handle | 68° |
| 40 | Emergency WING SWEEP handle | OV SW |
| 41 | WING SWEEP MODE switch | AUTO |
| 42 | MASTER RESET pushbutton | Depress |
| CHECKLIST FOR CV RESUMES | ||
| 43 | ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch | BOTH |
| 44 | ANTI SKID | BIT |
| Ensure coarse gyro alignment complete before releasing parking brake. | ||
| 45 | ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch | OFF |
| 46 | Radar altimeter - BIT. | |
| Depress SET knob, display should show 100 feet and indicator green light illuminates. | ||
| Release and indicator should show 0 feet, warning tone should sound in both cockpits and ALT LOW illuminates correspondingly. | ||
| 47 | Displays | Check |
| 48 | TACAN | BIT |
| 49 | ARA-63 | BIT |
| 50 | HUD-VIDEO | BIT |
| 51 | Altimeter | SET/RESET MODE |
| 52 | Compass | Check |
| Check IMU heading on HUD, VDI, HSD and BDHI. | ||
| 53 | Flight instruments | Check |
RIO
💡 Note: The RIO must ensure that the EMERG GEN check is completed before commencing post-start checklist. The ECS (Environmental Control System) should run for at least 3 minutes before avionics and AWG-9 power-up.
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | WCS switch | STBY |
| Verify that AWG-9 COND light illuminates. | ||
| 2 | LIQ COOLING switch | AWG-9 or AWG-9/AIM-54 |
| Select AWG-9/AIM-54 if AIM-54 is loaded. | ||
| Verify that AWG-9 COND light goes off and that AUTO BIT 2 is running (on TID). | ||
| 3 | IR/TV power switch | STBY/IR/TV |
| 4 | CATEGORY knob | NAV |
| 5 | NAV MODE switch | Align |
| 6 | Communications | ON and Set |
| - U/VHF MODE selector - T/R G. | ||
| - DATA LINK switch - ON. | ||
| 9 | TACAN function selector | T/R |
| 10 | RADAR WARNING RCVR panel | Set |
| - Display type switch - NORM. | ||
| - PWR switch - ON. | ||
| - TEST switch - SPL. | ||
| - MODE button - LMT. | ||
| 11 | DECM knob | STBY |
| - When STBY light goes off, select hold 3 SEC, then ACT for OBC. | ||
| 12 | IFF MASTER knob | STBY |
| - Set CODE knob - As required. | ||
| - IFF panel - Test. | ||
| - MC switch - OUT. | ||
| - M1, M2 and M3 - Test. | ||
| - MC - Test. | ||
| - IFF ANT switch - AUTO. | ||
| Select NORM and observe that TEST light | ||
| illuminates. | ||
| 13 | AUTO BIT 2 | Verify Complete |
| On TID. | ||
| 14 | CAP | Enter own aircraft latitude, longitude and field or ship elevation |
| 15 | Altimeter | Reset |
| 16 | Computer address panel | Enter desired data |
| WP, FP, etc, according to mission. | ||
| 17 | DDD | Set |
| 18 | TID controls | Set |
| - CONTRAST - Set. | ||
| - BRIGHT control - Set. | ||
| - CLSN - OFF. | ||
| - ALT NUM - ON. | ||
| - SYM ELEM - ON. | ||
| - DATA LINK - As required. | ||
| - JAM strobe - As required. | ||
| - NON ATTK - As required. | ||
| - LAUNCH ZONE - As required. | ||
| - VEL VECTOR - As required. | ||
| - RANGE scale - As required. | ||
| 19 | Multiple display indicator | Set |
| - TEST button - Depress and Check. | ||
| - BRIGHTNESS - Set. | ||
| 20 | DATA/ADF switch | BOTH |
| 21 | Hand control panel | Set |
| - Light test - Depress and Check. | ||
| - El Vernier - Set 0° elevation on radar. | ||
| All AWG-9 lights should illuminate. | ||
| 22 | AN/ALE-39 | Set |
| - BURST switch - 3. | ||
| - BURST INTERVAL - 0.1. | ||
| - SALVO - 2. | ||
| - SALVO INTERVAL - 0.4. | ||
| 23 | CANOPY DEFOG-CABIN AIR lever | CABIN AIR |
| 24 | D/L reply | As required |
| 25 | AAI control panel | Set |
| - TEST/CHAL CC switch - Test. | ||
| Check DDD display. | ||
| 26 | Indicator lights | Test |
| 27 | DDI BIT | Test |
| 28 | After alignment complete: | - NAV mode - INS. |
| - Program restart - Depress. | ||
| - STBY/READY lights - OFF. | ||
| - TID NAV mode - INS. | ||
| 29 | DEST data | Verify |
| 30 | BRG/DIST to destination | Check |
| 31 | OWN A/C groundspeed | Check |
| 32 | MAG VAR | Check |
| 33 | KY-28/KY-58 | As required |
| 34 | Standby attitude gyro | Erect |
| 35 | Notify pilot | Ready to taxi |
Emergency Procedures
Engine Air-start
The F110-GE-400 engines can be air-started one-by-one or simultaneously.
Three restart methods are available:
- Spool-down
- Cross-Bleed
- Windmill
All attempts should be made in the engine mode selected by the AFTC (normally PRI, or SEC if PRI fails).
Spool-down Air-start
Spool-down air-start should be attempted immediately after engine loss, before significant spool-down occurs.
- May take up to 10 seconds for RPM increase and 90 seconds to reach commanded RPM.
- If PRI fails, retry in SEC.
Spool-down Air-start Checklist
| Step | Item | Action |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Throttle | IDLE or above |
| 2 | If no relight: Throttle | OFF then IDLE |
| 3 | ENG MODE SELECT switch | SEC |
| 4 | Throttle | If no start after mode switch: OFF then IDLE |
| 5 | After successful start | Set ENG MODE SELECT to PRI if possible |
Cross-Bleed Air-start
Use if:
- Spool-down failed
- One engine is already running
- Target engine is near windmill RPM
Cross-Bleed Air-start Checklist
| Step | Item | Action |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Non-running throttle | OFF |
| 2 | FUEL SHUT OFF handle | Verify handle IN |
| 3 | Running engine throttle | Minimum 80% RPM |
| 4 | BACK UP IGNITION switch | ON |
| 5 | ENG CRANK switch | Set to non-running engine |
| 6 | Non-running throttle | IDLE immediately after CRANK |
| 7 | If no start: Throttle | OFF then IDLE |
| 8 | ENG MODE SELECT switch | SEC |
| 9 | Throttle | OFF then IDLE |
| 10 | After successful start | BACK UP IGNITION: OFF |
| 11 | ENG MODE SELECT switch | PRI if possible |
Windmill Air-start
Used when:
- Airspeed ≥ 450 KIAS
- Altitude permits sufficient airflow through engine
Windmill Air-start Checklist
| Step | Item | Action |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Airspeed | At or above 450 KIAS |
| 2 | Throttle | IDLE or above |
| 3 | BACK UP IGNITION switch | ON |
| 4 | If no relight: Throttle | OFF then IDLE |
| 5 | ENG MODE SELECT switch | SEC |
| 6 | Throttle | OFF then IDLE |
| 7 | After successful start | BACK UP IGNITION: OFF |
| 8 | ENG MODE SELECT switch | PRI if possible |
F-14B Upgrade
Details on all changes introduced to the F-14B(U) variant specifically. Read chapter F-14A/B for an overview on the aircraft itself first.
Contents
- Introduction
- Cockpit Overview
- Systems Overview
- Weapons Employment
- Normal Procedures
- DCS
- Abbreviations
- Tutorials
- Imprint
Cockpit Overview
The following chapter gives a detailed overview of the pilot's cockpit, as well as that of the Radar Interceptor Officer (RIO). Each single switch will be outlined and explained briefly, while giving context to the functions.
More in-depth details on the various systems and consequences of using a switch beyond their brief explanation are available in the Systems Overview Chapter.
Pilot Cockpit Overview
Layout
Left Side Console
💡 The Left Side Console consists of the:
- G-valve Button (
1 )- Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel (
2 )- Volume/TACAN Command Panel (
3 )- TACAN Control Panel (
4 )- ICS Control Panel (
5 )- DFCS Control Panel (
6 )- UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159) Radio (
7 )- ASYM Limiter/Engine Mode Select (
8 )- Target Designate Switch (
9 )- Inlet Ramps/Throttle Control Panel (
10 )- Throttle (
11 )
G-valve Button
G-valve button (
The G-valve button is pressed to test inflation of the g-suit.
Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel
The Oxygen-Vent (
Vent Airflow Dial
The VENT AIRFLOW dial (
Oxygen Switch
The OXYGEN switch (
- ON — Enables oxygen flow.
- OFF — Disables oxygen flow.
Volume/TACAN Command Panel
The Volume/TACAN command panel (
ALR-67 Volume Knob
The ALR-67 knob (
Sidewinder Tone Volume Knob
The SW knob (
V/UHF 2 Volume Knob
The V/UHF 2 knob (
TACAN Command Switch
The TACAN CMD switch (
TACAN Control Panel
The TACAN Control Panel (
Channel Selector (Dual Rotary Switch)
The dual rotary switch (
The outer dial selects the first two digits and the inner dial selects the final digit.
GO and NO-GO Lights
The GO and NO-GO lights (
BIT Button
The BIT button (
Mode Switches (X/Y and Operating Mode)
The MODE switches (
INVERSE mode is not functional.
TACAN Audio Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
TACAN Mode Selector Knob
The mode knob (
The following modes are available:
- OFF — TACAN off.
- REC — Receive only.
- T/R — Transmit and receive. Enables range readout.
- A/A — Air-to-air TACAN mode.
- BCN — Beacon mode. Not functional.
ICS Control Panel
The ICS Control Panel (
ICS Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Amplifier Selection Knob
The amplifier selection knob (
The following amplifiers are available:
- B/U — Backup amplifier.
- NORM — Normal amplifier.
- EMER — Emergency amplifier. Uses the RIO’s amplifier and his volume settings and prevents monitoring of pilot-only audio such as Sidewinder tone and engine stall/overtemperature warnings.
ICS Function Switch
The ICS switch (
Available ICS functions are:
- RADIO OVERRIDE — ICS audio overrides radio audio.
- HOT MIC — Enables intercom without pressing PTT. Also allows ground crew communication through the external interphone.
- COLD MIC — Intercom only while PTT is pressed.
DFCS Control Panel
The DFCS Control Panel (
💡 All switches are spring-loaded to OFF but held in position by a solenoid, allowing automatic disengagement when applicable.
Pitch Stability Augmentation Switch
The PITCH switch (
Roll Stability Augmentation Switch
The ROLL switch (
Yaw Stability Augmentation Switch
The YAW switch (
VEC/PCD/ACL Switch
The VEC/PCD/ACL switch (
- VEC/PCD — Vector/PCD mode. Data link controls roll and pitch. Engaged using the NWS button on the pilot stick.
- OFF — Remote-control function off.
- ACL — Automatic carrier landing mode. Engaged using the NWS button on the pilot stick.
Altitude Hold Switch
The ALT switch (
Heading Mode Switch
The HDG switch (
- HDG — Heading hold.
- OFF — Heading hold off.
- GT — Ground track mode. Engaged using the NWS button on the pilot stick.
Autopilot Engage Switch
The ENGAGE switch (
- ENGAGE — Autopilot on.
- OFF — Autopilot off.
DEC pushbutton
With weight on wheels, depressing the DEC pushbutton (
INC pushbutton
With weight on wheels, depressing the INC pushbutton (
DFCS fault display
With weight on wheels, the DFCS fault display (
UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159) Radio
The UHF 1 (AN/ARC-159) Radio (
💡 ADF is nonfunctional with the AN/ARC-159. Use V/UHF 2 instead.
Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Squelch Switch
The SQL switch (
- ON — Squelch enabled.
- OFF — Squelch disabled.
Frequency Select Switches
The frequency select switches (
Frequency/Channel Display
The FREQ/(CHAN) display (
Read Button
The READ button (
Brightness Knob
The BRT knob (
Load Button
The LOAD button (
Function Selector Knob
The function selector knob (
Channel Select Knob
The CHAN SEL knob (
Preset Channels Chart
The preset channels chart (
Mode Selector Knob
The mode selector knob (
Tone Button
The TONE button (
ASYM Limiter/Engine Mode Select
The ASYM Limiter/Engine Mode Select (
Asymmetry Limiter Switch
The ASYM LIMITER switch (
- ON — Limiter enabled.
- OFF — Limiter disabled.
Engine Mode Select Switches
The ENG MODE SELECT switches (
Selectable engine modes are:
- PRI — Primary engine control mode.
- SEC — Secondary engine control mode.
Target Designate Switch
The Target Designate Switch (
The switch can be moved up, down, and forward (designate).
In air-to-ground mode, up and down move the designator and forward designates.
In A/A mode with the ACM cover lowered, the Target Designate switch steps through TWS tracks on the HUD to display information in the VDIG-R Info box.
In A/A mode with the ACM cover raised, the Target Designate up and down switch select VSL HI and VSL LO, respectively, and forward selects PAL.
Inlet Ramps/Throttle Control Panel
The Inlet Ramps/Throttle Control Panel (
Throttle Mode Switch
The THROTTLE MODE switch (
- AUTO — Automatic.
- BOOST — Boosted.
- MAN — Manual.
Throttle Temp Switch
The THROTTLE TEMP switch (
- HOT — Hot.
- NORM — Normal.
- COLD — Cold.
Inlet Ramps Switches
The INLET RAMPS switches (
- STOW — Stowed.
- AUTO — Automatic.
Engine Crank Selector
The ENG CRANK selector (
Airstart/Backup Ignition Switch
The Airstart/BACK UP IGNITION switch (
- ON — Airstart/Backup ignition enabled.
- OFF — Airstart/Backup ignition disabled.
Rudder Trim Switch
The RUDDER TRIM switch (
Throttle
The throttle grips (
Speed Brake Switch
The speed brake switch (
- EXT — Momentary. Extends the speed brake incrementally while held and holds the achieved position when released.
- RET — Retracts the speed brake.
Wing-Sweep Switch
The wing-sweep switch (
- AUTO — Wing sweep controlled automatically by CADC.
- FWD — Sweeps wings forward manually.
- AFT — Sweeps wings aft manually.
- BOMB — Commands 55° wing sweep if currently forward of 55°. If CADC commanded position is aft of 55°, wing sweep follows CADC instead.
PLM Button
The PLM button (
CAGE/SEAM Button
The CAGE/SEAM button (
Exterior Light Switch
The exterior light switch (
- OFF — Disables exterior lights and increases approach light intensity.
- ON — Enables exterior lights and dims approach lights.
ICS PTT Switch
The ICS PTT switch (
- ICS — Keys intercommunication to the RIO.
- BOTH — Keys UHF 1 and V/UHF 2.
- UHF1 — Keys UHF 1.
- UHF2 — Keys V/UHF 2.
Throttle Quadrant
The throttle quadrant contains the two main engine throttle controls, the flap lever, and the manual wing-sweep handle, in addition to HOTAS controls on the throttles.
The throttles have detents in the OFF, IDLE, and MIL positions.
Moving the throttles from OFF to IDLE arms ignition and disengages fuel cutoff.
The sideways throttle movements are not spring-loaded, allowing the pilot to rest the throttles at MIL during catapult launches and preventing accidental spool-down.
A friction lever for throttle movement friction is located on the left side of the throttle quadrant beneath the flap lever.
The flap lever has a stepless range of motion between up and down and includes two emergency positions, emergency up and emergency down. Both have detents and require moving the lever outboard to continue into the emergency range.
Emergency up forces the flaps up, overriding normal flap logic. Emergency down is non-functional.
The manual/emergency wing-sweep handle is guarded and normally stowed. The handle top is extended for manual operation.
For more information see Wing-Sweep System.
Hydraulic Hand Pump
The hydraulic hand pump is located inboard of the throttle quadrant near the pilot’s left leg.
It is used to manually build hydraulic pressure for brake operation (with the gear handle down) or for refueling probe operation in the event of hydraulic system failure.
Left Vertical Console
💡 The Left Vertical Console consists of the:
- Fuel Management Panel (
1 )- Control Surface Position Indicator (
2 )- Launch Bar Abort Panel (
3 )- Landing Gear Control Panel (
4 )
Fuel Management Panel
Control panel for fuel system management, CADC master reset, and anti-skid and spoiler brake control.
Quantity Selector Switch
The QTY SEL switch (
The switch is spring-loaded to FEED.
- FEED — Displays respective feed and fuselage tank quantities.
- WING — Displays respective wing tank quantities.
- EXT — Displays respective external tank quantities.
Fuel Feed Switch
The FEED switch (
The guard locks the switch in NORM until lifted.
Wing/External Transfer Switch
The WING/EXT TRANS switch (
- ORIDE — Overrides automatic transfer logic.
- AUTO — Normal automatic operation.
- OFF — Disables fuel feed from wing and external tanks.
Refueling Probe Indicator Light
The refueling probe transition light (
Fuel Dump Switch
The DUMP switch (
Fuel dumping is permitted only when speed brakes are retracted, afterburner is off, and weight is off wheels.
Refueling Probe Switch
The REFUEL PROBE switch (
- ALL EXTD — Extends the refueling probe and allows refueling of all tanks. Also resets the WING/EXT TRANS switch to AUTO.
- FUS EXTD — Extends the refueling probe and allows refueling of fuselage tanks only.
- RET — Retracts the refueling probe.
Anti-Skid / Spoiler Brake Switch
The ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch (
- BOTH — Enables both anti-skid and spoiler brake functions.
- OFF — Disables both systems.
- SPOILER BK — Enables spoiler braking only.
Master Reset Button
The MASTER RESET button (
Control Surface Position Indicator
Control Surface Position Indicator (
Engine Record switch
Manual override for the Fatigue Engine Management System (FEMS) recording.
💡 Not used in DCS.
Control Surface Pos Indicator
Provides indication of aircraft control surface positions.
Spoiler Position Indicators
The spoiler indicators (
- DN — Spoilers down and flush with the wing.
- Up-arrow — Spoilers extended above the wing.
- Down-arrow — Spoilers drooped below the wing surface.
Rudder Position Indicators
The rudder indicators (
Horizontal Tail Position Indicators
The horizontal stabilizer indicators (
Launch Bar Abort Panel
The launch bar abort switch is used to abort catapult launches.
When held in ABORT, the launch bar is raised. The switch is spring-loaded back to NORM, which is the standard position.
💡 Not currently used in DCS.
Landing Gear Control Panel
Control panel for landing gear operation and emergency stores jettison.
Landing Gear Handle
The LDG GEAR handle (
For emergency extension with the handle in DOWN, push the handle in, rotate it clockwise, and pull outward. This releases a compressed nitrogen charge to extend the gear.
Down Lock Override
The DOWN LOCK ORIDE indicator (
The indicator may be lifted to override the signal.
Hydraulic Isolation Switch
The HYD ISOL switch (
The switch is automatically moved to T.O./LDG when the landing gear handle is in the DOWN position.
- FLT — In-flight operation. Isolates listed systems.
- T.O./LDG — Takeoff and landing operation. Connects listed systems.
Landing Gear Transition Light
The transition light (
Wheels and Flaps Position Indicator
The wheels-flaps indicator (
Slat Indications
| Indication | State |
|---|---|
| Power off or maneuver slats extended. | |
| Slats extended. | |
| Slats retracted. |
Flap position is shown by a pointer moving between UP and DOWN. The first marked segment represents the maneuver flap range.
Landing Gear Indications
| Indication | State |
|---|---|
| Power off or unsafe gear. | |
| Gear down. | |
| Gear retracted and doors closed. |
Speed Brake Indications
| Indication | State |
|---|---|
| Speed brake system power off. | |
| Speed brake partial extension, not in motion. | |
| Speed brake fully extended. | |
| Speed brake retracted. |
Emergency Stores Jettison Button
The EMERG STORES button (
The button illuminates to indicate activation upon press.
Nose Strut Switch
The NOSE STRUT switch (
- EXTD — Extends the nose strut and raises and locks the launch bar.
- OFF — Turns off nosewheel strut movement. Spring-loaded to this position.
- KNEEL — Releases strut pressure to retract the nose strut, kneeling the aircraft and unlocking the launch bar.
Brake Pull Handle
The BRAKE-PULL handle (
Pull out to apply the parking brake. Push in to release.
Eject Command Indicator
The EJECT CMD indicator (
- PILOT — Pilot ejects both crewmembers; RIO ejects only himself.
- MCO — Either crewmember ejects both crew.
💡 Currently non-functional in DCS.
Left Knee Panel
Hydraulic Pressure Indicator
Shows hydraulic pressure of the combined and flight hydraulic systems.
- SPOIL (Spoiler): ON/OFF-flag indicates pressurization of outboard spoiler module.
- EMER FLT HI: ON/OFF-flags indicates backup flight hydraulic system pressures when HI or LOW is selected respectively.
Oil Pressure Indicator
Displays oil pressure for each engine. Range is 0 - 100 psi, normal range is 25 - 65 psi, varying with engine rpm.
Exhaust Nozzle Position Indicator
Displays position of engine nozzles. Range 0 - 5 with 5 being fully open.
Electronic Instrument Group
Displays engine RPM (High-pressure compressor rotor speed (N2)), EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) and FF (Fuel Flow) for respective engine.
💡 FF is not indicated for the additional fuel used in afterburner.
Left Instrument Panel
💡 The Left Instrument Panel consists of the:
- Radar Altimeter (
1 )- Servopneumatic Altimeter (
2 )- Airspeed Mach Indicator (
3 )- Vertical Velocity Indicator (
4 )- Left Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle (
5 )- Angle-of-Attack Indicator (
6 )- Landing Checklist (
7 )
Radar Altimeter
Control and indicator for the radar altimeter(
Radar Altimeter Control Knob
The radar altimeter control knob (
Fully counterclockwise turns the radar altimeter off. Rotating clockwise sets the altitude warning level. Depressing the knob initiates radar altimeter BIT.
OFF Flag
The OFF flag (
Low Altitude Warning Light
The low altitude warning light (
Self-Test Light
The self-test light (
During BIT, the readout should display 100 feet ±10.
Low-Altitude Limit Index
The low-altitude limit index (
💡 Radio override does not disable the low-altitude warning tone.
Servopneumatic Altimeter
The servopneumatic altimeter (
Altimeter Readout
The altimeter readout (
A pointer on the circular scale provides continuous indication in hundreds of feet.
Baroset Knob
The baroset knob (
This setting only affects the local altimeter display. Other CADC-driven digital indicators use a fixed 29.92 in.Hg reference.
Local Barometric Pressure Window
The local barometric pressure window (
Mode Switch
The mode switch (
- RESET - When CADC power and altitude data are available, holding RESET for approximately three seconds enables normal servoed operation.
- STBY - Selects backup pressure mode.
If CADC data or electrical power is absent for more than three seconds, the system automatically reverts to standby mode.
STBY Flag
The STBY flag is a red standby indication that appears when the altimeter is operating in backup (standby) mode (not visible in this image).
💡 At high speeds and below 10,000 feet, pressure effects can produce significant readout errors: up to 1,200 feet when transonic and up to 4,000 feet when supersonic.
Airspeed Mach Indicator
Indicated airspeed and Mach number display(
Airspeed Dial
The airspeed dial (
Indicated Airspeed Scale (Outer)
The outer indicated airspeed scale (
Indicated Airspeed Scale (Inner)
The inner indicated airspeed scale (
Mach Number Scale
The Mach number scale (
Indicated Airspeed Index Pointer
The indicated airspeed index pointer (
Mach Number Index Pointer
The Mach number index pointer (
Not visible in the image.
Safe Mach Number Index Pointer
The safe Mach number index pointer (
Not visible in the image.
Index Knob
The index knob (
One position adjusts the indicated airspeed index and the other adjusts the Mach number index.
Vertical Velocity Indicator
Displays vertical velocity in thousands of feet per minute (
Sudden or abrupt attitude changes can produce erroneous indications due to airflow changes over the static probe.
Left Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle
Emergency fuel shutoff handle for the left engine(
Pulling the handle shuts off fuel flow to the left engine. Pushing the handle in restores fuel flow.
This handle should not be used to normally secure the engine.
A left engine fire extinguishing button is located behind the handle and is accessible when the handle is pulled out.
Angle-of-Attack Indicator
Displays angle of attack (AOA) (
This corresponds approximately to -10° to +40° rotation of the AOA probe.
Reference markers are provided on the right side for climb (5), cruise (8.5), and stall (29). A reference bar indicates on-speed approach (15).
Landing Checklist
Provides most critical landing checklist items (
Left Windshield Frame
Approach Indexer
The approach indexer provides visual indication of aircraft angle of attack relative to on-speed AOA during landing.
Three lights are displayed:
- Green — Indicates aircraft is slow (AOA too high).
- Amber — Indicates on-speed AOA.
- Red — Indicates aircraft is fast (AOA too low).
When the HOOK BYPASS switch is set to CARRIER and the landing gear is down, the indexer lights will flash if the arresting hook is not extended.
These indications are repeated on the nosewheel strut approach lights, allowing the landing signal officer (LSO) to observe aircraft AOA during carrier recoveries.
HUD Caution Lights
Several caution and warning indicators are located to the left of the HUD.
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| WHEELS | Flashes with landing gear not down and locked, flaps below 10° and either throttle below 85%. |
| BRAKES | Indicates antiskid or brake failure. Also lights when parking brake is set. |
| ACLS/AP | Shows that ACLS or autopilot is disengaged. |
| NWS ENGA | Lit when nosewheel steering (NWS) is engaged. |
| AUTO THROT | When shown disengagement of the automatic throttle control mode is not resulting from the throttle mode switch. |
Center Panel
💡 The center panel consists of the:
- Vertical Display Indicator Group Replacement (VDIG-R) (
1/2/3 )
- Heads-Up Display (
1 )- Vertical Display Indicator (
2 )- Air Combat Maneuver Panel (ACM) (
3 )- Horizontal Situation Display Indicator (HSD) (
4 )- Pilot control stick
- Cabin Pressure Altimeter
- Emergency Brake Pressure Indicator
Vertical Display Indicator Group - Replacement
The VDIG(R) system displays—the HUD and VDI—are mounted in the chassis unit assembly, along with peripheral indicators and switches. The HUD and VDI are located in the front cockpit behind the center windscreen. The HUD is the primary source of flight information. Flight-critical data (airspeed, altitude, and attitude) is presented on the HUD in all modes. The Stores Status Indicator flag information is selectively displayed on the VDI HUD repeat.
With the introduction of the VDIG-R and the HUD assembly, the ACM panel switches were relocated. In the F-14B(U), some the traditional ACM panel switches are moved to other parts of the VDIG-R. Additionally, the Master Arm and the ACM cover have been reversed in the F-14B(U).
Heads-Up Display
The HUD assembly is part of the VDIG-R. Like the VDI it provides the pilot with symbology for takeoff, cruise, air−to−air (A/A), air−to−ground (A/G) and landing. Electronically generated symbology portrays aircraft attitude, command, and tactical information.
The information is displayed on the Heads Up Display (HUD) (
Part of the HUD assembly is the cockpit television sensor (CTVS) (
Cockpit Television Sensor (CTVS)
The cockpit television sensor (CTVS) (
Master Caution Light and Button
The MASTER CAUTION light and reset button (
Press to acknowledge and extinguish the light until the next event.
Turn-and-Slip Indicator
The turn-and-slip indicator (
The upper section contains an electrically driven pointer, where one needle deflection corresponds to a 360° turn in four minutes. The lower section contains an inclinometer with a ball suspended in damping fluid.
💡 For more information see relevant chapters under Navigation and Weapons and Weapons Employment Overview.
Vertical Display Indicator (VDI)
The vertical display indicator (VDI) repeats the HUD by displaying flight and weapon information.
HUD Brightness Control
- Upper rotary: HUD BRT control (
1 ) adjusts HUD brightness. - Lower rotary: HUD/VDI BARO SET (
1 ) barometric altitude selector.
VDI Brightness Control
- Upper rotary: VDI BRT control (
2 ) adjusts VDI brightness. - Lower rotary: VDI CONT control (
2 ) adjusts VDI contrast.
Sidewinder Cooling Pushbutton
Toggle pushbutton with light indication (
Sidewinder cooling is automatically set to ON when ACM mode is selected.
Missile Preparation Pushbutton
Toggle pushbutton with light indication (
Missile preparation is automatically set to ON when ACM mode is commanded.
Missile Mode Pushbutton
Toggle pushbutton with light indication (
- NORM - Normal missile launch mode.
- BRSIT - Boresight missile launch mode.
Controlled by the WCS when in ACM mode.
VDI Caution Lights
VDI-mounted caution lights (
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| ADJ A/C | Advisory light indicating other aircraft close to own traffic pattern. |
| LANDING CHK | Advisory light indicating carrier has a channel ready for ACL and that the crew should prepare for carrier landing. |
| ACL READY | Warning light indicating CATCC has acquired the aircraft and is transmitting glidepath information to the aircraft. |
| A/P CPLR | Warning light indicating CATCC is ready to control the aircraft. |
| CMD CONTROL | Warning light indicating the aircraft is under data link control for landing. |
| 10 SECONDS | Indicates 10 seconds to arrival at the EGI Fly-To point. |
| TILT | Warning light indicating no data link command received for the last 2 seconds during ACL. When not in ACL, it indicates no data link messages during the last 10 seconds. |
| VOICE | Warning light indicating CATCC not ready for ACL, switch to standard voice procedures. |
| A/P REF | Warning light indicating autopilot selected but not engaged. Exception: altitude and heading hold. |
| WAVEOFF | Warning light indicating waveoff commanded. |
| WING SWEEP | Warning light indicating failure in both wing-sweep channels or disengagement of spider detent. |
| REDUCE SPEED | Warning light indicating flap retraction failure with greater than 225 knots indicated airspeed. Also indicates safe Mach number exceeded. |
| ALT LOW | Non-functional, light on radar altimeter is used instead. |
VDI Specific Displays
Specific VDI Displays (
BDHI fly-to mode Indicator
BDHI fly-to mode indicator (
| Name | Description |
|---|---|
| BDHI FLYTO | EGI Fly−To waypoint is selected |
| BDHI WP # | Flight Plan Waypoint # is selected |
| BDHI PHUD | The BDHI steer to point will remain synchronized with the HUD steer to point |
| BDHI TGT # | GGW/LTS Target waypoint for station # is selected (MAN selected on the AWP) |
| BDHI LP # | GGW/LTS Launch Point waypoint for station # is selected (CP selected on the AWP) |
| BDHI TACAN | TACAN is selected on the TACAN Command Panel |
Stores Status Indicators
Station status Indicators (
The Stores Status Indicators are displayed on the bottom of the VDI display. SSI display is inhibited in PDCP T.O. or LDG modes.
- A boxed station indicates a station is selected.
- A station flanked by <> indicates the station is ready.
Primary and Secondary time to go
The CDNU has a Time Selection Page accessed via the CDNU F6 function key. The
Time Selection menu allows the RIO to select the source for HUD/VDI Primary and
Secondary TTG and ETA windows. The Primary TTG/ETA is present on both the HUD
and VDI. To avoid cluttering the HUD, the Secondary TTG/ETA is present ONLY on
the VDI (
Air Combat Maneuver Panel
Main pilot armament control panel.
Master Arm Switch
The MASTER ARM switch (
- OFF - Disables electrical power to release circuitry.
- ON - Enables electrical power to release circuitry. Position is locked until the master arm cover is lifted.
- TNG - Enables in-flight training mode.
💡 The MASTER ARM bus is interlocked with the landing gear control lever, disabling all releases except emergency jettison while the gear is down.
💡 ACM jettison and emergency jettison are not disabled by MASTER ARM.
HUD Cage Switch
HUD CAGE pushbutton (
Engine Fire Warning Lights
The L FIRE and R FIRE lights (
ACM Switch/Cover
The ACM (Air Combat Maneuver) switch/cover (
ACM Jettison Button
The ACM JETT button (
Sidewinders are not jettisoned even if selected.
SEAM Lock Light
The SEAM LOCK light (
The light illuminates during the 4.5-second SEAM acquisition attempt and remains illuminated if the seeker locks onto a target.
Collision Light
The COLLISION light (
Hot Trigger Light
The HOT TRIG light (
Horizontal Situation Display Indicator (HSD)
The horizontal situation display (HSD) displays navigational information to the pilot and can repeat the RIO’s TID.
HSD Brightness Control
The BRT control (
Heading Bug Control
The HDG control (
Course Control
The CRS control (
Test Button
The TEST button (
BIT Indicator
The BIT indicator (
💡 For more information see relevant chapters under Navigation and for the TID repeat Tactical Information Display (TID) and Associated Controls.
Cabin Pressure Altimeter
Displays cabin pressure in 1,000-foot increments from 0 to 50,000 feet.
Emergency Brake Pressure Indicator
Displays hydraulic pressure available from the emergency brake accumulators to the auxiliary and parking wheel brake systems.
Parking Brake Pressure
The PARK indication shows brake pressure available for parking brakes.
The green segment indicates 2,150 to 3,000 psi and the red segment indicates 1,900 to 2,150 psi. When in the green, sufficient pressure is available for approximately three brake applications.
Auxiliary Brake Pressure
The AUX indication shows brake pressure available for the auxiliary brake system, usable via toe brakes.
The green segment indicates 2,150 to 3,000 psi (approximately 13 to 14 applications) and the red segment indicates 1,900 to 2,150 psi (approximately five applications).
Control Stick
The control stick provides aircraft roll and pitch control and contains additional weapon and aircraft control functions.
Bomb Release Button
The bomb release button (
Pitch and Roll Trim Hat
The pitch and roll trim hat (
Up/down commands pitch trim and left/right commands roll trim.
Weapon Select Hat
Selector hat (
- SP or PH - Selects AIM-7 or AIM-54. Depression toggles between types.
- SW - Selects AIM-9. Depression toggles between stations.
- GUN - Selects M61A1 Vulcan gun.
- OFF - Inhibits weapon release.
DLC and Maneuver Flap Command Wheel
The DLC and maneuver flap command wheel (
With DLC engaged, forward rotation extends spoilers and aft rotation retracts spoilers.
With flaps up and DLC disengaged, forward rotation retracts maneuvering flaps/slats and aft rotation extends them.
The control logic is that pulling the wheel toward the pilot increases lift and pushing it away decreases lift.
DLC Engage/Disengage and Countermeasure Dispense Button
The DLC engage/disengage and countermeasure dispense button (
With flaps up, this button commands the ALE-47 to dispense program 8. The CMDS programs can be defined in the mission editor.
DLC disengages with another momentary press, raising flaps, or advancing either throttle to MIL.
Autopilot Reference and Nosewheel Steering Button
The autopilot reference and nosewheel steering button (
With weight off wheels, it engages enabled autopilot modes.
Autopilot Emergency Disengage Paddle
The autopilot emergency disengage paddle (
With weight on wheels, it additionally reverts throttle mode to MAN (manual) while depressed.
Weapon Firing Trigger
The weapon firing trigger (
The first detent enables CTVS and gun camera which will record for 10 seconds. The second detent releases the selected forward-firing weapon.
Right Windshield Frame
ECM Warning Lights
Warning lights connected to the ALR-67 indicating different types of threats.
ALR-67
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| SAM | Steady illumination when detecting lock-on from a SAM tracking radar. Flashes when missile launch is detected. |
| AAA | Steady illumination when detecting lock-on from a AAA tracking radar. Flashes when AAA firing is detected. |
| AI | Steady illumination when detecting lock-on from an airborne interceptor radar. |
Standby Compass
Conventional standby compass.
Right Instrument Panel
💡 The Right Instrument Panel consists of the:
- Wing-Sweep Indicator (
1 )- Right Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle (
2 )- Standby Attitude Indicator (
3 )- UHF/VHF Remote Indicators (
4 )- Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI) (
5 )- ALR-67 Indicator (
6 )- Canopy Jettison Handle (
7 )- Takeoff Checklist (
8 )
Wing-Sweep Indicator
Indicator detailing status of the wing-sweep system (
Leftmost indicator pointer shows wing-sweep program position which is also the max forward angle at present airspeed and altitude.
Middle tape shows commanded wing-sweep position.
Rightmost tape shows actual wing-sweep position.
The five indicator windows shows current operating mode.
Right Engine Fuel Shutoff Handle
Emergency fuel shutoff handle for the right engine(
Pulling the handle shuts off fuel flow to the right engine. Pushing the handle in restores fuel flow.
This handle should not be used for normal engine shutdown.
The right engine fire extinguishing button is located behind the handle and is accessible when the handle is pulled outward.
Standby Attitude Indicator
Standalone standby attitude indicator(
An OFF flag is visible on the left side when caged or when un-powered.
The knob below and to the right of the indicator cages/un-cages the indicator and allows trim to correct pitch. In pulled out position the indicator is caged. When pushed in un-cages the indicator and allows pitch trim by turning the knob.
UHF/VHF Remote Indicators
Remote indicators display frequency or channel information for UHF 1 and V/UHF 2
radios(
UHF 1 Remote Indicator
The UHF 1 remote indicator (
V/UHF 2 Remote Indicator
The V/UHF 2 remote indicator (
The operation of the DIM and BRT knob as well as TEST button are the same for both indicators.
The DIM and BRT knobs control display brightness.
The TEST button initiates a self-test. A correct test result displays 888.888.
Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI)
Provides azimuth, bearing, and distance information(
No. 2 Bearing Pointer
The No. 2 bearing pointer (
Compass Rose
The compass rose (
No. 1 Bearing Pointer
The No. 1 bearing pointer (
Distance Counter
The distance counter (
ALR-67 Indicator
Displays radar emitters detected by the ALR-67 radar warning
receiver(
Threat Display Bands
- Critical band (
2 ) - Displays direct threats to own aircraft. Systems capable of engaging own aircraft and showing current intent of doing so. - Lethal band (
3 ) - Displays emitters capable of engaging own aircraft but not currently doing so.- Non-lethal band (
4 ) - Displays emitters not considered an immediate threat due to range or lack of weapon capability.
- Non-lethal band (
System Status Circle
The system status circle (
Area I (upper left quadrant) displays threat prioritization symbols:
- N - Normal.
- I - AI, Airborne interceptors prioritized.
- A - AAA, Anti-air artillery prioritized.
- U - Unknown emitters prioritized.
- F - Friendly emitters displayed in addition to threats.
Area II (upper right quadrant) indicates limited mode status.
- (Blank) - Limited mode not selected.
- L - Limited mode selected. Only the six highest-priority threats are shown.
Area III (lower half) displays system status and offset information:
- (Blank) - Normal operation.
- B - BIT failure.
- T - Thermal overload.
- O - Offset display selected. Threats will be separated to allow readout of overlapping symbols. Bearing accuracy degraded for displaced threats.
Intensity Control Knob
The INT knob (
Canopy Jettison Handle
The canopy jettison handle (
Takeoff Checklist
The Takeoff Checklist (
Right Knee Panel
Fuel Quantity Indicator
The fuel quantity indicator displays fuel quantity information for all aircraft tanks.
BINGO Readout
The BINGO readout (
Total Fuel Counter
The TOTAL counter (
Left and Right Tank Counters
The L and R counters (
The displayed tank group (feed, wing, or external) is selected using the QTY SEL switch on the fuel management panel.
Fuselage and Feed Fuel Tapes
The FUS and FEED fuel tapes (
- Left tape — Indicates left feed and aft fuselage tanks.
- Right tape — Indicates right feed and forward fuselage tanks.
BINGO Set Knob
The SET knob (
Rotate the knob to select the required value.
Accelerometer
Instrument showing current aircraft g-load (acceleration along the aircraft vertical axis). It’s graded in g from -5g to +10g. One pointer will show current g-load while the other two will indicate max reached negative and positive g-load. These can be reset by pushing the PUSH TO SET button on the lower left corner of the instrument.
Clock
Mechanical wind-up clock.
The knob on the lower left corner is used to wind up the clock by turning it clockwise and pulled out and turned to set the hour and minute hands.
The control on the upper right corner is used to start, stop, and reset a 1-hour elapsed time counter.
Right Vertical Console
💡 The Right Vertical Console consists of the:
- Arresting Hook Panel (
1 )- Pilot Display Control Panel (PDCP) (
2 )- Elevation Lead Panel (
3 )
Arresting Hook Panel
Panel controlling arresting hook operation.
Hook Handle
The HOOK handle (
- UP - Electrically commands hydraulic retraction of the hook and locks it in the up-lock.
- DOWN - Electrically releases hydraulic pressure, allowing the hook to extend by dashpot pressure and gravity.
- EMERG DOWN - When the handle is pulled and rotated counter-clockwise, the hook is mechanically released for emergency extension.
Hook Transition Light
The hook transition light (
The light will not extinguish until the hook is fully extended and may remain illuminated during high-speed extension due to hook blowback.
Rounds Remaining Counter
The rounds remaining counter (
The counter normally counts down from 676 rounds and may be manually reset to a desired value using the adjustment knob on the right side.
Pilot Display Control Panel (PDCP)
Control panel for front cockpit display configuration.
Steering Command Selectors
The STEERING CMD selectors (
The selectors are mutually exclusive and rotate to indicate the active selection.
- TACAN - Provides TACAN steering and deviation from the selected TACAN radial, or To/From the selected CDNU Waypoint.
- DEST - Provides course to selected FMC destination point.
- AWL/PCD - Provides glideslope information during landing or precision course direction (vector) information during air-to-ground.
- VEC - Provides data link deviation steering.
- MAN - Displays manually selected course and heading.
Mode Selectors
The MODE selectors (
Selectors are mutually exclusive and rotate to indicate the selected mode.
- T.O. - Selects takeoff symbology for the HUD/VDI.
- CRUISE - Selects cruise symbology for the HUD/VDI.
- A/A - Selects air-to-air attack symbology for the HUD/VDI.
- A/G - Selects air-to-ground symbology for the HUD/VDI.
- LDG - Selects landing (ILS, ACL) symbology for the HUD/VDI.
HUD Format
The HUD format switch (
HUD Baro switch
The HUD baro switch (
VDI Mode Switch
In all modes except when in landing and AWL mode, the VDI MODE switch
(
- TV - Displays video from TCS or LANTIRN.
- NORM - Displays the VDI HUD repeat.
With PDCP LDG Mode and PDCP AWL Steering selected, the VDI Video Mode is inhibited and the VDI is commanded to the VDI HUD repeat mode. If the VDI Mode switch is set to VIDEO, ILS symbology is displayed on the HUD, otherwise the ILS Vectors appear on the VDI display only. This effectively allows declutter of the ILS vectors from the HUD by selecting PDCP VDI Mode switch to VDI while PDCP Mode is set to LDG. The ACL Steering Indicator ("tadpole") is always displayed, on both HUD and VDI, in PDCP LDG mode with AWL Steering while ACLS steering is valid.
HUD day/night switch
The HUD day/night switch (
HSD Mode Switch
The HSD MODE switch (
- NAV - Presents navigation steering information associated with STEER CMD mode selected.
- TID - Repeats information from PTID except when RIO selects TV on the PTID; PTID attack symbology remains presented.
- ECM - Displays the ALR-67 ECM page.
Display Power Switches
The POWER switches (
The TEST Step knob
The TEST Step knob (
HSD ECM Override Switch
The HSD ECM ORIDE switch (
- ORIDE - Allows ECM override.
- OFF - Prevents ECM override.
Elevation Lead Panel
The elevation lead panel (
Adjustment range is from −263 to +87 mils.
Right Side Console
💡 The Right Side Console consists of the:
- Liquid Oxygen Quantity Indicator (
1 )- Compass Control Panel (
2 )- ARA-63 Control Panel (
3 )- Caution - Advisory Indicator (
4 )- Master Generator Control Panel (
5 )- Master Light Control Panel (
6 )- Air Conditioning Control Panel (
7 )- Master Test Panel (
8 )- External Environmental Control Panel (
9 )- Hydraulic Transfer Pump Panel (
10 )- Canopy Defog / Cabin Air Lever (
11 )
Liquid Oxygen Quantity Indicator
Contains an indicator showing the remaining quantity of liquid oxygen available. Graduated in 1-liter increments. Also has an OFF flag that is shown in case of power failure to the indicator. The indicator is tested through the INST mode on the MASTER TEST panel and should read 2 liters.
Compass Control Panel
The compass control panel contains controls used to configure AHRS heading reference modes.
Sync Indicator
Indicator (
Hemisphere Selector Switch
The N-S switch (
Correct selection is critical to ensure proper earth-rate correction in both DG and SLAVED modes.
Latitude Selector Knob
The LAT knob (
This input allows the AHRS to apply correct earth-rate compensation in DG and SLAVED modes.
Compass Mode Switch
The mode switch (
- COMP - Compass, uses magnetic azimuth detector directly without stabilization from the directional gyro, used only for emergency operation and the displays automatically uses the manual magnetic variation.
- SLAVED - Normal mode, uses the magnetic azimuth detector stabilized by the directional gyro.
- DG - Directional gyro mode, uses only gyro and not the magnetic azimuth detector.
Heading Knob/Button
The HDG knob and pushbutton (
In SLAVED mode it's used to sync the directional gyro with the magnetic azimuth detector and set magnetic heading on the BDHI. Button should be held until the synchronization indicator needle is over the null mark.
In DG mode the button is depressed and rotated to select desired heading on the BDHI.
The button can also be used to fast erect pitch and roll of the AHRS by depressing the button for up to 3 minutes. A new fast erect attempt can be done if a 1 minute wait is first observed.
ARA-63 Control Panel
Panel used to control the AN/ARA-63 Instrument Carrier Landing System (ICLS).
Channel Selector
Rotary selector (
BIT Button
The BIT pushbutton (
When activated, landing symbology is displayed on the HUD and VDI if configured for ILS operation.
Power Switch
The POWER switch (
The switch must be pulled outward to move to the OFF position.
Power Indicator Light
Indicator light (
Caution - Advisory Indicator
Main pilot caution panel.
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| PITCH STAB 1 & 2 | Caution lights indicating inoperative pitch channels. |
| ROLL STAB 1 & 2 | Caution lights indicating inoperative roll channels (roll SAS failure). |
| YAW STAB OP | Caution light indicating one inoperative yaw channel. |
| YAW STAB OUT | Caution light indicating two inoperative yaw channels (yaw SAS failure). |
| EMERG JETT | Caution light indicating activation of EMERG STORES JETT button. |
| LADDER | Caution light indicating boarding ladder not correctly stowed. |
| ECS TURBINE | Non-functional |
| INLET ICE | Caution light indicating accumulation of ice on the ice detector in the left engine inlet. |
| FLAP | Caution light indicating failure in the flap system or airspeed greater than 225 knots indicated airspeed with flaps down. |
| HZ TAIL AUTH | Caution light indicating failure of lateral tail authority actuator (or CADC failure). |
| RUDDER AUTH | Caution light indicating failure of rudder authority actuators (or CADC failure). |
| SPOILERS | Caution light indicating spoiler system failure causing several or all spoilers to be locked down. |
| AUTO PILOT | Caution light indicating failure in the auto pilot system. |
| L & R INLET | Caution lights indicating AICS programmer and/or system failure. |
| OIL PRESS | Caution light indicating left or right engine oil pressure below 11 psi. |
| BLEED DUCT | Caution light indicating high-temperature air leak in the engine compartments. |
| L & R RAMPS | Caution lights indicating ramps not locked in position during critical flight conditions. |
| START VALVE | Caution light indicating that the starter solenoid air valve is open after start. (F-14B only.) |
| OXY LOW | Caution light indicating low oxygen pressure or less than 2 liters of oxygen remaining. (F-14A only.) |
| L & R ENG SEC | Caution lights indicating that respective engine AFTC is in secondary mode. (F-14B only.) |
| L & R OVSP/VALVE | Caution lights indicating engine starter system malfunction or N1 rotor over-speed in respective engine. (F-14A only.) |
| L & R GEN | Caution lights indicating respective engine generator is inoperative. |
| CANOPY | Caution light indicating that the canopy is not down and locked. |
| BINGO | Caution light indicating aircraft fuel quantity at or below set BINGO quantity. |
| L & R OIL HOT | Caution lights indicating that respective engine oil is too hot. |
| CADC | Caution light indicating failure in the air data computer. |
| HYD PRESS | Caution light indicating pressure in either engine hydraulic pump below 2,100 psi. |
| L & R FUEL PRESS | Caution lights indicating pressure below 9 psi in the respective engine fuel boost pump. |
| L & R FUEL LOW | Caution lights indicating fuel quantity below 1,000 pounds in aft and left or forward and right fuel feed group respectively. |
| WING SWEEP | Advisory light indicating failure of a single channel in the wing-sweep system. |
| RATS | Advisory light indicating RATS enabled. (F-14B only.) |
| TRANS/RECT | Advisory light indicating failure in one or both transformer-rectifiers. |
| MACH TRIM | Advisory light indicating failure in Mach trim actuator. |
| WSHLD HOT | Advisory light indicating central windshield overheat. |
| LAUNCH BAR | Advisory light indicating either: Weight on wheels - Aircraft kneeled, either throttle below MIL and launch bar not up and locked. Weight off wheels - Launch bar not up and locked, launch bar not within 15º of center (cocked nose-gear), or nose strut not fully extended. |
| INTEG TRIM | Advisory light indicating failure in the trim system or computer failure. |
| AHRS | Advisory light indicating unreliable attitude or heading information from AHRS. |
| ENG FIRE EXT | Advisory light indicating low pressure in the fire extinguishing container (90 psi below nominal 600 psi). |
| AUX FIRE EXT | Advisory light indicating low pressure in the auxiliary fire extinguishing container (90 psi below nominal 600 psi). |
Master Generator Control Panel
Panel controlling electrical power generation and emergency generator logic.
Master Generator Switches
The left and right MASTER GEN switches (
The switch must be lifted to move from OFF/RESET.
- NORM - Activates and connects the generator to the main electrical buses.
- OFF/RESET - Disconnects the generator and resets protective circuits.
- TEST - Activates the generator without connecting it to the buses for testing purposes.
Emergency Generator Switch
Guarded EMERG switch (
- NORM - Emergency generator automatically connects if both main generators fail.
- OFF/RESET - Disconnects the emergency generator and resets protection circuits.
Master Light Control Panel
The master light control panel manages most interior and exterior aircraft lighting systems.
Anti-Collision Light Switch
ON/OFF switch (
Position Light Mode Switch
Switch (
With weight on wheels, supplementary lights remain steady regardless of selection.
Tail Position Light Switch
Switch (
Wing Position Light Switch
Switch (
ACM Lighting Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
AoA Indexer Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
Hook Bypass Switch
Switch (
When set to CARRIER with wheels down, AoA lights flash if the arresting hook is not down.
Taxi Light Switch
ON/OFF switch (
Instrument Lighting Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
White Flood Light Switch
Switch (
DIM and BRT positions available. Switch is locked to OFF unless pulled outward.
Console Lighting Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
- 0 - All off
- 1–14 - Increasing console light intensity
Green NVG Flood Light dial
Switch (
Turn knob to increase or decrease intensity.
Formation Light Thumbwheel
Thumbwheel (
Air Conditioning Control Panel
Panel controlling the environmental control system (ECS).
Temperature Switch
Two-position switch (
- AUTO - Temperature is automatically regulated using the TEMP thumbwheel regardless of airspeed and altitude.
- MAN - Temperature is manually controlled using the TEMP thumbwheel and varies with airspeed and altitude.
Cabin Pressure Switch
Two-position switch (
- NORM - Normal pressurization mode. Cabin pressure is maintained at approximately 8,000 feet up to an aircraft altitude of 23,000 feet, after which a constant 5 psi differential is maintained.
- DUMP - Opens the cockpit dump valve, depressurizing the cockpit.
RAM AIR Switch
The RAM AIR switch (
INCR opens the ram air door, decreasing temperature, while DECR closes the door, increasing temperature. The switch is spring-loaded to center.
Air Source Selectors
Five mutually exclusive air source selectors (
- RAM - Closes all other air sources and opens the ram air door. Gun firing is inhibited.
- L & R ENG - Selects either engine as bleed air source.
- BOTH ENG - Selects both engines as bleed air sources. Normal position.
- OFF - Closes all air sources except the ram air door. Pressurization and air conditioning are unavailable. Gun firing is inhibited.
Temperature Thumbwheel
The TEMP thumbwheel (
Master Test Panel
Panel used to control onboard checkout (OBC), on board built-in tests (BIT), and emergency flight hydraulic operation.
Master Test Selector
The MASTER TEST selector (
- OFF - Disables all test functions.
- LTS - Tests cockpit lights.
- FIRE DET/EXT - Tests fire detection and extinguishing systems.
- INST - Tests cockpit instruments.
- OBC - Initiates onboard checkout.
- EMERG GEN - Tests emergency generator.
- MACH LEV - Dynamic Mach lever test. (F-14A only.)
- WG SWP - Wing sweep test.
- FLT GR DN - Ground check of autothrottle interlocks.
- FLT GR UP - External tank pressurization test.
- D/L RAD - Data link converter test.
- DFCS IBIT - Digital Flight Controls system integrated BIT.
- STICK SW - Stick and spoiler symmetry switch test.
GO / NO-GO Indicator Lights
The GO and NO-GO lights (
Emergency Flight Hydraulic Switch
The EMERG FLT HYD switch (
- HIGH - Activates the power module (high speed mode), bypassing flight and combined 2,100 psi switches.
- LOW - Activates the backup power module bypassing flight and combined 2,100 psi switches.
- AUTO (LOW) - Automatically activates LOW mode when both flight and combined system pressures are below 2,100 psi.
External Environmental Control Panel
Panel controlling windshield heating and external anti-ice systems.
Windshield Heat Switch
The WIND SHIELD switch (
- AIR - Enables windshield heating using warm air.
- OFF - Disables windshield heating.
ENG/PROBE ANTI-ICE Switch
The ENG/PROBE ANTI-ICE switch (
- ORIDE/ON - Engages engine and probe anti-ice regardless of external conditions and enables the anti-ice setting in AICS.
- AUTO/OFF - Automatically engages engine and probe anti-ice as needed, turns off AICS anti-ice.
- OFF/OFF - Turns off both engine and probe anti-ice and AICS anti-ice.
Hydraulic Transfer Pump Switch
Panel containing the control for the hydraulic transfer pump which equalizes pressure between the combined and flight hydraulic systems in case of a failure in one of them.
The HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch has two positions, SHUTOFF and NORMAL (guarded position).
The NORMAL position (also the standard setting) will have the hydraulic transfer pump pressurize a failed hydraulic system from the other, functioning system, when it drops below 2,100 psi.
The SHUTOFF position (which can be accessed by lifting the guard) is used to turn off the transfer pump in case it can’t supply enough pressure to the failed system as that would risk disabling the still operational system.
Canopy Defog / Cabin Air Lever
The canopy air diffuser lever controls the flow of cabin air. The normal position, CABIN AIR, directs 70% of the conditioned air through the cockpit air diffusers and 30% through the canopy air diffusers.
The CANOPY DEFOG position directs all airflow through the canopy air diffusers for canopy defog.
Canopy Control Handle
The canopy control handle controls canopy operation and is located on the right cockpit wall. The handle is mounted downwards beneath the box containing the handle mechanism and the handle position texts. The canopy control handle is duplicated in the RIO cockpit.
| Control | Function |
|---|---|
| BOOST | Closes the canopy using boost, used during cold weather or with a strong headwind. |
| CLOSE | Closes the canopy, default position during flight. |
| HOLD | Holds the canopy at the current position for any position other than closed. |
| OPEN | Opens the canopy. |
| AUX OPEN | Allows manual opening of the canopy if system pressure is too low. |
RIO Cockpit Overview
Layout
Left Side Console
💡 The Left Side Console consists of the:
- Sensor Control Panel (
1 )- Control Display Navigation Unit (CDNU) (
2 )- LANTIRN Control Panel (LCP) (
3 )- Computer Address Panel (CAP) (
4 )- Communication / TACAN Command Panel (
5 )- Radar Beacon Control Panel (
6 )- Power System Test Panel (
7 )- KY-58 Control Panel (
8 )- Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel (
9 )- G-Valve Button (
10 )- Liquid Cooling Control Panel (
11 )- Eject Command Lever (
12 )
Sensor Control Panel
The Sensor Control Panel (
Stabilization Switch
The STAB switch (
Azimuth Center Knob
The AZ CTR knob (
Elevation Center Knob
The EL CTR knob (
VSL Switch
The VSL switch (
- VSL HI
- VSL LO
Azimuth Scan Knob
The AZ SCAN knob (
Elevation Bars Knob
The EL BARS knob (
TCS Trim Knobs
The TCS TRIM knobs (
Slave Switch
The SLAVE switch (
Acquisition Switch
The ACQ switch (
- AUTO SRCH
- MAN
- AUTO
Field of View Switch
The FOV switch (
- WIDE
- NAR
AVTR Mode Knob
The MODE knob (
In the F-14B Upgrade that knob is disabled. VTR recording is selected via the ECMD. Reference the Fast Tactical Imaging section of this manual.
Minutes Remaining Display
The MIN REMAIN display (
Record Switch
The RECORD switch (
- OFF
- STBY
- ON
FTI is set to operate with the switch in STBY or ON.
AVTR Indicator Lights
The indicator lights (
- STBY
- EOT (end of tape)
- REC
Control Display Navigation Unit (CDNU)
The CDNU (
Line Select Keys
Eight Line Select Keys (
Brightness knob
The BRT control (
On / Off knob
The ON / OFF knob (
Scratchpad
The Scratchpad (
Function keys
The Function keys (
Keypad
The Keypad (
Arrow Keys
The Arrow keys (
Dedicated Menu Select Keys
The FPLN (flight plan), PROG (progress), DIR (direct), RNAV (area navigation),
and MARK (
The STAT (status), MENU, and IDX (index) dedicated select keys permit access to a variety of information applicable to the general flight operation and maintenance of the navigation system.
LANTIRN Control Panel (LCP)
The control panel (
Power switch
Three-position rotary switch (
Hand Operated Controller
Provides for selection of critical targeting pod operating functions
(
Mode switch
Standby/operate switch (
Following application of full power (POD on), STBY lamp off until all internal checks complete, FLIR has cooled to operating temperature, gimbal is stowed, and system is in low power state and ready to be commanded to operate mode.
STBY - Pressing switch when STBY is on commands system to operate mode, while gimbal is un-stowing, lamp will flash. When gimbal is un-stowed, OPER lamp comes on and STBY lamp goes off.
OPER - Pressing switch when OPER is on commands system to standby mode and stows gimbal. While gimbal is stowing, STBY lamp will flash and when fully stowed, STBY lamp is on steady and OPER lamp is off.
Bit Advisory Lamps
The four grouped indicator lights (
Video toggle switch
This switch selects either TCS or FLIR video (
- FLIR - LANTIRN FLIR video mode.
- TCS - Television Camera System video mode.
IBIT switch
The IBIT button (
LASER Arm switch
Lever locked laser arm switch (
- SAFE- Laser cannot be fired.
- ARM - Laser can be fired (If all conditions are met).
LASER Armed lamp
Lamp (
Computer Address Panel (CAP)
The Computer Address Panel (
Clear Button
The CLEAR button (
Enter Button
The ENTER button (
Prefix and Numerical Buttons
The numerical and prefix buttons (
Message Selection Buttons
The MESSAGE buttons (
Message Indicator Drum
The MESSAGE drum (
Program Restart Button
The PRGM RESTRT button (
Category Selector Knob
The CATEGORY knob (
Tune Disable
The TUNE DSBL function (
💡 All CAP buttons include indicator lights that illuminate based on selected function.
Communication / TACAN Command Panel
Panel (
Transmitter Select Switch
The XMTR SEL switch (
- UHF 1 - ARC-159.
- BOTH - Both radios.
- V/UHF 2 - ARC-182.
V/UHF 2 Antenna Switch
The V/UHF 2 ANT switch (
- UPR - Upper antenna.
- LWR - Lower antenna.
TACAN/EGI Command Switch
The TACAN/EGI CMD switch (
UHF 1 Volume Knob
The UHF 1 VOL knob (
KY Mode Switch
The KY MODE switch (
The simulated aircraft uses KY-58; this switch is non-functional.
Radar Beacon Control Panel
Panel (
Beacon Mode Selector
The MODE selector (
- SINGLE - Responds to single-pulse interrogation.
- DOUBLE - Responds to double-pulse code.
- ACLS - Enables ACLS augmentation for carrier landings.
ACLS Test Button
The ACLS TEST button (
- Illuminates during successful test.
- Flashes when SPN-42 radar sweep is detected.
- Steady illumination indicates radar lock-on for ACLS.
Power Switch
The PWR switch (
- PWR - Beacon fully active.
- STBY - Warm-up mode; ACLS replies enabled if MODE is ACLS.
- OFF - Beacon off.
Power System Test Panel
Power System Test Panel (
💡 Non-functional in DCS.
KY-58 Control Panel
Encryption control panel (
Zeroize Switch
The ZEROIZE switch (
Power-Mode Switch
The power-mode switch (
Radio Select Switch
The radio select switch (
Oxygen-Vent Airflow Control Panel
Panel (
Vent Airflow Dial
The VENT AIRFLOW dial controls airflow through the pressure suit or seat cushions when no pressure suit is worn.
Oxygen Switch
The OXYGEN switch controls oxygen flow to the RIO oxygen mask.
- ON - Oxygen supplied to mask.
- OFF - Oxygen flow shut off.
G-Valve Button
The G-valve button (
Liquid Cooling Control Panel
LIQ COOLING switch (
Eject Command Lever
The EJECT CMD lever (
- PILOT (lever forward) - Only the RIO ejects.
- MCO (lever aft) - Both crewmembers eject.
Pilot-initiated ejection always ejects both crew members.
Left Vertical Console
Armament Panel
The armament panel provides primary control of air-to-air and air-to-ground weapon employment from the RIO cockpit.
Weapon Type Selector
The WPN TYPE selector (
Attack Mode Selector
The ATTK MODE knob (
Electrical Fuse Selector
The ELEC FUSE knob (
Air-to-Ground Gun Switch
The A/G GUN switch (
- OFF - Gun disabled.
- MIXED - Enables gun in addition to selected A/G ordnance.
Quantity Selectors
The QTY selector wheels (
Interval Selectors
The INTERVAL selector wheels (
Interval is set in milliseconds.
Station 6 Select Switch
The station 6 select switch (
Air-to-Air Launch Button
The A/A LAUNCH button (
Button illumination indicates hot-trigger conditions are met.
Missile Speed Gate Knob
The MSL SPD GATE knob (
Station 8 Select Switch
The station 8 select switch (
- B - Selects lower pylon.
- SW - Non-functional.
Missile Options Switch
The MSL OPTIONS switch (
- Enables AIM-7 pulse-doppler mode.
- Enables AIM-54 active launch mode.
Station 5 Select Switch
The station 5 select switch (
Next Launch Button
The NEXT LAUNCH button (
Station 4 Select Switch
The station 4 select switch (
Station 1 Select Switch
The station 1 select switch (
- B - Selects lower pylon.
- SW - Non-functional.
Tank Jettison Station 7 Switch
The TANK JETT station 7 switch (
Tank Jettison Station 2 Switch
The TANK JETT station 2 switch (
Station 3 Select Switch
The station 3 select switch (
Jettison Options Switch
The JETT OPTIONS switch (
- WPNS - Jettison weapons only.
- MER/TER - Jettison racks in addition to weapons.
This function is non-functional in the modeled F-14.
Selective Jettison Switch
The SEL JETT switch (
- JETT - Normal jettison mode.
- AUX - Backup jettison mode (guarded).
Mechanical Fuse Selector
The MECH FUSE switch (
Delivery Mode Selectors
The DLVY MODE switches (
- One switch selects single or paired weapon release.
- The other selects single-pass or multiple-pass delivery according to quantity and interval settings.
Left Instrument Panel
💡 The Left Instrument Panel consists of the:
- Servopneumatic Altimeter (
1 )- Airspeed Mach Indicator (
2 )- Standby Attitude Indicator (
3 )- UHF Remote Indicator (
4 )
Servopneumatic Altimeter
The servopneumatic altimeter provides altitude indication using both electrical and pressure-based systems.
Altimeter Readout
The altimeter readout (
A pointer on the circular scale provides continuous indication in hundreds of feet.
Baroset Knob
The baroset knob (
This setting only affects the local altimeter display. Other CADC-driven digital indicators use a fixed 29.92 in.Hg reference.
Local Barometric Pressure Window
The local barometric pressure window (
Mode Switch
The mode switch (
- RESET - When CADC power and altitude data are available, holding RESET for approximately three seconds enables normal servoed operation.
- STBY - Selects backup pressure mode.
If CADC data or electrical power is absent for more than three seconds, the system automatically reverts to standby mode.
STBY Flag
The STBY flag is a red standby indication that appears when the altimeter is operating in backup (standby) mode (not visible in this image).
💡 At high speeds and below 10,000 feet, pressure effects can produce significant readout errors: up to 1,200 feet when transonic and up to 4,000 feet when supersonic.
Airspeed Mach Indicator
The airspeed Mach indicator displays indicated airspeed and Mach number.
Airspeed Dial
The airspeed dial (
Outer Airspeed Scale
The outer indicated airspeed scale (
Inner Airspeed Scale
The inner airspeed scale (
This scale remains covered by the dial until applicable.
Mach Number Scale
The Mach number scale (
Indicated Airspeed Index Pointer
The indicated airspeed index pointer (
Mach Number Index Pointer
The Mach number index pointer (
(Not visible in the referenced image.)
Safe Mach Number Index Pointer
The safe Mach number index pointer (
(Not visible in the referenced image.)
Index Selector Knob
The index knob (
One position adjusts the airspeed index pointer, and the other adjusts the Mach index pointer.
Standby Attitude Indicator
The standby attitude indicator provides independent attitude reference.
OFF Flag
The OFF flag (
Cage and Trim Knob
The cage and trim knob (
- Pulled out - Indicator is caged.
- Pushed in - Indicator is uncaged and pitch trim may be adjusted by rotating the knob.
UHF Remote Indicator
The UHF remote indicator provides a cockpit readout of ARC-159 radio tuning.
The remote display shows the selected frequency or preset channel for UHF 1.
The TEST button initiates an indicator self-test. A successful test results in a display of 888.888.
The DIM knob controls indicator display brightness.
Center Panel
Chaff/Flare Dispense Switches
Two countermeasure switch hats (
The switches are functionally mirrored.
- Up - Initiates CMS program 6.
- Down - Initiates CMS program 5.
- Inboard - Initiates CMS program 1-4, depending on which semi-automatic program is selected or which program is selected on the DCDU.
- Outboard - Initiates CMS program 7.
Detail Data Display Panel
The Detail Data Display (DDD) panel provides primary radar control and display functions for the AWG-9 weapon system.
Target Size Switch
The TGTS switch (
Mainlobe Clutter Switch
The MLC switch (
Automatic Gain Control Switch
The AGC switch (
This function is currently non-functional in DCS.
Parametric Amplification Switch
The PARAMP switch (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
Pulse Video Control
The PULSE VIDEO knob (
This control has no effect on pulse-doppler video.
Radar Track Indicator Lights
The radar track indicator lights (
- ANT TRK - Radar is tracking target angle.
- RDROT - Target is within range or rate gate and being tracked.
- JAT - Radar is tracking a jamming source angle.
- IROT - Indicates TCS angle tracking. Originally used for IRST in early F-14A variants.
Range Display Drum
The RANGE display (
The display may be blank when no range scale is applicable.
Range Selection Buttons
The RANGE buttons (
Brightness Control Knob
The BRIGHT knob (
IR Audio Threshold Knob
The IR AUDIO THRLD knob (
This function is non-functional when using the TCS.
IR Audio Volume Knob
The IR AUDIO VOL knob (
Non-functional with TCS.
IR Gain Knob
The IR GAIN knob (
Non-functional with TCS.
Transmitter Channel Wheel
The XMTR CHAN wheel (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
Missile Channel Wheel
The MSL CHAN wheel (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
Display Selection Buttons
The DISPLAY buttons (
The IR button is non-functional with TCS.
WCS Mode Buttons
The WCS MODE buttons (
WCS Mode Display
The WCS MODE display (
Closing Velocity Scale Switch
The Vc switch (
Erase Control Knob
The ERASE knob (
Pulse Gain Control
The PULSE GAIN knob (
Normally left in the detent position unless adjustment is required due to clutter or jamming.
Aspect Switch
The ASPECT switch (
- Controls expected target aspect.
- Selects edge or centroid tracking in pulse mode.
Elevation Indicator
The EL indicator (
- Left needle - Actual radar antenna elevation.
- Right needle - Commanded radar elevation when RDR is selected on the HCU, or TCS elevation when IR/TV is selected.
Counter-Countermeasure Mode Buttons
The CCM MODES buttons (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
Jam/Jet Threshold Knob
The JAM/JET knob (
Currently non-functional in DCS.
ACM Threshold Knob
The ACM THRLD knob (
Normally left in the detent position, as automatic logic manages this function.
Pulse-Doppler Threshold Knobs
The PD THRLD knobs (
- CLEAR - Upper half of the DDD.
- CLUTTER - Lower half of the DDD.
DDD Radar Display
The DDD radar display (
Center Console
💡 The Center Console consists of the:
- Programmable Tactical Information Display (PTID) (
1 )- Hand Control Unit (HCU) (
2 )
Programmable Tactical Information Display (PTID)
The RIO's 8 inch by 8 inch Programmable Tactical Information Display (PTID) replicates the functions of the non-F-14B Upgrade TID, however menu push-buttons (PB) on the PTID provide the ability to select desired menus or select weapons system functions. The PTID presents tactical, navigation, and data link functions via multiple page and display formats.
Navigation Mode Selector
The NAV MODE selector (
Brightness Knobs
The STRK/RSTR knob (
Contrast Knob
The CONTRAST knob (
PTID power switch
The PTID power switch (
TCS Button
The TCS button (
JAM Strobe Button
The JAMMING Strobe button (
Launch Zone Button
The Launch Zone button (
PTID MENU, CLSN, THLD options
In the PTID Tactical (TAC) Page (
The Collision Steering option (CLSN) is available on PB 19. Collision steering selects collision steering toward a tracked target or the TWS centroid.
The Track Hold Option (THLD) is available on PB 18. Track hold extends the time before a radar track is dropped after the last observation.
When selected, track retention time is increased to two minutes. Normal retention time is approximately 14 seconds.
Range Selector
The RANGE selector (
The selected range corresponds to the diameter distance represented on the display.
PTID Declutter Options
Declutter options (
- ALT NUM — Toggles altitude numerics next to track symbols.
- SYM ELEM — Toggles supplementary track symbology. When deselected, only the track symbol dot is displayed.
- DATA LINK — Toggles display of all data link tracks.
- NON-ATTK — Toggles display of non-attackable tracks.
DEST and JMSN
In the PTID TAC page (
RIDD and EXPAND
Additional TAC page options (
- EXP - PTID Expand, enlarges area around PTID Hook.
- RID DISABLE — Not implemented.
PTID Steering mode
Push Button (PB) 9 (
- DEST
- CDNU Mode (MAN/AUTO/OFLY)
- TGT
- LP
INS Status Indicator (not visible)
The INS status indicator displays inertial navigation system alignment status.
- STBY — Power applied but alignment not complete.
- READY — Minimum alignment sufficient for AIM-54 launch criteria.
Both lights extinguish when an INS mode is selected. The indicator may also display fault conditions.
Hand Control Unit (HCU)
The hand control unit is the primary control stick for radar and TCS operation.
IR/TV Switch
The IR/TV switch (
- OFF/STBY — Applies power without full operation.
- ON — Enables full TCS operation.
IR/TV Overtemperature Indicator
The IR/TV overtemp indicator (
Light Test Button
The LIGHT TEST button (
Power Reset Indicator
The PWR RESET indicator (
Power Reset Button
The PWR RESET button (
If the fault condition persists, affected supplies will remain inoperative.
WCS Status Indicator
The WCS indicator (
- STBY or XMT selected while radar warmup is incomplete.
- XMT selected while radar transmission remains inhibited.
WCS Power Switch
The WCS switch (
- STBY — Applies power to WCS and begins radar warmup without transmission.
- XMT — Enables radar transmission when warmup is complete.
Display warmup time is approximately 30 seconds. Radar warmup time is approximately three minutes.
Manual Rapid Lockon Button
The MRL button (
This mode overrides all other radar operating modes except PLM and VSL.
Offset Button
The OFFSET button (
Antenna Elevation Thumbwheel
The ELEV thumbwheel (
HCU Trigger
The HCU trigger (
- First detent — HALF ACTION.
- Second detent — FULL ACTION.
Functions include target acquisition and symbol hook.
Hand Control Function Buttons
The hand control function buttons (
The buttons are mutually exclusive and light up when selected.
Available functions are:
- IR/TV — Controls TCS azimuth, elevation, and tracking. Enables display of TCS elevation on the right elevation indicator on the DDD.
- RDR — Controls radar antenna elevation and STT acquisition or return to search. Displays commanded radar antenna elevation on the DDD.
- DDD CURSOR — Controls DDD cursor for marking geographic positions in pulse radar mode.
- TID CURSOR — Controls the TID cursor used to hook symbols on the TID.
When the DDD cursor is selected but the Pulse Radar mode is not selected the DDD cursor functions as a cursor for the ECMD menu.
Footwells
Left Footwell
AN/ASQ-215 Mission data loader
The Mission Data Loader (
ICS Left Foot Button
RIO left footrest (
Right Footwell
Caution-Advisory Panel
Warning lights (
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| C&D HOT | Caution light indicating overheat in RIO controls and displays. |
| CABIN PRESS | Caution light indicating cabin pressure is too low. |
| FUEL LOW | Caution light indicating fuel below 1,000 pounds in either aft and left or forward and right fuel feed groups. |
| OXY LOW | Caution light indicating oxygen quantity is below 2 liters or pressure too low. |
| CANOPY | Caution light indicating canopy not down and locked. |
| FUSE HV | Caution light indicating AWW-4 electric fuse inoperative. |
| RDR ENABLED | Caution light indicating that radar operation with weight on wheels is possible. |
| COOLING AIR | Advisory light indicating overtemperature condition in the electronic forced air cooling system. |
| MSL COND | Advisory light indicating overtemperature or under-pressure in missile coolant flow, either of which shuts down the missile coolant pump. Can also indicate that the LIQ COOLING switch is not in the AWG-9/AIM-54 position with the WCS in STBY or ON when the Phoenix fairings are installed. |
| AWG-9 COND | Advisory light indicating overheat or overpressure in the AWG-9 coolant flow or that the overtemperature switch has shut down the coolant pump. |
| NAV COMP | Advisory light indicating failure in the INS or CSDC with the NAV MODE switch in INS. |
| FILM LOW | Advisory light indicating low remaining quantity of mission recorder film. |
| IMU | Advisory light indicating a failure in the inertial measuring unit or that the navigation system is in AHRS/AM mode. |
| AHRS | Advisory light indicating that the attitude or heading information from the AHRS is unreliable. |
ICS Right Foot Button
RIO right footrest (
Right Instrument Panel
💡 The Right Instrument Panel consists of the:
- Clock (
1 )- ALR-67 Indicator (
2 )- Fuel Quantity Totalizer (
3 )- Threat Advisory and Master Caution Lights (
4 )- Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI) (
5 )- Canopy Jettison Handle (
6 )- Landing Checklist (
7 )
Clock
Mechanical wind-up clock(
The wind/set knob (
- Rotate clockwise to wind the clock.
- Pull out and rotate to set the hour and minute hands.
The elapsed-time control (
ALR-67 Blank (RWR now displayed on ECMD)
The PMDIG section of this manual has a detailed explanation of the ECMD RWR symbology.
Fuel Quantity Totalizer
The fuel quantity totalizer (
Threat Advisory and Master Caution Lights
Master caution light and ECM/IFF advisory and warning indications(
The MASTER CAUTION light and reset button flashes to indicate a status change on the RIO caution/advisory panel.
Press to acknowledge and extinguish the light until the next event.
ALR-67 Caution Lights
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| IFF | Advisory light indicating received mode 4 interrogation without own system generating a reply. |
| RCV | Advisory light indicating ALQ-126 is receiving a threat identification signal. |
| XMIT | Advisory light indicating ALQ-126 is transmitting. |
| SAM | Warning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from a SAM tracking radar. Flashes when a missile launch is detected. |
| AAA | Warning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from a AAA tracking radar. Flashes when AAA engagement is detected. |
| CW | Warning light indicating detection of a continuous wave emitter. |
| AI | Warning light, steady illumination when detecting lockon from an airborne interceptor radar. |
Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI)
Display indicating azimuth, distance and bearing information (
No. 2 Bearing Pointer
The No. 2 bearing pointer (
Compass Rose
The compass rose (
No. 1 Bearing Pointer
The No. 1 bearing pointer (
Distance Counter
The distance counter (
(Not visible in the referenced image.)
Canopy Jettison Handle
The canopy jettison handle (
Right Vertical Console
Electronic Countermeasures Display (ECMD)
The ECMD (
The ECMD is controlled via the ECMD control panel (
Right Side Console
💡 The Right Side Console consists of the:
- ECMD Display Control Panel (
1 )- Radar Warning Receiver Panel (
2 )- UHF 2 Control Panel (
3 )- ICS Control Panel (
4 )- AN/ALE-47 DCDU (
5 )- AN/ALE-47 Programmer (
6 )- Digital Data Indicator (DDI) (
7 )- FTI Control Panel (
8 )- Data Link Control Panel (
9 )- Data Link Reply COntrol Panel (
10 )- Interrogator Control Panel (
11 )- Interior Lights Control Panel (
12 )- Transponder Set Control Panel (
13 )- DECM Control Panel (
14 )- IFF Antenna Computer Test Control Panel (
15 )- Cabin Defog (
16 )
ECM Display Control Panel
Control panel for the Electronic Countermeasure Display (ECMD) (
ECM Mode Switch
The Mode switch (
Override switch
When in the ECM position the Override switch (
Option Switch
The Option switch (
Lethality Ring switch
The Lethality ring switch (
Radar Warning Receiver Panel
Control panel for the ALR-67 radar warning receiver (
Power Switch
The PWR switch (
Display Type Selector
The DISPLAY TYPE selector (
Display Mode Switch
The MODE switch (
It can be held to the following momentary positions:
- OFST - Enables offset display while held.
- LMT - Enables limited display while held.
Test Switch
The TEST switch (
- BIT - Momentary selection initiates ALR-67 BIT.
- SPL - While BIT page 1 is displayed, holding SPL displays the special BIT status page while held and for three seconds after release.
Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
UHF 2 Control Panel
The UHF 2 (
V/UHF 2 Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Squelch Switch
The SQL switch (
Frequency Select Switches
The frequency select switches (
Frequency / Channel Display
The FREQ/(CHAN) display (
UHF Selector Switch
The UHF switch (
Brightness Knob
The BRT knob (
Mode Selector Knob
The MODE knob (
Frequency Mode Knob
The outer frequency mode dial (
Channel Select Knob
The inner CHAN SEL knob (
💡 HAVE QUICK anti-jam functionality is not implemented in DCS.
ICS Control Panel
Intercommunication (
ICS Volume Knob
The VOL knob (
Amplifier Selection Knob
The amplifier selection knob (
- B/U - Backup amplifier.
- NORM - Normal amplifier.
- EMER - Emergency amplifier using pilot’s amplifier and volume settings. Disables RIO-only audio sources.
ICS Function Switch
The ICS switch (
- RADIO OVERRIDE - ICS audio overrides radio audio.
- HOT MIC - Enables continuous intercom without PTT.
- COLD MIC - Intercom only when PTT is pressed.
AN/ALE-47 Digital Control Display Unit (DCDU)
The AN/ALE-47 CMDS (
INHIBIT Button Functions
The INHIBIT function is initiated by pressing one of seven expendable inhibit buttons: Other 1, Other 2, Chaff, Flares, Radar Warning Receiver (RWR), Missile Warning System (MWS), or Jammer (JMR). When depressed, the respective LED will illuminate when the countermeasure type is inhibited from dispensing. The INHIBIT functions are reset to the "not inhibited" mode during power up. During normal operation, selected INHIBIT functions are retained in memory for momentary power interruptions and are reset when powering up from the MODE control switch OFF position.
OTHER 1 Button
The (O1) button (
💡 Not functional.
OTHER 2 Button
The (O2) button (
💡 Not functional.
CHAFF Button
The (CH) button (
FLARES Button
The (FL) button (
Radar Warning Receiver Button
The RWR button is (
💡 Not functional.
Missile Warning System Button
The MWS button (
JAMMER Button
The JAMMER button is (
💡 Not functional.
ENTER/BUILT IN TEST Button
Actuating the ENT/BIT switch (
💡 Not functional.
Guarded JETTISON Switch
The guarded JETTISON switch (
MODE Control Switch
The Mode control switch (
For a detailed discussion reference the ALE-47 section of this manual.
MANUAL Switch
The Manual switch (
READY/NO GO Display
The Ready display (
The NO GO annunciator illuminates when the CMDS is NOT ready to dispense because of a system failure, during initial power-up, and in BYP Mode.
Positions 1 through 4
Switch positions 1 through 4 are used to select one of four pre-programmed dispense programs. The selected dispense program is initiated by a command from the designated dispense switch in MAN, SEMI, and AUTO modes.
PROGRAM Position
If PRG is selected the ALE-47 system will default to manual program 4 for dispense.
Brightness knob
The BRT knob (
Ground Test switch
The guarded ground test switch (
💡 Not functional.
AN/ALE-47 Programmer
The Programmer (
Digital Data Indicator (DDI)
Digital data indicator (
| Indicator | Function |
|---|---|
| AFT VEC | Aircraft is being vectored to approach target from the rear hemisphere. |
| COL VEC | Aircraft is being vectored on a collision course to target. |
| NO MSG | No message at this time, indicates presence of data link communication while not receiving a command. |
| TO WAY PT | Proceed to the point being indicated by target information. |
| HANDOVER | TDS is handing own aircraft over to another control center. |
| ORBIT | Assume orbit at present position maintaining maximum endurance. |
| CHALNGE | Intercept and visually identify the target. |
| ARM 1 | Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-54. |
| ARM 2 | Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-7. |
| ARM 3 | Intercept and destroy the indicated hostile target using AIM-9. |
| NOT CMD | Ignore currently received heading, speed, and altitude. Also means valid command BIT not yet available. |
| FRE LAN | Free to attack the most suitable target. |
| DIS’GAGE | Cease fire. |
| ABORT | Abort action. |
| BEAC ON | Enable APN-154 tracking beacon. |
| BEAC DUB | Set APN-154 to double-pulse mode. |
| DROP | Command to release a weapon in data link A/G attack, manually or automatically if in data link attack mode. |
| BEAC OFF | Turn off APN-154 tracking beacon. |
| RET BASE | Return to the indicated home base. |
| WAVE OFF | Wave off, automatic AFCS disengagement. |
| LAND CHECK | CATCC has a data link channel available for AFCS, complete landing checklist. |
| ACL BEAC | Directed by carrier to enable APN-154 beacon. |
| ACL RDY | ACL has locked onto aircraft APN-154 beacon and is transmitting zero pitch and bank signals. Glideslope information is now available to the pilot. |
| A/P CPLR | ACL is ready to take control of the aircraft for the ACL approach, autopilot should be engaged. |
| 10 SECONDS | Indicates 10 seconds to arrival at the EGI Fly-To point. In ACL indicates that the ship's motion is taken into account for ACL. |
| ADJ A/C | Indication from the control station of another aircraft near own aircraft. |
| VOICE | Indicates ACL not available, switch to voice procedures. |
| TILT | Indicates no data link message received in the last 10 seconds. In ACL indicates no messages in the last 2 seconds, will disengage AFCS. |
| CMD CHG | Indicates imminent or recently changed command instructions. |
| ALT CHG | Indicates imminent or recently changed altitude command. |
| MON ALT | Message indicating altitude command not being followed with enough precision. |
| MANUAL | Indicates autopilot should not be engaged. |
| SPD CHG | Indicates imminent or recently changed speed command. |
| MON SPD | Message indicating speed command not being followed with enough precision. |
| CMD CTRL | Indicates aircraft under data link control for landing. |
| CHG CHN | Command to change data link channel. |
| HDG CHN | Indicates imminent or recently changed heading command. |
| CANC RPY | TDS has canceled reply messages. |
| FWD VEC | Aircraft is being vectored to approach the target from the front hemisphere. |
💡 The majority of the DDI lights depend on data link reply messages not currently modelled in DCS.
The Fast Tactical Imaging Control Panel
The Tactical Imaging Set (
Remote control unit (RCU)
The RCU display contains 2 lines of 24 green, night vision compatible, alphanumeric characters each. The top line provides status and messages. The bottom line provides a command menu. Find more in the FTI section of this manual.
Data Link Control Panel
Control panel (
Transmission Mode Switch
The transmission mode switch (
- TEST - Initiates system test.
- NORM - Normal operational mode.
- A/J - Anti-jam transmission mode.
Frequency Select Wheels
The frequency select thumbwheels (
Data Link Power Switch
The data link power switch (
Data Link Reply and Antenna Control Panel
Panel (
Antenna Switch
The ANTENNA switch (
Reply Switch
The REPLY switch (
- NORM - Reply transmission enabled.
- CANC - Reply transmission disabled (cancelled).
Datalink Mode Switch
The MODE switch (
- CAINS/WAYPT - Enables data link alignment and waypoint update.
- TAC - Enables manual frequency selection and stops alignment/waypoint update.
Address Thumbwheel
The ADDRESS thumbwheel (
This sets the two least-significant digits; remaining digits are set by ground crew.
AAI Control Panel
AN/APX-76 interrogator control panel(
AN/APX-76 interrogator control panel.
💡 Due to DCS limitations in regards to IFF the AAI control panel is currently non-functional.
M4 Alarm Override Switch
The M4 ALARM OVERRIDE switch (
Test / Challenge CC Switch
The TEST-CHAL CC switch (
- TEST - Momentary actuation interrogates own transponder. With matching codes, two solid lines appear on the DDD at 3 and 4 miles.
- CHAL CC - Momentary actuation starts a 10-second interrogation cycle. Only returns with correct mode and code are displayed on the DDD.
Code Selector Thumbwheels
The CODE selector thumbwheels (
The first wheel sets mode, and the last four wheels set code.
Challenge Light
The CHAL light (
Fault Light
The FAULT light (
Interior Light Control Panel
Panel controlling RIO cockpit lighting (
Instrument Lighting Thumbwheel
The INSTRUMENT thumbwheel (
- 0 - Off
- 1–14 - Increasing brightness
White Flood Switch
The WHITE FLOOD switch (
DIM and BRT settings are available. The switch is locked to OFF unless pulled out.
Console Lighting Thumbwheel
The CONSOLE thumbwheel (
- 0 - Console and green flood off
- 1–14 - Increasing console brightness
NVG Flood Switch
The NVG FLOOD rotary (
IFF Transponder Control Panel
Control panel for the
AN/APX-72 IFF transponder
(
Mode 4 Switch
The MODE 4 switch (
Mode 4 Audio/Light Switch
The MODE 4 AUDIO/LIGHT switch (
- AUDIO - Enables Mode 4 audio monitoring and reply light monitoring.
- OUT - Disables audio and light monitoring.
- LIGHT - Enables reply light monitoring only.
Mode 4 Code Selector
The MODE 4 CODE selector (
- ZERO - Erases both ciphers.
- B - Selects B cipher.
- A - Selects A cipher.
- HOLD - Non-functional.
Mode 4 Reply Light
The MODE 4 REPLY light (
The light can be pressed to test.
Test Light
The TEST light (
The light can be pressed to test illumination.
Master Selector
The MASTER selector (
- OFF - No power.
- STBY - Standby for immediate operation when another mode is selected.
- LOW - Low sensitivity replies; responds only to strong nearby interrogators.
- NORM - Normal reply operation.
- EMER - Emergency replies to Mode 1, 2, and 3/A and normal reply to Mode C, regardless of mode switch settings.
Mode Switches
The MODE switches (
- TEST - Tests the respective mode; correct operation indicated by TEST light.
- ON - Enables the mode.
- OUT - Disables the mode.
Rad Test / Out / Mon Switch
The RAD TEST-OUT-MON switch (
- RAD TEST - Not used by aircrew.
- OUT - Disables test and monitoring.
- MON - Monitors Mode 1, 2, 3, and C by illuminating the TEST light when replies are generated and transmitted.
Ident / Out / Mic Switch
The IDENT-OUT-MIC switch (
- IDENT - Momentary; enables IDENT replies for 15–30 seconds after release.
- OUT - IDENT disabled.
- MIC - Transfers IDENT control to crewmember UHF PTT; IDENT replies occur when PTT is keyed.
Code Thumbwheels
The code thumbwheels (
Six thumbwheels are provided.
DECM Control Panel
Control panel for the AN/ALQ-126 DECM jammer (
Standby Light
The STANDBY light (
The light extinguishes after warm-up. Illumination during test or operation indicates a fault.
DECM Selector
The DECM selector (
Selectable modes are:
- OFF - Removes power from the AN/ALQ-126.
- STBY - Standby warm-up mode.
- TEST/HOLD 3 SEC - Hold for three seconds to arm the system test.
- TEST/ACT - Initiates AN/ALQ-126 BIT after the TEST/HOLD 3 SEC step.
- REC - Receive and analyze threat signals. Missile launch detection may force the system into repeat.
- RPT - Repeat mode, transmits programmed responses to detected threats.
Audio Knob
The AUDIO knob (
IFF Antenna Control / Test Panel
Panel containing (
IFF Antenna Switch
The IFF ANT switch (
- AUTO - Automatic selection.
- LWR - Forces lower antenna selection.
Indicator Light / DDI BIT Switch
The IND LT/DDI BIT switch (
Ground Cooling Switch
The GND CLG switch (
- OBC/CABIN - External air into cabin and electronics cooling with reduced OBC performance.
- OFF - External air not used.
- AWG-9/AIM-54 - External air used to cool AWG-9/AIM-54 more effectively; disables external cabin air.
Left and Right Test Lights
The left and right test lights (
MCB Test Switch
The MCB test switch (
Canopy Defog / Cabin Air Lever
The canopy air diffuser lever (
- CABIN AIR - Normal position. Directs approximately 70% of airflow through cockpit air diffusers and 30% through canopy diffusers.
- CANOPY DEFOG - Directs all airflow through canopy diffusers for canopy defog.
Canopy Control Handle
The canopy control handle controls canopy operation and is located on the right cockpit wall. The handle is mounted downwards beneath the box containing the handle mechanism and the handle position texts. The canopy control handle is duplicated in the pilot cockpit.
| Control | Function |
|---|---|
| BOOST | Closes the canopy using boost, used during cold weather or with a strong headwind. |
| CLOSE | Closes the canopy, the default position during flight. |
| HOLD | Holds the canopy at the current position for any position other than closed. |
| OPEN | Opens the canopy. |
| AUX OPEN | Allows manual opening of the canopy if system pressure is too low. |
Systems Overview
Navigation & Communication
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | Navigation Controls and Displays |
| 2. | Embedded GPS INS (EGI) |
| 3. | Control Display Navigation Unit (CDNU) |
| 4. | Backup Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI) |
| 5. | Fast Tactical Imaging (FTI) |
NAVIGATION CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
The Tomcat has a multitude of displays to show navigation data. Different input methods can be used to display different navigation data at the same time. The CDNU and PTID are the only Navigation data displays that also offer input methods. The CDNU is the primary navigation input device.
Tactical navigational information is displayed on the VDIG-R, PMDIG, and BDHI. The type of information displayed is predicated on the PDCP display mode and steering sub-mode selected. System navigation information is displayed on the CDNU, PTID and HSD. Below a summary of system outputs available to the displays. Specific presentations for each navigation mode are presented in the navigation modes and steering section. All displays provide navigation information with respect to magnetic north. The navigation command and control grid displays are discussed in the PTID chapter.
Pilot
(
(
(
(
(
(
RIO
(
(
(
(
(
System Architecture and Terminology
With the F-14B Upgrade the Navigation system was upgraded significantly, replacing entire component groups or supplementing them with newer components. At the core of the Navigation system is the Embedded GPS INS (EGI). The EGI is controlled by the CDNU. The F-14s weapon system is controlled by the F-14s Mission Computer (FMC). The FMC requires analogue signals and interfaces with the CDNU and the EGI via the Computer Signal Data Converter (Replacement) CSDC(R).
This means, that whilst the overall navigation solution for the Tomcat is determined by the EGI, there are four distinct sources for steering information:
-
The EGI steering solution which is controlled via the CDNU.
-
The FMC steering solution which is controlled via the PTID.
-
BDHI steering controlled via the CDNU.
-
TACAN steering controlled via the Pilots TACAN panel.
EGI Steering
The EGI provides flight plan AUTO, OFLY and MAN steering selected on the CDNU. If EGI (MAN/OFLY/AUTO) steering is selected via the PTID and EGI is selected on the TACAN CMD panel, the HUD and HSD reference the EGI steering solution. The current EGI steering waypoint is shown on the PTID as a "Hot-Dog" waypoint. The EGI always provides steering to the currently active flight plan waypoint.
Destination Steering
The FMC provides two basic types of steering Navigation and Attack, Navigation steering is commonly referred to as destination steering. Any waypoint in the Flight Plan can be designated as the Destination waypoint. If destination steering is selected via the PTID tactical page using PBs 6, 8, and 9 and EGI is selected on the TACAN CMD panel, the HUD and HSD reference the destination steering solution. Destination steering is available on the HUD in all HUD modes, and is only available on the HSD if the DEST steering sub-mode is selected on the PDCP.
BDHI Steering
Steering information to the CDNU Fly−To point (listed as the first waypoint on the CDNU Flight Plan page) can be displayed on the BDHI by ensuring that EGI is selected on the TACAN Control Panel. If EGI is selected, then the RIO has four options: selecting the EGI fly−to point (default), selecting a flight plan waypoint, selecting the GGW/LTS next launch WP (TGT or LP), or synchronizing the BDHI with HUD steering. Options are available on the BDHI Steering Selection page, accessed via the CDNU F4 function key. The RIO selects options by depressing the appropriate LSK. An asterisk next to the LSK shows which option is active.
TACAN Steering
TACAN steering is shown on the HSD, HUD and BDHI if the Pilot or RIO has TACAN selected on the TACAN CMD panel. All displays will now reference the TACAN station as the steering source. The HSD will only show TACAN steering if TACAN is selected on the PDCP sub-mode.
TACAN Yardstick is always displayed on the HUD with a valid TACAN station regardless of TACAN CMD panel EGI/TACAN switch position.
Navigation Display Matrix
| PDCP Mode | TACAN/EGI Pushbutton | PTID Steering Select (PB 9) | HUD/HSD/ECMD Displays (DEST and TACAN Display is the same between ECMD and HSD) | BDHI Display |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| TACAN | EGI | AUTO MAN OFLY DEST | Command Heading: Wind corrected Heading to the EGI Fly-To Point. Range: To the EGI Fly-To Point. CDI Bar: Displayed (to the EGI Fly-To Point) for the course entered in the CDNU Flightplan | Steering and range to EGI "Fly-To" Point ("Hot Dog") |
| TACAN | TACAN | Command Heading: Wind corrected Heading (to the TACAN Station) required to maintain the HSD selected course. Range: To the TACAN Station. CDI Bar: Displayed (to the TACAN) for the course dialed on the HSD course knob. | TACAN | |
| DEST | EGI | AUTO MAN OFLY | Command Heading: Wind corrected Heading to the EGI Fly-To Point. Range: To the EGI Fly-To Point. CDI Bar: None | Steering and range to EGI "Fly-To" Point ("Hot Dog") |
| DEST | EGI | DEST | Command Heading: Wind corrected Heading to the Destination Waypoint. Range: To the Destination Waypoint. CDI Bar: None | Steering and range to EGI "Fly-To" Point ("Hot Dog") |
| DEST | TACAN | TACAN |
With the PDCP mode in TACAN, then EGI or TACAN steering are the only available options for the HUD display. Destination Steering will not be displayed on the HUD even with the PTID Steering Select Pushbutton (PB 9) selected to DEST ##.
Steering Select Sources
-
Dest steering: activated via PTID, waypoint selected via PTID rotary or CDNU.
-
EGI steering: activated via PTID, waypoint selected via CDNU.
EGI Steering on the HUD/HSD
To display steering information to the CDNU Fly−To point on the HUD and HSD, the RIO must first select AUTO, OFLY or MAN using the PTID Steering Select Rotary (PB 9). The pilot must then select DEST or TACAN on the PDCP.
Note The TACAN Range displayed on the left side of the HUD is always present regardless of the PDCP mode or the status of TACAN/EGI command pushbutton With PDCP mode in TACAN, the TACAN/EGI command determines whether TACAN or EGI steering is displayed on the BDHI/HUD/HSD.
AUTO/MAN/OFLY/CDNU Steering
Selection of "AUTO/MAN/OFLY/CDNU" (indication is dependent on steering mode selected on CDNU Flight Plan page, and the status of the EGI) on the PTID Destination Steering Select Rotary PB provides steering to the CDNU Fly−To waypoint on the HUD, HSD and BDHI when either DEST or TACAN is selected on the PDCP (assuming EGI is on). If DEST is selected on the PDCP, the HSD steering is derived by the FMC, but it is calculated for the same point as the CDNU calculation. For TACAN selected, the same data seen on the BDHI is provided on the HSD TACAN display. Both the Hot Dog and the Destination Steering symbols are posted on the fly−to waypoint if DEST is selected on the PDCP, or TACAN is selected on the PDCP with EGI selected on the TACAN Select Switch. The following table summarizes each mode:
| MODE | DESCRIPTION |
|---|---|
| AUTO | Steering to the next waypoint in a flight plan is in accordance with FAA requirements for a "lead turn" when doing Airways Navigation. The lead turn is calculated using a fixed angle of bank, aircraft speed, and course geometry. Automatic sequencing occurs when the aircraft passes an imaginary line perpendicular to the inbound course through the "lead turn" point. |
| MAN | Manual steering to a flight plan waypoint. No automatic sequencing to subsequent waypoint occurs upon reaching the selected waypoint. |
| OFLY | Steering calculations are provided directly to the desired waypoint so that the aircraft passes directly over the waypoint. Automatic sequencing occurs when the aircraft passes an imaginary line perpendicular to the inbound course through the waypoint. |
Destination Steering via CDNU
The RIO can select the destination steering source directly from the PTID TAC display page. Selecting (or "boxing") PTID PB6 (DEST) will replace the normal Steering Mode display on PB9 with the destination steering rotary on PB8 and PB9.
The RIO can then use PB8 and PB9 to step through the available waypoints, stopping at the WP number to be designated Destination Steering Point. Unboxing the DEST pushbutton (PB6) restores the Steering Mode display. To designate a DEST waypoint via the CDNU, the RIO:
-
Hooks the desired waypoint (Note: if the waypoint is not visible on the PTID, the NVD WP page can be used to select the desired waypoint)
-
PTID − Select WPEDIT (PB 8) to bring up the Waypoint Edit 1/2 page on the CDNU
-
CDNU − Using LSK 2, cycle through the options until ":DEST" is visible then depress ENTER (LSK 6)
-
Verify "D" is posted on the desired CDNU Waypoint Edit Page
-
PTID − Using PB 9, ensure DEST ## is displayed, where ## is the waypoint number.
-
PDCP − Pilot must select DEST to display steering information for the destination waypoint on the HUD.
PDCP Display Modes and Steering Sub-modes
The pilot has the option of selecting any one of five VDIG display formats, depending on the flight phase, to provide him with the data necessary to accomplish the particular flight phase. These five display modes are arranged as five vertical, mutually exclusive push-buttons on the pilot’s display control panel. The five phases are takeoff (T.O.), CRUISE, air-to-air (A/A), air-to-ground (A/G), and landing (LDG). Note ACM selection overrides the CRUISE A/A and A/G modes; however, it does not override the T.O. or LDG modes. In addition to controlling the VDIG(R) formats, the display mode selections also controls armament and FMC logic.
In addition to the essential data such as altitude, vertical speed indicator, etc., the VDIG(R) format also provides steering cues. In each of the PDCP display modes, the pilot has the capability of displaying several types of steering commands. Altogether there are five distinct steering command sub-modes: TACAN, destination (DEST), AWL/PCD, vector (VEC), and manual (MAN). The five selections are arranged horizontally along the bottom of the display control panel. The five steering sub-modes determine the display format on the pilot’s HSD and the RIO’s multiple display indicator. The HSD and multiple display indicator present, in a horizontal plane, steering to the selected point. The HSD follows the five sub-modes when the pilot places the HSD-MODE switch to NAV. The RIO also performs the same function by setting the MODE switch on this multiple display indicator control panel to NAV. Also, when LDG is selected, the pilot has the option of displaying ILS or ACL information via switches that can be used to individually and independently select the HUD and VDI for display.
A typical choice would be to select ILS (SPN-41/ARA-63) for the HUD and for D/L to VDI. Note All steering commands (such as command course and command heading) are processed to some extent through the FMC prior to display. The STEERING indicator legend on the PTID provides a readout for the RIO to inform him of what sub-mode the pilot has chosen.
EGI vs DEST Steering mode use-case examples
EGI Steering provides the aircrew with steering information to the currently active flight plan waypoint. The currently active flight plan waypoint is shown on the FLPN page, and is denoted by the Hot-Dog symbol on the PTID. The CDNU has 4 steering modes, MAN, AUTO and OFLY. In MAN steering the flight plan does not advance automatically, it can only be advanced through using the DIR function. The DIR function will pass all bypassed waypoints into history. In AUTO or OFLY the EGI automatically sequences the waypoints once passed. This has the advantage of lowering crew tasks during critical phases of flight. It is particularly helpful for long routes and low level navigation, where a lot of waypoints need to be passed in short order.
AUTO and OFLY have the disadvantage of passing waypoints into history, only 5 history waypoints are stored.
Destination steering provides steering to any flight plan waypoint regardless of its position in the flight plan. There is not Automatic sequencing of waypoints, the RIO has to manually select the desired waypoint via the PTID rotary or the CDNU WP edit page. This mode is particularly helpful in missions where no long routes are required such as a DCA mission.
In Destination no waypoints pass into history, but the RIO always has to manually select the next desired waypoint once a waypoint has been passed.
DEST steering
| PDCP | TACAN CMD Panel |
|---|---|
| PTID | |
(
(
(
| Result: | |
|---|---|
| HUD | HSD |
HUD/HSD: Show DEST wp.
EGI steering
| PDCP | TACAN CMD Panel |
|---|---|
| PTID | |
(
(
(
| Result: | |
|---|---|
| HUD | HSD |
HUD/HSD: Show Hot-Dog wp.
TACAN steering
| PDCP | TACAN CMD Panel |
|---|---|
(
(
| Result: | |
|---|---|
| HUD | HSD |
HUD/HSD: Show TACAN steering.
Introduction
The early F-14A and F-14B relied on a traditional Carrier Aircraft Inertial Navigation System (CAINS). In the F-14B Upgrade, this architecture was modernized with a new navigation suite centered around the Embedded GPS/INS (EGI) and the F-14 Mission Computer (FMC). While the older system relied entirely on inertial navigation, the upgraded system combines inertial sensors with satellite navigation, greatly improving long-term accuracy and reducing drift.
The F-14B(U)s primary navigation components are the H-764G Embedded GPS/INS (EGI) and the C-12284/A Control Display Navigation Unit (CDNU). The CDNU acts as the BUS controller for the MIL-STD-1553B digital data bus. The MIL-STD-1553B digital data bus was the primary element allowing for the integration of the Navigation system and associated weapons.
The EGI consists of a Ring Laser Gyro (RLG) IMU and a five-channel GPS receiver. A Kalman filter is used to combine the data of the IMU and the GPS resulting in a navigation system with essentially no drift.
Embedded GPS/INS (EGI)
The EGI is a Ring Laser Gyro (RLG) IMU complemented by an embedded five-channel GPS receiver to provide precise position in addition to the highly accurate RLG velocity and attitude measurements. A Kalman filter is used to optimally combine the data from both sensors resulting in a navigation system with essentially no drift.
The EGI provides three separate position solutions simultaneously:
- GPS
- Blended
- Free Inertial
The GPS solution uses the timing signals transmitted by the NAVSTAR GPS constellation of satellites to determine position near the earth’s surface. As long as four satellites are being tracked, extremely accurate position and time are available even when the EGI is in an alignment mode. The receiver also provides aircraft velocity in three dimensions, although during rapid maneuvering the velocity information can lag slightly due to update timing.
The Blended solution is the primary solution determined by the EGI, and is available for use as soon as the EGI estimates its drift rate is less than 5.0 nm/hr. It uses a Kalman filter that both improves IMU quality and GPS quality and also uses the GPS solution to refine the position derived from the IMU.
The EGI has the ability to remove the GPS data from the Kalman filter. This is useful in areas of known GPS spoofing for example. There are therefore two Blended solutions: Blended (Aided) and Blended (Unaided). The F-14 uses the Blended (Unaided) solution when GPS aiding is not desired because it still uses the Kalman filter to improve the IMU position outputs.
The Free Inertial solution is similar to the Blended (Unaided), however it also excludes the kalman filter and provides only a raw IMU output, this solution drifts much more than the others and is only used for IMU diagnostic purposes, it cannot be used for Navigation purposes by the CDNU or FMC.
EGI MODES OF OPERATION
The EGI has ten modes of operation. In addition to Off, Initialize and Navigate, there are seven separate alignment modes:
- Gyro Compass
- Stored Heading
- SINS In Motion Align (IMA)
- SINS Stored Heading
- GPS IMA
- Manual IMA
- Air Data IMA
The EGI chooses the alignment mode automatically as soon as the NAV MODE Select switch on the PTID is in any other position than OFF. The alignment mode is determined based on NAV MODE SEL switch position, aiding data available, the state of the parking brake and any detected motion. After alignment the transition to Navigate can either occur automatically or by RIO action. For a detailed discussion of the alignment modes refer to the chapter on alignment modes.
Whilst the Aircrew will primarily interface with the EGI through the CDNU and use it for navigation purposes, the EGI is crucial for all functions of the F-14s weapons systems. An accurate position and altitude location is vital to employing GPS Guided Weapons (GGW).
The old AN/ASN-92 CAINS would drift significantly over longer duration flights, which would become visible when Datalink and Radar Tracks would not align properly anymore. This deficiency of the system has essentially been eliminated by the EGI. With a GPS solution the EGI has essentially no drift, and even without a GPS solution, the RLG of the EGI now provides much better performance than the old CAINS.
The EGI paired with the CDNU and the MDL (Mission Data Loader) allows for the storage of up to 12 flight plans and the usage of up to 50 pre planned waypoints during flight. Additionally 49 more waypoints can be inserted during flight.
| System Mode | Symbol | Attitude Source | Position Source | Velocity Source |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Blended – Aided (Y-Code Only) | BY | EGI | GPS/INS | IMU |
| Blended – Aided (Mixed P-Code and Y-Code) | BM | EGI | INS Only | IMU |
| Blended – Unaided (RIO Commanded) | IN | EGI | INS Only | IMU |
| Blended – Unaided (CSDC Commanded) | BU | EGI | INS Only | IMU |
| GPS | G | EGI | GPS Only | IMU |
| IMU/AM | IM | EGI | FMC Dead Reckoning | FMC Dead Reckoning |
| AHRS/EGI | AE | AHRS | EGI (Aided — GPS/INS; Unaided — INS) | IMU |
| AHRS/GPS | AE | AHRS | GPS | GPS |
| AHRS/AM | AH | AHRS | FMC Dead Reckoning | FMC Dead Reckoning |
| NAV FAIL | — | None | None | None |
(EGI Modes Of Operation - Displayed in bottom right of PTID and bottom of HSD)
Navigation System Caution and Advisory Lights/Legends
The caution advisory panel on the RIO’s right knee panel has three advisory lights that indicate failures within the navigation system (IMU, NAV COMP, AHRS). The panel also has two other advisory lights, C&D HOT and AWG-9 COND, that are indirectly related to navigation system operation. Illumination of either or both of these lights could mean degraded navigation operation because of improperly working displays.
NAV COMP Light / NAV HUD Display
The NAV COMP advisory light in the RIO annunciator panel will illuminate any time a fault is detected in the EGI, CDNU, or SDC that could degrade the navigation solution, or when communication is lost between the EGI and CDNU (i.e., a NAVBUS failure occurs). A "NAV" indication will display on the HUD in window 34 anytime a NAV COMP light appears. The light/NAV display will also appear any time a tolerance level for a particular mode of flight is exceeded. The NAV COMP advisory light/NAV display should be treated as a cue to check the status indications on the CDNU. The RIO should read the CDNU annunciator line and, if necessary, the status page, to determine the exact nature of the fault.
IMU Light
If the IMU advisory light illuminates, there is either a failure in the EGI IMU or in the analog circuitry that sends attitude information to the CSDC(R). If the IMU light illuminates without a corresponding NAV COMP light, the fault is in the analog circuitry. In either case, attitude information for the VDIG and missile control system will be provided by the AHRS. If only the IMU light illuminates, the EGI is still providing a complete navigation solution to the CSDC(R) and CDNU; only attitude information to the flight instruments is affected. If both the IMU and NAV COMP lights illuminate, in addition to bad attitude information, the Blended and Free-Inertial solutions from the EGI will be unusable. The GPS solution may still be available. Check the EGI status on the CDNU. Regardless of the nature of the fault, the CSDC(R) will switch the navigation system mode to the best available. The pilot does not receive any indication of an IMU failure.
STANDBY/READY Legends
The Navigation status indicators on the PTID (STBY and READY legends) are used to interpret the status of the Navigation System. The figure below lists the possible combinations, the interpretation, and required actions, if any.
| Status | Interpretation |
|---|---|
| ALIGN STBY ON READY ON (STBY and/or READY blinks – parking brake not set or hydraulic pressure low) | - Coarse align not complete. - "HS" blinks if NAV MODE is CVA and no GPS or SINS. If attempting a GPS IMA, wait for a valid GPS solution. If no GPS and no SINS, enter carrier LAT, LONG, true HDG, and SPD on the CDNU via the CV Manual Page. - Normal during align until ALIGN QUALITY ±3.0 nm/hr. |
| STBY OFF READY ON (STBY blinks – parking brake released for taxi) | Minimum Phoenix criteria met. |
| STBY OFF READY OFF (READY blinks – parking brake released for taxi) | ALIGN QUALITY <1.0 nm/hr. |
| NAVIGATE STBY OFF READY OFF | Selected NAV MODE SEL position valid. |
| STBY OFF READY ON | A better NAV MODE SEL selection is available (INS or IMU if in AHRS, INS if in IMU). |
| STBY ON READY ON | NAV MODE SEL selection failed. |
(Standby Ready Legend Logic - Displayed in top left of PTID)
EGI ALIGNMENT MODES
Associated equipment for alignment is the Control Display Navigation Unit (CDNU)
(
Before the EGI can be used for navigation, the GPS must be initialized and the IMU must determine its orientation with respect to true north. This process is termed "alignment", and the EGI accomplishes this task automatically, with the exact alignment mode determined by the reference data available. The unit is capable of providing accurate position data as soon as the GPS unit acquires the four satellites necessary for a solution. However, attitude and inertial velocity measurements require the alignment procedure.
Power is applied to the EGI by selecting any mode other than OFF on the NAV MODE SEL switch, at which time the unit transitions to its power-up initialization (INIT) mode. In this mode it performs a Startup BIT; loads initial values for position, velocity, and time (PVT); loads the GPS almanac if necessary; checks the availability of data for a Stored Heading Alignment; and then transitions to the appropriate alignment mode.
Initial position, date, and time values must be entered via the CDNU. The EGI will use (and the CDNU will display) its last known values until new data are entered or GPS becomes available. While in INIT, all navigation outputs are set to zero, null, or invalid as appropriate. The RIO must verify the correct position appears in Line 1 of the CDNU START 1/2 or START 2/2 page. Upon verification that the position is correct, LSK1 should be depressed. If the entered position is the one to which the EGI initialized, the alignment will continue normally; if the position is significantly different (greater than approximately 20 miles), the alignment will restart.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
| Symbol | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Alignment is initializing | |
| Coarse Align Complete | |
| Align Complete |
💡 Initial position for alignment can only be entered using the CDNU; a CAP entry will have no effect. Information entered via the CAP goes only to the FMC, not the EGI. Communication with the EGI is only effected through the CDNU.
The EGI will perform a coarse alignment with the NAV MODE SEL switch in any position except OFF. However, full specified accuracy is only guaranteed if the NAV MODE SEL switch is left in an alignment position (GND or CVA) until ALIGN COMPLETE (a "Dot-in-Diamond") appears. The only operator action required once power is applied is the entry of initial position using LSK1 on either the START 1/2 or START 2/2 page of the CDNU.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
💡 If power is applied to the EGI prior to the CDNU, depression of LSK1 on either of the CDNU START pages may be delayed until after the CDNU is functioning.
💡 Pressing LSK1 on either page reinitializes the GPS receiver, so momentary loss of GPS satellites can be expected. The EGI should reacquire satellites in 15–30 seconds.
💡 All available sources of reference data are used by the EGI Kalman filter to improve the quality of alignment. This includes GPS when in the aided mode, and air data (true airspeed, pressure altitude, and pressure altitude rate) at all times. The EGI provides the current status of the alignment for display on the CDNU and the PTID. Alignment Quality, GPS Figure of Merit (FOM), and Time in Alignment are updated every second. Discrete messages for Coarse Align Complete; 5.0 nm/hour, 3.0 nm/hour, and 1.0 nm/ hour align quality; Align Hold; and Alignment Complete signals are also sent to the CDNU and CSDC(R).
(
(
- NAV
- GND
- CV
- AHRS
- IMU
- OFF
(
(
(
(
- Off
- Initialize
- Gyro Compass
- Stored Heading
- SINS In Motion Align (IMA)
- SINS Stored Heading
- GPS IMA
- Manual IMA
- Air Data IMA
(
(
(
When the RIO selects an alignment mode using the NAV MODE SEL switch, alignment data will normally be displayed on the PTID This display can also be activated at any time, even while displaying tactical information, by depressing NAV FB-2 on the CAP. Information concerning the status of the alignment is displayed on both the PTID and the CDNU.
💡 If an alignment begins without the Alignment Display appearing on the PTID, verify that NAV category FB-2 is selected (button illuminated) on the CAP.
💡 If the PTID Alignment Display is selected after the alignment is complete, the display will contain the Time In Align at the time the alignment was accepted. The Align Quality (Q) and GPS FOM readouts, however, will accurately reflect the current state of the EGI, including any improvements to the alignment (due to GPS aiding) made after selecting INS on the NAV MODE SEL switch.
The PTID will first display a caret (v) on the far left side of the alignment display, indicating that INIT is in progress. At COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE the caret transitions to a diamond (◊).
As the alignment progresses, the diamond will move in steps across the alignment display from left to right aligning with four tick marks representing coarse align complete, 5.0 nm/hr, 3.0 nm/hr, and 1.0 nm/hr align quality, respectively. The display also shows the align time in minutes and seconds, Blended align quality in nm/hr, and the GPS FOM. The actual alignment mode is shown on the right side of display line 3 of the EGI Start 2/2 page on the CDNU. The left side of the same line indicates the detected position of the NAV MODE SEL switch (that is, the position that the CSDC(R) is currently sending to the CDNU).
Alignment telltales are displayed between the tick marks if necessary. An "S" will appear between the first and second tick-marks indicating invalid SINS data (only in CV align). An "H" will appear between the second and third tick-mark if the EGI goes into an align-hold state. An "HS" acronym will appear between the third and fourth tick-marks when a Manual InMotion Alignment (IMA) is in progress. The "HS" will flash if hand set data for the Manual IMA are needed.
Transition to NAV Mode
During alignment, the Free Inertial and Blended solutions are "Coupled", with gyro and accelerometer biases determined within the Kalman filter for both. Once the alignment is complete, the two solutions are decoupled, and the Free Inertial solution continues to use the bias information available at the time of de-coupling.
The Kalman filter continues to refine those errors for use by the Blended solution. Thus, even if GPS becomes unavailable, the Blended solution will provide a more accurate position than the Free Inertial solution. The intent of the Free Inertial solution is to provide an IMU derived dead-reckoning solution for IMU diagnostic purposes only. Align quality, displayed on the PTID and CDNU during alignment, is the EGI’s best estimate of what the Blended (Unaided) solution drift would be if the EGI were to transition to Navigate mode at that point.
The EGI signals the FMC when it has achieved full specified alignment accuracy. This is indicated to the aircrew by the appearance of a dot within the alignment status diamond on the PTID. The time required to achieve ALIGN COMPLETE is determined by the total amount of time in alignment with good data, and the alignment mode used. If ALIGN COMPLETE is set, alignment will continue until the EGI senses a ground speed of 80 knots, or, until the RIO selects INS, AHRS, or IMU on the NAV MODE SEL switch.
💡 Full specified INS performance (see the specific alignment sections below) is only guaranteed if the alignment is allowed to proceed to completion, i.e., the NAV MODE SEL switch stays in an alignment position (GND or CV) until achieving ALIGN COMPLETE and a dot appears in the alignment diamond on the PTID. If the switch is moved to NAV, AHRS, or IMU prior to ALIGN COMPLETE, the Blended solution will continue to improve, but the Free Inertial gyro and accelerometer biases will be frozen at the point at which the switch was moved out of alignment. Align time will stop incrementing, but blended align quality will show improvement.
GPS
Before the GPS can navigate, the GPS receiver must lock on to the satellite signals it will use to provide a position. To do this it uses a GPS almanac stored in its memory to determine where in orbit each of the satellites is. To properly use this information it must also know its own location, the current date and time, and its motion with respect to the earth. This information is supplied using the EGI Start 1/2 page.
Stationary Alignments
EGI stationary alignment logic is used whenever the parking brake is set, and the NAV MODE SEL switch is placed in the GND position to initiate an alignment. Two EGI modes are available in this case: Gyro Compass (GC) alignment and Stored Heading (SH) alignment.
Gyro Compass Alignment (GC)
Gyro Compass alignment is the primary ground based inertial alignment mode of the EGI. Full specified performance (unaided INS drift of less than 0.8 nm/hr) is available after 4.0 minutes in this mode.
GC alignments require an estimate of current position, GND selected on the NAV MODE SEL switch, and the parking brake set. In GC, the priority for present position initialization by the EGI is:
-
GPS, if available
-
CDNU entered Latitude and Longitude
-
The position stored in the EGI at its last shutdown.
💡 Note The contents of Home Base or any other waypoint have no effect on the alignment.
The procedure for initiating a GC alignment is:
-
Parking Brake — SET
-
CDNU — ON After CDNU SELF TEST complete:
-
NAV MODE SEL switch — GND
-
PTID — ON
-
FMC — ON
-
AWG-9 Cooling — AWG-9/AIM-54
-
CDNU Index Page LSK1 — DEPRESS (Select EGI Start 1/2 Page) On either the EGI Start 1/2 or Start 2/2 page, ensure that present position is correct or enter a correct position.
-
CDNU LSK1 — DEPRESS A momentary asterisk next to the position on display line 1 confirms that the Anti-Spoof function (Y-Code) is correctly initialized. When ALIGN COMPLETE (Dot in diamond):
-
NAV MODE Switch — INS
-
Verify Blended Mode (BY acronym on PTID)
If the parking brake is released before a COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE indication and the GPS is navigating (i.e., the GPS is tracking four satellites), then the EGI will transition to INIT and then to GPS IMA mode (see below). If the parking brake is released before COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE and GPS is not available, the alignment will stay in INIT until GPS is available.
💡 Note If the alignment stops because the parking brake was released prior to COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE, LSK3 on the EGI Start 2/2 Page (RSTRT ALGN) should be depressed after the parking brake has been reset, unless a GPS IMA is desired.
If the parking brake is released after COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE, the EGI will suspend the alignment, set ALIGN HOLD, and wait for the parking brake to be reset An ALIGN HOLD indication will be posted on the PTID and CDNU, and the STBY and/or READY legends will flash to indicate the suspension. Align time does not increment while in ALIGN HOLD, but Align Quality may improve.
💡 Note The EGI will not restart incrementing align time until 20 seconds after the parking brake has been reset.
💡 Note Once the EGI achieves ALIGN COMPLETE (Dot in Diamond appears), subsequent release of the parking brake will not cause an ALIGN HOLD. In this case the RIO should select INS on the NAV MODE SEL switch prior to releasing the parking brake.
Stored Heading Alignment (SH)
Stored Heading Align is a fast, ground based inertial alignment where the IMU identifies the direction of local vertical, then initializes position and heading to the value it had at the last shutdown. Specified performance in this mode is the same as that for a normal GC alignment. A complete GC reference alignment must be successfully completed just prior to the last EGI shutdown, and the aircraft must not be moved after the reference alignment in order to transition to a SH alignment. When these conditions are met, SH will complete in 30 seconds.
The parking brake must remain set throughout the SH alignment. If it is released, the EGI will transition to the GPS IMA mode. If the EGI determines that any of the other required parameters (besides "parking brake set") have not been met, it will revert to a GC alignment. The only indication that a SH has been done, is the presence of an ALIGN COMPLETE dot after thirty seconds of align time.
In-Motion Alignments
The carrier alignment procedures are used when NAV MODE SEL switch is set to the CV position. These procedures should be used whenever the aircraft is in motion with respect to the earth (either because it is taxiing on the ground, is aboard a moving carrier, or is airborne). The EGI supports five types of In Motion Alignment (IMA): SINS IMA, SINS SH, GPS IMA, Air Data IMA, and Manual IMA. A SINS alignment can be done using either the rf data link or the deck-edge cable. An In-Motion Alignment is begun by selecting the CV position on the NAV MODE SEL switch; from that point, the mode the EGI uses to align is dependent on the reference data available.
The data priority is:
-
SINS Data
-
GPS Data
-
Manual Handset Data
💡 Note Any time the EGI enters ALIGN HOLD with the NAV MODE SEL switch in CV and before COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE, the alignment will restart from the beginning.
SINS In Motion Alignment (SINS IMA)
In SINS IMA, the EGI uses the Ships Inertial Navigation System (SINS) to align the IMU. The inertial inputs are received by the ASW-27 and transmitted to the EGI. These inputs include ship’s latitude, longitude, north and east velocity, as well as roll, pitch, heading, and heading rate. To align the EGI using SINS data, use the following procedure:
-
CDNU — ON
-
DATA LINK — ON
-
DATA LINK mode — TAC
After CDNU SELF TEST Complete:
-
DATA LINK mode — CAINS/WAYPT
-
NAV MODE SEL — CVA
-
PTID Power — ON
-
WCS — STBY
-
CDNU INDEX Key — DEPRESS
-
CDNU Index Page LSK1 — DEPRESS (Select EGI Start 1/2 Page), On either the EGI Start 1/2 or Start 2/2 page, ensure that present position is correct or enter a correct position.
-
CDNU LSK1 — DEPRESS, A momentary asterisk next to the position on display line 1 confirms that the Anti-Spoof function (Y-Code) is correctly initialized.
When ALIGN COMPLETE (Dot in diamond):
-
NAV MODE SEL — INS
-
Verify Blended Mode (BY acronym on PTID)
To transition to GPS IMA from SINS IMA, insert the following steps into the above procedure:
- 9a. Ensure GPS is navigating (FOM < 4)
- 9b. DATA LINK Mode — TAC
- 9c. On EGI Start 2/2 Page LSK3 — DEPRESS (RESTART ALIGN)
The EGI enters SINS IMA mode whenever the NAV MODE SEL switch is placed in the CV position with "CAINS/WAYPT" selected on the DATA LINK MODE Switch, and a SINS SH is not available. A full performance alignment (unaided INS drift of less than 1.0 nm/hr) using this mode will take 5 minutes providing that there are no SINS data dropouts lasting more than 4 seconds. If a dropout occurs, or the parking brake is released, the alignment will be suspended. An ALIGN HOLD indication will be posted on the PTID and CDNU, and the STBY and/or READY legends will flash to indicate the suspension.
If within 30 seconds the parking brake is reset, or SINS data again become valid, the alignment will continue. If the alignment is suspended before COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE, the alignment will restart with align time reset to zero. If SINS is lost for more than 30 seconds, and the Align Quality has not yet reached 3.0 nm/hr, the EGI will transition to MANUAL IMA. If Align Quality is better than 3.0 nm/hr, the EGI will transition to NAV mode
SINS Stored Heading Alignment (SINS SH)
SINS SH is the shipboard equivalent to the ground based SH alignment. In this mode the EGI uses stored spotting angle to reduce the time required for a full performance alignment to 4 minutes. A reference alignment must be performed in accordance with the procedure given above for SH, and the aircraft must not be moved relative to the ship. If SINS data drop out for longer than 4 seconds or the parking brake is released during SINS SH, the EGI will suspend the alignment and transition to SINS IMA.
GPS In-Motion Alignment (GPS IMA)
GPS IMA is available any time GPS data are valid. The mode can be entered in three ways:
-
The RIO selects CV on the NAV MODE SEL switch with the DATA LINK MODE Switch in TAC
-
The aircraft reaches 80 knots and Weight-OffWheels (i.e., the aircraft is airborne) without an alignment.
-
The RIO selects GND on the NAV MODE SEL switch and the pilot releases the parking brake prior to a COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE indication
💡 Note The EGI will enter GPS IMA with the NAV MODE SEL switch in either GND or CV if the aircraft becomes airborne and the alignment is not complete (no "Dot-in-Diamond").
If GPS IMA is entered before COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE (i.e., the alignment begins in GPS IMA), the alignment time for full EGI performance (unaided INS drift of less than 0.8 nm/hr) will be 10 minutes. If GPS IMA is entered after a COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE indication in GC, the EGI can complete the alignment in 5 minutes, provided at least 2 of those minutes occur while the aircraft is in flight (i.e., the aircraft takes off after COARSE ALIGN COMPLETE, but before an alignment complete dot is posted). If GPS data are lost, the alignment will be suspended and an ALIGN HOLD indication will be posted on the PTID and the CDNU.
💡 Note Once the EGI enters the GPS IMA mode, it will stay in that mode as long as GPS data remain valid and the NAV MODE SEL switch remains in an alignment position (GND or CV). If GPS is lost, the EGI will suspend the alignment if the NAV MODE SEL switch is in GND, and it will transition to Manual IMA if the switch is in CV (SINS data are not available). The EGI will transition to AIR DATA IMA if the aircraft is airborne.
Manual In-Motion Alignment (Manual IMA)
If, after entering SINS IMA, the EGI fails to detect valid SINS data, it will transition to the Manual IMA mode. If this occurs, the RIO should enter the appropriate latitude, longitude, carrier heading, carrier speed and Z-lever arm on the CV Manual Page of the CDNU. The CV Manual Page is accessed via the Start 2/2 page.
(
(
(
(
💡 Any time the "HS" telltale flashes on the PTID alignment display, the RIO should enter or re-enter the manual alignment data.
A Manual IMA will take 10 minutes, at which time an alignment complete dot will appear in the alignment progress diamond. Full specified accuracy for this mode is only 3.0 nm/hr unaided INS drift. For this reason, Manual IMA should be considered a backup mode. If the EGI is in Manual IMA and either SINS or GPS data become available, the RIO should depress LSK3 on the EGI Start 2/2 page (RSTRT ALGN) to restart the alignment. The EGI will not automatically transition to a better mode from Manual IMA.
In-Flight Alignments
If, for any reason, the EGI loses its alignment while airborne, or if it is necessary to launch before an alignment can be achieved, the EGI is capable of alignment in flight. The two modes available are GPS IMA and AIR DATA IMA.
GPS IMA Airborne
GPS IMA while airborne is equivalent to a GPS IMA done prior to takeoff. There are no restrictions on speed, heading, or maneuvers, only that GPS data be available. The time in alignment is 10 minutes (provided a GPS solution is available for that entire period), unless coarse alignment was completed in GC mode prior to take-off. In that case, the GPS IMA can complete in as little as 5 minutes, provided two of those minutes occur airborne. Inertial alignment quality for a GPS IMA while airborne will be the equivalent of a GPS alignment done on the ground or shipboard (i.e., < 0.8 nm/hr unaided INS drift). If GPS data are lost, the alignment will be suspended and an ALIGN HOLD indication will be posted on the PTID and the CDNU.
Air Data In-Motion Alignment (AIR DATA IMA)
Air Data IMA can be used whenever the aircraft is airborne (ground speed greater than 80 knots and Weight-Off-Wheels), CADC data and AHRS magnetic heading are valid, and GPS data are not available. If the EGI is in GPS IMA while airborne, and GPS data become invalid for more than 90 seconds, the EGI will automatically attempt to transition to Air Data IMA. Once in Air Data IMA, if GPS data is recovered, LSK3 on the EGI Start 2/2 page (RSTRT ALIGN) must be depressed before GPS IMA can be used. The total time for an AIR DATA IMA is 35 minutes and the best inertial alignment quality it can produce is 3.0 nm/hr.
💡 Note AIR DATA IMA requires that true heading be provided to the EGI with a maximum error of 2.5°. The RIO should thus verify that an accurate value for magnetic variation is entered into the FMC.
Aircraft heading, speed, altitude, and the wind must remain constant for the entire alignment period. If the air data become invalid for more than 5 seconds, the EGI will enter ALIGN HOLD. If this happens, the alignment will reinitialize once the data again become valid, and the Align Time will begin counting from zero. This mode should be considered a backup.
NAVIGATION UPDATING
The GPS receiver in the EGI provides highly accurate position. As a result, there is very little need to update the solution to account for drift. Even if GPS is degraded to Standard Positioning System accuracy, the quality of the EGI Blended (Aided) solution will be much better than can be obtained using updates. For that reason, only “Map Bias” updates (temporary position offsets of a specific amount which are added on top of the Kalman filter solution) are allowed under normal circumstances. This feature allows the flight crew to modify their position to match other, non-GPS equipped units.
(
(
(
(
(
(
💡 Note Only the Blended and Free-Inertial solutions will reflect the offset when a Map Bias update is performed. The GPS solution will always show the actual position computed by the GPS receiver.
An asterisk will appear next to the position readout on the RNAV, Start, and Progress pages of the CDNU when a Map Bias is in effect.
When the actual Blended and Free Inertial solutions must be updated because of drift experienced when GPS is unavailable, Kalman filter updates are permitted. The NAV MODE SEL Switch must be in an Align position (GND or CVA), and the update will not take effect if GPS is available. These updates are termed “Optimal” updates, and actually modify the Blended solution and Free Inertial calculations.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
The Updates can also be used to modify the latitude or longitude in FMC position of the aircraft in the AHRS/AM and IMU/AM modes if the EGI has failed.
Similar navigation updating techniques are employed whether a Map Bias or Optimal position update is performed. For both, a ground reference point (latitude and longitude) position is required. The range and bearing of this position to present aircraft position is used to make the correction. The general procedure for doing an update is:
- Select the Map Bias page or Optimal Page on the CDNU RNAV Page.
- Establish a reference point using an FMC navigation point.
- Determine the offset to that point.
- Accept or reject the update based on the size of the offset.
- Confirm that the CDNU reflects the update.
The latitude and longitude of the desired update point must be stored in one of eighteen FMC navigation waypoint locations (12 WPs, FIX PT, HOME BASE, HOST AREA, DEF PT, and IP) prior to initiating the Map Bias or Optimal update. This data may be stored prior to flight, by data link, by manual insertion, or by transfer from the CDNU. The point selected for the update must be hooked. The pre-stored latitude and longitude should be checked on the PTID. The CATEGORY select switch is rotated to NAV and the desired type of update selected.
💡 Note Do not use SURF TGT as a reference for updating the navigation system. The surface target position symbol is repositioned with respect to own-aircraft vice own-aircraft being updated in reference to the surface target.
Radar Update
For a radar update, the FMC computes own-aircraft position by measuring radar range and bearing from the reference point coordinates in the track file.
Once the update point is called up, its latitude and longitude are verified on the PTID readouts. The same point is then located on the DDD, using the hand control with the radar operating in the pulse search mode. DDD CURSOR is selected on the hand control and halfaction is selected so that the DDD cursors are presented on the DDD. Once the cursors overlay the selected point, full action is selected. This tells the computer the point selected.
💡 Note RDR FIX may be selected before or after positioning DDD cursors.
When the RDR FIX pushbutton is depressed, the computer will compute the present position of the aircraft by measuring the range and bearing from the selected point. The difference between the computer position and the position determined by the EGI is then displayed on the PTID. If it is desired to enter this delta into the navigation computations, the FIX ENABLE pushbutton is depressed. However, if the observed delta does not appear to be correct, the computer and the readout can be cleared by deselecting the RDR FIX pushbutton. The fix may then be attempted again. Once FIX ENABLE is depressed on the CAP, the delta will appear on line five (5) of the Map Bias or Optimal page on the CDNU.
💡 Note Data line five (5) of on the CDNU Map Bias and Optimal pages may be toggled between delta latitude/delta longitude display or an error distance display in nautical miles.
Radar updating is performed as follows:
-
Select — CDNU Map Bias or Optimal page.
-
Hook — Desired navigation point.
-
PULSE SRCH pushbutton — DEPRESS.
-
On sensor control panel:
a. STAB switch — IN.\
b. EL BARS switch — 1.\
c. AZ SCAN switch — AS DESIRED.\
-
If Ground Map desired:
a. CATEGORY Switch — TGT DATA.\
b. FB-1 — DEPRESS.\
-
RDR FIX pushbutton — DEPRESS.
-
CURSOR pushbutton — DEPRESS.
-
HCU — Select HALF ACTION.
-
Cursor — is displayed on DDD.
-
Manipulate hand control — DDD cursor over desired ground map point.
-
HCU — FULL ACTION and RELEASE.
Note 💡 This causes the DDD cursor to remain at the selected position.
-
Observe present position delta readout on the PTID.
-
If Delta is Unsatisfactory:
a. Deselect — RDR FIX.\
b. Repeat — steps 2–11.\
-
FIX ENABLE pushbutton — DEPRESS to accept update. 15. Confirm delta LAT/LONG
TACAN Update
Updating the navigation system by TACAN requires that the waypoint used for the update be the same latitude and longitude as the TACAN station. The TACAN channel that corresponds to the station selected must be selected, and should be verified by listening to the identifier (coded tone) in the headset. To update the aircraft position with respect to the station, the TACAN FIX pushbutton is depressed. The FMC then computes own aircraft position error based on the range and bearing from the TACAN station. The delta is then observed and entered into the computer in the same manner as for radar updating. TACAN updating is performed as follows:
-
Pilot Select — TACAN channel corresponding to desired update point.
-
Hook — Desired update point.
-
Select — TACAN on TACAN CMD panel.
Note 💡 Failure to select TACAN on the TACAN command panel will result in the use of the CDNU active waypoint instead of the TACAN station when determining delta latitude and longitude.
-
Select — CDNU Map Bias or Optimal page.
-
CATEGORY switch — NAV.
-
TACAN FIX pushbutton — DEPRESS.
-
Observe present position delta readout on the PTID.
-
If Delta is Unsatisfactory:
a. Deselect — TACAN FIX.\
b. Repeat — steps 3–6.\
-
FIX ENABLE pushbutton — DEPRESS to accept update.
-
Confirm delta LAT/LONG appears on line five of the CDNU.
Note 💡 When performing a TACAN update, aircraft MAGVAR must match the TACAN station’s declination, otherwise, the update will be in error. An assumption is made by the FMC that the TACAN station bearing information is adjusted for the TACAN’s declination, and that it is the same as the manually entered value of MAGVAR. TACAN declination will normally not be the same as the MAGVAR at the aircraft and may not be the same as the MAGVAR at the station. If the TACAN station is one of the waypoints stored on the MDL or in the CDNU database, TACAN declination can be found on the right side of Data Line 5 on the CDNU Waypoint Data page for that station. To illustrate the impact of MAGVAR error, assume that a TACAN station with a range of 100 nautical miles from ownship is used for an update. A 1 degree difference between MAGVAR and TACAN declination will result in a 1.74 nautical mile error in the update position.
Visual Update
A visual update is performed by flying over the previously entered FMC waypoint and depressing the VIS FIX pushbutton. A timing estimate must be made since the aircraft nose and fuselage may obscure the ground reference point for some time during the overflight. Also, it is difficult to estimate when directly overhead a ground reference point when altitude is greater than 10,000 feet. The delta then appears on the PTID. Again, this delta may be entered into the computer by depressing FIX ENABLE.
Visual updating is accomplished as follows:
-
Select — CDNU Map Bias or Optimal page.
-
Hook — Desired update point.
-
CATEGORY switch — NAV.
-
Overfly the selected pre-stored point and when over the point, depress the VIS FIX pushbutton on the CAP.
-
Observe present position delta readout on the PTID.
-
If delta is unsatisfactory:
a. Deselect — VIS FIX.\
b. Repeat — steps 3–5.\
-
FIX ENABLE pushbutton — DEPRESS to accept update.
-
Confirm delta LAT/LONG appears on line five of the CDNU.
CDNU Visual Update
A Visual Update can also be accomplished using the CDNU alone with the following procedure:
-
Select — CDNU Map Bias or Optimal page.
-
Enter a known position into Data Line 3 of the CDNU using LSK2.
-
Overfly known position, and when over the point, depress the MARK Key on the CDNU.
-
Enter the resulting position into Data Line 1 of the CDNU using LSK1.
-
Observe present position delta on Data Line 5 of the CDNU.
-
If delta is unsatisfactory:
a. LSK8 — DEPRESS.\
b. Repeat — steps 2–5.\
-
LSK7 — Depress to accept the update
Fighter-to-Fighter Navigation Update
Net aircraft using fighter-to-fighter data link (FF/DL) can coordinate their navigation systems while in the FF/DL mode. Hooking an associated net aircraft symbol and pressing D/L FB-5 causes the coordinates of the hooked aircraft to be used as a reference for updating own-aircraft coordinates. The exact procedure is:
-
Obtain a radar STT on or fly in close formation with another net aircraft.
-
CATEGORY switch — D/L.
-
Hook — Net aircraft symbol.
-
CAP FB-5 — DEPRESS.
CONTROL DISPLAY NAVIGATION UNIT
General Function
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | The CDNU |
| 2. | CDNU Display |
| 3. | CDNU Front Panel |
| 4. | Line Select Keys |
| 5. | Alphanumeric Keys |
| 6. | Function Keys |
| 7. | Dedicated Select Keys |
| 8. | Scratchpad |
| 9. | Page Scrolling |
| 10. | Clear Key |
| 11. | Common Symbology |
| 12. | The CDNU flight plan and Steering sources |
| 13. | Data Entry |
| 14. | CDNU Pages |
CDNU Pages
THE CDNU
The C-12284/A Control Display Navigation Unit (CDNU) is the primary control and display interface for the EGI-based navigation system. The CDNU, installed on the RIO’s left-hand console, is the bus controller for the NAVBUS, controlling the exchange of digital information between the EGI, the CSDC(R), and itself. The Computer Address Panel (CAP) in the F-14B(U) still serves a function, but no navigation inputs are made through it anymore. The Navigation functions of the CAP either do not work or the options in the drum have been replaced to serve other functions.
Associated equipment for navigation is: The F-14 Mission Computer (FMC), the H-764G Embedded GPS/INS (EGI), the Computer Signal Data Converter (Replacement) [CSDC(R)], the A/A24G-39 Attitude Heading Reference Set (AHRS), the C-12284/A Control Display Navigation Unit (CDNU), and a Signal Data Converter (SDC).
CDNU Display
Electronic pages and a page tree structure are used on a Cathode Ray Tube (CRT)
(
CDNU Front Panel
Line Select Keys
Eight Line Select Keys (LSKs) (
Alphanumeric Keys
Alphanumeric keys (
Function Keys
The function keys, F1 through F7 (
CDNU Function MENU
| KEY | FUNCTION |
|---|---|
| F1 | Returns the CDNU to the previously selected page. |
| F2 | Reloads the active CDNU flight plan into the MDP, clearing any existing flight plan waypoints (in the MDP) in the process. |
| F3 | Calls up the High Precision Coordinate Edit page. |
| F4 | Calls up the BDHI Steering Selection Page. |
| F5 | Toggles the source of Flight Mode determination between the PDCP and the CDNU. Default is "P" (PDCP). |
| F6 | Calls up the Time Selection Page for the HUD/VDI. |
| F7 | Data For?/Copy What? |
| MENU | Displays all Function key functions |
Dedicated Select Keys
The Dedicated Select Keys (
| KEY | FUNCTION |
|---|---|
| FPLN | Flight plan Page |
| PROG | Progress Page |
| DIR | Direct Page |
| RNAV | Area navigation Page |
| MARK | Mark function |
| STAT | Status Page |
| MENU | Function Key Menu |
| IDX | Index Page |
Scratchpad
The scratchpad is the bottom line on the display,(
Page Scrolling
Arrow keys (
Vertical scrolling is accomplished by pressing the "↑" and "↓" arrow keys. Pressing the "↑" arrow key moves one toward the beginning of a set of data (e.g., a lower numbered intercept). Lateral page scrolling is accomplished by pressing the "←" and "→" arrow keys. Holding the arrow keys causes page scrolling to continue until the key is released.
Clear Key
The CLR (
Error messages can be cleared by depressing the CLR key when the message appears. The key will also clear certain annunciation messages when the scratchpad is blank and annunciation messages are displayed on line six of the display.
Common Symbology
CDNU Standard Display Symbols
| Start Page | RNAV Page |
|---|---|
| Icon | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Go To Arrow. Pushing the Line Select Key access a different page. (Arrow points toward Key). | |
| Pushing the Line Select Key will select the item or enable the mode. (Arrow points toward text). | |
| Function is Enabled. | |
| Alternate selections are available. | |
| Check status pages for BIT failures. | |
| No computed data is available or meaningful. | |
| Data entry from the scratchpad is possible/required. | |
| Vertical page or line scrolling is possible. | |
| Lateral page scrolling is possible. | |
| Lateral and Vertical page scrolling is possible. |
The CDNU flight plan and Steering sources
The F-14B(U)’s CDNU flight plan system is built to manage multiple routes while allowing both preplanned and dynamic navigation during a mission. The system can store up to twelve separate flight plans, each composed of a sequence of waypoints that define the intended path of flight. These waypoints are not organized by their numerical identifiers, but strictly by the order in which they are intended to be flown, meaning the order in which the waypoints are displayed on the CDNU FPLN page. The waypoint ID itself, or the waypoint label, has no influence on its position within a given flight plan.
Waypoints are divided into two main categories: preset and impromptu. Preset waypoints occupy identifiers one through fifty and are typically loaded via mission data prior to flight, while impromptu waypoints begin at fifty-one and are created by the crew in real time or by the system to provide turn anticipation. This separation allows the crew to distinguish between planned navigation points and those generated on the fly without affecting how they are sequenced within the active route. The active flight plan route, and the sequence in which waypoints are meant to be flown, can be changed at any time during flight by copying, inserting, and/or deleting redundant waypoints.
The F-14B(U)’s navigation system provides four types of steering output. Because of the B(U)’s system architecture, there are essentially two steering sources: first, the EGI, which is overall responsible for positional data, and second, the F-14’s Mission Computer (FMC). The EGI is controlled by the CDNU, and its steering modes are selected through the CDNU.
The FMC is responsible for attack steering modes such as GGW LP and TGT steering, but also for DEST steering.
EGI Steering
As the aircraft progresses along a flight plan, waypoint sequencing is governed by the selected mode. In AUTO mode, the system automatically advances to the next waypoint once certain criteria are met, such as passing a defined proximity threshold. OFLY (overfly) mode requires the aircraft to pass directly over, or very near, the waypoint before sequencing occurs; this is useful in low-level navigation, for example, where overflight of a precise point is crucial. In both modes, once a waypoint has been passed, it transitions into a history state, allowing the crew to track what has already been flown. The third mode is Manual Mode (MAN). In this mode, the flight plan does not sequence automatically. Steering is only provided to the currently active waypoint shown on the first FPLN page. The only way to advance the flight plan in this mode is by using the DIR function located on the CDNU.
DEST Steering
DEST steering is entirely separate from the CDNU flight plan and can be used independently of the EGI fly-to point. DEST steering for the RIO is not to be confused with DEST steering set on the pilot’s PDCP. In DEST steering, the RIO may select one waypoint from the CDNU’s flight plan to provide steering to. This can be achieved through the CDNU WP EDIT page, or through the PTID’s DEST rotary on PB 8 and PB 9.
BDHI Steering
BDHI steering can be entirely separate from DEST and EGI steering and is only presented on the BDHI. Through the BDHI steering page on the CDNU, accessed via the F4 key, the RIO can direct the BDHI to either synchronize with HUD and HSD steering, provide launch point and target steering to the next launch GGW target, or provide steering to a CDNU flight plan waypoint. Like DEST steering, no AUTO or OFLY sequencing occurs.
TACAN Steering
TACAN steering can be selected through the pilot’s or RIO’s TACAN command panel. The TACAN command panel cycles between TACAN and EGI steering. In TACAN steering, the HUD and HSD provide steering to the selected TACAN station. If DEST steering is selected on the PDCP, the HSD will not display it; only TACAN selected on the PDCP will show TACAN steering on the HSD. The BDHI is not affected if TACAN steering is selected and the RIO has the BDHI set to EGI fly-to or FPLN waypoint steering.
Active Flight Plan Waypoint
The active waypoint is the waypoint to which all flight instruments (in EGI steering) and CDNU guidance displays are referenced. Pressing the FPLN key on the CDNU will access the Flight Plan page with the active waypoint displayed. Associated with the active waypoint are the following quantities:
- Current desired inbound horizontal course,
- Current desired inbound vertical angle (optional, contingent on entry of altitude),
- Active waypoint position, or User-defined label (optional).
- Current Flight Mode,
- Altitude assigned to the active waypoint (optional — for CDNU fixed waypoints only),
- Planned time of arrival (PTA) at the active waypoint (optional — for CDNU fixed waypoints only). If a planned time of arrival is specified, the ground speed required to achieve it will be generated and displayed on the Progress 1/3 page.
Future Waypoints
Up to 49 future waypoints may be inserted for execution after the active waypoint is passed. To access these future points the flight plan is scrolled vertically with the arrow keys. When scrolled away from the active waypoint, two display formats are available:
- Expanded display, showing full display of waypoint attributes, but with only two waypoints displayed per page.
- Condensed display, showing only horizontal positions, but with four waypoints displayed at the same time.
History Waypoints
The five waypoints most recently passed are also maintained in the flight plan. These waypoints along with the associated altitude, Flight Mode and planned time of arrival may be reviewed by scrolling the Flight Plan page with the up arrow key. These waypoint definitions may not be edited or deleted but they may be used with Direct-To. History waypoint data may be reviewed by using the Waypoint Info Page.
Data Entry
This section describes acceptable data entry formats, valid data ranges and display formats.
All navigation−related quantities may be displayed in either metric or English units unless specifically stated elsewhere (e.g., altitude related quantities, which are always displayed in feet and feet/minute). When metric units are chosen the unit labels are changed appropriately. Generally speaking data is always entered into the scratchpad (SP) before the data-line for data entry is selected with a Line Select Key (LSK).
Entry and Display of Waypoints
The F−14B uses a common numbering scheme for display of waypoints. The CDNU, PTID (including the LTS display), and HUD will all display the same two digit number assigned to each waypoint. When a flight plan is first activated, the waypoints are assigned numbers from 01 to 50 in flight plan order. When new waypoints are added, they are assigned numbers sequentially beginning with number 51. When waypoints are deleted, the remaining waypoints retain their original number. he RIO may change the waypoint number of a specific waypoint using LSK 3 on the Waypoint Edit 1/2 page. (Link)
💡 Duplicate waypoint display IDs can be entered and will be displayed.
Flight plan waypoints and other horizontal locations are entered in one of three basic formats:
| Entry Method | Type |
|---|---|
| ICAO | Stored in CDNU memory |
| UDL | User Defined Label (loaded via MDL) |
| Position Coordinates | DMM and MGRS on FPLN Page - DMS only on high precision coordinate entry display |
User Define Label (UDL) — Waypoints can be inserted into the flight plan via their (User Defined Label). Any UDL waypoint stored on the MDL can be entered into the SP and inserted into the FPLN.
ICAO Identifier — position labeled with up to a 5 character alphanumeric. The appropriate data are extracted from a database contained in the MDL or downloaded to CDNU nonvolatile memory
Position coordinates — either as a latitude/ longitude waypoint pair or as a Military Grid Reference System coordinate.
Entry and Display of Latitude/Longitude Waypoints
Latitude/longitude waypoints are entered in the form of degrees and decimal minutes (DMM). The required format is an "N" or "S" followed by four digits (with a decimal point and up to three additional digits optional), followed by "E" or "W" followed by five digits (with a decimal point and up to three additional digits optional). Leading zeros are required as no deliminator are used between degrees and minutes. All waypoints are stored, and calculations made, using thousandth of a minute precision.
💡 Do not enter spaces between degrees and minutes or between latitude and longitude entries. Do not put a "/" or any other character between entries. A typical entry will have the form: "Nddmm.mmmWdddmm.mmm" (where dd = degrees and mm = minutes) with digits to the right of the decimal points optional.
Latitude/longitude waypoints are displayed left-justified to the nearest tenth of a minute on all CDNU pages, except on the RNAV Pages and the Waypoint Edit pages where thousandths of minutes are displayed. Coordinates are displayed based on RIO selection of any of the following formats using LSK3 on the RNAV page.
- DMM − Degrees, Minutes, fractional minutes to 0.0001
- DMS − Degrees, Minutes, Seconds, fractional seconds to 0.01
- MGRS − Military Grid Reference System Coordinates Tactical Display Enhancements
| Type | Entry Example |
|---|---|
| MGRS | 37TDH4989754515 (WP EDIT/FPLN Page) |
| Lat/Long DMM | N4358.257W10700.347 (WP EDIT/FPLN Page) |
| Lat/Long DMS | LAT N133528.44 LONG E1445647.76 (High Precision Coordinate Edit) |
DMM and MGRS coordinate formats are available for entry and display. MGRS and DMM formats can be entered in Scratch Pad (SP) on FPLN and WP Edit pages. Only valid formats are entered after selection. Invalid formats will remain in the SP.
DMS coordinates can only be entered through the high precision coordinate edit display page, DMS coordinates can be displayed via LSK 5 on the WP edit page, or via LSK 3 on the RNAV INAV page
MGRS, DMM and DMS Coordinate display can be toggled between on the RNAV page. Selection of any of these formats on the CDNU controls the format of coordinates on the PTID, hooked WP position coordinates on the PTID NVD WP page, and LANTIRN displays.
High Precision Coordinate Edit
The exception to the above scheme is on the High Precision Coordinate Edit page. Depressing the F3 key when on the Flight Plan or Waypoint Edit 1/2 page calls up the page. This page permits the entry of coordinates to either a ten−thousandth of a minute, or a hundredth of a second. The RIO selects the format by choosing either DMM or DMS with LSK 1. Due to space limitations, spaces and symbols for degrees, minutes, and seconds are eliminated. After coordinates are entered, selecting LSK 5 returns the CDNU to the originating page.
💡 The format for displaying position (DMM, DMS, or MGRS) on the cockpit displays is selected using LSK 3 on the RNAV INAV page of the CDNU. LSK 1 on the High Precision Edit page of the CDNU only controls the data entry mode on that page.
Entry and Display of Military Grid Reference System Waypoints
Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates are entered as three components:
- Grid zone designation
- Meter square identification
- Grid coordinates
Display format for MGRS waypoints on the WP EDIT and FPLN pages is the grid zone designation followed by one space followed by the 100,000 meter square identification followed by a space followed by the grid coordinates. Six-digit grid coordinates (i.e., 100 meter precision) are used everywhere except on the Area Navigation pages and the Waypoint Data page where ten-digit coordinates (1 meter precision) are used. This yields roughly the same display precision used in the latitude/longitude format.
Data For?/Copy What?
Waypoints, and all their associated data, may be copied in their entirety by using Function Key 7. Pressing F7 alternately writes "DATA FOR?" and "COPY WHAT?" into the scratchpad. "DATA FOR?" permits access to the detailed Waypoint Data page, and "COPY WHAT?" copies a waypoint with all associated attributes into the scratchpad.
Deletion of Data
Most data entry fields may have the associated data deleted by entering a dash "-" in the scratchpad and pressing the LSK adjacent to the desired field. The primary exceptions are waypoints with user supplied names (i.e., those with a slash ("/") as the lead character). These must have the name removed by depressing the "/" key followed by the LSK adjacent to the waypoint. Once this is accomplished, the waypoint can be deleted using the dash.
CDNU Pages
The following section will show all CDNU Pages available as well as highlight possible CDNU actions.
Index Page
STEP 1: Access the IDX Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Start Page 1/2
STEP 1: Go to the IDX Page
STEP 2: Press LSK 1 to access the START page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Start Page 2/2
STEP 1: Access the IDX Page.
STEP 2: Press LSK 1 to access the START page.
STEP 3: Press the arrow down key to switch to START page 2/2.
(
(
- NAV
- GND
- CV
- AHRS
- IMU
- OFF
(
(
(
(
- Off
- Initialize
- Gyro Compass
- Stored Heading
- SINS In Motion Align (IMA)
- SINS Stored Heading
- GPS IMA
- Manual IMA
- Air Data IMA
(
(
(
MDL START Page
STEP 1: Press IDX Key
STEP 2: Press LSK 1 on IDX page to access START page
STEP 3: Vertical scroll until MDL START page
The Mission Data Loader (MDL) provides bulk storage of mission essential data. The Data Transfer Module (DTM), can be loaded in the Mission Editor with up to 12 flight plans, Pre-Planned Missions for JDAM employment and countermeasure profiles for the ALE-47 CMDS.
The MDL Start page is accessed by scrolling up from the EGI Start 1/2 page or down from the EGI Start 2/2 page. Display line 3 contains the MDL cartridge label and date stamp; display line 3 is blank if no cartridge is installed.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
MDL Page
MDL STEP 1: Press IDX Key
STEP 2: Press LSK 5 on IDX page to access MDL page
The MDL Page provides the RIO with the ability to search the entire database of waypoints stored in the MDL, as well as the ability to load different flight plans.
(
(
(
(
Flight Plan Select Page
FP STEP 1: Press IDX Key
FP STEP 2: Press LSK 5 on IDX page to access MDL page
STEP 3: On MDL Page press LSK 3 to select Flt Pln select page
Flight plan selection is accomplished from the FPLN Select Pages of the CDNU. These pages may be accessed from either the MDL Start page or the MDL page. To activate a specific flight plan, press the LSK adjacent to the selected flight plan. A check mark will be displayed adjacent to the LSK indicating the selection, and FP DATA LOADING will be annunciated on display line 7.
Up to 12 flight plans can be stored on the MDL and accessed via the Flt Pln Select page 1/2 and 2/2. Each flight plan can store 50 pre-planned waypoints.
(
(
(
Flight Plan Page
STEP 1: Press FPLN Key
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
💡 Auto Leg sequencing will "LEAD" turns as required to maintain the flight path within notional airway boundaries and is not recommended for low level navigation because of this feature.
| MODE | DESCRIPTION |
|---|---|
| AUTO | Steering to the next waypoint in a flight plan is in accordance with FAA requirements for a "lead turn" when doing Airways Navigation. The lead turn is calculated using a fixed angle of bank, aircraft speed, and course geometry. Automatic sequencing occurs when the aircraft passes an imaginary line perpendicular to the inbound course through the "lead turn" point. |
| MAN | Manual steering to a flight plan waypoint. No automatic sequencing to subsequent waypoint occurs upon reaching the selected waypoint. |
| OFLY | Steering calculations are provided directly to the desired waypoint so that the aircraft passes directly over the waypoint. Automatic sequencing occurs when the aircraft passes an imaginary line perpendicular to the inbound course through the waypoint. |
Waypoint Search Page
WP STEP 1: Press IDX Key
STEP 2: Press MDL on LSK 5
STEP 3: Press Waypoint search on LSK2
(
(
Once the desired waypoint has been identified it can be selected by pressing the adjacent LSK. Using the F7 COPY WHAT?/DATA FOR? function lets the operator copy the coordinates and insert them as desired for example into the flight plan.
Attach User Defined Label
Label STEP 1: Press FPLN Key
(
(
(
(
FPLN Insert Initial Waypoint
When the flight plan has been erased, the current integrated navigation solution of present position is inserted as the first history waypoint and the Flight Plan page indicates "*End of Flight Plan" in lieu of the active waypoint. To insert a waypoint into the flight plan:
-
Enter the desired waypoint (Position, ICAO ID, or ID/Bearing/Distance) into the scratchpad.
-
Press the left LSK at which "*End of Flight Plan" is displayed.
When airborne, "CONFIRM FLT PLN CHG" will be annunciated in the scratchpad; pressing the left LSK a second time will enter the point in the flight plan.
STEP 1: Press the FPLN Key
(
(
💡 If the flight plan were not empty depressing LSK1 would insert the new waypoint as the active waypoint.
FPLN Page Insert a Waypoint
(
(
(
Bearing/Distance Vector Waypoint Calculator
A new waypoint which is a bearing/distance vector from an existing waypoint may be created in the scratchpad. This new waypoint may be inserted in the flight plan, if desired. The vector waypoint is calculated by entering the desired "bearing/ distance" in the scratchpad and pressing the LSK adjacent to the base waypoint of interest. The CDNU displays the coordinates (either Latitude/Longitude or MGRS) of the vector waypoint at the specified bearing and distance from the specified point in the scratchpad. This location may then be entered wherever desired, but it does not affect the original waypoint in the flight plan.
The bearing and distance are entered as a bearing, optionally followed by a "T" or "M" (True/Magnetic reference), followed by a "/", followed by distance, followed optionally by an "N" or "K" (nautical miles or kilometer reference). Bearings are entered as up to three digits, optionally followed by a decimal point and an additional digit. Distances are entered as up to four digits, optionally followed by a decimal point, and up to two additional digits. If the optional "T"/"M" or "N"/"K" are not entered, the bearing will default to Magnetic and English/Metric toggle state determines the distance format.
FPLN Insert with LANTIRN
The CDNU permits the creation of new waypoints via LANTIRN. Newly created waypoints will always be placed at the end of the Flight plan and be numbered 51 and up.
The naming convention for LTS Designated waypoint depends on the accuracy of the LTS designation. The naming scheme is as follows: Start name with "/LT"
- If a valid laser range is available at designation, add "*".
- If no laser range is available a dash is appended.
- If the LTS is GPS aided at the time of designation, add "*", if not GPS is not available a dash is appended.
- Add the GPS FOM.
For example, an LTS designated waypoint made with laser ranging and perfect GPS
will be named: /LT**1.
Similarly, if the designation was made without laser ranging and with a GPS FOM
of 4, the name will be /LT−*4.
If the LTS designation is established with valid laser ranging, GPS aiding, and
a FOM of 1 (**1), then the displayed target altitude will be sent to the new
waypoint file. If not **1, then the altitude for the new waypoint will be set
to zero.
STEP 1: Depress the S-7 FOV hat on the LTS controller for more than 2 seconds
STEP 2: Scroll to end of flight plan
The newly created waypoint is inserted as waypoint 51 into the flight plan.
FPLN waypoint deletion
FPLN STEP 1: Press FPLN Key
(
(
(
Waypoint Edit Page 1/2
WP STEP 1: Press the FPLN Key
STEP 2: Press LSK left of desired waypoint
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Waypoint Edit Page 2/2
WP STEP 1: Press FPLN Key
STEP 2: Press LSK left of desired waypoints
STEP 3: Horizontal scroll to WPEDIT 2/2 page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
High Precision Waypoint Edit Page
STEP 1: Press the F3 Key
(
(
(
(
Waypoint Info Page
Scrolling up on the flight plan page using the arrow keys allows aircrew to select one of 5 history waypoints. Selection of a waypoint is achieved by depressing the LSK adjacent to the desired waypoint. Once selected the waypoint info page will appear allowing for review of the history waypoint. The history waypoints location can be copied into the scratchpad using the Copy What? function using the F7 key.
STEP 1: Press FPLN Key
STEP 2: Scoll up.
STEP 3: Press LSK adjacent to desired history waypoint.
(
(
(
(
(
(
Direct Steering
Direct to steering is available with:
A. Impromptu waypoints:
- Lat/Long
- UDL
- ICAO IBD
- Vector
B. Flight plan waypoints:
- Inserting via UDL
- Scrolling through DIR to page
The Direct steering page offers multiple ways to obtain steering to a horizontal position.
- Direct to a Flight Plan waypoint
- Direct to a History waypoint
- Direct to a User defined Label
- Direct to an ICAO waypoint
- Direct to an impromptu waypoint
Direct to steering can be initiated to the next flight plan waypoint or to any of the horizontal positions described above. It is also possible to bypass a number of future flight plan waypoints with the DIR steering function.
Impromptu waypoints may be inserted into the flight plan by entering the desired position into the scratchpad, then pressing LSK1 (adjacent to "Direct-To [ ]"). The impromptu point may also be defined as a vector from the present position of the aircraft by inserting a bearing and range in the scratchpad instead of a position. Vector waypoints are handled in exactly the same manner as a normal waypoint. In both cases, the impromptu waypoint is inserted prior to the current active waypoint, which becomes the first future waypoint.
It is possible to insert an impromptu waypoint and bypass a number of future flight plan waypoints. First depress the "DIR TO" key on the CDNU, then enter the impromptu waypoint into the scratchpad. Finally, press the LSK adjacent to the waypoint where the original flight plan is to be resumed. This makes the impromptu waypoint the active waypoint and the selected waypoint the second waypoint in the flightplan.
After selecting a waypoint for the Direct-To operation, the normal Flight Plan page display is returned, with the course, vertical angle, offset and advance displays restored as appropriate. Ability to edit the flight plan is restored. The computer-generated turn point is inserted as a standard latitude/longitude or MGRS waypoint in history as the most recently passed point. The use of the Direct-To function has no affect on waypoint sequencing (AUTO/OFLY/MAN).
DIRECT-TO a Flight Plan Waypoint
STEP 1: Press the DIR key
(
(
STEP 2: Vertical Scroll to desired waypoint and select with left LSK
(
💡 The previously active waypoint (01) and the computer generated turn point pass into history. If the waypoint selected for the Direct-To operation is a future waypoint, all intermediate waypoints are deleted from the flight plan. Any waypoints after the one DIR TO is selected remain in the flight plan as normal. The last 5 history waypoints can be recalled and steered DIR TO again.
RESULT
DDD is now the Active FPLN waypoint. All preceding FPLN waypoints have been passed into history.
(
(
DIRECT-TO an Impromptu Vector Waypoint from present position
Direct STEP 1: Press the DIR key
(
(
(
The Vector is inserted with a User Defined Label (UDL) of the desired vector into the flight plan.
(
(
Progress Page 1/3
STEP 1: Press the PROG Key
(
(
(
(
- TO-DIST
- FROM- DIST
- TO-RANGE
- FROM - RANGE
(
(
- Ground Speed (GS)
- Ground Speed CMD (Gscmd)
- Ground Speed Error
(
(
- Ground Speed (GS): Current ground speed
- Ground Speed Command (Gscmd): Ground speed necessary to achieve current planned time of arrival at active waypoint.
- Ground Speed Error (FAST/SLOW): Correction required to achieve current planned time of arrival at active waypoint.
Progress Page 2/3
Progress STEP 1: Press the PROG Key
STEP 2: Vertical Scroll to PROG 2/3 Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Progress Page 3/3
STEP 1: Press PROG Key
STEP 2: Vertical Scroll to PROG 3/3 Page
(
(
(
(
(
MARK Page
STEP 1: Press the IDX key
STEP 2: Press LSK 6 (MARK Page)
(
(
(
Nine mark positions may be saved in nonvolatile memory and given a user defined label in the same manner as on the Flight Plan page. The Mark List page records the position of the mark and the associated time of the mark.
To save a point in the Mark List, press the "MARK" key when the aircraft is directly over the point to be marked. This action puts the position (latitude/longitude or MGRS coordinates) in the scratchpad.
Access the MARK page from the Index page and depress the LSK to the left of the position where the mark will be saved. The time of the mark will also be saved. Once a marked position is entered into the Mark List, pressing the LSK to the right of a position copies it to the scratchpad. A waypoint may be retrieved from the flight plan and copied into the Mark List.
First, use the vertical arrow keys (↑/↓) to scroll the Flt Pln page to the waypoint (active, history, or future) to be stored in the Mark List. Press the F7 key twice, entering COPY WHAT? into the scratchpad, then press the LSK to the left of the waypoint to be copied. This will enter the position (or user-defined label) in the scratchpad, as well as all available waypoint attributes (identifier, elevation, frequency, and declination). Go to the Mark List page and insert the waypoint normally.
Time Page
STEP 1: Press the IDX key
STEP 2: Press LSK 3 (TIME Page)
With no GPS available the CDNU time page is used to enter EGI system time. Exit using the F1 key.
RNAV INAV Page
STEP 1: Press the RNAV key
Integrated navigation solution Page (INAV)
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
RNAV GPS Page
STEP 1: Press RNAV key
STEP 2: Horizontal scroll until RNAV GPS Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
RNAV INS Page
STEP 2: Horizontal scroll until RNAV INS Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
RNAV Blend Page
STEP 2: Horizontal scroll until RNAV Blend Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
STAT Page
STEP 1: Press the STAT key
The stat page displays the system status of the F-14B(U)s navigation equipment.
Holding Page
A holding pattern may be associated with one fixed waypoint in the flight plan, called the holding fix. When the aircraft crosses the holding fix, holding guidance is activated, suspending normal leg sequencing until the holding pattern is canceled. Three parameters define the holding pattern: Inbound Course, Turn Direction, and Pattern Length. The CDNU Hold page is accessed from the Index page. If no holding course is entered, then the flight plan inbound course will be used when holding guidance is activated.
Holding STEP 1: Press the IDX key
STEP 2: Press LSK 7 to access the HOLD page
When the holding fix is passed for the first time, holding guidance computations are activated. At that time several changes occur, both in flight plan operation and page displays:
-
Automatic leg sequencing is suspended.
-
Course edits on the Flight Plan page may no longer be made. Inbound holding course edit may be made on the Hold page.
-
All displays reference the inbound course displayed on the Hold page.
(
(
(
(
(
(
Once the Hold Pattern has been entered, the course display and "to" indicator on the Flight Plan page are replaced with "Holding" and "at". The entry advisory display on display line 1 of the Hold page is changed to read "HOLD IS ACTIVE". Vertical angle display is automatically changed to "MAINTAIN" and selection of other vertical angles is prohibited.
If any holding pattern definition parameters are changed while in the pattern, the changes are applied after the aircraft passes the holding fix (transition from "TO" to "FROM"). When holding guidance has been activated, all course and lateral deviation displays now reference the inbound holding course, irrespective of whether the aircraft is on the inbound or outbound leg of the holding pattern. However, the ten second turn alert (Pilot VDIG-R Bezel and RIO DDI) will be computed on the outbound leg as though there is a phantom waypoint on the outbound leg where the turn inbound should be initiated.
Exiting a Holding Pattern
Holding STEP 1: Press IDX key
Holding STEP 2: Press LSK 7 to access the HOLD page
Holding patterns may be terminated in two ways:
-
Press LSK8 on the Hold page to cancel. In this case a leg switch to the next flight plan waypoint will occur when the fix is crossed again (if automatic flight plan advancing is selected).
-
The Direct-To function is activated to a future waypoint.
Intercept Page
Up to nine moving targets may be simultaneously defined. Intercept solutions to these targets may be used in two ways:
- The intercept solution may be inserted as the active waypoint for immediate (i.e., Direct To) execution.
- The intercept solution may be inserted as a future waypoint to implement a future rendezvous with a moving target.
Intercept STEP 1: Press the IDX key
STEP 2: Press LSK 8 to access the Intercept page
(
(
(
(
(
(
Intercept Calculations
The Intercept 1/9a page is accessed from the Index page using LSK8. Subsequent pages (Intercept 2/9a and beyond) are reached by scrolling up or down until the desired page is visible. Current position, Ground Track, and Ground Speed is displayed or can be entered on the Intercept x/9a page (where "x" is the specific intercept number). Range and bearing to the intercept is also shown. Intercept x/9b page is accessed by using the left/right arrow keys to scroll from the Intercept x/9a page. The Intercept x/9b page displays the current Time to Intercept, point of closest approach if no intercept in possible, and the current true airspeed.
(
(
(
(
(
A calculator function is provided to allow the RIO to enter an alternate true airspeed and see the effect on the time to intercept and point of closest approach miss distance. This calculator is available for all intercepts not inserted into the flight plan (based on Direct-To solution) and for the next intercept in the flight plan.
The CDNU calculates the true minimum time intercept to the moving waypoint. If intercept is not possible, a point of closest approach is computed. The calculations are based on a flat earth approximation about the equator. Therefore, the solution will slowly begin to degrade as the distance to the intercept point increases, and the intercept solution gets close to the poles.
Solutions are cyclically computed for all intercepts, whether inserted in the flight plan or not. If they are not inserted, the computations are performed as if they were Direct-To intercepts. Changes on the Intercept "a" page immediately affect the intercept solution in the flight plan.
Inserting Intercepts
An intercept can be inserted directly into the flight plan as the active waypoint by accessing the desired Intercept x/9a page and pressing LSK8 twice (confirmation is required). This calls up the Flt Pln page, and depressing the LSK next to the waypoint before which the intercept is desired enters it into the flight plan. When an intercept is the active waypoint, the intercept location is cyclically updated based on current aircraft position and speed, the moving target definition, and current wind. The intercept point location is adjusted, as required, and the inbound course is edited to match the current Direct-To course into the waypoint. When the intercept is inserted as a future waypoint, then the intercept location is updated based on the location of the flight plan waypoint immediately prior to the intercept, the distance along the flight plan to that waypoint, current aircraft speed, the moving target definition, and current wind. The estimated time of arrival at the waypoint immediately prior to the intercept is computed. Then the intercept point is computed from that point and time.
Intercept Passage
When an intercept is passed into history, the latitude/longitude of the intercept at the time of waypoint passage is recorded as the flight plan history waypoint. All parameters defining the moving target remain on the intercept page, but the intercept is removed from the flight plan.
Parallel Offsets
WIP
BDHI Steering Page
If EGI is selected on the TACAN command panel, then the RIO has four options: selecting the EGI fly−to point (default), selecting a flight plan waypoint, selecting the GGW/LTS next launch WP (TGT or LP), or synchronizing the BDHI with HUD steering.
STEP 1: Press the F4 Key
(
(
(
(
(
(
BDHI Steering to Page
BDHI STEP 1: Press LSK adjacent to FP WP on BDHI steering page.
Time Selection Page
STEP 1: Press the F6 Key
The CDNU has a Time Selection Page accessed via the CDNU F6 function key. The Time Selection menu allows the RIO to select the source for HUD/VDI Primary and Secondary TTG and ETA windows. The Primary TTG/ETA is present on both the HUD and VDI. To avoid cluttering the HUD, the Secondary TTG/ETA is present ONLY on the VDI and defaulted to OFF. If desired, the RIO must manually select the Secondary TTG/ETA to ON via the F6 page.
(
(
(
(
(
Bearing Distance Heading Indicator
A BDHI is on the right side of the pilot and RIO instrument panels It displays aircraft magnetic heading with navigation bearing data and range information. A fixed index marker at the 12-o’clock position indicates the magnetic heading.
Two servo-driven bearing needles show magnetic bearings to the selected UHF (ADF) and TACAN stations. The No.1 (single bar) needle receives signals from the UHF (ADF) system, the No.2 (double bar) needle receives signals from the TACAN coupler.
| BDHI |
|---|
BDHI Steering
If EGI is selected on the TACAN command panel, then the RIO has four options: selecting the EGI fly−to point (default), selecting a flight plan waypoint, selecting the GGW/LTS next launch WP (TGT or LP), or synchronizing the BDHI with HUD steering.
The BDHI Steering Selection Page shown below enables selection of the BDHI steering source. The page is accessed via the CDNU F4 function key. The default option for BDHI steering is Fly−To. The RIO selects the other options by depressing the appropriate LSK. An asterisk next to the LSK shows which option is active.
(
(
(
(
(
(
If the RIO opts for Flight Plan Waypoint Steering (FP WP##), depressing LSK7 will transition the CDNU to the "Steer To" page shown below. This page functions similar to the "Direct To" page; the active CDNU flight plan is presented, and the RIO can scroll through the waypoints until the desired waypoint is visible.
Depression of the adjacent LSK activates FP WP steering to that waypoint and returns the CDNU back to the BDHI Steering Selection Page. The waypoint ID Number will appear in the FP WP## legend in place of the "##" symbol.
BDHI steering options:
- Next Launch GGW Target
- Next Launch GGW LP
- EGI Fly−To (Default setting)
- FP WP (any WP in active FP)
- HUD Sync (Keeps HUD and BDHI steering in Sync).
AN/ARA-50 UHF AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER
The UHF automatic direction finder is used with the ARC-182 radio. ADF provides relative bearings to transmitting ground stations or other aircraft. It can receive signals on any 1 of 30 preset channels or on any manually set frequency in the 108 to 399.975 MHz range.
The system has a line-of-sight range, varying with altitude.
The system uses the AS-909/ARA-48 ADF antenna. Bearing to transmitting stations is displayed on the pilot/RIO BDHI (No. 1 needle), pilot HSD, and RIO multiple display indicator.
Fast Tactical Imaging System
The Tactical Imaging Set (also called FTI), captures, digitizes, and compresses imagery from an external video source, then stores and/or transmits it over a secure communications link.
The external video source is typically a camera/video system such as the nose mounted Television Camera System (TCS), Low Altitude Navigation and Targeting System for Night (LANTIRN), Head Up Display (HUD) camera. Maximum image capture rate is 4 images/second. In reality the Tactical Imaging Set could also receive images transmitted by other Tactical Imaging Sets or compatible systems (such as ground or base stations). Selected images can be displayed on the forward (Video Display Indicator−VDI) and/or aft (Programmable Tactical Information Display − PTID) cockpit display.
The Tactical Imaging Set consists of a Remote Control Unit (RCU), Image Transceiver, Video Tape Recorder (VTR). The RCU mounts in the aft cockpit at the outboard front of the right side console.
The Tactical Imaging System replaces large parts of the legacy AVTR system. The Image Transceiver, VTR, Interface Box, and cables are mechanically mounted as one unit, called the Naval Airborne Video Recorder and Image Transceiver (NAVGRIT) Unit, which is mounted the right side front fuselage avionics bay.
(
(
Remote Control Unit (RCU)
The RCU is used to control the Image transceiver mounted in the avionics bay. The RCU display contains 2 lines of 24 green, night vision compatible, alphanumeric characters each. The top line provides status and messages. The bottom line provides a command menu. The command menu defines the functions of six pushbutton switches located below the display. The command menu, and thus the switch functions, varies depending on the selected operating mode. Display brightness is controlled via menu selection.
Image Transceiver
The Image Transceiver also has two Personal Computer Memories Card International Association (PCMCIA) card slots. The Image Transceiver has 26 MB of image memory allocated for storage of uncompressed image frames. The image memory is volatile, and so stored image frames are lost when power is removed.
In DCS sent and received images are stored in the saved-games directory
Saved Games\DCS_F14\TIS For each flown mission where the VTR or FTI are used a
folder with that mission date is created. VTR recordings are stored with a time
stamp. FTI images are stored and named in order of which they are received.
Airborne Video Tape Recorder (AVTR)
The VTR is an airborne video recorder that can record and play back up to 2 hours of information on a standard Hi 8 format cassette tape. The legacy AVTR front panel controls are disabled with the exception of the record switch; thus all VTR control is remotely performed. The RCU duplicates the AVTR record function through the view menu shown below.
The AVTR can only record one display at a time. The displays are selected via the ECMD video menu which is accessed via the DDD cursor. The selected display is also the one that the FTI records for image sending.
ECMD Video Recording Menu
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Note: ECMD Video Menu display selection is overridden by actuation of the LCP TCS/LTS video feed button.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Power-up Sequence
Power up is accomplished using the aft cockpit Sensor Control Panel, moving the record switch from OFF into standby will apply power. Once power is applied, the Remote Control Unit (RCU) controls all functions, with the exception of VTR record which is accomplished by moving the record switch into the ON position. VTR record can also be initiated through the RCU, overriding the Sensor Control Panel Record switch position.
Set aft cockpit Sensor Control Panel selector to STBY
RCU displays following sequence:
| PHOTOTELESIS |
| RCU 403 |
| Waiting ATR startup |
| Unit is |
| Waiting for ATR startup |
After Image Transceiver startup, the following message sequence appears
| RCU RESET |
| PHOTOTELESIS |
| RCU 403 |
Boot up menu appears
(
(
Press switch corresponding to desired display brightness level
(if current level is satisfactory, do not press a switch):
- EXT − Not used
- NITE − Nighttime level from Settings menus
- DAY − Daytime level from Settings menus
- Press OK switch. Main menu appears at currently selected brightness level.
(
(
(
(
SETTINGS MENUS
The Settings menus are used to modify configuration parameters for capturing, compressing, transmitting, and receiving image frames, as well as other system level functions. The Settings menus are accessed and processed in sequence from the Main menu (by pressing the SET switch) as shown above.
Settings Menus' Format
The Settings menus follow the general format:
| Parameter: ###### |
| End BackSet Fld PrevNext |
Where ####### (flashing) is the value of the parameter being set. Switch functions vary somewhat among menus, and are explained as each menu is described.
Send to Call Sign Menu
This menu is used to select/deselect the call signs to be included in the next transmission. It provides access to submenus, which are used to maintain the call sign directory. The menu contains one value field. When selected, the first call sign in the directory is listed whether or not it is selected for transmission. The directory can be stepped through using the NEXT switch, and each entry can be selected or deselected, as desired. The displays for a call sign value differ slightly depending on whether that value is selected or not selected.
For a selected call sign value:
For a non−selected call sign value:
END − Return to Main menu
MOD − Display Modify Call Sign menu
SET − Select next menu in sequence
YES − Select call sign
NO − Deselect call sign
NEXT − Change currently displayed call sign to next call sign in directory
The callsign directory can be edited using the TIS DTM menu in the mission editor.
Modify Call Sign Menu
This menu is used to add a new call sign to the directory or delete an existing call sign from the directory. It also provides access to the Edit Call Sign menu, which is used to define a newly added call sign.
DONE −Return to Send to Call Sign menu
DEL − Delete the current call sign from the directory and display the next value (if no next value, default is 000000)
NEW − Create new unselected call sign with value of 000000 (if value 000000 already exists, switch has no effect)
EDIT − Display Edit Call Sign menu
PREV − Change currently displayed call sign to previous call sign in directory
NEXT − Change currently displayed call sign to next call sign in directory
Edit Call Sign Menu
This menu is used to change the name of an existing call sign, including a newly added call sign (000000). Each character in the call sign is considered a separate value field. Valid entries for each character are numerals, upper case letters, and blanks (, located in sequence between Z and 0). Blanks are not permitted within the body of the call sign; however, if a call sign has less than 6 characters, trailing blanks must be added to complete the 6 character call sign. Trailing blanks appear on the display only when the call sign value field is being edited.
OK − Return to Modify Send to Call Sign menu
FLD − Select next field in call sign
PREV − Change currently selected call sign character to previous letter or number
NEXT − Change currently selected call sign character to next letter or number
Local Call Sign Menu
This menu is used to modify the call sign associated with the Tactical Imaging Set. Each character in the call sign is considered a separate value field. Valid entries for each character are numerals, upper case letters, and blanks (4, located in sequence between Z and 0). Blanks are not permitted within the body of the call sign; however, if the call sign has less than 6 characters, trailing blanks must be added to complete the 6 character call sign. Trailing blanks appear on the display only when the call sign value field is being edited.
END − Return to Main menu
BACK− Display PTAC Quick Start menu
SET − Display Brightness menu
FLD − Select next field in call sign
PREV − Change currently selected call sign character to previous letter or number
NEXT − Change currently selected call sign character to next letter or number
Send/Delete Function Menu
This menu is used to toggle the send/delete mode parameter on or off. In send/delete mode, captured images are deleted as they are sent. With send/delete mode turned off, images are copied to the receive queue as they are sent. Valid values are YES and NO.
END − Return to Main menu
BACK− Display Send−to Call Sign menu
SET − Display Capture Rate menu
NEXT − Toggle send and delete mode value
Capture Rate Menu
This menu is used to change the time interval between image captures in burst mode. Valid values range from 0.1 to 999.0. Values are incremented or decremented in 0.1−second steps when the value is less than 1 second, and in 1−second steps when the value is greater than 1 second. Incrementing once from 999.0 or decrementing once from 0.1 disables burst mode and enables single shot mode. In this case, the value field indicates SINGLESHOT.
The capture rate can be set to 0.1 or 0.2 seconds/image; however, these settings are below the Tactical Imaging Set minimum capture rate value (fastest capture). If the capture rate is set to 0.1 or 0.2 seconds/image, the Tactical Imaging Set will capture image frames at its fastest speed, which is approximately 0.28 second/image in capture/hold mode. In capture/send mode, the minimum capture rate value is substantially higher due to the compression required to transfer image frames to the send queue.
END − Return to Main menu
BACK − Display Send/Delete menu
SET − Display Capture Time menu
PREV − Decrement currently displayed
NEXT − Increment currently displayed value
Capture Time Menu
This menu is used to change the duration of image captures in burst mode. Valid values range from 001 to 999. Values are incremented or decremented in 1−second steps. Incrementing once from 999 or decrementing once from 001 selects continuous capturing. In this case, the value field indicates CONTINUOUS.
END − Return to Main menu
BACK − Display Capture Rate menu
SET − Display Max Key Time menu
PREV − Decrement currently displayed value
NEXT − Increment currently displayed value
Display Brightness Menu
This menu is used to set RCU display brightness level for daytime or nighttime viewing, Valid values are EXTERNAL (not used), DAY, and NIGHT.
END − Return to Main menu
BACK − Display Local Call Sign menu
SET − Display Image Dimension menu
DIM − Decrease brightness of display for selected DAY or NIGHT value
BRT − Increase brightness of display for selected DAY or NIGHT value
NEXT − Change currently selected brightness value to next value
Format SRAM Card Menu
This menu is used to format the Image card (also called the Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) card) used to store the image frames in the send and receive queues. Valid values are YES and NO (NO is default).
END − Return to Main menu
BACK − Display Date and Time menu
SET − Display View Version Number menu
FMT − Format Image card if format value is YES (if format value is NO, this switch has no effect)
NEXT − Toggle format yes/no value
Formatting an Image card causes all stored image frames in the send and receive queues to be deleted and the display to momentarily read:
| Dumping SEND & RECV |
When all images are deleted, the display momentarily changes to read:
| Formatting SRAM card |
CAPTURING/COMPRESSING/SAVING/TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING IMAGES
Capturing Images
Image frames are captured in either burst mode or snap mode. In burst mode, image frames are captured at predetermined intervals for a predetermined length of time. In snap (single shot) mode, a single image frame is captured. The captured image frames are then either transmitted immediately (capture/send mode) or stored in the image buffer/hold queue (capture/hold mode). All modes and parameters are set using the Settings menu.
Capturing Images in Burst/Hold Mode
Note If the specified capture rate is SINGLESHOT, the BRST switch label does not appear.
-
From the Main menu, press the BRST switch. The capture sequence proceeds automatically with image frames being captured at the specified rate for the specified duration (capture time).
-
While the image frames are being captured, the menu appears as follows:
-
The hold queue field (H012) increases by 1 as each image frame is captured.
Note If the hold queue is full (typically 188 image frames), burst mode is discontinued automatically.
Burst length and Burst interval are changed in the settings menu.
Capturing Images in Snap Mode
From the Main menu, press the SNAP switch. The capture sequence proceeds automatically with one image frame being captured. The Main menu remains unchanged, except that the hold queue field H012 increases by 1.
Saving Images
In capture/hold mode when no call signs are selected for transmission and reception is not occurring, all captured− but−not−compressed image frames in the hold queue can be compressed and stored in the send queue. In this situation, the following menu appears:
Pressing the SEND switch transfers one image at a time from the send que (S002) into the Image card.
🚧 Work In Progress.
Transmitting Images
Image frames which have been captured and compressed are send using the SEND switch on the Main menu. The SEND switch appears when the Tactical Imaging Set is not currently transmitting or receiving image frames, there is at least one image frame in the send and/or hold queue, and at least one send−to call sign is selected. New image frames can be captured during transmission. Transmission of image frames on command is accomplished as follows:
Note The Tactical Imaging Set transmits image frames to all selected call signs, but it does so sequentially, that is, it transmits all image frames to the first selected call sign.
-
On the Main menu, press the view key the following menu appears:
-
In the view menu press the Hold key, the cockpit display will now display the images captured in the hold cue and the following menu appears: Within the hold menu scroll to the image or images that are to be transferred to the send cue. With the MARK key images are transferred into the send cue.
-
On the Main menu, press the SEND switch. The Tactical Imaging Set automatically shifts into data mode, and the following menu appears:
a. If there are image frames in the send queue with a valid callsign selected in the settings menu, those image frames are transmitted.
b. If there are no images in the send cue, the send switch stores all images in the Hold cue on the image card.
c. The S=00% displays to the aircrew the percentage of transmitted data successfully received by the receiving station.
Receiving Images
Image reception is normally accomplished after coordinating voice communication with the transmitting station. Image reception cannot occur during transmission, and the Image card must have sufficient memory available to store the received images. Reception is initiated when a transmission to a call sign matching the local call sign is received. The local call sign is set using the Settings menu. Once reception is initiated, it proceeds until complete with no user intervention. When reception is complete, the Tactical Imaging Set sends an acknowledgement to the sending station, and the Main menu appears on the RCU.
-
Ensure that the transmitting station has the correct receiver callsign set in the settings menu. By default the unit name is used as the callsign. The local callsign can be changed in the settings menu. All callsigns of a group are stored by default. Callsigns can als be pre programmed via the DTM in the mission editor TIS menu.
-
When reception begins, the following menu appears with the R000 field flashing:
-
Once images have been received the R002 menu will show the amount of images received. For example R002. These images can be viewed via the view/send menu described below.
VIEWING IMAGES
Images available for viewing are captured image frames in the hold queue, captured, marked, or sent image frames in the send queue, received, sent, or uploaded image frames in the receive queue, and live/playback VTR output. When no viewing option is selected, Television Camera System (TCS) output is displayed on the cockpit display. Image frames in the hold, send, and/or receive queue can also be deleted. All functions are accomplished using the View menu.
-
Pressing the VIEW switch on the Main menu accesses the View menu.
-
From the View menu, press the SEND switch. The View Send menu sequence appears as follows, and the first image frame in the queue is decompressed and appears on the cockpit display:
(Progress bar indicating status of decompression)
Switch functions are as follows:
END − Return to Main menu
DEL − Delete current image frame
PREV − Display next image frame in queue
NEXT − Display previous image frame in queue
b. Press the PREV or NEXT switch until the desired image frame is displayed
The decompressed image appears on the cockpit display. The number of the image frame displayed is its position in the queue. This position is based on the image frames assigned image code (time code for FTI−captured image frames, externally assigned for received and previously loaded image frames). The queue wraps around so that the image frame selected by pressing the NEXT switch when viewing the last image frame in the queue is image frame number 1, and the image frame selected by pressing the PREV switch when viewing image frame number 1 is the last image frame in the queue.
CONTROLLING VTR FUNCTIONS
The VTR can be controlled from either the RCU or the aft cockpit Sensor Control Panel, with the Sensor Control Panel taking precedence. When the Sensor Control Panel RECORD switch is set to OFF, power is removed from the Tactical Imaging Set, and the VTR tape is unthreaded. When the Sensor Control Panel RECORD switch is set to RECD, the VTR is commanded to record. When the Sensor Control Panel is set to STBY (normal situation), the VTR is commanded to perform the function set by the RCU. In either case, the Sensor Control Panel indicator lights indicate standby, end of tape (EOT), or unthreaded VTR status, as applicable. In practice, it is recommended that if the Sensor Control Panel is used to control the VTR record function, the RCU have STBY selected. If the RCU is used to control the VTR functions, the Sensor Control Panel selector must be set to STBY.
-
VTR control functions are part of the Tactical Imaging Set view functions The View menu is accessed by pressing the VIEW switch on the Main menu. The View menu appears as follows:
- END − Return to Main menu
- REC − Set VTR to record function
-
Once the VTR is set to record an event mark switch appears on the RCU panel. The VTR recording time is also displayed.
Programmable Tactical Information Display
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | The PTID |
| 2. | PTID Waypoints |
| 3. | Tactical Page |
| 4. | Menu Page |
| 5. | Navigation Data Plot Line Page |
| 6. | Plot Lines |
| 7. | Navigation Data Waypoint Page |
| 8. | Bullseye |
| 9. | Navgrid |
| 10. | All Weather Landing Page |
| 11. | JDAM Mission Page |
| 12. | Stores Management Page |
| 13. | PTID Steering |
Programmable Tactical Information Display
The Programmable Tactical Information display (PTID) was intended to replace the ageing Tactical Information Displays (TID) in all tomcats. As part of the F-14B Upgrade Program all F-14B(U)s were equipped with the PTID as it serves as a central part to integrate all updates to the tomcat in a functional way.
The PTID like the old TID displays A/A Tactical Information. However it also incorporates many updates to the A/A information, such as Target Altitude in thousands of feet or Bullseye. For a complete list of functions refer to the chapters below. PTID allowed for a deep integration of various menu pages, or the loading of Magnetic Tape Memory (MTM) functions, such as the TID Avia Display, or the Air-To-Ground Magnetic Tapes.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
The IP-1643A/A Programmable Tactical Information Display (PTID) is the primary interface for the RIO with the WCS and the Radar. The PTID has 3 Primary pages for Navigation purposes:
-
PTID TAC Page
-
Navigation Data Plot Line (NVD PLT) Page
-
Navigation Data Waypoint (NVD WP) Page
Waypoints
The F−14B uses a common numbering scheme for display of waypoints. The CDNU, PTID (including the FLIR display), and HUD will all display the same two digit number assigned to each waypoint. When a flight plan is first activated, the waypoints are assigned numbers from 01 to 50 in flight plan order. When new waypoints are added, they are assigned numbers sequentially beginning with number 51. When waypoints are deleted, the remaining waypoints retain their original number.
Due to limitations with the F-14 Mission Computer (FMC) PTID can only display 18 waypoints at a time. Because of that limitation a prioritization scheme is used.
Waypoints that are always displayed when they are within range scale selected on the PTID:
-
FP; IP; HB; DP; HA; ST;
-
Priority WP 1-3
-
Generic Priority 4-7
-
Destination Steering Waypoint
-
EGI Fly-To Waypoint "Hot Dog"
| Icon | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Defence Point | |
| Destination Waypoint | |
| Fixed Point | |
| Generic Waypoint | |
| Home Base | |
| Hostile Area | |
| EGI Fly-To Waypoint/ Hot-Dog Waypoint | |
| Initial Point | |
| Surface Target |
💡 A special waypoint designation may be assigned to any Waypoint. For example there might be a surface target with the Waypoint ID 67. Each of the special waypoints can only exist once in a flight plan.
💡 EGI "Hot Dog" and Destination Steerpoint symbology is applied to any waypoint that is designated as such. The symbology is overlaid.
Tactical Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Menu Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Navigation Data Plot Line (NVD PLT) Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Plot Lines
Plot Lines may be drawn between a group of waypoint to delineate areas of interest like restricted areas, the Forward Edge Battle Area (FEBA), areas of hostile forces etc. A plot line may be inserted between any two waypoints contained in the CDNU active flight plan. Up to nine waypoints may be strung together to plot complex areas.
The RIO can designate up to four separate plot line groups. Up to nine waypoints may be used per plot line group, with a maximum of 20 waypoints for all four plot line groups combined. If there is an attempt to assign more waypoints than allowed a "PL FULL" advisory is displayed at the top of the PTID. If the PTID is not able to display all plot lines at once, "PL MASK" is displayed in the same location.
Plot lines are cleared whenever a flight plan clear command is executed on the CDNU, or a new flight plan is loaded into the CDNU.
The PTID NVD PLT page is available for plot line definition and editing. The NVD PLT page is the NVD default page. The WP acronym on the top line must be selected to display the NVD WP page. NAV GRID/Bullseye activation is accomplished on the NVD PLT or NVD WP page via hooking the respective acronyms. While in any NVD page, the RIO can access the PLT page by hooking the PLT acronym located on the top right of the NVD pages. If WP or NG is hooked, deselecting either also brings up the PLT page. The PLT page displays the following information:
-
Plot information on the top of the display
-
Information about the hooked waypoint as displayed on the WP page
-
A table of the 50 waypoints resident in the CDNU
On the NVD PLT page, the waypoints selected for each plot line are shown in a table on the upper half of the page. The unique line type used for the plot line is shown to the right of the plot line number (PL1, PL2, PL3, or PL4) and is simply different lengths of dashes. The line type is set by the system.
At the top and at either side of the plot line table on the PLT page is a list of one− or two−character acronyms for each of the five plot line edit functions. The edit functions include:
- "A" — Append. Appends a hooked WP to the end of any plot line.
- "I" — Insert. Inserts a hooked WP in front of any selected WP in any plot line.
- "D" — Delete. Deletes a selected WP from any plot line.
- "C" — Change. Changes a selected WP in any plot line to the hooked WP
- "S" — Sequence. Append a set of selected WPs in the active flight plan on to the end of any plot line. Corresponding Plot Line number must also be selected.
- "E#" — Erase. Erases an entire plot line.
- "PL" — Display Plot line. Turn the display of the plot line on/off. Default is on.
The CAP may also be used to edit plot lines.
Appending Plot Line Waypoints
To append a waypoint to a plot line using the NVD PLT page:
- Hook "A"
- Hook the desired plot line number (1 to 4)
- Hook the desired waypoint from the bottom half of page.
The hooking sequence can be in any order. For example, if a waypoint is already hooked, hooking "A" and then plot line # will append the hooked waypoint to the plot line. "A" will be crossed out and disabled when a total of 20 waypoints have been used for all plot lines.
Inserting Plot Line Waypoints
To insert a waypoint into a plot line using the NVD PLT page:
- Hook "I"
- Hook the desired waypoint from the bottom half of page
- Hook the waypoint number in a plot line in front of which the new waypoint is to be inserted.
The first two steps can be done in either order. "I" will be crossed out and disabled when 20 waypoints have been used for all plot lines.
Deleting Plot Line Waypoints
To delete a waypoint from a plot line using the NVD PLT page:
- Hook "D"
- Hook the desired waypoint number on a plot line to delete the waypoint from the plot line.
Changing Plot Line Waypoints
To change a waypoint in a plot line using the NVD PLT page:
- Hook "C"
- Hook a waypoint from the bottom half of the page
- Hook a waypoint for a plot line to replace the waypoint with the one selected from the bottom half of the page.
The first two steps can be done in any order.
Appending Sets of Waypoints (Sequencing)
To append a sequence of waypoints to a plot line using the NVD PLT page:
- Hook "A"
- Hook the desired plot line number (1 to 4)
- Hook the first waypoint in the desired sequence from the bottom half of page
- Hook "A" to disable the Append function
- Hook the last waypoint in the sequence from the bottom half of the page
- Hook "S" to append the waypoint sequence to the selected plot line.
The first three steps can be done in any order. With "S" function and a waypoint hooked, "xx" is displayed after the last waypoint (until the next HCU half action) if the selected sequence of waypoints exceeds the maximum number of waypoints allowed in a given plot line (9), or for all the plot lines (20).
Erasing Plot Lines
To erase all the waypoints in a plot line:
-
Hook "E1" to erase Plot Line 1
-
Hook "E2" to erase Plot Line 2
-
Hook "E3" to erase Plot Line 3
-
Hook "E4" to erase Plot Line 4
Enable/Disable Display of Plot Lines from PTID NVD PLT Page
The RIO can suppress display of a plot line on the PTID Tactical page by hooking the PL symbol on the NVD PLT page for the desired plot line. When plot line display is enabled, the line type is displayed to the right of the plot line number. When the plot line display is disabled, the line type is not displayed. The default condition is to enable plot line display.
Navigation Data Waypoint Page (NVD WP) Page
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Bullseye
The Bullseye Grid provides F-14 aircrews with a means to quickly and accurately locate the position of airborne or ground targets based on position data from a fixed geographical point. The Bullseye mode provides a digital readout of range and bearing from a designated pseudo file (Bullseye Reference Point) to any hooked symbol, an active PTID cursor, or PTID cursor spot hook. Bullseye Grid is selected by the RIO and displayed using any of the three PTID tactical display formats.
(
(
(
Bullseye Grid is displayed in the tactical and menu page and in all range scales with the PTID in GSTAB, ASTAB or ATTK. It consists of data readouts for range and bearing from the Bullseye Reference Point to own aircraft and to a hooked symbol, an active PTID cursor, or PTID cursor spot hook, and designated BE waypoint number. The Bullseye display is available during air-to-air and air-to-ground.
When the Bullseye Grid mode is active, the "BE" acronym on the PTID full menu is brightened. The Bullseye Grid displays consist of bearing and range readouts which are displayed in the upper right submenu area of the PTID. The bearing display is located to the left of the range readout and consists of a three-digit readout ranging from 001 to 360° accompanied by a dimmed degree symbol. The range display is a three-digit readout from 000 to 999 nm. If there is no active cursor, spot hook, or hooked symbol, dashes will be displayed for the target bearing and range readouts.
Immediately below the bearing and range readout the alphanumeric identifier for the Bullseye Reference Point is posted. The Bullseye Reference Point is selected from the NVD WP or PLT page.
The system permits re-designation of the Bullseye reference point on the NVD WP or PLT page, or TAC page via the TID offset function. From NVD WP or PLT page, the RIO hooks the desired point (using lower list of waypoints), and then selects the TID Offset button on the HCU. A ‘B’ character appears adjacent to the waypoint ID to indicate the Bullseye selection. Bullseye re-designation using the TID Offset button will not work if NG is selected instead of BE on the NVD WP or PLT page. The CAP BE REDESIG function (D/L #4) can also be used instead of the TID Offset button.
Bullseye Grid Entry
The weapon system automatically enables Bullseye Grid on power−up and major mode transitions. It will select the designated waypoint as the reference point. If no waypoint is designated as the Bullseye reference point, the system will select the first waypoint in the flight plan as the default Bullseye.
If Bullseye Grid is deselected, it may be reselected using the following procedure:
-
On the PTID full menu, select NVD to transition to the Navigation Data Plot Line page.
-
On the NVD PLT page, cursor hook the "BE" acronym.
-
The "BE" acronym will brighten if an active pseudo file has been selected as the Bullseye Reference Point. If BE does not brighten, designate a BE on the NVD PLT or WP page, using the TID offset button.
-
Once the "BE" acronym is brightened on the NVD PLT page, select MENU on the NVD PLT page to return to the PTID full menu.
-
On the PTID full menu, verify BE selected.
Bullseye Grid Mode Exit
Bullseye Grid can be exited by any of the following actions:
- With the Bullseye Grid Mode active, select MENU. On the PTID full menu, deselect BE. The Bullseye Grid Mode can be restored by re-selecting BE on the PTID full menu. Note The "north spike" will remain with the Bullseye Reference Point until "BE" is de-selected from an NVD page.
Nav Grid
Navigation command and control grid (NAV GRID) enhances fleet air defense by providing navigation and command/control information during combat air patrol operations and for fleet defense of a specific fixed position. NAV GRID has two major advantages: it provides aircraft position relative to a geographic reference point (YY) common to all fleet defense units and eliminates dependence on navigation aids such as tacan during anti-air warfare operations. F-14 combat air patrols using NAV GRID can report target contacts using grid coordinates or range and bearing relative to YY in addition to normal reports referenced to own aircraft position. NAV GRID is selected by the RIO and displayed on the tactical information display.
All Weather Landing (AWL) Page
AOA, VV, ILS, and ACLS are displayed on the PTID when AWL is hooked on PTID menu.
By hooking the +ACL acronym on the PTID, the ACLS display replaces the ILS and the ACL is highlighted. If the ACLS data becomes invalid, the azimuth and elevation needles are not displayed. When a waveoff signal is received, a waveoff "X" appears and the azimuth and elevation needles are cleared. If no ACLS or ICLS data is received for more than 2 seconds, a TILT acronym appears on the PTID.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
JDAM Mission (JMSN) Page
The PTID JDAM mission page provides the ability for the RIO to update and review the Pre Planned Missions used for JDAM employment. The Tomcat has the ability to store up to 8 Pre-Planned Missions per station. These Pre Planned missions contain Target Data, Launch Data and Terminal Impact Parameters. The Target coordinates of any pre planned mission can also be edited during flight via the CDNU.
For a detailed explanation of JDAM Targeting in either a Pre-Planned or a Target of Opportunity format, refer to the Weapons chapter of this manual.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Stores Management Page (SMS) Page
The Stores Management Page is a dedicated PTID display to advise the aircrew of the currently loaded stores status. It also provides the RIO with the ability to switch the Gun Rate between High (HI) and Low (LO).
HI - Selects 6,000 rounds per minute. Normally used for air-to-air operation.
LO - Selects 4,000 rounds per minute. Normally used for air-to-ground operation.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
PTID Steering
Two basic types of steering are provided: navigation and attack.
The F−14B provides the capability of selecting any of the waypoints in a flight plan as the CDNU Fly−To ("hot dog") point and/or the DEST Steering waypoint. The RIO may also select steering to a GGW target or Launch Point (LP). Fly−To steering is selected by choosing one of the EGI options (AUTO, MAN, OFLY, or CDNU) using the PTID Steering Select rotary pushbutton (PB 9).
The rotary also provides for selection of DEST, LP, or TGT. These choices are discussed in subsequent paragraphs. EGI, DEST, LP, or TGT steering may be presented on the HUD and ECMD, but only TACAN and EGI steering are available on the BDHI.
(
(
(
(
(
(
PTID Steering Selection
Steering information presented on the HUD and HSD is commanded with the PTID Steering Select pushbutton (PB9). Repeated depression of the pushbutton provides the following selections in the order given:
-
AUTO/MAN/OFLY/CDNU (EGI Steering − only one of these selections will be available depending on what is selected on the CDNU Flight Plan page)
-
DEST (Destination Steering)
-
LP/TGT (GGW Steering − LP requires CP selection on the ACP, while TGT requires selection of Manual on ACP)
The number of the waypoint will be displayed to the right of the PTID selected steering mode above PB 9 (e.g., DEST 03 or AUTO 07).
If GGW steering is selected, the station number of the next launch weapon will be displayed. The "Hot−Dog" symbol is displayed on the PTID and indicates the waypoint to which the CDNU is calculating steering information. If there is no valid Fly−To point, no waypoint number is displayed above PB 9, and the Hot Dog is removed from the PTID.
With Pushbutton 6 (
| Steering Selection | Option |
|---|---|
| AUTO( | |
| OFLY ( | |
| MAN ( | |
| TGT ( | |
| LP ( |
Vertical Display Indicator Group Replacement
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | Takeoff |
| 2. | Cruise |
| 3. | Air-To-Air |
| 4. | Air-To-Ground |
| 5. | Landing |
| 6. | AWL |
Vertical Display Indicator Group-Replacement
The VDIG-R (Vertical Display Indicator Group Replacement) was introduced as part of the F-14B upgrade program to address the limitations of the original F-14A-era pilot displays and HUD. The upgrade combines a new HUD with updated mission-processing hardware while retaining portions of the existing VDI installation. By presenting primary flight, navigation, radar, and weapon information in the pilot’s field of view, the VDIG-R reduces the need to reference cockpit instruments and improves integration between the aircraft's sensors and displays.
The VDIG(R) provides the pilot symbolic takeoff, cruise, air−to−air (A/A), air−to−ground (A/G), landing, and test information. Electronically generated symbology portrays aircraft attitude, command, and tactical information.
The information is displayed on the Heads Up Display (HUD) and depends on mission phase and the mode of operation the pilot selects for a given phase. The Vertical Display Indicator (VDI) acts as a HUD repeater, or can display TCS or LANTIRN video. The VDIG(R) includes the HUD, HUD Camera, VDI, VDIG(R) Bezel, and the CP−24341AYK Processor Interface Unit (PIU).
The VDIG(R) system displays, HUD and VDI, are mounted in the chassis unit assembly with peripheral indicators and switches. The HUD and VDI are mounted in the front cockpit behind the center windscreen. The HUD is the primary source of flight information. Flight critical data (airspeed, altitude and attitude) is presented on the HUD in all modes. The Stores Status Indicators’ flag information is selectively displayed on the VDI HUD Repeat.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Symbology Common To All Display Modes
The symbology described below is designed to provide accurate flight path information on the HUD as well as maintain conventional pitch and roll attitude indicator type information.
FPM, CDM, PFPM, Aircraft Reticle
One of the fundamental benefits of the HUD is the presentation of flight path information as the primary control reference. Traditional pitch referenced displays require the pilot to mentally determine aircraft flight path by referencing pitch attitude, vertical velocity, and AOA. The incorporation of flight path information eliminates the need for these mental interpretations by indicating where the aircraft is going rather than where it is pointing (i.e., pitch attitude).
The HUD presents flight path information utilizing the symbols FPM, CDM, and Potential Flight Path Marker (PFPM).
Shown here: Flight Path Marker (FPM) and Potential Flight Path Marker (PFPM)
The FPM is displayed on the HUD only, indicating the actual flight path of the aircraft when read against the outside world. The FPM is free to move within the entire Total Field Of View (TFOV).
Unlike a fixed pitch reference, which indicates where the nose of the aircraft is pointing, the FPM’s position changes based on the dynamic characteristics of the aircraft and the atmospheric conditions in which the aircraft is flying (i.e., winds).
This displacement of the FPM can cause two undesirable effects. First, the displacement of the FPM also displaces all the symbols that are positioned relative to the FPM (e.g., instrument landing system ILS/TACAN symbology, or the climb/dive ladder). The displacement of the symbols can overwrite or interfere with the interpretation of other primary flight information (i.e., altitude and airspeed scales). Second, during dynamic maneuvering, the FPM, along with the Climb/Dive Ladder (CDL), can disappear from the display leaving the pilot with no attitude reference whatsoever.
To compensate for these shortcomings, the CDM was adopted as a standard display reference and is used in the F−14B Upgrade VDIG(R) system.
The adoption of a CDM has several advantages as a primary display reference as compared to the FPM:
- The lateral displacement of the display reference due to sideslip and winds is restricted.
- Since stability of the display reference is greatly enhanced by the incorporation of the CDM, the stability of all symbology referenced to the CDM is also improved.
- The CDM more accurately displays the resultant climb/dive angle.
The FPM continues to be displayed at 1/3 size when the CDM is displayed. However, the CDM will occlude the FPM when the FPM is within 15 mils of the CDM center.
Shown here: Climb Dive Marker (CDM) and small Flight Path Marker (FPM)
The CDM displays the current climb/dive angle when read against the climb/dive ladder (CDL). The CDM is free to move along the vertical axis within the Instantaneous Field Of View (IFOV). In the horizontal axis, the VDI CDM is restricted to zero degrees azimuth and the HUD CDM is restricted to ± 5° in azimuth.
Supplementing the CDM and FPM is the PFPM, which moves up and down along the right side of the CDM or FPM indicating aircraft acceleration or deceleration along the flight path. The PFPM can thus be used to:
- Show if aircraft is accelerating or decelerating.
- Determine achievable climb or dive angle while maintaining constant airspeed for the selected power setting.
- Determine if aircraft is gaining or losing total energy.
- Show which way to move the throttle to stabilize at current energy state.
The inertial data dependent symbology (FPM, CDM, PFPM, ground speed, vertical velocity, aircraft G and aircraft peak G) are displayed when operating in the Blended Aided or Blended Unaided navigation modes. When the CSDC(R) detects and commands a degraded navigation mode [NAV Fail, AHRS/GPS, AHRS/AM, IMU/AM or AHRS/EGI (GPS)], inertial data dependent symbols are not displayed and the system reverts to a pitch reference only display.
In the pitch reference state, the Aircraft Reticle becomes the reference symbol for attitude. The reticle is fixed at a position 3.5° below the Fuselage Reference Line (FRL), or 2.5° above the HUD optical center.
A HUD caging function is provided to limit display motion so that needed symbology stays within the Instantaneous Field Of View (IFOV). The default setting is caged for all display modes except A/G. A/G display default mode is UNCAGED.
When the HUD is caged, the CDM is displayed. The CDM is constrained in lateral motion, and to the Instantaneous Field Of View (IFOV) of the HUD in elevation. A simultaneous FPM and CDM will be seen whenever the HUD is caged, and the flight path differs laterally from the CDM by greater than 10 mils. In this case, when the FPM appears from behind the CDM area, it is displayed at 1/3 normal size.
When uncaged, either by pilot selection using the HUD CAGE push-tile on the VDI bezel or by selection of A/G display mode, the FPM is displayed and is free to move about the IFOV. If the FPM reaches the edge of the IFOV, it will flash; the CDM provides vertical flight path information. When flight path returns within the IFOV, the HUD will again only display the FPM.
When the CDM/FPM symbol is pegged at the Instantaneous Field of View (IFOV) limit, the symbol will flash. At the same time, the Waterline symbol on the HUD will also flash if it is displayed (Takeoff or Landing PDCP modes and during failure modes that result in the Waterline symbol appearing). Thus, at extreme angles of attack, when the flight path is markedly different from the aircraft’s longitudinal axis, the pilot can expect to see the CDM/FPM and Waterline symbol flash.
The HUD maintains the last pilot selection (caged or uncaged) when the PDCP selection is changed, unless the selection is A/G. PDCP A/G default is uncaged. The pilot may select CAGE in A/G mode.
CAUTION Due to the proximity of the HUD CAGE pushbutton to the MASTER ARM switch, the pilot should avoid caging the HUD when dropping conventional ordnance.
Climb/Dive Ladder
The CDL consists of a horizon line that depicts 0° flight path angle, and index lines numbered in 5° increments.
The positive index lines are solid with the vertical legs pointing to the horizon. The negative index lines are dashed and are angled at one half the dive angle to the horizon. For example, if the aircraft were in a 30° dive, the CDL index lines would be angled at 15° down from the horizon line.
The HUD Total Field Of View (TFOV) will typically display four CDL index lines. The aircraft pitch attitude determines the CDL index line displayed on the HUD.
The CDM indicates aircraft flight path. When the aircraft is at a flight path angle/attitude where the horizon line is outside the IFOV, the HUD displays a Ghost Horizon Line at the edge of the IFOV closest to the actual horizon.
A zenith symbol is shown at 90° nose up and a nadir symbol is displayed at 90° nose down. The CDL is positioned using EGI attitude data, or AHRS data (pitch reference state).
It is important to note that the CDL is always referenced off of the CDM, or FPM, even when these symbols are pegged at the edge of the IFOV. This means that above approximately 18 Units AOA, the CDL will no longer represent pitch attitude when read against the waterline, aircraft reticle or ADL.
Actual aircraft flight path will still be accurate when read against the CDM. The end result is that the CDL does not conform to the real world in some cases, and the horizon line will not be coincident with the actual horizon.
WARNING The waterline and aircraft reticle must not be used for pitch reference when the Climb Dive Marker is limited by the HUD IFOV.
Heading Scale
The heading scale displays magnetic heading provided via the CSDC(R). It consists of a scale of tic marks with numerical values and a triangular pointer pointing to the current value of magnetic heading.
In T.O., LDG, CRUISE and A/G modes, the scale has major divisions of 10 degrees. In the A/A mode, the scale has major divisions of 20 degrees.
The Heading Scale is laterally centered at the upper IFOV boundary in CRUISE, A/A and A/G modes. In T.O. and LDG modes it is laterally centered with the bottom of the scale’s digits located 2 degrees above the top of the CDM, or the FPM if the CDM is not displayed, but never lower than 3 degrees above the horizon line.
If the FPM/CDM is inhibited (e.g., INS degraded) in T.O. and LDG modes, the scale is placed at the same fixed position as in CRUISE, A/A, and A/G Mode.
AHRS data via the CSDC is the primary heading source. If AHRS data is invalid, AWG−9 derived magnetic heading (true heading + magnetic variation) is used.
Airspeed and Altitude Information
Airspeed information is provided on the HUD from CADC data.
Altitude information is provided on HUD from either barometric (from CADC) or radar sources, depending upon pilot’s selection of BARO or RDR with the PDCP HUD ALT switch.
If ANLG is selected on the PDCP FORMAT switch, Airspeed and Altitude Analog Dials are displayed around a digital readout of the respective quantities.
Airspeed Analog Dial
The Airspeed Analog Dial consists of ten dots equally spaced around a circle and a pointer with the pointer making one complete clockwise revolution for every 100 knots of airspeed. Zero and multiples of 100 knots are referenced to the 12 o’clock position.
Auxiliary Airspeed is normally groundspeed. This adds a ready display of groundspeed for use in high density altitude takeoff and landing conditions.
Groundspeed is displayed in T.O., LDG, CRUISE, A/A and A/G HUD display modes. VDIG-R calculated groundspeed is displayed in CRUISE and A/A modes and in A/G. The letter G for groundspeed is posted following the numerical readout.
Altitude Analog Dial
The Altitude Analog Dial consists of 10 dots encircling the digital altitude with a pointer rotating on the inside circumference of the dots. One full rotation of the pointer equals 1000 feet of altitude change. Zero and multiples of 1000 feet are referenced to 12 o’clock.
Clockwise rotation of the pointers indicates increasing value.
The HUD will display Barometric Altitude with a flashing "B" if radar is selected and Radar Altitude is not available. An "R" is shown if Radar Altitude is displayed.
The HUD barometric pressure setting is independent of the altimeter setting in the cockpit.
WARNING VDIG(R) HUD altimeter and cockpit altimeter settings are independent. The pilot must ensure BOTH systems are updated with every altimeter change.
The analog Vertical Velocity speed tape is displayed only in T.O. and LDG, superimposed on the Analog Altitude Dial. The zero point is at the 9 o’clock position, with each dot representing 400 ft/min. A ^ mark is positioned at −650 ft/min to aid in instrument approaches. A vertical speed tape originates at the 9 o’clock position and pegs at −2000 ft/min if at or beyond that sink rate, positioned just outside the radius of the dots so as to not obscure the dots.
Angle of Attack Readout
AOA is displayed in all modes. However, in T.O. and LDG, the readout is removed when the AOA is between 14 and 16 units. To prevent the display from cycling at the boundary of these values, a dead-band is provided.
If AOA is greater than 14 units and decreasing, the readout remains off until the AOA decreases below 13 units.
If AOA is less than 16 units and increasing, the readout remains off until the AOA increases above 17 units.
The central air data computer (CADC) provides AOA values up to 19 units. Above 19 units, an AOA estimate is calculated by the VDIG(R). When the estimated value is displayed, parentheses are placed around the AOA numeric to indicate the displayed value is an approximation.
The VDIG(R) will display AOA in excess of 19 units up to an estimated 40 units. The value is calculated based on EGI flight path data corrected for yaw and roll. Flight test results indicate that the estimate will typically be accurate to within five units.
The display is intended as a trend indicator. When the estimate is greater than 40 units, "(40+)" will be displayed; when the estimate is less than 19 units and the CADC AOA is greater than 19 units, "(19.1)" is displayed.
Waterline
The Waterline is a pitch reference symbol. It is displayed in a fixed location on the HUD, laterally centered at the aircraft fuselage datum (6° above HUD optical center).
The waterline is always displayed in T.O. and LDG modes. If the VDIG(R) enters the pitch reference state (inertial data failure), the waterline is shown in all display modes.
Aircraft G
Aircraft g is displayed as a digital readout indicating aircraft normal acceleration as provided by the EGI.
Note Because of different sensor sources for the g-meter and the EGI, their respective g indications can differ. At maximum g, the g-meter can lag the HUD g readout by 0.5g prior to reaching a steady state condition.
Aircraft g is always displayed in A/A, A/G or CRUISE PDCP modes. Aircraft g is also displayed in the T.O. or LDG PDCP modes when aircraft g is greater than +1.5 or less than +0.5.
Barometric Pressure
Since the VDIG(R) receives uncorrected (29.92 referenced) pressure altitude from the CADC, the local altimeter (barometric pressure) setting must be supplied.
The pilot enters the setting using the HUD BARO set knob located on the lower left portion of the VDIG(R) bezel.
The VDIG(R) altimeter setting is continuously displayed on the HUD in T.O. and LDG modes.
In all display modes except A/G, the setting display flashes at 3 Hz for five seconds to alert the pilot to one of the following conditions:
- Whenever the aircraft passes 17,700 MSL altitude.
- Whenever descending below 10,000 MSL with calibrated airspeed less than 300 knots, after previously exceeding both of these values.
The VDIG(R) altimeter setting is also displayed on the HUD without flashing whenever the setting is changed. The setting remains displayed for five seconds after the new entry is completed.
The VDIG(R) altimeter setting displays continuously in all display modes on the VDI display.
WARNING VDIG(R) HUD altimeter and cockpit altimeter settings are independent. The pilot must ensure BOTH systems are updated with every altimeter change.
TACAN course deviation indicator
The displacement of the course bar from the reference symbol provides TACAN deviation. The vertical course bar is solid when receiving TO TACAN information and dashed when receiving FROM TACAN information. Two solid dots appear on the course bar side of the reference symbol and perpendicular to it. The dot closest to the reference symbol represents a half scale deflection of 3° off course. The outermost dot represents full scale deflection of 6° off course. For deviations > 7°, the bar pegs. When the aircraft crosses the selected course, the bar moves to the opposite side of the reference symbol and the dots appears on that side. If the bar is centered on course ±1/2°, the dots disappear. The course bar indicates being on course when centered over the reference symbol. Course and deviation dots are to the right of the reference symbol when TACAN deviation is positive and to the left when negative. The course bar and deviation dots are only displayed with TACAN steering selected while in T.O., CRUISE and LDG modes.
ICLS Vectors
The ILS vectors consist of two independent vectors (horizontal and vertical) which form a cross pointer. The displacement of the horizontal vector from the reference symbol indicates the ILS glide slope error and the vertical vector displacement indicates the ILS localizer error. The ILS vectors are only displayed in LDG mode with AWL steering selected. The Vectors are displayed by default on the VDI, they are only displayed on the HUD when the VDI mode is in Video whilst AWL is selected on the PDCP submode. (ACL Tadpole explained below).
Automatic Carrier Landing (ACL) Steering Indicator
The ACL steering indicator displays ACL steering information with respect to the reference symbol. Zero vertical and lateral error results in the indicator being superimposed on the reference symbol. It is only displayed in LDG with AWL steering selected. The ACL Steering Indicator is always displayed on HUD and VDI with AWL submode and LNG selected on the PDCP, and valid ACLS datalink tuned.
Navigation Data Readout
DEST/TACAN steering range and range source are displayed at the lower right corner of the HUD.
TACAN data is displayed when TACAN is selected for steering. Otherwise WP# / LP# / TGT# is displayed, followed by range to that point.
- WP # (Waypoint ID)
- TGT # (Selected Station)
- LP # (Selected Station)
Steering Mode
The PTID steering mode selected by the RIO is displayed in the lower left in T/O, A/A, A/G, and CRUISE.
The steering mode options include:
- DEST
- CDNU Mode (MAN/AUTO/OFLY)
Time Display
The Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) time display is presented in all modes at the lower right corner. This time is obtained from the EGI system via the 1553 Navigation Bus connection.
Estimated Time of Arrival and Time to Go
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) and Time to Go (TTG) to either the BDHI steering point, route waypoint, or HUD steering points are displayed on the HUD/VDI on the bottom right.
Additionally, the ETA/TTG to a secondary point can be displayed on the VDI only left of the normal TTG and ETA displays.
The CDNU has a Time Selection Page accessed via the CDNU F6 function key. The Time Selection menu allows the RIO to select the source for HUD/VDI TTG and ETA.
This information is not displayed with Weight-On-Wheels.
Takeoff
The Takeoff display mode is entered by depressing the T.O. pushbutton on the PDCP. The steering command selections are TACAN, Destination (DEST), All Weather Landing/ Precision Course Direction (AWL/PCD), Manual (MAN), and Vector (VEC).
The figure below depicts the symbology and the format of the F−14B Takeoff Mode with DEST, AWL/PCD, MAN, or VEC steering selected display. In addition to the basic flight symbology discussed previously, the following symbology is displayed on the HUD in this mode: Vertical Velocity, CDI and Angle of Attack Bracket. The Aircraft Reticle is displayed when the CDM/FPM is not available.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Cruise
Depressing the CRUISE pushbutton on the PDCP enters the cruise display mode. There are four steering command selections valid during cruise operations: Destination, TACAN, Manual, and Vector. CRUISE like TAKEOFF and LANDING inhibits the display for ALR-67 data, Target Designate Boxes are still shown in cruise. CRUISE mode with Dest Steering symbology is depicted in the figure below.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Only in cruise Command Mach and Command Altitude are displayed in the bottom left corner. These always reference the next steering waypoint, either EGI Fly-To or Destination. The values are dependent on set waypoint altitude and set waypoint TOT or Ground Speed. The Settings can be input in mission planning or during flight on the waypoint Edit 1/2 page.
Air-To-Air
Air−To−Air (A/A) displays are presented when the pilot selects the A/A pushbutton on the PDCP, the pilot or RIO selects a radar hot mode, or when the ACM guard is raised. The A/A displays provide target acquisition and weapon status, in addition to primary flight information. Target data and the selection legends PH, SP, SW, and G are displayed. Quantity of the selected weapon is also shown. When GUN is selected, the quantity number indicates rounds remaining in hundreds. A large X through a weapon selection legend indicates that the MASTER ARM switch is in OFF or TNG position.
Air−To−Air Mode — AIM-54 Phoenix
The Figure below is an example of A/A mode and TWS with Phoenix selected. The display will be the same for Sparrow except SP will be shown instead of PH and Tracks will not be shown with firing order number next to them. For a complete discussion of VDIG-R A/A formats consult the A/A Employment chapter.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Air−To−Air Mode — AIM-7 Sparrow
The Figure below is an example of A/A mode and STT with Sparrow selected. The display will be the same for Phoenix except PH will be shown instead of SP. For a complete discussion of VDIG-R A/A formats consult the A/A Employment chapter.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Air−To−Air Mode — AIM-9 Sidewinder
The Figure below shows an example of A/A mode and STT with Sidewinder selected. With VDIG(R), the Sidewinder Seeker Head Position Display (SHPD) is indicated with a circle symbol. For a complete discussion of VDIG-R A/A formats consult the A/A Employment chapter.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Air−To−Air Mode — Director Gunsight
Selecting A/A on the PDCP and Gun on the Pilot Control Stick activates the Multi−Mode Gun Sight (MMGS). With STT, the Director Gunsight is displayed as shown in The Figure below. The pilot can toggle between Director Sight and Manual Gunsight with the Cage/SEAM switch. When target radar track is not available, the LCOS gunsight is presented. For a complete discussion of VDIG-R A/A formats consult the A/A Employment chapter.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Air-To-Ground
A/G pushbutton selection on the PDCP enables A/G displays on the HUD (without A/A weapon selected). HUD TARPS mode steering cues are supported. TAS is displayed in window 42, just below the indicated airspeed readout. Symbology for Air−To−Ground Gun is shown below.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Landing
Landing mode is selectable on the PDCP, with TACAN steering and AWL steering as sub−mode selections. The Landing mode TACAN display is similar to the Takeoff mode TACAN display previously described. The Landing mode AWL Steering display provides ILS steering indicators, ACLS steering indicator, AWL legend, and the Breakaway/ Waveoff X. PTID steering mode, radar mode, and TACAN range are not displayed in any landing mode.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
With PDCP LDG Mode and PDCP AWL Steering selected, the VDI Video Mode is inhibited and the VDI is commanded to the VDI HUD repeat mode. If the VDI Mode switch is set to VIDEO, ILS symbology is displayed on the HUD, otherwise the ILS Vectors appear on the VDI display only.
This effectively allows declutter of the ILS vectors from the HUD by selecting PDCP VDI Mode switch to VDI while PDCP Mode is set to LDG. The ACL Steering Indicator ("tadpole") is always displayed, on both HUD and VDI, in PDCP LDG mode with AWL Steering while ACLS steering is valid.
Programmable Multiple Display Indicator Group
| Pilot HSD | RIO ECMD |
|---|---|
Programmable Multiple Display Indicator Group
The PMDIG provides the pilot and RIO with navigation or tactical data. The PMDIG is composed of the pilot horizontal situation display (HSD) and the RIO Electronic Counter Measure Display (ECMD). Both the ECMD and HSD are capable of display Navigation and Electronic countermeasure data, as well as operating in the PTID repeat mode.
Pilot Horizontal Situation Display
The HSD is the pilot’s primary navigation display. The HSD is also capable of repeating the RIO tactical information display presentation and the Electronic countermeasure page.
The HSD indicator and the multiple display indicator are formatted in horizontal plan position indicator or in horizontal plane, depending on display mode. The HSD display consists of a cathode ray tube, providing a 5-inch diameter (approximate) display format. The display format is dependent on the position of the HSD MODE switch (NAV, ECM or PTID).
| PMDIG HSD | PMDIG PDCP |
|---|---|
(
(
(
(
(
(
RIO Electronic Countermeasure Display
The ECMD is the RIO’s primary navigation display. The ECMD is also capable of repeating the RIO tactical information display presentation and The Electronic countermeasure page. Additionally only the RIOs ECMD has an ECMD menu page accessible with the use of the HCU cursor in DDD mode. In DDD mode the ECMD menu items will appear. As long as the HCU cursor is set to DDD the Cursor selections will override the switch position set on the ECMD control panel. Once a different HCU Cursor option is selected the ECMD will default back to the display selected on the ECMD Control Panel.
The ECMD Pages are: PTID Repeat, NAV, ECM, and MENU. Within MENU the RIO can select BIT (No Function) and VIDEO. In the Video Page the RIO can select which displays of the PMDIG are recorded by the FTI and VDIG-R. Additionally, the RIO can control which displays are presented on HSD and VDI for the pilot and ECMD and PTID for the RIO.
| PMDIG HCU | PMDIG ECMD |
|---|---|
(
(
(
(
(
PMDIG Modes
The PMDIG can operate in multiple display modes. In Navigation the Pilots selection on the PDCP (TACAN; DEST; AWL; MAN; VEC) determine the overall display for both HSD and ECMD. PTID Repeat and ECM are individually selectable by Pilot and RIO can be selected independently by the aircrew.
Navigation Modes
The navigation mode is selected by the pilot with the HSD MODE switch on the pilot display control panel. When the navigation mode is initiated, any one of four navigation sub-modes (TACAN, destination, vector, or manual) can be selected. They are selected on the pilot display control panel with STEER CMD push-buttons.
TACAN Steering Mode
The TACAN Steering Mode Provides course deviation steering to the selected TACAN station, or to the selected EGI Fly-To point, depending on the TACAN CMD control panel button position (TACAN/EGI).
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Destination Steering Mode
The Destination Steering display provides course destination steering to the currently selected destination steering point, or the currently selected EGI Fly-To Point depending on the RIOs PTID steering selection.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
PTID Repeat Mode
The PTID repeat mode provides display of the PTID presentations on the Pilots HSD and RIOs ECMD and is initiated with the MODE switch on the Pilots PDCP or the Mode switch on the RIOs ECMD Control Panel. If the RIO selects TV on the PTID, the HSD will continue to present PTID attack symbology while the PTID displays TV. The PTID repeat mode is available for both pilot HSD and RIO ECMD. For the Pilot the PTID repeat mode is selected on the PDCP, for the RIO the PTID repeat mode is selected on the ECMD control panel.
ECM Display Mode
The ECM Display mode is selectable via the PDCP for the pilot and via the ECMD control panel for the RIO. The ECMD control panel and ECMD menu provided declutter options for the RIO that are presented to both pilot and RIO ECM display. The ECM display has an override mode that will automatically display the ECM page as soon as a threat is detected. The override mode can be turned off on the PDCP and the ECMD control panel.
| Icon | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Seaborne Threat Radar | |
| AAA Threat Radar | |
| SAM Threat Radar | |
| A/A Threat Radar | |
| Unknown Threat Radar |
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
ECMD Menu
The ECMD Menu is only displayed to the RIOs ECMD and is only shown with the HCU cursor in DDD mode. The ECMD menu selections are achieved via half action HCU cursor.
Cursor is inhibited if radar mode is set to pulse.
As long as the DDD HCU mode is active the Menu selections on the ECMD menu override the switch on the ECMD control panel. Once DDD Cursor mode is exited the switch position on the ECMD overrides the menu selection and the menu disappears.
ECM Display
The RIOs ECM display can be selected with the use of the ECMD menu and ECMD cursor, or via the ECMD control panel ECM switch position.
(
(
(
(
BIT Display
No Function
Video Display
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Note: ECMD Video Menu display selection is overridden by actuation of the LCP TCS/LTS video feed button.
AN/ASQ-215 Mission Data Loader
Mission Data Loader
The Mission Data Loader (MDL) provides bulk storage of mission-essential data.
The Data Transfer Module (DTM) can be edited in the Mission Editor or the ground crew F10 menu, with a range of navigation and mission computer data. Navigation data are transferred to the CDNU using a special pass-through function of the EGI.
The MDL may contain two separate waypoint databases, a magnetic variation (MAGVAR) table, up to twelve flight plans, and the current GPS almanac. The waypoint databases contain 5-character alphanumeric identifiers and the associated data for each waypoint, as well as the effective dates of the information.
The primary waypoint database is maintained on the MDL. When a DTM is inserted into the MDL, identifier indices are automatically transferred into CDNU memory to speed the search process when a specific waypoint is requested. Transfer of the indices to the CDNU takes approximately 60 seconds. The primary waypoint database is not available until this process is complete.
The MDL Start page is accessed by scrolling up from the EGI Start 1/2 page or down from the EGI Start 2/2 page. Display line 3 contains the MDL cartridge label and date stamp; display line 3 is blank if no cartridge is installed. Display line 5 contains the date stamp for the MAGVAR table if it is loaded; otherwise, it is blank. Pressing LSK4 on this page erases the flight plan currently loaded into the CDNU. Pressing LSK8 transfers the user to the Flight Plan Select 1/2 page.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
If a primary database exists on the MDL, this is indicated by "↑PRI↑" on display line 2 of the MDL Start page. Display line 1 displays the effective dates for the database. Display line 3 displays the MDL cartridge label and date stamp; display line 3 is blank if no cartridge is installed. Display line 5 displays the date stamp for the magnetic variation database in the CDNU; display line 5 is blank if the database does not exist.
Flight Plan
(
Navigation lets the operator plan 12 unique flight plans with 50 preset waypoints each. JDAM lets the operator pre-plan a JDAM strike. CMDS lets the operator define countermeasure profiles. TIS lets the operator enter special settings for the Tactical Imaging Set.
(
(
(
Designation of Special Points, Bullseye, LANTIRN, and Priority Waypoints
The aircrew may designate any of the waypoints in a flight plan as the Bullseye waypoint or a LANTIRN waypoint, as well as designating them for one of the six special waypoints (FP, IP, HB, DP, HA, or ST).
This is done in the mission editor by appending the appropriate alphanumeric string to the waypoint name while assembling the flight plan. Addition of the Bullseye or LTS designation does not alter the waypoint label seen on the CDNU. The additional characters are used internally by the CDNU and MDP. The designation can also be changed on the CDNU.
Special Point Designation
If a waypoint name ends in "X##", where ## refers to any of the WCS Special Waypoints designators (FP, IP, HB, DP, HA, ST), then the CDNU will identify then waypoint as being assigned to that special waypoint. For example, "OCEANA" may be designated as Home Base by appending "XHB" to the waypoint name so that it reads: "OCEANAXHB".
The CDNU will not display the suffix, only the root name, although it will store the entire name. Note that waypoints designated as Special Points may also be designated as Destination or Bullseye waypoints. See the following paragraphs.
CAUTION If more than one waypoint is designated as the same Special Point (e.g. 2 WP’s assigned as HB) in a flight plan, the navigation system will ignore all of the waypoints so designated.
Upon activation of a flight plan, if the following designations are attached after the "X" or "X##" at the end of a waypoint name, the CDNU will identify the points accordingly.
-
"B" − Bullseye
-
"D" − Destination
-
"1" − Priority 1
-
"2" − Priority 2
-
"3" − Priority 3
-
"4" − "7" − Generic Priority
-
L − LTS
The D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and L modifications can also be made after Flight Plan upload using the CDNU Waypoint Edit 1/2 page. The Bullseye ‘B’ designation can be made or changed using the PTID NVD WP page, the TID OFFSET function, or BE REDESIG (D/L FB #4) on the CAP.
Bullseye Designation
If a waypoint name ends in "XB" or "X##B", where ## refers to any of the WCS Special Waypoint designators (FP, IP, HB, DP, HA, ST), the CDNU will identify the waypoint as the Bullseye Reference Point. For example, the waypoint "DALLAS" can be designated as the bullseye waypoint by changing its name to "DALLASXB". The CDNU will continue to display "DALLAS", but the MDP will identify the waypoint as the Bullseye Reference Point. Only one Bullseye waypoint can be designated in any given flight plan. If more than one waypoint name has the Bullseye suffix, the navigation system will ignore all of the points so designated.
LTS Designation
If a waypoint ends in "XL" or "X##L", where ## refers to any of the WCS Special Waypoint designators (FP, IP, HB, DP, HA, ST), the navigation system will transfer that waypoint to the LCP. For example, the waypoint "DALLAS" can be designated as a LANTIRN waypoint by changing its name to "DALLASXL". The CDNU will continue to display "DALLAS", but the weapon system will identify the waypoint as a LANTIRN waypoint. Up to 20 waypoints may be so designated. If more than 20 waypoints are designated as LANTIRN waypoints, only the first 20 in the flight plan will be transferred to the LCP.
Waypoint Display Priority
Due to system limitations a maximum of 18 waypoints − the six special points (FP, IP, HB, DP, HA, ST) and twelve additional waypoints − can be displayed at one time on the PTID TAC or NVD WP pages. With each flight plan able to contain up to 50 waypoints, some sort of prioritization scheme must be used to which waypoints will be visible at any given time on the PTID. The priorities used by the WCS for display are (in order):
-
Special Point
-
Priority WP (1, 2, and 3 in order)
-
Bullseye
-
Hooked WP
-
CDNU Fly−To WP (AUTO/MAN/OFLY)
-
Destination WP
-
Previous Hooked WP
-
Generic Priority
-
WP range
(the closest without a higher priority) With this scheme, the RIO may assign a priority to a waypoint so that it is always one of the 18 waypoints displayed (provided it is within range scale selected on the PTID). Waypoints that have two priority designations are counted only once for the purposes of display.
For example, if the Bullseye Point is also Hooked, it is given the Bullseye priority and no point is given the Hooked Point priority. Likewise, if a waypoint is both a Special Point and one of the priority waypoints as listed above, it is treated as a Special Point for display purposes and its status as a priority waypoint is ignored.
Plot Lines
Plot Lines may be drawn between a group of waypoint to delineate areas of interest like restricted areas, the Forward Edge Battle Area (FEBA), areas of hostile forces etc. A plot line may be inserted between any two waypoints contained in the CDNU active flight plan. Up to nine waypoints may be strung together to plot complex areas.
For an in depth discussion of plot lines refer to the PTID Plot Line chapter.
JDAM Planning Tool
The JDAM Planning Tool section is found in the GGW Pre Planned Employment Section.
ALE-47 Counter Measure Dispensing system (CMDS) programming
The CMDS programmer is found in the ALE-47 Section.
Tactical Imaging System
The TIS Section is found in the FTI Section.
Defensive Systems
The F-14B(U) Tomcat is equipped with the ALE-47 Countermeasure Dispensing System and can be fitted with the LAU-138 to defend itself against threats by dispensing chaff or flares.
Also installed on the aircraft is the ALR-67 Radar Warning Receiver to increase passive situational awareness by detecting airborne and surface-to-air radar threats.
For extended protection and radar jamming it can also carry the ECM Pods.
AN/ALE-47 Countermeasures Dispensing Set
The F-14B Upgrade is equipped with the AN/ALE-47 Countermeasure Dispensing Set. The ALE-47 uses the legacy launchers from the AN/ALE-29 and integrates the LAU-138 Chaff and Flare Dispenser.
The launchers each have two sections, one containing 10 cartridges and the other 20. They are referred to as the left and right dispensers, even though the left dispenser is actually the forward launcher and the right dispenser is the aft launcher, with both mounted in line on the left side of the tailhook.
The launchers have a total capacity of 60 cartridges. Each section can hold only one type of cartridge, meaning that any combination of cartridges is possible as long as the quantity of each type is a multiple of 10. The ALE-47 recognizes loaded cartridges, so when reloading cartridges the panel automatically presents totalized countermeasure values.
The system provides eight programs that can be defined in the Mission Editor CMDS section of the DTC. The pilot only has control of Program 8 via the DLC switch on the control stick. Programs 5, 6, and 7 are actuated using the RIO's countermeasure switches located above the DDD. Programs 1 through 4 can be used as automatic, semi-automatic, or manual programs. Depending on the selected operating mode, these programs are dispensed using the inboard RIO countermeasure switch located above the DDD.
Digital Control Display Unit (DCDU)
The DCDU is located on the RIO right side console. It serves as the primary operator interface with the CMDS. The DCDU allows the operator to jettison remaining expendables, see system information as displayed by the 16 character display, inhibit the dispensing of specified countermeasures, initiate BIT, select mode of operation, and select one of four pre-programmed dispense programs.
INHIBIT Button Functions
The INHIBIT function is initiated by pressing one of seven expendable inhibit buttons: Other 1, Other 2, Chaff, Flares, Radar Warning Receiver (RWR), Missile Warning System (MWS), or Jammer (JMR). When depressed, the respective LED will illuminate when the countermeasure type is inhibited from dispensing.
OTHER 1 Button
The (O1) button (
OTHER 2 Button
The (O2) button (
CHAFF Button
The (CH) button (
FLARES Button
The (FL) button (
Radar Warning Receiver Button
The RWR button is (
Missile Warning System Button
The MWS button (
JAMMER Button
The JAMMER button is (
💡 Not functional.
ENTER/BUILT IN TEST Button
Actuating the ENT/BIT switch (
💡 Not functional.
Guarded JETTISON Switch
The guarded JETTISON switch (
MODE Control Switch
The Mode control switch (
OFF Position
OFF mode interrupts all power to the CMDS dispenser assemblies. This MODE of operation is overridden by JETTISON only
STANDBY Position
STBY mode allows the CMDS to power-up and initialize. The only dispensing function available while in STBY is JETTISON.
MANUAL Position
MAN mode allows the operator to select a manual program for dispensing. One of the Four programs (1-4) selected by the MANUAL switch can be initiated by actuating the designated DISPENSE switch. In manual the system will default to the program chosen on the manual switch and the actuation of the inboard switch on the countermeasure dispense switches only dispenses that chosen program. Programs 5, 6 and 7 may also be dispensed by actuating the RIO countermeasure dispense switches above the DDD. Countermeasures will be dispensed in accordance with parameters as defined by the MDL.
SEMI-AUTOMATIC Position
SEMI mode allows the operator to select a manual dispensing program. One of four preset programs, selected with the MANUAL switch, can be initiated by actuating the designated DISPENSE switch. When the system detects a threat programmed via the MDL, it selects the appropriate dispensing program. However, the selected program will only be dispensed once the RIO depresses the inboard countermeasure switch. As long as enough countermeasures remain, the operator requested program can be dispensed at the same time as the semi-automatic program. All programs are available for semi-automatic dispensing, provided they are pre-set via the DTM.
AUTOMATIC Position
AUTO mode allows the system to respond automatically to detected threats. When the system detects a threat programmed via the MDL, it automatically selects and dispenses the appropriate countermeasure program without requiring RIO input. All programs are available for automatic dispensing, provided they are pre-set via the DTM.
The inboard countermeasure switch is disabled as long as no program has been selected by the system. Programs 5, 6, 7, and 8 continue to function normally.
BYPASS Position
BYP allows selection of bypass mode for jettison only. To select the BYP position press knob down at AUTO position and turn.
MANUAL Switch
The Manual switch (
Positions 1 through 4
Switch positions 1 through 4 are used to select one of four pre-programmed dispense programs. The selected dispense program is initiated by a command from the designated dispense switch in MAN, SEMI, and AUTO modes.
PROGRAM Position
If PRG is selected the ALE-47 system will default to manual program 4 for dispense.
READY/NO GO Display
The Ready display (
The NO GO annunciator illuminates when the CMDS is NOT ready to dispense because of a system failure, during initial power-up, and in BYP Mode.
Controls and Operation
💡 In DCS the F-14 countermeasure loadout is set in the Mission Editor, see DCS Mission Editor Functions Specific to the HB DCS F-14 or controlled through the radio menu under ground crew. The default setting in the mission editor is bypassed. To see the real loadout check the kneeboard.
Programmer
The Programmer is part of the Programmer Panel Assembly and is the central processing, controlling and communications unit of the CMDS.
Countermeasure preset priority
Priorities can be assigned to any program. When a higher priority program is running, initiating a lower priority program will not have any effect, where initiating a higher priority program will override the previously running program.
Bingo
A Countermeasure Bingo can be defined in the Mission editor and programmed into the MDL. When that Bingo state is reached the ALE-47 panel with show "LoXX", where XX indicates the number of countermeasures of any type remaining as per the DTM setting.
🔴 WARNING: All countermeasure cartridge ejection is inhibited while the weight on wheels sensor is active, preventing countermeasure ejection while on the ground.
(
(
(
RIO Hand Hold Switches
Two countermeasure switch hats (
The switches are functionally mirrored.
- Up - Initiates CMS program 5.
- Down - Initiates CMS program 6.
- Inboard - Initiates CMS program 1-4, depending on which semi-automatic program is selected or which program is selected on the DCDU.
- Outboard - Initiates CMS program 7.
Countermeasure dispenser setup
The F-14 both has the native countermeasure buckets mounted on the main airframe, as detailed above they can be filled with chaff or flares in sets of 10. So for example 30 chaff and 30 flare can be mounted in the buckets.
The F-14B(U) tomcat is also equipped with the LAU-138 rails, these rails in reality held BOL Chaff and BOL Flares. Due to the limited DCS simulation only Chaff is available for dispensing from the LAU-138.
Each rail is filled with 40 chaff packets, the rails always dispense together, providing 40 chaff releases.
LAU-138
The LAU-138 chaff dispenser was developed to meet the need for additional chaff cartridge payload capacity. The launcher itself was developed in Sweden by CelsiusTech as a chaff dispenser integrated into a rail designed to replace the LAU-7 Sidewinder rail. Each rail holds up to 160 chaff packages, each smaller than a normal chaff cartridge while still enabling the mounting of a single AIM-9 Sidewinder.
On the F-14, the LAU-138 was used mounted on the 1A and 8A stations. While technically able to be mounted on the respective B stations as well, it was not possible to refill the launcher while mounted there, so it was not used there operationally.
With the LAU-138s mounted, the ALE-47 automatically recognizes the amount of chaff available in the rails.
Each launcher holds 160 chaff packages, and each ejection impulse ejects four packages from each launcher, each package being about 1/4 the size of a normal chaff cartridge. This results in each ejection impulse ejecting the equivalent of two chaff cartridges in total, and a total of 40 ejections being available from the launchers.
The F-14 also has native countermeasure buckets mounted on the main airframe. They can be filled with chaff or flares in sets of 10, so for example 30 chaff and 30 flare can be mounted in the buckets.
The F-14B(U) Tomcat is also equipped with LAU-138 rails; these rails in reality held BOL chaff and BOL flares. Due to the limitations of the DCS simulation, only chaff is available for dispensing from the LAU-138.
Each rail is filled with 40 chaff packets, and the rails always dispense together, providing 40 chaff releases.
LANTIRN TARGETING SYSTEM
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | A/A Mode |
| 2. | A/G Mode |
| 3. | Q (Cue) Modes |
| 4. | Waypoint List |
| 5. | Coordinate formats |
| 6. | LTS Designated Waypoints |
| 7. | LTS Video Elements |
LANTIRN
The LANTIRN (Low Altitude Navigation and Targeting Infrared for Night) system was originally developed as a combined navigation and targeting pod for the F-15E and F-16. When the U.S. Navy sought to expand the F-14 Tomcat's air-to-ground capability, Martin Marietta (now Lockheed Martin) adapted the targeting pod for integration with the aircraft. The navigation pod was omitted, leaving only the targeting pod in service with the F-14.
On early F-14 implementations, the aircraft lacked the required MIL-STD-1553 data bus for full integration. The LANTIRN pod therefore operated as a largely self-contained system.
The F-14B Upgrade introduces full integration between the aircraft and the LANTIRN pod. The pod now communicates directly with aircraft systems, allowing the VDIGR to display the LANTIRN line of sight in all operating modes. Integration with the AWG-9 radar also enables the pod to automatically slave to the radar line of sight.
The LANTIRN control panel (LCP) is retained in the F-14B Upgrade, TCS Video Feed or LTS video feed can still be toggled via the LCP TCS/LTS video switch. TCS or LANTIRN video feeds can also be selected through the ECMD video Menu.
The LANTIRN FLIR sensor provides three selectable fields of view. The Wide field of view covers 5.9° and supports a maximum slew rate of 8.5° per second. The Narrow field of view covers 1.7° with a maximum slew rate of 1.8° per second. The Expanded field of view provides a 0.8° digital zoom of the Narrow field of view, reducing image resolution while limiting maximum slew rate to 0.7° per second.
A/A Mode
Integration with the AWG-9 radar enables the pod to automatically slave to the radar line of sight during air-to-air when QADL is selected and the radar is in STT. The RIO can command a LANTIRN point track to continue tracking the target independently, even if the STT track is lost. If point track is subsequently lost, the pod automatically returns to QADL.
A/G Mode
In A/G mode the LANTIRN operates in 3 Basic Tracking modes:
Area Track
Area track enables the LTS to track a fixed Infrared (IR) scene if the scene contains some temperature variations or thermal texture. The LTS enters area track when commanded by the RIO or when the system defaults from point track. Once selected, an AREA status indication appears on the RIO PTID LTS display. If area track is selected but lock-on is unobtainable, the LTS defaults to computed rates track.
Computed Rates Track
Computed rates track provides interim line of sight (LOS) control during the transition from one LOS control scheme to another, or whenever track is temporarily broken. The computed rates track logic calculates the current position of the target from previous target motion data to maintain target tracking until the ensuing function takes control of the LTS LOS. The LTS defaults to the computed rates track function if other tracking modes cannot be entered or maintained.
Point Track
Point track enables the LTS line of sight (LOS) to track a hot spot such as a tank or vehicle. The LTS enters point track when selected by the RIO. Once selected, a POINT status indication appears on the PTID LTS display. If point track is selected but lock-on cannot be obtained or maintained (e.g., the target is too close and has too little thermal detail to point track), the LTS defaults to area track mode, except A-A mode in which case the LTS transitions to computed rates mode.
💡 Point Track with the LANTIRN can only be engaged on object that appear white on a dark background no matter the polarity mode (WHOT or BHOT). In DCS, due to limitations in simulation, Point Track can only be initiated in WHOT mode. Once Point Track is successfully engaged in WHOT, it is possible to change the polarity to BHOT.
Q (Cue) Modes
-
Q Waypoint: With Q waypoint any of 20 LTS designated waypoints can be toggled to. (See Waypoint list explanation below).
-
Q GGW Target: GPS Guided Weapon Targets Stored in the Mission Data Processor can be cued by the LTS, these targets are stored separately from the overall 20 waypoint list.
-
Q HUD: slaves the LTS LOS to the HUD.
-
Q SNOWPLOW: slaves the sensor to the ground 15 NM directly in front of the aircraft along own aircraft heading. QADL and QHUD slave the sensor to either ADL (in A/A) or the aircraft wings symbol on the HUD (in A/G).
-
Q DES: slaves the LTS back to the last obtained designation.
-
Q Bullseye: slaves the LTS to the Bullseye Designated waypoint.
Waypoint List
The LANTIRN Pod can access a list of 20 waypoints designated either during pre flight planning or via the CDNU. Additionally any newly created LTS waypoint is stored in the LTS waypoint list. The LTS waypoint list is modified via the WP Edit 2/2 page. LTS waypoints are marked by a small L posted on the NVD PLT and NVD WP pages.
Coordinate formats
The CDNU RNAV page lets the RIO toggle between DMS, DMM and MGRS coordinate formats for display on the LTS display.
| Type | Display Example |
|---|---|
| MGRS | 37TDH4989754515 |
| Lat/Long DMM | N4358.257W10700.347 |
| Lat/Long DMS | LAT N133528.44 LONG E1445647.76 |
LTS Designated Waypoints
The RIO may create a new CDNU flight plan waypoint directly from a LANTIRN target designation. After establishing a valid LANTIRN target designation, holding the S-7 FOV switch on the LANTIRN Control Panel (LCP) for at least 2 seconds stores the designated target coordinates (latitude/longitude) and GPS Figure of Merit (FOM) as a new waypoint in the active flight plan. New LTS-generated waypoints are assigned the next available waypoint number beginning with Waypoint 51.
If fewer than 20 waypoints in the flight plan are designated as LANTIRN (LTS) waypoints, the new waypoint is automatically assigned the LTS designation and is identified by an "L" in the upper-right corner of the waypoint number on the PTID NVD page. If 20 LTS-designated waypoints already exist, the waypoint is still created but is not assigned the LTS designation.
The waypoint name is automatically generated to indicate the quality of the target designation using the following format:
/LT[Laser][GPS][FOM]
Where:
-
The first character is:
- "*" – Valid laser range available at designation.
- "-" – No valid laser range available.
-
The second character is:
- "*" – GPS aiding available at designation.
- "-" – GPS aiding unavailable.
-
The final digit is the GPS Figure of Merit (FOM).
Examples:
- "
/LT**1" – Valid laser range, GPS aiding available, FOM 1. - "
/LT-*4" – No laser range, GPS aiding available, FOM 4.
When the designation is made with both valid laser ranging and GPS aiding, and
the GPS Figure of Merit is 1 ("/LT**1"), the target altitude displayed by
the LANTIRN is transferred to the waypoint. If these conditions are not met, the
waypoint altitude is set to 0 feet.
Holding the S-7 FOV switch for more than two seconds always creates a new waypoint. If valid target coordinates are not currently displayed on the FLIR, such as when operating in QHUD mode, the last available target coordinates are stored instead. Likewise, if the LANTIRN is cued to a GPS-Guided Weapon (GGW) target or an existing waypoint, those displayed coordinates are copied into the new waypoint.
If the LANTIRN calculates a negative Height Above Ellipsoid (HAE) during waypoint creation, an incorrect altitude may be transferred to the CDNU. In this case, the RIO must manually correct the waypoint altitude using the CDNU after the transfer is complete.
LANTIRN North Cue
During close air support (CAS) or Forward Air Controller Airborne FAC(A) missions it is crucial for the aircrew to know where north is based on where the LTS is looking. As such with the F-14B(U) software tapes an LTS north indicator was introduced. The circle represents a simplified rotating compass the square always points to where north is. So if for example the square is left of the circle, then the LANTIRN pod is facing eastwards.
LANTIRN Line Of Sight Cue
The LANTIRN Line of Sight Cue is presented in the VDIG-R when the RIO has LTS selected on the LCP. It replaces the TCS cue in both A/A and A/G when selected. If LANTIRN is in a non tracking mode an "N" is presented at the bottom of the triangle. The tracking modes are AREA Track and POINT track. In all other modes or Q modes an N is posted in the triangle. When the LTS cue is outside the HUD field of view it becomes dashed. In A/A with LANTIRN slewed to the radar LOS in STT the LTS LOS cue points along the radar LOS.
LANTIRN Video Elements
(
- Position
- Altitude
- Groundspeed
- Pitch Angle
(
- WHOT (White Hot) or BHOT (Black Hot)
- AGC (Automatic Gain Control) or
- MGC (Manual Gain Control)
(
- SRA: slant range
- AZ and EL is pod line of
sight azimuth and elevation
relative aircraft ADL - UTC Time
- IBIT Codes
(
- A/G Mode or A/A Mode
- Rates Track (RATES)
- Area Track (AREA)
- Point Track (POINT)
- LASER CODE
- Weapon Type
(
- Target Information Q (Current Slew Point) (Except for QSNO, QADL, QHUD)
- Time to go until on top of the Currently selected Q
- Bearing and Range to Q
- Elevation to Q
- Location of Q (Only Displayed if a Location Q is selected)
(
- Stores Status and Time To Impact Indicators. (S6XXX) (S3RDY)
- Vertical line is the bomb release cue.
- The bomb release cue, is only shown if the selected Q is QDES and shows a vertical line along which a release cue travels downwards.
- TREL (Time to Release) changes to
- TIMP (Time to Impact) after bomb release
(
(
(
- Steering guidance towards the selected Q.
- Top line is deviation from heading (L/R Degrees)
LANTIRN Display on PTID
The LANTIRN pod feed is displayed on PTID via depressing the TCS switch in front of the HCU. With the video feed enabled TCS and LTS feeds can be toggled via the LANTIRN control panel or the ECMD video Menu.
Once the TCS or LANTIRN feeds are displayed on PTID they are overlaid with the PTID symbology. To disable the PTID symbology depress Pushbutton 7 OL on the PTID Menu.
For a complete discussion of LANTIRN modes and controls refer to the LANTIRN Chapter in the F-14A/B manual.
DIGITAL FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | Stability Augmentation System |
| 2. | Autopilot |
| 3. | Pilot Relief and Guidance Modes |
| 4. | DFCS Test |
The Digital Flight Control System
The Digital Flight Control System (DFCS) was designed to replace the F-14's original analogue Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS). The DFCS retained all the functions of the AFCS, including a stability augmentation system, an autopilot, and auxiliary control functions for the spoilers, control authority, and automatic trim. In addition, the DFCS provides functions to enhance high AOA and Power Approach flight characteristics.
The DFCS augments the aircraft natural damping characteristics and provides automatic commands for control of attitude, altitude, heading, and approach modes selected by the pilot. All DFCS functions are integrated into the primary flight control system.
The DFCS also provides an Up and Away Automatic Rudder Interconnect (UA-ARI) to provide enhanced departure resistance, spin recovery, and high angle of attack flying qualities with the landing gear retracted. The DFCS also provides a Power Approach Automatic Rudder Interconnect (PA-ARI) to enhance the landing approach flying qualities with the landing gear extended.
DFCS hardware and software included existing aircraft sensors, interfaces, series servo-actuators, and actuator authorities, with the addition of a rudder pedal position transducer, a pitch/roll voter monitor, and an angle of attack/Mach redundancy management algorithm. The autopilot and automatic carrier landing functions of the AFCS were replicated in the DFCS in digital format.
The DFCS consists of three computers, one computer for each axis (pitch, roll, and yaw), that replaced the three AFCS computers. Each computer has two distinct and independent processors called channels, or segregation, with one "A" and one "B" channel per axis, each controlling one of the dual series servo-actuators. All channels share data through cross-channel data links. A BIT capability is provided to exercise in-flight monitoring and to conduct an automatic operational readiness test for preflight checks.
Stability Augmentation System
Stability augmentation is provided for all three aircraft axes (pitch, roll, and yaw) and is controlled by the three STAB AUG switches on the upper half of the DFCS control panel (DCP). SAS is engaged by placing these switches to ON during normal post-start procedures.
The PITCH, ROLL, and YAW STAB AUG switches are manually operated toggle switches mechanically held in the selected ON or OFF position. The pitch SAS incorporates a pitch rate feedback function that is reduced as airspeed is increased above 650 KIAS. This is necessary to maintain adequate control system stability and is not noticeable. The roll SAS is independent with the landing gear up, at low angle of attack (less than 15 units), and at supersonic flight conditions. At all other conditions, the roll SAS is part of the UA-ARI and PA-ARI. Similar to the pitch SAS, the roll rate feedback is reduced as airspeed is increased above 300 KIAS. With the landing gear down, the yaw SAS becomes part of the PA-ARI.
All SAS switches should remain ON during flight. Deselection of either the ROLL or YAW SAS switch will disable the affected SAS axis and all ARI functions, and illuminate the ARI/SAS OUT caution light. Deselection of the PITCH SAS switch will disable the pitch SAS, but no caution light will illuminate since no restriction exist for PITCH SAS OFF.
Depressing the paddle switch does not disable the pitch and roll SAS. If problems are suspected with any SAS axis, the appropriate STAB AUG switch must be manually selected OFF. Depressing the paddle switch disengages the autopilot and DLC (inflight and on deck).
Autopilot
The autopilot is controlled by four switches on the lower half of the DFCS control panel, and the autopilot reference and nosewheel steering pushbutton on the stick grip. With all three SAS axes engaged, autopilot operation is commanded by placing the ENGAGE/OFF switch to ENGAGE. No warmup period is required. The autopilot may be engaged with the aircraft in any attitude. If, however, aircraft attitude exceeds ±30° in pitch and ±60° in roll, the autopilot will automatically return the aircraft to these limits. Normally, the EGI is the prime reference and AHRS a backup.
Pilot Relief and Guidance Modes
Control Stick Steering
With the autopilot engaged, the aircraft may be maneuvered using control stick steering. In control stick steering mode, the DFCS automatically synchronizes to the new attitude.
Attitude Hold
Attitude hold is selected by setting the AUTO-PILOT ENGAGE switch to ENGAGE. To change attitude, use control stick steering. Re-engagement is achieved by releasing pressure on the stick. The autopilot will hold pitch attitudes up to ±30° and bank angles up to ±60°. EGI failure will cause mode disagreement and the engage switch will return off. The mode may be reengaged using AHRS as a reference.
Heading Hold
Heading (HDG) hold is engaged by setting the HDG-OFF-GT switch to HDG. After maneuvering the aircraft to the desired reference heading, release the control stick at a bank angle of less than ±5°. The autopilot will then hold the aircraft on the desired heading. Heading reference is obtained from the AHRS via the CSDC(R).
Altitude Hold
Altitude hold mode is engaged by setting the ALT-OFF switch to ALT. When the A/P REF warning light illuminates, press the nosewheel steering pushbutton when at the desired altitude. This will engage the altitude hold mode and the A/P REF warning light will go off. Applying 10 pounds of longitudinal stick force will cause the A/P REF warning light to illuminate. The mode may be reengaged by depressing the nosewheel steering pushbutton on the stick grip, when at the desired altitude, and observing that the A/P REF warning light goes off.
Altitude hold should not be engaged during any maneuvers requiring large, rapid, pitch trim changes because of limited servo authority and slow automatic trim rate. Disengagement of altitude hold is accomplished by applying 10 pounds or more longitudinal stick force or by placing the ALT-OFF switch to OFF.
DFCS Test
The DFCS has several self-test modes. These include power-up BIT (PBIT), initiated BIT (IBIT), and automatic BIT (ABIT). The results of these tests are indicated by the illumination of applicable caution lights, maintenance file acronyms, and DFCS control panel (DCP) fault display codes
DFCS Initiated BIT (IBIT)
A DFCS Initiated BIT is a thorough preflight indication of DFCS performance and can be obtained during post-start OBC or a DFCS BIT. All SAS switches must be engaged, weight-on-wheels, flaps extended greater than 25° or wings swept aft of 62°, and ANTI-SKID SPOILER BK switch OFF. If one of these interlocks is not satisfied the DFCS will not enter the IBIT ARM state. The AUTOPILOT switch must be engaged to test autopilot functions and can only be engaged in the IBIT ARM state.
F-14B Upgrade Weapons Employment
The F-14B Upgrade added a whole host of new A/G stores and a plethora of ways to both employ A/A and A/G ordnance.
The F-14B Upgrade, like earlier F-14s, features 4 main types of air-to-air weaponry: the Long-Range Active Radar Homing (LRM ARH) AIM-54 Phoenix missile, the Medium-Range Semi-Active Radar Homing (MRM SARH) AIM-7 missile, the Short-Range Infrared-Guided (SRM IR) AIM-9 missile, and the M61A1 Vulcan cannon.
The aircraft can be armed with a variety of bombs, rockets, and guided munitions to engage and neutralize ground targets. All A/G stores carried in earlier F-14 versions are retained.
As opposed to older versions of the F-14 Tomcat, the F-14B Upgrade attains the ability to employ GPS-guided weapons (GGW). These include the GBU-31 with the 2,000-pound hard-target penetrator BLU-109 or 2,000-pound general-purpose BLU-117 warhead; the GBU-38 with the 500-pound general-purpose BLU-111 warhead; and the Enhanced GBU-24E/B Paveway III with the 2,000-pound hard-target penetrator BLU-109 warhead.
Loadout
The F-14B Upgrade is able to employ GPS and Laser Guided Stores from stations 4 - 5 - 3 - 6, also commonly refered to as the tunnel stations. These stations utilze the phoenix pylon paired with the BRU-32 rack. The implementation of the 1553 data bus allows the aircraft to send targeting data to the stations for transferral into the JDAMs.
The GPS Guided stores available for the F-14B Upgrade are:
- GBU-31v(2)
- GBU-31v(4)
- GBU-24
- GBU-38
Loading of stores in the tunnel follows certain restrictions. These restrictions are only applied in DCS if the air-to-ground stores cannot physically fit side by side or behind one another in the tunnel, as is the case for the GBU-24 for example.
Nonetheless, certain carriage rules should be followed to ensure that the Tomcat remains within CG limits and is flyable throughout all flight regimes.
For single-type store loadouts, it is recommended to load the stores from front to back and release them in a back-to-front sequence. For example, when loading two GBU-31 JDAMs, they should be loaded on the front stations (3 and 6). When loading four GBU-31 JDAMs, they should then be released in the opposite order, i.e. back to front. Stations 4 and 5 should be released first, followed by stations 3 and 6.
When employing mixed loadouts, it is desirable to stagger the weapons in the tunnel. This ensures that stores can always be released from back to front while providing the aircrew with the ability to choose which stores are released. For example, when employing a mixed loadout of two GBU-31s and two GBU-12s, stations 3 and 6 should each carry one GBU-31 and one GBU-12, while stations 4 and 5 should each carry a GBU-31 and a GBU-12 on the opposite side.
The F-14B Upgrade Tomcat in DCS comes with a default set of loadouts. These loadouts follow the Standard Conventional Loadout (SCL) principle. The SCLs are divided into air-to-air (A/A) and air-to-ground (A/G) categories, with a few special loadouts for TARPS missions and peacetime flight operations.
The A/G SCLs in particular are not intended to provide a comprehensive set of loadouts, but rather a standard format in which specific air-to-ground stores can be exchanged depending on the mission.
The SCLs are listed below, together with their gross weights and maximum trap fuel weights. The maximum trap fuel weight is the amount of fuel the Tomcat can carry with the specific loadout while remaining at the maximum carrier landing weight of 54,000 pounds.
| SCL | Description | AA Stores | A/G Stores | Gross Weight | Max Trap Fuel Weight |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| AAW01 | BFM | (0/0/2) | — | — | — |
| AAW02 | Light CAP | (1/1/1) | — | — | — |
| AAW03 | Light CAP | (1/2/2) | — | — | — |
| AAW04 | Medium CAP | (2/3/2) | — | — | — |
| AAW05 | Heavy CAP | (4/2/2) | — | — | — |
| AAW06 | Six Shooter | (6/0/2) | — | — | — |
| AG01 | Light Strike | (1/0/2) | 1×GBU-12, 1×GBU-16 | — | — |
| AG02 | Medium CAS | (1/0/2) | 2×GBU-12, 2×GBU-38 | — | — |
| AG03 | Medium CAS | (1/0/2) | 2×GBU-38, 2×GBU-16 | — | — |
| AG04 | Medium Strike | (1/0/2) | 2×GBU-31 | — | — |
| AG05 | Heavy CAS | (1/0/2) | 2×GBU-31, 2×GBU-12 | — | — |
| AG06 | Heavy Strike | (1/0/2) | 2×GBU-24E/B | — | — |
| AG07 | Heavy Strike | (1/0/2) | 3×GBU-31 | — | — |
| AG08 | Heavy Strike | (0/0/1) | 4×GBU-31 | — | — |
| AG09 | Self Escort Strike | (2/1/2) | 1×GBU-38 | — | — |
| TARPS01 | TARPS | (0/2/2) | TARPS Pod | — | — |
| TNG01 | — | (0/0/0) | ACMI Pod | — | — |
| TNG02 | — | (1/0/2) | ACMI Pod | — | — |
| SPL01 | SARH | (0/4/4) | — | — | — |
| SPL02 | Clean | (0/0/4) | — | — | — |
The air to air stores are listed in a standard format.(AIM-54/AIM-7/AIM-9) The AIM-54 Phoenix is always written first, the AIM-7 Sparrow is second, the AIM-9 is third.
For Example: (2/3/2) is 2x AIM-54s; 3x AIM-7s and 2x AIM-9s.
🚧 Work In Progress
Armaments Section Overview
This section covers the F-14B(U) specific weapons employment. For A/A weapons employment specific VDIG-R Formats and PTID Formats are covered. For a detailed discussion on the AWG-9 weapons system refer to the AWG-9 Section in the F-14A/B manual. For A/G the section covers GPS Guided Weapons (GGW) employment in detail. Laser Guided Weapons (LGB) and Unguided Weapons employment are also covered.
Magnetic Tape Load
The Tomcat's weapons control system uses magnetic tape programs to load mission-specific software into the aircraft's computer. The computer has three levels of memory: Non-Destructive Readout (NDRO) memory, which permanently stores the main tactical program; Destructive Readout (DRO) memory, which serves as working memory for mission-specific software; and bulk storage, provided by the magnetic tape system.
The main tactical program is stored in NDRO memory and is always available. It controls the overall operation of the weapons control system, including air-to-air radar modes, such as TWS or RWS etc. Special programs, such as air-to-ground (A/G), TID AVIA, or training software, are stored on magnetic tape. When required, they are loaded from the tape into DRO memory, replacing any previously loaded special program. Because DRO memory cannot hold multiple special programs simultaneously, only one can be active at a time. Depending on the program, loading can take from several seconds to several minutes.
In the F-14B(U), air-to-ground magnetic tapes are loaded through the PTID Menu page as part of the startup procedure if A/G operations are planned. Once the A/G program is loaded, no other special program can be accessed until it is replaced. Without the A/G program loaded, the AWG-9 radar cannot operate in air-to-ground ranging mode.
However, with the A/G program loaded, when selecting MANUAL on the ACP attack mode selector, the A/G radar ranging function of the AWG-9 is disabled while leaving the A/G program loaded. This allows the AWG-9 to operate in all air-to-air modes and permitting the employment of air-to-ground stores that do not require radar ranging.
Air To Air Weapons Employment
VDIG-R
PTID
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | Buffer Readouts |
| 2. | HAFU |
| 3. | Target Aspect |
| 4. | PTID Attack |
| 5. | PTID Ground Stab |
| 6. | Expand Mode |
| 7. | Bullseye |
Vertical Display Indicator Group Replacement A/A
The VDIG-R (Vertical Display Indicator Group Replacement) was introduced as part of the F-14B upgrade program to address the limitations of the original F-14A-era pilot displays and HUD.
For air-to-air employment, the VDIG-R serves as the pilot's primary tactical display. During A/A combat the pilots need to reference the HSD for situational awareness is greatly reduced, all TWS tracks are displayed directly in the HUD. Tracks hooked by the RIO are denoted with whiskers and associated track information is posted on the right side of the HUD. An angle off nose indicator directs the pilot to hooked TWS tracks outside the HUDs field of view. The following section will describe the VDIG-Rs A/A symbology in detail.
VDIG-R Symbology common to all A/A formats
Target Designator (TD) Box
TD box either represents radar target line of sight for a Single Target Track (STT), or the location in azimuth and elevation for each Track While Scan track. All tracks built by the AWG-9 in TWS are presented in the HUD as target designate boxes. A FONO (a numeral from 1 to 6) or a TOF counter (0 to 99 seconds) will be displayed to the right of the TD box.
| Target Designate Box Variation | Meaning | Target Designate Box Variation | Meaning |
|---|---|---|---|
| Unknown | Friendly | ||
| Unknown Hooked | Friendly Hooked | ||
| Hostile | Outside IFOV | ||
| Hostile Hooked | Outside IFOV Hooked |
Note: any type of TD box (UNKNOWN, FRIEND, HOSTILE) becomes dashed when outside the IFOV.
TD Box Modifiers
"Whiskers" indicate associated track is hooked, shape indicates track classification (UNKNOWN, FRIEND, HOSTILE).
Firing Order Number
With AIM-54 selected and in TWS mode all TWS tracks are designated with a Firing Order Number (FONO). FONO is shown right of TD box. FONO 1 is always the next launch target. RIO can manually redesignate FONO 1 using the next launch button. Shown in the TWS AIM-54 Typical A/A Cues during intercept below. Once AIM-54 is launched (Post LTE cycle), Time to Active is displayed right of TD box until Active Parameters are met.
Time to Impact indicator
With Sparrow selected after sparrow launch, the sparrow time to impact indicator is shown on right of the Target Designate box. Shown in the STT AIM-7 Typical A/A Cues after LTE graphic below.
Active Cue "ACT"
indicates AIM−54C Active parameters met.
Shoot Cue
"SHOOT" − indicates target between Rmax and Rmin ranges.
FFDL Wingman
Symbology similar to PTID, displayed on HUD when FFDL wingman is within +/-45° of own A/C nose, and less than 4 TD boxes are present.
RWR Symbols
ALR−67 RWR HUD symbology.
| Icon | Meaning |
|---|---|
| Seaborne Threat Radar | |
| AAA Threat Radar | |
| SAM Threat Radar | |
| A/A Threat Radar | |
| Unknown Threat Radar |
Steering Tee
The Steering Tee symbol provides three types of steering commands in the A/A mode. The VDI steering tee information is displayed on both VDI and HUD.
-
When an A/A weapon is selected, the steering tee is used in conjunction with the ASE circle (LRD described below) for weapons steering.
-
If the radar is in STT without a weapon select (no ASE circle), the steering tee provides RIO selected attack steering.
-
When in TWS AUTO, the steering tee provides steering to a weighted centroid of TWS targets.
The steering is referenced to the Launch Range Designator to determine allowable steering error for weapon steering of SW, SP or PH.
Launch Range Designator (LRD)
The Launch Range Designator presents normalized target range, maximum range (Rmax), median range (Ropt) and minimum range (Rmin) launch cues to the pilot. It consists of a dashed circle, a solid range tape with reference tic and three triangles that represent Rmax, Ropt and Rmin. The range tape (and reference mark) is a circular arc that unwinds counterclockwise to show normalized target range, uncovering the dashed circle. The Rmax cue is placed at the 6:00 position of the circle, the Rmin cue is placed at the 2:30 position, and Ropt is placed per the Ropt calculation. It is shown with all A/A weapons except GUN.
Target Angle Off Nose Indicator
The HUD displays a relative bearing readout below the center of the heading scale that provides bearing to the currently hooked A/A Track, or an indication to of the most direct route to the LP for a hooked GGW target. The arrow indicates the direction to steer, and the numerical readout provides the number of degrees to turn. The Angle Off Nose indicator is paired with the Target Locator Line (TLL).
Target Locator Line
TLL originates at Angle Off Nose (AON) readout and points to the currently selected TD box if the TD box is outside the HUD IFOV. TLL points in azimuth elevation. Displayed in A/A only.
F−Pole Cue
Cue to heading for maximum F−pole. (Single Solid Vertial Bar) Provides cues to achieve maximum slant range between the launch aircraft and target, at the time of missile impact. Displayed in PDSTT and TWSA.
Notch Cue
The Notch Cue (Double Solid Vertial Bar) is presented on the heading scale and provides the pilot steering to put the F−14 into the beam of the target. The cue is only provided in PDSTT. When the PDSTT lock is broken, the information is stored and the cue is displayed for an additional 15 seconds. Note Due to AWG−9 tracking limitations, after gimbaling the radar, the Notch Cue can initially overshoot the beam by approximately 5 degrees.
A/A Track Info Box
Target Altitude
Displayed in A/A mode, and A/G mode when Surface Target is hooked on the PTID. The AWG−9 calculates target altitude from available data. Target altitude is displayed in thousands of feet to one decimal point preceded by the legend ALT. Shows a leading zero only if altitude is less than 1000 feet. Target altitude is not available with GUN selected.
Target Range
Displayed in A/A mode and in A/G mode when Surface Target is hooked on the PTID. Target range in nautical miles is preceded by the legend RNG. There are two range scales used. The high 0−255.75 nmi scale and the low 0−0.9 nmi scale. The low scale is displayed only when GUN is selected in A/A mode. The display shows two decimal places if in the high scale and one decimal if in the low scale. When using the low scale, the resolution is to the nearest tenth of a mile (0.1) and when in the high scale, the resolution is to the nearest quarter of a mile (0.25). Range is blanked if invalid, and followed by a plus sign if extrapolating.
Target Bearing
Displayed in A/A mode, and A/G mode when Surface Target is hooked; preceded by the legend BRG.
Target Closure Rate
The AWG−9−supplied target closure rate is displayed when in A/A mode, preceded by the legend VC. It is up to four digits long and displayed to one nautical mile per hour. A minus sign preceding numbers indicates negative closure. Target Closure Rate symbol is followed by a plus sign if extrapolating.
Target Radial Velocity
Displays target velocity component along LOS to F−14. Preceded by a minus sign when opening.
Target Bullseye
Bullseye−to−Target "BT" bearing and range.
Ownship Bullseye
Displays Bullseye−to−Aircraft "BA".
TWS AIM-54 Typical A/A Cues during intercept
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
TWS AIM-54 Typical A/A Cues at LRM ARHM active parameters
(
(
(
(
STT AIM-7 Typical A/A Cues after LTE
(
(
(
STT Notch Cue
(
(
(
(
STT AIM-9 Typical A/A Cues
(
(
Director Reticle
The Director Reticle is composed of a circle with range markings at 12 o’clock for 1 nmi, 9 o’clock for ¾ nmi, 6 o’clock for ½ nmi and 500 foot marks for the remaining half the circle for use with the range tape as a director solution.
For the Director sight, both the Launch Range Designator and In−Range Cue flash at 1 or 4 Hz as an in−range cue. The pilot can distinguish between the Director reticle and the LCOS by observing the Range Tape and In−Range Cue. Lack of a Range Tape and In−Range Cue indicates an LCOS solution.
The Director reticle is displayed under the following conditions; A/A mode, GUN selected and sight uncaged. This symbol is flashed at approximately 16 Hz for one second when reaching Rmax in the forward quarter and Ropt in the rear quarter. The reticle occludes all symbols except the FPM, Range Tape and TD Box/ BATR/Reticle.
In range flashing is not currently implemented.
Gun In−Range Cue
The diamond−shaped Rmax cue is placed perpendicular to the Target Range Tape at a point representing Maximum Range. It is displayed with a valid Reticle and Target Range. This symbol is flashed at 1 Hz when reaching Rmax and 4 Hz when reaching Ropt. For ranges greater than 1 nmi, the diamond pegs at the 12 o’clock position.
Target Range Tape
Target Range Tape is superimposed over the Director Reticle when the Director Reticle is displayed and there is a valid target range. The range tape unwinds counterclockwise to show target range when used with the reticle. The range tape is calculated as the percentage of target range to 1 nmi with a percentage of 100 or greater shown as a full circle.
Manual Gun Reticle
The symbol is centered in azimuth and positioned in elevation based upon the mil setting input from ELEV LEAD knob on the Elevation Lead Panel located beneath the PDCP. A value of zero mils positions the Manual Reticle at a point 0.6 degrees below the boresight/FRL/ Waterline.
Director Gunsight
(
(
(
(
(
(
LCOS Gunsight
(
(
(
(
Manual Gunsight
(
(
(
(
Pilot Selected Target Designate Box
In the F-14B(U), a way for the pilot to display A/A target data independently of the RIO was added. Typically, the information box displays data for the TWS track or certain pseudo-files currently hooked by the RIO. In the F-14B(U), the Target Designate Switch on the left sidewall was repurposed, allowing the pilot to cycle through A/A TWS tracks and select a specific track for display. Once a track has been selected by the pilot, the pilot's selection overrides the RIO's hooked track until the pilot depresses the Target Designate Forward switch again to deselect it.
Because of this change, the pilot-selected radar modes VSL High, VSL Low, and PAL are only available with the ACM cover in the UP position.
(
(
(
(
(
(
UP and DOWN cycle through tracks. Forward selects a track for information display.
Air Combat Maneuvering (ACM) Cover logic
ACM Cover UP: Target Designate Switch Actuates Pilot selected Radar Modes.
-
TD Down: VSL LO.
-
TD Up: VSL High.
-
TD Forward: PAL.
For a complete discussion of Pilot selected Radar modes refer to the Radar Chapter
The ACM cover in the up position overrides the Cruise and A/G VDIG-R display modes. With the ACM cover in the up positon the A/A Target info box is displayed in cruise and A/G. ACM cover up also allows for A/A weapons employment. Refer to the ACM cover weapons logic discussed in the AWG-9 Chapter.
Programmable Tactical Information Display
Buffer Readouts
The PTID buffer readouts provide information for any hooked pseudo-file. With A/A TWS or STT Tracks the Buffer reads out Range and Target Aspect (LT/RT) on the left and Magnetic Bearing and Altitude on the right. With waypoint pseudo-files the buffer only reads out bearing and range to the waypoint. The CAP can be used to access more readouts depending on the RIO selection. JDAM Launch Points and JDAM Targets read out Range and Time to Go when hooked.
HAFU
HAFU Symbology (Hostile, Ambiguous, Friendly, or Unknown). F-14B(U) uses the same HAFU symbology as other contemporary fighters.
Top Half: The top half of the symbol indicates identification from your onboard sensors
Bottom Half: The bottom half of the symbol indicates the identification by offboard sensors (donors)
Vector: A line leading from the HAFU indicates two different things depending on the selection of ground stab or aircraft/attack stab
Shape: The top and bottom elements of the HAFU can have three shapes:
- Hemisphere: Friendly
- Bracket: Unknown/Bogey
- Caret: Hostile/Bandit
| Meaning | Combined | Datalink | Radar |
|---|---|---|---|
| Bandit/Hostile (ROE) | |||
| Bogey/Unknown | |||
| Friendly |
Target Aspect
In the Tomcat TA is displayed as a readout on the top left of the PTID. Either as LT or RT for left or right of nose.
Track Files in Aircraft or Attack Stabilized mode
In attack or aircraft stab the TID shows vectors emminating from the center of tracks as relative velocity vectors. The vector displayed is the difference between the targets vector and ownship vector. It is depended on the heading and speed of both aircraft. Any change in ownship heading or speed will change the displayed vector even if target speed and heading are constant. The vectors lenght is eqivalent to closure so that the max indicated speed (1,800 knots) is 1.5 inches on the TID.
Rather than depicting the target's actual flight path, the vector indicates how the target will move across the display relative to ownship if both aircraft maintain their current velocity. It therefore provides an immediate indication of the developing intercept geometry.
For example when a vector in ATTACK or AIRCRAFT Stabilised mode points towards ownship an intercept course has been achieved.
For a target ahead of ownship:
- A vector pointing below the target indicates positive closure.
- A vector pointing below the target indicates opening.
- A vector pointing left or right inidcates the direction in which the target will drift across the display.
- A vector pointing directly at the ownship symbol indicates a collision course, with no lateral drift between the aircraft.
(
(
(
(
(
Track Files in Ground Stabilized mode
In PTID ground stabilized mode the vector direction represents track true heading and the vector length represents track ground speed.
(
(
(
(
(
Firing Order Number
With AIM-54 selected the number right of any TWS track presents the Firing order number (FONO).
FONO Indicates AIM-54 phoenix target prioritization (1 to 6) in WCS when in the TWS mode. Next missile launch will target track with number 1 and remove the number from that track to advance the other 5 track numbers one step to prepare for next launch. Mandatory attack selection on a target forces the WCS to always include that target in the prioritization. Next launch selection automatically sets hooked target as number one.
FONO can be manually set to 1 (next launch) by hooking the desried TWS track and depressing the Next Launch button.
Time-to-Impact (TTI)
After AIM-54 launch the firing order number on a track is replaced with the TTI or time-to-impact indication, showing WCS calculated time until missile intercepts the target track. When the AIM-54 active command is sent the TTI numbers flash to indicate this.
PTID Attack Stab
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
PTID Ground Stab
(
(
(
Expand Mode
(
(
PTID Bullseye Readouts
For a detailed discussion on PTID Bullseye refer to the Bullseye section in the PTID chapter.
AWG-9 Radar
For a detailed discussion on the AWG-9 Radar refer to the AWG-9 section in the F-14A/B manual.
Air To Ground Weapons Employment
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | GGW Employment |
| 2. | LGB Employment |
| 3. | Unguided Weapons Employment |
GPS Guided Weapons Employment
GPS Guided Weapons (GGW) can be employed in two ways in the F-14B(U). Either weapons employment can be pre-planned and programmed via the MDL, or Targets of Opportunity can be programmed into the GGWs in flight.
Unlike other contemporary fighters, the F-14B(U) does not have a dedicated TOO mode, but weapons employment on Targets of Opportunity is just as possible.
Associated equipment for GGW targeting and employment are the: Programmable Tactical Information Display (PTID), the Control Display Navigation Unit (CDNU), the Armament Control Panel (ACP) for the RIO, and the Vertical Display Indicator Group Replacement (VDIGR), Horizontal Situation Display (HSD), and the Bearing Distance Heading Indicator (BDHI) for the Pilot.
Pre-Planned Missions
The F-14B(U)'s Mission Data Processor (MDP) can store up to 8 Pre-Planned Missions per station. These Pre-Planned Missions include data for the Target (REFP), terminal attack parameters for the weapon to meet, Launch Acceptability Region data, and Pre-Planned Launch Point coordinates.
ACP Attack Mode Steering Options
The F-14B(U)'s Weapons Control Processor can provide two types of attack steering: Launch Point and Target Steering. The steering options are selected via the Armament Control Panel (ACP). Target Steering is presented when Manual Mode is selected on the ACP Delivery Mode rotary. Launch Point steering is presented when CPTR Pilot is selected on the Delivery Mode rotary.
In Manual mode, the HUD "Time to" (TMAX, TOPT, TMIN) displays are referenced to the ROPT release strobe. The first tick mark indicates MAX range of the GGW. The second tick mark indicates OPT range of the GGW. The final half-circle indicates MIN range of the GGW.
In Computer Pilot mode, the HUD "Time to" (TMAX, TREL, TMIN) displays are referenced to the LAR boundary and Launch Point. TMAX indicates time until the LAR boundary, TREL indicates time until the Launch Point, and TMIN indicates time until minimum range of the GGW.
Pre-Planned Launch Acceptability Region
The Pre-Planned Launch Acceptability Region (PPLAR) cue is developed using the launch and targeting data entered during mission planning. This static cue is intended to provide a representation of the selected mission as planned before flight. PPLARs are saved in each Pre-Planned Target Data Set if that Pre-Planned Mission has a Target associated with it. Up to 8 Pre-Planned Missions can be saved per station and reviewed via the JDAM Mission Page (JMSN). LAR data in the Pre-Planned Missions cannot be changed; however, target coordinates associated with the Pre-Planned Mission can be reprogrammed in flight, allowing for flexibility when using the PPLAR cue.
Pre-Planned Launch Point Cue
The Pre-Planned Launch Point cue is displayed only when a valid launch point for the GGWs exists. All GGW station launch points are shown on the PTID Tactical Page at the same time. This static, pentagon-shaped cue indicates the launch point defined during mission planning. It is intended to provide a reference with which to steer to the pre-planned release point. The Pre-Planned Launch Point cue is removed when a Pre-Planned Mission with a previously defined launch point has its Target Coordinates changed.
Bearing to Launch Point Cue
The Bearing-to-Launch Point Line cue is displayed only in PP mode when a valid launch point exists for the next launch GGW. This static cue indicates the aircraft heading into the pre-planned launch point and is represented by a line drawn outward from the launch point along the launch heading. It is intended to provide a simple means to achieve pre-planned release conditions by aligning the aircraft flight path with the launch point along the launch heading. GGW Launch Points can be hooked by the RIO on the PTID Tactical Page to provide Range and Time To Go (TTG) readouts in the PTID Buffer.
GGW Target Cue
The GGW Target cue indicates the location of the JDAM target relative to the aircraft for the priority next-launch GGW station. This cue is presented as a solid triangle when a PP mission is selected. The JDAM Target cue is intended to provide a graphical means of verifying correct target placement. This cue is displayed for all selected GPS Guided Weapons. A "+" sign with a number next to the Target Cue indicates which station the target cue is for. GGW Target cues can be hooked by the RIO on the PTID Tactical Page to provide Range and Time To Go (TTG) readouts in the PTID Buffer.
GGW Terminal Heading Cue
The Terminal Heading cue indicates the selected terminal impact heading oriented about the GGW target symbol. This straight-line cue is intended to provide a graphical representation of the terminal heading that the assigned JDAM weapon will attempt to achieve after launch. The Terminal Heading cue is displayed whenever the associated GGW Target cue is displayed.
ROPT Release Strobe
The Range Optimum (ROPT) Release Strobe functions as a Predictive Maximum Range cue. It represents the theoretical maximum launch range if the aircraft is heading towards the target. It is intended to provide the best-case absolute maximum launch range for the existing flight conditions. This dynamic cue facilitates a quick, direct on-axis targeting solution without taking into account terminal impact parameters.
The first tick mark indicates MAX range of the GGW. The second tick mark indicates OPT range of the GGW. The final half-circle indicates MIN range of the GGW.
Primary Release Modes
JDAM weapons may be delivered singly or in quantity in either the Manual or Computer Pilot delivery mode. Timing cues for GGWs reference a level delivery; the selection of Computer Pilot is primarily intended to provide Launch Point Steering cues on the VDIG-R. When all GGW-capable stations are selected, the default release sequence is 4 - 5 - 3 - 6. Ripple and Pairs settings on the ACP can theoretically be used with JDAM; however, due to fin actuation concerns, it is most ideal to release JDAMs only in 2-second intervals.
Single Release
Single JDAM release is achieved by selecting the desired station on the ACP. Stations 4 - 5 - 3 - 6 are available for JDAM carriage.
Quantity Release
Quantity releases of JDAMs are possible but not recommended. The ACP Setup for JDAMs for a quantity release is identical to any other unguided store.
Typical PTID Tac Page Cues for JDAM releases
PTID Tac Page Cues, Single Pre-Planned Target with Launch Point
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
PTID Tac Page Cues, Multiple Pre-Planned Targets with multiple Launch Points
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
PTID Tac Page Cues, Single Target Of Opportunity without Launch point, with reprogrammed PPLAR
(
(
(
(
(
PTID Tac Page Cues, Single Target Of Opportunity without launch point, without PPLAR
(
(
(
(
(
Typical VDIG-R A/G Cues for JDAM releases
VDIG-R A/G Cues, Multiple Pre Planned Targets, Launch Point Steering
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
VDIG-R A/G Cues, Target Steering
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
JDAM Mission Page (JMSN)
The PTID JDAM mission page provides the ability for the RIO to update and review the Pre Planned Missions used for JDAM employment. The Tomcat has the ability to store up to 8 Pre-Planned Missions per station. These Pre Planned missions contain Target Data, Launch Data and Terminal Impact Parameters. The Target coordinates of any pre planned mission can also be edited during flight via the CDNU.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Pre-Planned JDAM Employment
JDAM mission planning is achieved via the DCS Mission Editor. The F-14B Upgrade comes equipped with a Mission Data Loader system. This allows for the creation and distribution of custom DTMs (Data Transfer Modules). For each GGW-capable station, mission planners can pre-program up to 8 Pre-Planned Missions. A pre-programmed Pre-Planned Mission always includes a LAR and Terminal Impact Parameters for the GGW. Due to DCS limitations, the Terminal Impact Parameters cannot be properly accounted for in the calculation of the Pre-Planned LAR.
(
(
(
Once a target has been placed on the map, the attack heading can be modified by dragging the triangle at the outside of the LAR to its desired location. The currently selected pre planned mission is highlighted in yellow. All other pre planned missions are shown in red. The currently selected launch point is denoted by a circle. This circle can be placed anywhere within the confines of the LAR. When employing multiple JDAMs in sequence it is recommended to place the launch points in sequence. The default JDAM release sequence is 4 - 5 - 3 - 6. It is recommended to place the launch points in that order.
Target Of Opportunity JDAM Employment
Targets of Opportunity may also be engaged with GGWs. In principle, the reprogramming of Pre-Planned Missions with TOO coordinates is simple.
Any flight plan waypoint stored in the CDNU can have its coordinates copied into the JMSN page via the WP Edit 2/2 page. The CDNU WP Edit 2/2 page provides the ability to send any coordinate to the JMSN page by depressing LSK 7. The coordinates will always be sent to the currently selected Pre-Planned Mission for the CDNU-selected station.
As such, it is desirable to select the JMSN page before coordinate transfer is initiated and confirm that the desired Pre-Planned Mission is selected.
Coordinates in the CDNU can be entered multiple ways:
- Either via normal waypoint entry through the flight plan.
- Through the High Precision Waypoint Edit page.
- Or with the LANTIRN pod.
Step by Step GGW TOO guide
- A/G Selected on PDCP
- A/G Hooked on Full PTID menu. (Jester does automatically).
- Conduct normal ACP weapons setup (Sta Select, Fuze, Weapon Type).
- Select Manual on ACP ATTACK options. Pilot gets TMAX, TOPT, TMIN timers.
- LANTIRN Target Designated.
- Depress S-7 (FOV) Hat on LANTIRN for 2 seconds. Waypoint 51 and up is created in flight plan.
- Select newly created LTS waypoint on CDNU.
- Horizontal scroll to Waypoint Edit 2/2 Page.
- Open JMSN page via PTID Tac Page.
- Select Desired Station and Desired Pre Planned Mission.
- Confirm Elevation and Coordinates on CDNU depress LSK7 on CDNU (GGW) to transfer coordinates to JMSN page.
- Depress Update on JMSN page to update JDAM.
- Select Target Steering on PTID (PB9). Or Target Steering on BDHI (F4) key on CDNU.
Pre-Planned JDAM tutorial by Baltic Dragon
Joint Direct Attack Munition
Guided Bomb Unit 31 (GBU-31)
The Joint Direct Attack Munition (JDAM) GBU-31 is a tail kit developed to meet both USAF and U.S. Navy requirements.
On 15 February 2001, F-14s from VF-11, VF-143, and VX-9 took part in a live-fire exercise and delivered 2,000-pound JDAMs to the NAWS China Lake ranges. This was the first time fleet F-14 squadrons trained with the new weapon. The exercise was an outstanding success, and fleet aircrews scored direct hits on their targets, proving the capabilities of the GPS-guided JDAM.
On the evening of 11 March 2002, an F-14 dropped the first-ever combat JDAM during a mission against terrorist targets in Afghanistan. One F-14 crew commented: "We may be mature, but the claws are still sharp!"
Both the F-14B Upgrade and F-14D had the capability to carry the 2,000-pound version of the JDAM.
The F-14B(U) is capable of carrying both the GBU-31(V)4 with the 2,000-pound BLU-109 hard-target penetrator warhead and the GBU-31(V)2 with the 2,000-pound BLU-117 general-purpose warhead.
The JDAM in the Tomcat can be employed against targets of opportunity, with coordinates programmed in flight, or in a pre-planned capacity, where target coordinates and weapon terminal parameters are loaded via the AN/ASQ-215 Mission Data Loader prior to takeoff. Weapons intended for pre-planned delivery can be reprogrammed in flight.
The weapon automatically begins its initialization process during captive carry when power is applied by the Tomcat. The weapon aligns its INS with the F-14B(U)'s systems. Targeting data is downloaded to the weapon via the UPDATE function on the PTID JMSN page. Once downloaded from the F-14B(U), the weapon is ready for employment. When the Tomcat reaches the release point within the Launch Acceptability Region (LAR), the weapon is released. Weapon maneuverability and range are enhanced by fixed aerodynamic surfaces (mid-body strakes) attached to the bomb body.
Once released, the bomb's INS/GPS takes over and guides the bomb to its target regardless of weather conditions. Guidance is accomplished through the tight coupling of an accurate Global Positioning System (GPS) with a three-axis Inertial Navigation System (INS).
The weapon system allows launch from very low to very high altitude and can be employed in a dive, toss, loft, or straight-and-level delivery, with either an on-axis or off-axis attack. Aircraft guidance via LAR and Launch Point is provided for straight and level deliveries only. JDAM also allows multiple target engagements in a single pass. It provides the user with a variety of targeting schemes, including pre-planned targeting and in-flight retargeting.
Guided Bomb Unit 38 (GBU-38)
The Tomcat's JDAM capability continued to evolve during its final years in service. By the opening of Operation Iraqi Freedom in 2003, the F-14D had received GBU-31 JDAM capability through the D04 operational software load. The software was designed to support both the 2,000-pound GBU-31 and the 500-pound GBU-38, although only the GBU-31 had completed the required integration and was employed operationally during the opening stages of the war.
While the software already supported the GBU-38, the weapon itself had not yet completed the flight-clearance program required for release from the Tomcat.
For the 2005–2006 deployment, the F-14D received the D05 operational software, which added the 500-pound GBU-38 JDAM to the Tomcat's approved weapons inventory. This provided crews with a lighter GPS-guided weapon that complemented the existing GBU-31 and was better suited to many close air support missions where the larger 2,000-pound weapon was unnecessary.
The F-14B Upgrade was retired before the GBU-38 completed its flight-clearance program and therefore never received operational clearance to employ the weapon. Had the F-14B Upgrade remained in service through 2005–2006, it would have received the same capability, as the underlying JDAM software architecture already supported both the GBU-31 and GBU-38.
Enhanced Paveway™ III Dual Mode GPS/Laser Guided Bomb
First flights - The GBU-24E/B hangs beneath an F-14 prior to one of two test missions in September 1999. The Tomcat was crewed by pilot CDR Mark Bathrick and Radar Intercept Officer LCDR William Chubb
GBU-24E/B is an Enhanced Paveway Laser Guided Bomb that was first tested in September 1999 at NAWCWD Point Mugu. The F-14B upgrade and the F-14D aircraft were able to employ the GBU-24E/B.
GBU-24E/B is a precision-guided hardened target penetrator used to destroy hardened aircraft hangars and underground bunkers. It integrates GPS and a ring laser gyro inertial measuring unit (IMU) to the already fielded GBU-24B/B "Paveway III" with the existing laser guidance.
A guidance and control unit was modified to incorporate a GPS antenna, IMU, and software for precision GPS/INS guidance. This was a significant war-fighting enhancement that enabeled the F-14B(U) to attack targets in all weather conditions with a precision-guided munition.
GBU-24 Employment Principles
🚧 Work In Progress
The Guided Bomb Unit-24 (GBU-24E/B) Dual Mode Low-Level GPS/Laser-Guided Bomb (LLLGB) consists of a BLU-109 penetrator bomb modified with a Paveway III dual mode low-level GPS/laser-guided bomb kit to add proportional guidance in place of the bang-bang type used in the Paveway II. The LLLGB was developed in response to sophisticated enemy air defenses, poor visibility, and limitations imposed by low ceilings. The weapon is designed for low-altitude delivery and has a capability for improved standoff ranges to reduce exposure. The GBU-24 LLLGB/Paveway III has a low-level standoff capability of more than 10 nautical miles. Performance envelopes for all modes of delivery are improved because the larger wings of the GBU-24 increase maneuverability. Paveway III also has increased seeker sensitivity and a larger field of regard.
The operator illuminates a target with a laser designator, and then the munition guides to a spot of laser energy reflected from the target. One way to deliver LGBs from low altitude is a loft attack. In this maneuver, the aircraft pulls up sharply at a predetermined point several miles from the target, and the LGB is lofted upward and toward the target.
Because of the GBU-24E/B's dual-mode capability, if no laser energy is detected, the weapon will fly to its pre-planned impact point and detonate as planned. A higher amount of accuracy is achieved if laser designation is provided.
The GBU-24E/B also provides greater mission flexibility, allowing for a guided release through thick cloud layers, then acquiring a ground-based laser once the cloud layer has been cleared.
Due to its size, only 2 GBU-24E/Bs can be carried by a Tomcat at a time. Stations 3 and 5 are available for GBU-24E/B carriage. In the F-14B Upgrade, the GBU-24E/B can be released in a TOO capacity or as a pre-planned mission.
Laser Guided Bombs
The F-14B(U) features the LANTIRN pod fully integrated into the weapons system via the 1553 data bus. The LANTIRN and HUD are integrated such that the HUD displays a dashed alignment cue, TREL indicator, TTI indicator, and LTS Line of Sight (LOS) indicator.
The LTS display on the PTID is largely similar; however, the larger display provides significantly improved LTS resolution. For a complete discussion of the LANTIRN Targeting System (LTS), refer to the LANTIRN chapter.
Typical VDIG-R Formats
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
LANTIRN and Mask Status
Centrally in the HUD lower half (
L Laser Armed - Nothing will be displayed when the laser is not armed. An "X" will be superimposed on the "L" when the laser is inhibited from firing (above 40k, Weight−On−Wheels, laser failure, LOS masked or LTS not in track mode).
L (Flashing) Laser Firing - Whenever the Laser is firing (either in Training or Combat) the "L" flashes for the duration of the Laser Fire period. If the Laser is not firing, a solid "L" will be displayed.
M Laser Masked - Whenever the Laser is masked by the ownship, a solid "M" symbol will be displayed. M (Flashing) Pending Laser Mask. As the Laser approaches the ownship masking regions (as determined by the pod and currently displayed on the PTID), an "M" will be displayed on the HUD and will flash when the LOS is within 5° of the mask region (coming or going).
Typical LGB LANTIRN Formats
(
- Position
- Altitude
- Groundspeed
- Pitch Angle
(
- WHOT (White Hot) or BHOT (Black Hot)
- AGC (Automatic Gain Control) or
- MGC (Manual Gain Control)
(
- SRA: slant range
- AZ and EL is pod line of sight azimuth and elevation relative aircraft ADL
- UTC Time
- IBIT Codes
(
- A/G Mode or A/A Mode
- Rates Track (RATES)
- Area Track (AREA)
- Point Track (POINT)
- LASER CODE
- Weapon Type
(
- Target Information Q (Current Slew Point) (Except for QSNO, QADL, QHUD)
- Time to go until on top of the Currently selected Q
- Bearing and Range to Q
- Elevation to Q
- Location of Q (only Displayed if a Location Q is selected)
(
- Vertical line is the bomb release cue.
- The bomb release cue, is only shown if the selected Q is QDES and shows a vertical line along which a release cue travels downwards.
- TREL (Time to Release) changes to
- TIMP (Time to Impact) after bomb release
(
(
(
- Steering guidance towards the selected Q.
- Top line is deviation from heading (L/R Degrees)
Unguided Weapons Employment
Air-to-ground delivery is initiated by pilot selection of the A/G mode on the display control panel. After tape read-in (about 30 seconds), the WCS initiates the air-to-ground mode and enables relevant symbology on the displays.
The weapon selection automatically switches to ordnance (ORD on the HUD) unless the pilot has selected another weapon. All other options are set by the RIO in the back seat.
The available attack modes in the F-14 are set by the ATTK MODE selector in the RIO pit and are:
- CMPTR TGT: Computer target, a semi-automatic computer-guided mode similar to a CCRP mode in newer aircraft.
- CMPTR IP: Computer initial point, an extended CMPTR TGT mode using a known initial point (IP) as a reference for store delivery. Mostly used in situations where the actual target is expected to be hard to locate visually and is located closely to an easily identifiable reference point/landmark.
- CMPTR PLT: Computer pilot, a manual computer and pilot-guided mode using the WCS for store impact point indication on HUD. Similar to a CCIP mode in newer aircraft.
- MAN: Manual, manual backup mode in which the HUD displays a pipper (crosshair) on the HUD at the deflection set by the pilot. Used in case of a systems failure prohibiting the other modes.
- D/L BOMB: Data-link bomb, an automatic mode in which the pilot is steered via data-link cues for remotely controlled store delivery. (Not implemented in DCS at this point in time.)
For a complete discussion of unguided bombing modes refer to the Weapon Delivery chapter.
Computer Pilot
The computer pilot mode uses the WCS to continually calculate and display an impact point for the configured store on the HUD.
When selected, the HUD displays the current store impact point in real-time using the pipper (crosshair). The target designation diamond is used when the WCS is configured for rockets and overlays the pipper to indicate that the configured store is out of range when displayed. As in the Computer Target and IP modes, the pull-up cue is used to indicate aircraft below safe store release altitude when at or above the velocity vector.
To correctly engage the desired target, the pilot flies the impact point pipper on the HUD over the target and then depresses the bomb release button.
When using rockets, the pilot should wait until the diamond disappears, indicating that the selected store is within range and then use the control stick trigger to fire the rockets.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Manual
The Manual (MAN) air-to-ground mode serves as a backup delivery mode when the computer-assisted attack modes are unavailable or when no Air to Ground Radar Ranging is desired. In principle, it functions similarly to Computer Pilot (CPTR) mode, requiring the pilot to fly the HUD pipper onto the target during the attack. Unlike CPTR mode, however, the pipper is not updated by the WCS. Instead, it is displayed at a fixed depression below the Aircraft Datum Line (ADL), calculated for the planned delivery profile.
The required pipper depression is set using the Elevation Lead Panel on the pilot's right-side vertical console. The appropriate setting is determined from weapon delivery tables or estimated by the pilot based on the intended release altitude, dive angle, and airspeed.
When an A/G program is loaded and MANUAL is selected on the Attack Mode Selector of the ACP, the AWG-9's air-to-ground radar ranging function is disabled while the selected A/G program remains active. This allows the AWG-9 to continue operating in all air-to-air radar modes while still permitting the employment of air-to-ground stores that do not require radar ranging.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Normal Procedures
This chapter contains standard procedures for operating the F-14 Tomcat.
The aircrew procedures are separated into individual procedures for the pilot and radar intercept officer. These separate procedures allow the individual crew-member to perform the checks without requiring them to read the checks performed by the other crew-member. The remaining procedures are combined and are coded for applicable crew-member action.
Provided are complete checklists for full startup and Alert Checklists for quick start.
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | Takeoff Procedures WIP |
| 3. | Tactical Procedures WIP |
| 4. | Landing Procedures WIP |
| 5. | Checklists |
Checklists
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | Pre Start Pilot |
| 2. | Pre Start RIO |
| 3. | Startup Pilot |
| 4. | Startup RIO |
| 5. | Post Start Pilot |
| 6. | Post Start RIO |
| 7. | Quick Start CV Pilot |
| 8. | Quick Start CV RIO |
| 9. | Quick Start Field Pilot |
| 10. | Quick Start Field RIO |
Preparation for Flight and Interior Inspection
Pilot
Interior Inspection (Pilot)
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | OXYGEN | Switch ON: check airflow Switch OFF: verify no airflow |
| 2 | VENT AIRFLOW thumbwheel | Set to desired cockpit ventilation |
| 3 | Tone VOLUME controls | Set |
| 4 | TACAN function selector | OFF |
| TACAN Channel | Set | |
| Mode switch | Set | |
| VOL knob | Counterclockwise | |
| 5 | ICS panel | VOL: as desired Amplifier: NORM Function selector: COLD MIC |
| 6 | STAB AUG switches | OFF |
| 7 | UHF function selector | OFF |
| 8 | Wing-sweep switch | MAN ⚠️ Wings may move if control system is powered |
| 9 | Left and Right Throttles | OFF |
| 10 | Speed brake switch | RET |
| 11 | Exterior lights master switch | Set as required |
| 12 | FLAP handle | Set to current flap position |
| 13 | ASYM LIMITER switch | ON (guard down) |
| 14 | L and R ENG MODE SELECT switches | PRI |
| 15 | BACKUP IGNITION switch | OFF |
| 16 | THROTTLE TEMP switch | NORM |
| 17 | THROTTLE MODE switch | BOOST |
| 18 | L and R INLET RAMPS switches | AUTO |
| 19 | ANTI SKID SPOILER BK switch | OFF |
| 20 | FUEL panel | WING/EXT TRANS: AUTO REFUEL PROBE: RET DUMP: OFF FEED: NORM (guard down) |
| 21 | LDG GEAR handle | DN |
| 22 | NOSE STRUT switch | OFF |
| 23 | Parking brake | Pull |
| 24 | Radar altimeter | OFF |
| 25 | Altimeter | Set to current elevation |
| 26 | Left and Right FUEL SHUT OFF handles | In |
| 27 | VDIG(R) Bezel | ACM: OFF (guard down) MASTER ARM: OFF (guard down) |
| 28 | Weapon select | OFF |
| 29 | HUD and VDI filters | As required |
| 30 | Standby attitude gyro | Caged |
| 31 | G-meter | Reset |
| 32 | Clock | Wind and Set |
| 33 | Fuel Bingo | Set |
| 34 | Circuit breakers | Checked |
| 35 | Brake accumulator pressure | Check (should be in green) |
| 36 | HYD HAND PUMP | Check for pressure build-up |
| 37 | HOOK handle | Set to current hook position |
| 38 | DISPLAYS panel | MODE: T.O. HUD VDI MODE: VDI HUD MODE switch: DAY or NIGHT as required HSD MODE switch: NAV STEER CMD pushbutton: DEST DISPLAYS POWER switches: OFF |
| 39 | ELEV LEAD knob | Set |
| 40 | INBD and OUTBD spoiler switches | NORM (guard down) |
| 41 | L and R generator switches | NORM |
| 42 | EMERG generator switch | NORM (guard down) |
| 43 | Air-conditioning controls | TEMP mode: AUTO Thumbwheel: desired (5–7 = medium) CABIN PRESS: NORM AIR SOURCE: OFF |
| 44 | WSHLD AIR switch | OFF |
| 45 | ANTI-ICE switch | AUTO/OFF |
| 46 | COMPASS panel | Mode: SLAVED Hemisphere: set N/S LAT knob: set |
| 47 | ARA-63 panel | CHANNEL: Set POWER: OFF |
| 48 | MASTER LIGHT panel controls | As required |
| 49 | MASTER TEST switch | OFF |
| 50 | EMERG FLT HYD switch | AUTO (guard down) |
| 51 | HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch | SHUT OFF (guard up) |
| 52 | CANOPY air diffuser lever | CABIN AIR |
| 53 | VIDEO CONTROL switch | OFF |
| 54 | Storage case | Check adequacy of flight planning documents and storage of loose gear such as Night Vision Goggles (NVGs) |
Pre-start (Pilot)
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Ground crew | Connect starter air and external power |
| 2 | Wing sweep circuit breakers | If not in OV SWP: - Pull CBs (LE1, LE2) - Use emergency WINGSWEEP handle |
| 3 | ICS | Check |
| 4 | Landing gear indicators | Check |
| 5 | MASTER TEST switch | Check LTS, FIRE DET/EXT, INST responses |
| 6 | Ejection seats | Armed |
| 7 | CANOPY handle | Close |
| 8 | VDIG(R) Bezel | SW COOL push-tile: OFF MSL PREP push-tile: OFF MSL MODE push-tile: NORM Stores Status Indicators on VDI: Consistent with loadout |
| 9 | EMERG STORES JETT light | Out |
| 10 | LADDER light | Out (ladder stowed) |
| 11 | RIO | Notify ready to start |
RIO
Interior Inspection (RIO)
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | OXYGEN | Switch ON: check airflow Switch OFF: verify airflow ceases |
| 2 | VENT AIRFLOW thumbwheel | OFF |
| 3 | SYS TEST - SYS PWR ground panel | Closed |
| 4 | KY-58 | Set to P/OFF |
| 5 | ICS panel | VOL knob: Set Amplifier: NORM Function selector: COLD MIC |
| 6 | CDNU | OFF |
| 7 | U/VHF MODE selector | OFF |
| 8 | LIQ COOLING switch | OFF |
| 9 | EJECT CMD lever | Set per squadron policy |
| 10 | Data storage unit | Secure |
| 11 | ARMAMENT control panel | Configure: - WPN type: OFF - ATTK MODE: MAN - DLVY MODE: STP / SGL - ELECT FUZE: Safe - A/G GUN: OFF - MECH FUZE: Safe - SEL JETT: Safe - JETT OPTIONS: MER TER - INTERVAL / QTY: Set - Stations 1–8: Safe - MSL OPTIONS: NORM - MSL SPD GATE: NOSE QTR |
| 12 | Standby attitude gyro | Caged |
| 13 | NAV MODE knob | OFF |
| 14 | PTID power switch | OFF |
| 15 | Clock | Wind and Set |
| 16 | WCS switch | OFF |
| 17 | IR/TV power switch | OFF |
| 18 | RECORD switch | OFF |
| 19 | RADAR WARNING RCVR PWR switch | OFF |
| 20 | DECM selector knob | OFF |
| 21 | AN/ALE-47 PWR/MODE switch | OFF |
| 22 | AN/ALE-47 GROUND TEST/DIMMER PNL GUARD | DOWN |
| 23 | DATA LINK ON-OFF-AUX ON switch | OFF |
| 24 | APX-76 | OFF |
| 25 | INTERIOR LIGHTS panel | Check |
| 26 | IFF MASTER knob | OFF |
| 27 | MODE 4 switch | Out |
| 28 | IFF ANT and TEST panel | Configure: - IFF ANT switch: Off - IND LT-DDI BIT switch: Off - GND CLG switch: OFF |
| 29 | RADAR BEACON switch | OFF |
| 30 | RADAR BEACON MODE switch | Single or Double |
| 31 | POWER SYS TEST switch | OFF |
| 32 | DATA/ADF switch | OFF |
Pre-start (RIO)
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | External power and air | Verify connected ⚠️ Do not start WCS or displays without power |
| 2 | ICS | Check two-way communication with pilot |
| 3 | DL, TACAN, and U/VHF | Set per mission requirements |
| 4 | Fuel quantity | Check |
| 5 | Console and instrument lights | Check and adjust |
| 6 | LTS test | Verify all caution, advisory, ECM, and DDI lights illuminate |
| 7 | Ejection seats | Verify pilot's seat is armed and your seat is armed |
| 8 | CANOPY handle | Close canopy when pilot ready |
| 9 | Ready signal | Inform pilot: ready to start |
Engine Startup
Startup (Pilot)
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | AIR SOURCE switch | Set to OFF |
| 2 | HYD TRANSFER PUMP switch | Set to OFF (Guard up) |
| 3 | EMERG FLT HYD switch | Set to LOW → Check ON flag Set to HIGH → Check ON flag Set to AUTO (LOW) → Verify both flags OFF |
| 4 | ENG CRANK switch | Set to R (Right engine) At ~20% RPM: check oil/hydraulic pressure, START/VALVE caution light |
| 5 | Right throttle | Advance to IDLE at 20% RPM |
| 6 | ENG CRANK switch | Verify it returns to OFF at ~50% RPM START/VALVE caution light turns off |
| 7 | R GEN caution light | Turns off at ~59% RPM |
| 8 | R FUEL PRESS caution light | Turns off before idle RPM |
| 9 | Engine instrument readings | RPM: 62–78% EGT: ~500 °C FF: 950–1400 Pph NOZ: 100% OIL: 25–35 psi FLT HYD: ~3000 psi |
| 10 | External electrical power | Disconnect (order plane captain) |
| 11 | ENG CRANK switch | Set to L (Left engine) Switch OFF after combined hydraulic pressure reaches 3000 psi |
| 12 | HYD TRANSFER PUMP | Set to NORMAL If no pressure in 10 sec → set to SHUTOFF |
| 13 | Repeat | Perform steps 4–9 for Left Engine |
| 14 | Starter air | Disconnect (order plane captain) |
| 15 | AIR SOURCE switch | Cycle: L ENG → R ENG → BOTH ENG Verify cockpit airflow |
| 16 | HYD TRANSFER PUMP | Set to NORMAL |
Startup (RIO)
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Monitor startup | Observe pilot procedures and plane captain signals for safety |
Post Start
Post Start (Pilot)
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | STAB AUG switches | All ON |
| 2 | MASTER TEST switch | Set to EMERG GEN |
| 3 | MASTER RESET pushbutton | Depress Verify DFCS caution lights extinguished |
| 4 | MASTER TEST switch | OFF |
| 5 | MASTER RESET pushbutton | Depress Verify DFCS caution lights extinguished. STAB AUG switches should not disengage. |
| 6 | Notify RIO | Advise test complete |
| 7 | STAB AUG switches | All ON |
| 8 | AFTC | L/R ENG MODE SELECT: SEC → PRI |
| 9 | Emergency WING SWEEP handle | If not over-swept: Move to 68° Then full OV SW Hold until HZ TAIL AUTH light goes out and OVER flag appears Then stow |
| 10 | Wing-sweep mode switch | AUTO |
| 11 | WING SWEEP DRIVE NO.1 and WG SW DR NO.2/MANUV FLAP circuit breakers | In |
| 12 | WING/EXT TRANS switch | OFF |
| 13 | MASTER RESET pushbutton | Depress |
| 14 | COMM/NAV/GEAR/DISPLAYS | Set all to ON: - UHF to TR+G or BOTH - TACAN to T/R - ARA-63 to ON - DISPLAYS power switches ON - RADAR ALT ON |
| 15 | Trim | Set to 000 |
| 16 | Standby attitude gyro | Erect |
| 17 | MASTER RESET pushbutton | Depress |
| 18 | MASTER TEST switch | Set to OBC |
| 19 | Autopilot | Engage |
| 20 | Speed brake switch | Extend → Retract |
| 21 | REFUEL PROBE switch | Extend → Retract |
| 22 | WSHLD AIR switch | Cycle |
| 23 | OBC | OFF |
| 24 | WING/EXT TRANS switch | OFF |
| 25 | Trim | Re-check and set to 000 |
Post Start (RIO)
| Step | Item | Action/Details |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | EMERG GEN check | Ensure completed before continuing |
| 2 | ECS system | Allow ECS to run ≥ 3 minutes before powering avionics/AWG-9 |
| 3 | CDNU | ON |
| 4 | DATA LINK | ON |
| 5 | DATA LINK Mode | CAINS/WAYPT (CV Ops) / TAC (Shore Based) |
| 6 | NAV MODE Switch | ALIGN |
| 7 | WCS switch | STBY |
| 8 | PTID power switch | ON |
| 9 | LIQ COOLING switch | AWG-9 or AWG-9/AIM-54 |
| 10 | CDNU | Enter Current Position / Date / Time |
| 11 | IR/TV power switch | IR/TV |
| 12 | Communications | ON and Set |
| 13 | TACAN/EGI select switch | EGI |
| 14 | RADAR WARNING RCVR panel | Set |
| 15 | DECM knob | STBY Wait for light to go off → HOLD 3 sec → ACT for OBC |
| 16 | IFF MASTER knob | STBY |
| 17 | AUTO BIT 2 | Verify Complete |
| 18 | Verify pilot has OBC selected | Check |
| 18a | PTID | Observe ALIGNMENT display |
| 18b | PTID (CM display) | Observe FAILED acronyms |
| 18c | PTID | Observe Test Complete |
| 18d | Altimeter | Reset |
| 19 | CDNU | Enter Data / Load Flight Plan |
| 20 | Computer Address Panel | Set |
| 21 | DDD | Set |
| 22 | PTID Controls | Set |
| 22a | Contrast | Set |
| 22b | Bright Control | Set |
| 22c | Data Link | As Required |
| 22d | JAM Strobe | As Required |
| 22e | NON ATTK | As Required |
| 22f | Launch Zone | As Required |
| 23 | Multiple Display Indicator | Set |
| 23a | TEST Button | Depress and Check |
| 23b | Brightness | Set |
| 24 | DATA/ADF switch | BOTH |
| 25 | Hand Control Panel | Set |
| 25a | Light Test (AWG-9 lights) | Depress and Check |
| 25b | EL Vernier | Set 0° EL |
| 26 | AN/ALE-47 DCDU MODE/PWR Switch | STBY |
| 27 | CANOPY DEFOG-CABIN AIR lever | CABIN AIR |
| 28 | D/L Reply | As Required |
| 29 | AAI Control Panel | Set |
| 29a | TEST/CHAL CC switch | TEST |
| 30 | Indicator Lights | Test |
| 31 | DDI BIT | Test |
| 32 | After Alignment Completed | Check |
| 32a | NAV Mode | INS |
| 32b | Program Restart | Depress |
| 32c | STBY/READY Lights | OFF |
| 33 | DEST Data | Verify |
| 34 | BRG/DIST to Destination | Check |
| 35 | Own Aircraft Groundspeed | Check |
| 36 | MAG VAR | Check |
| 37 | KY-58 | As Required |
| 38 | Standby Attitude Gyro | Erect |
| 39 | Notify Pilot | Ready to Taxi |
Quick Start Field
Pilot
| # | Item | Setting |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | External Electrical Power | ON |
| 2 | Oxygen | ON |
| 3 | Seat | ARM |
| 4 | Ground Air | ON |
| 5 | Engines | Idle |
| 5a | Left Engine | Crank |
| 5b | Left Engine | Idle |
| 5c | Right Engine | Crank |
| 5d | Right Engine | Idle |
| 6 | SAS | ON |
| 7 | Air Source | BOTH |
| 8 | Instruments | ON |
| 9 | Radio | ON |
| 10 | Wing Sweep | EMER |
| 11 | Ground Air / Power | OFF |
| 12 | Anti-Skid | ON / BOTH |
Note: Do not move wings into AUTO position until at hold short line. Check for normal brake operation after releasing the parking brake and before commencing taxi.
Caution: After wing sweep handle forward and auto. Select CADAC master reset.
RIO
| # | Item | Setting |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | WCS | STBY |
| 2 | PTID/CDNU | ON/ON |
| 3 | NAV MODE | GND |
| 4 | CDNU START | Verify L/L |
| 4 | Oxygen | ON |
| 5 | Seat | ARM |
| 6 | Canopy | CLOSE |
| 7 | AWG-9 | LIQ COOL ON |
| 8 | Align | Verify |
| 9 | NAV MODE | INS |
| 10 | Radio | ON |
| 11 | Instruments | ON |
Quick Start CV
Pilot
| # | Item | Setting |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | External Electrical Power | ON |
| 2 | Oxygen | ON |
| 3 | Seat | ARM |
| 4 | Ground Air | ON |
| 5 | Engines | Idle |
| 5a | Left Engine | Crank |
| 5b | Left Engine | Idle |
| 5c | Right Engine | Crank |
| 5d | Right Engine | Idle |
| 6 | SAS | ON |
| 7 | Air Source | BOTH |
| 8 | Instruments | ON |
| 9 | Radio | ON |
| 10 | Wing Sweep | EMER |
| 11 | Ground Air / Power | OFF |
CV Note: Do not move wings into AUTO position on carrier. Wait for catapult hookup and crew direction. Ensure the aircraft is properly armed and the Takeoff Checklist completed before the launch bar is placed over the catapult shuttle.
Caution: After wing sweep handle forward and auto. Select CADC master reset.
RIO
| # | Item | Setting |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | WCS | STBY |
| 2 | PTID/CDNU | ON/ON |
| 3 | CAINS/WPT | SELECT |
| 3a | Datalink | TUNE |
| 4 | NAV MODE | CVA |
| 5 | Oxygen | ON |
| 6 | Seat | ARM |
| 7 | Canopy | CLOSE |
| 8 | AWG-9 | LIQ COOL ON |
| 9 | Align | Verify |
| 10 | NAV MODE | INS |
| 11 | Radio | ON |
| 12 | Instruments | ON |
Jester
🚧 Work in Progress
The context command (by default V) allows for intuitive cooperation and exchange between Pilot and RIO based on the following contexts:
-
A/A PDCP Mode - Pilot Display Control Panel A/A
-
A/G PDCP Mode - Pilot Display Control Panel A/G
Generally all Jester wheel functions from the F-14A/B are retained. However the functions are also expanded to fit the new systems.
Q JESTER
With the addition of QJester the Player can prompt jester to perform specific actions based on the master mode selection. In all modes it is possible to prompt jester to select specific pages on the PTID. This is achieved by holding and releasing the jester context key whilst looking at the desired PTID option on the HSD in TID repeat.
For example on the PTID tactical page, the player can prompt jester to change the TID scale meerly by holding and releasing the QJester indicator on top of the range scale buttons on the left side of the PTID.
A/A Context Key Actions
-
Holding and releasing the context key on a Target Designate Box in the HUD or a TWS track on the PTID prompts jester to hook that track.
-
Holding and releasing the context key whilst looking in the direction in azimuth and elevation will prompt jester to scan in the desired direction.
-
Holding and releasing the context key on a visually aquired target will prompt jester to try and track that target in TWS.
A/G Context Key Actions
-
Holding and releasing the context key on a visually aquired area of interest will prompt jester to slew the pod in the desired direction and area track the location.
-
Holding and releasing the context key on the VDI in LTS repeat will prompt jester to move the pod to the indicated location.
DCS
This chapter contains systems, settings and interfaces specific to the simulation of the F-14B Upgrade inside DCS. Refer to the DCS section for information that pertains to both the B Upgrade and A/B model Tomcats.
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | Laser Pointer Designator |
| 2. | Training Lessons |
Laser Pointer Designator
As the Tomcat became the Navy's premier FAC(A) platform in the late 1990s, the Infrared Zoom Laser Illuminator Designator was introduced to provide FAC(A) aircrews with the ability to visually designate targets from the air. First operationally combat-tested during Operation Allied Force in 1999, the IZLID proved its usefulness by enabling the instantaneous designation of tactical targets to other Night Vision Goggle (NVG)-equipped aircraft, resulting in immediate target identification and weapons delivery at night. This capability was primarily used for target talk-ons and the visual designation of targets.
In DCS, the Laser Pointer designator can be enabled with a keybind and activated with a separate keybind. It is slaved to the player's line of sight. The IR laser is only visible through night vision goggles during nighttime operations.
Below a usage example of using the laser pointer designator under night vision googles.
Training Lessons
Introduction
Welcome! Since its arrival in DCS in 2019, the F-14 Tomcat has set the standard for double seater aircraft. Now, we are proud to introduce the upgraded F-14B(U). This variant brings essential modernizations to the legendary airframe, enhancing its combat effectiveness in the digital battlespace. Whether you are a seasoned Tomcat pilot or just at the very beginning of your aircraft qualifications, the training lessons introduce you to new features of the B(U) variant. You will work through the new systems, refined avionics, and updated workflows that are required to master this wonderful airplane. We've thoroughly revised the most important lessons in order to improve the quality, stability, clarity, and learning experience for the most important crew members during the course of our long-term Tomcat journey, and that is YOU.
Lesson design
The training lessons for the F-14B(U) have been designed in such a way that, as a beginner, everything important that you need for a successful start is explained, without knowing much about the older A/B variants of the Tomcat, and without reading too much right at the beginning. The lesson design follows the didactic concept of combining multiple information channels (reading, listening, observing/checking, doing) to achieve maximum learning effect, focusing on important things and leaving out unnecessary things whenever possible. The complexity and richness of the F-14B(U) lessons is somewhere in the middle between the original F-14A/B lessons from 2019, and the newer F-4E lessons from 2024. The following slide shows the didactic elements used in the F-14B(U) training lessons:
For beginners
For beginners, it should be easy to follow the instructions, because everything is explained by using on-screen text and audio, together with highlights of the relevant controls & indications in the cockpit. By initially leaving out steps that contain a SYSTEM TEST, the lessons can be accomplished in a brief time. These tests are in fact not necessary for DCS, because in DCS the Tomcat is always spawned in perfect condition, and you can rely on the systems when you enter the cockpit. In real life, things were somewhat different though.
For the pros
Pilots that are interested in details, or pilots approaching the aircraft on a study level, may accomplish steps containing a SYSTEM TEST as written in the books. Therefore, a longer lesson duration must be planned. Pilots with knowledge of the former Tomcat versions will experience no difficulties in going through the additional steps required by the new equipment. Note that not all system tests from the books are currently possible, simply because certain subsystems are not available in DCS.
Goals
The lessons should enable Tomcat pilots to understand the basic functions of the new equipment, and how to use it. As pilot or RIO, you can use the lessons as "initial training", or as "recurrent training" whenever you have not flown for a long time and need a refresher. By the way: We recommend a refresher after 30 days of not flying the bird. Please note that the lessons require a certain level of knowledge about DCS and also basic flying skills. The lessons don't explain flying as such, but rather the aircraft, its systems and their usage and behavior. The lessons may therefore be understood as interactive "type training" / "recurrent training", but not as "basic flying training".
Your way through
Due to the design, systems, and age of the jet, it has peculiarities. Precise application of system knowledge in daily duty is the key to success. With the Tomcat, you will be challenged in so many ways. So be ready! We leave it up to you whether you want to get into the cockpit immediately without studying the manual, or whether you want to read before. Decide for yourself! If you want to hop into the jet immediately, the training lessons will provide you with enough knowledge to successfully complete them. You can even study this manual section or other parts of the manual during your flights; this is an innovation that came with the DCS F-4E Phantom II in 2024 and is now available for all F-14 variants as well. Use keybinding "Manual - Open" (RShift + M) to open up the manual while flying. The lessons can be paused any time by using the PAUSE or ACTIVE PAUSE keys. Of course, you are welcome in practicing multi-tasking by flying at the same time as studying the manual; that is not explicitly forbidden! Generally speaking, learning by doing is the core strategy for being a good crew member, but you should read the manual and carefully study the systems if you want to become a real pro.
Procedures
We have depicted the important "normal procedures" of the aircraft. These procedures are based as closely as possible on the real procedures, although we were aware that it would not be possible to implement everything in the simulation. Therefore, certain procedures had to be altered, shifted, or omitted entirely. Omitting steps of the original procedures leads to leaving out their numbering during the course of the procedure. Please note that the procedure can therefore continue with step 27 right after step 22. Think, for example, of the ejection seat harness, the oxygen mask and its test, the transponder, or similar items which cannot be set or tested. Furthermore, certain steps were not coded because the respective controls/switches are already set correctly after spawning the aircraft. This was decided in order to help you speed up the lesson tempo and to get you in the air as quickly as possible; of course you may check all these items after entering the cockpit and before pressing SPACEBAR for the first time.
Interaction
For many steps, you will need to press the SPACEBAR to confirm what you have done / checked / heard / found in the cockpit, or to simply progress with the lesson. Therefore, please make sure that the SPACEBAR key is not assigned to any other action, like "Weapon fire" or similar.
Lesson overview
For your training on the F-14B(U) Tomcat, these lessons are currently available:
Difference training
Lesson 01: F-14BU Differences Familiarization
Lesson 04: F-14BU Basic Navigation
Type training
Lesson 02a: F-14BU Cold Start Airfield PILOT
Lesson 02b: F-14BU Cold Start Carrier PILOT
Lesson 03: F-14BU Cold Start Carrier RIO
Weapon training
F-14BU JDAM PP Mode
F-14BU JDAM TOO Mode
General Tips & Tricks
-
Once the lesson was loaded, right before pressing SPACEBAR for the first time, please make sure that the actions (keybindings and HOTAS assignments) are done properly. For this, go to OPTIONS > CONTROLS and assign keys and joystick / throttle buttons to the most important actions. The lessons usually provide a list of actions used in that particular lesson, and a few more that we think you could need. DCS only provides a rough basic setup for most HOTAS controls available on the market, so it is worth looking into this before beginning.
-
Make sure your system is able to keep a suitable frame rate of at least 30 fps throughout the normal game play. For this, adjust your graphic settings in OPTIONS > SYSTEM. You may load one of the INSTANT ACTION MISSIONS, and see how your system performs.
-
The lessons contain a lot of audio material spoken by an instructor, so be prepared to listen a lot. Therefore, adjust the audio settings to a comfortable level in OPTIONS > AUDIO. The lessons are designed in a way, so that no other surrounding noise disturbs the flow of the lesson, with the exception of one lesson, which has a nice surprise right at the beginning (sorry, but we couldn't resist).
Time acceleration
The influence of the time accelerationfunction on the stability of the lessons is not documented properly. The lessons do not contain phases in which nothing happens for a long time, so mostly you will not need it. To be on the safe side, it is most probably better not to use the time acceleration function, especially if you would like to save track files of your lessons.
Lesson got stuck
There might be situations in which you feel the lesson does not continue or no longer works properly for any reason. Fortunately, this happens very rarely! Nevertheless, if you get stuck in a lesson, you should take the following measures:
-
Act like a pilot: Stay calm!
-
Check if everything is actually set up as required and according to the checklist / procedure. If necessary, check each of the previous steps individually and carefully, starting from the top by asking yourself the following questions: "What is written in the procedure / checklist / book?" and "How did I set it up?". An example is the Wing Sweep Handle; it can be moved aft, but if the oversweep locks open, you may then move it further aft. This requires precision and patience, but also knowledge of how the lever and the control and indication system works.
-
You may repeat the step before, and then approach the current step once again.
-
If that does not help and you cannot go further:
-
Quit the mission and SAVE DEBRIEFING (log-file) and SAVE TRACK (trk-file) in the debriefing screen.
-
In such a case, we recommend flying the mission again before posting in the forums.
-
If you then still suspect the same issue, please open a new ticket in the DCS forum: English > Licensed Third Party Projects > Heatblur Simulations > DCS: F-14B(U) > Problems Please add as much information as possible in order to help us finding the issue. Best is to add a track file of your flight. We apologize for that, and also thank you in advance for your efforts reporting a possible bug!
Lesson 01: F-14B(U) Differences Familiarization
Lesson 01: Introduction
Welcome to the differences familiarization of the F-14B(U) Tomcat! You aircraft is spawned hot over Tblisi, and you are placed in the PILOT seat. Switching to the RIO is possible during the course of the lesson.
Objectives
This lesson introduces you to the most important changes in the B(U) version compared to the A/B version. You will fly a pre-determined route through Georgia while listening to the instructor. The instructor will give you an overview of the most important changes in the cockpit, although the lesson focuses a bit more on the pilot seat. On the other hand, the lesson doesn't go into much detail for now, because the operation of the new systems is explained in other training lessons.
Prerequisites
For this flight, it is helpful if you have some experience on any of the older Tomcat variants, at least in terms of flying the aircraft during cruise.
Lesson 01: Documentation
If you feel the need for knowledge, you may read through the following chapters of the manual:
Chapter > History
Chapter > Navigation system Overview (for a first glance)
Chapter > Navigation system Introduction (in depth details)
Chapter > Center panel (including HUD, VDI, ACM, HSD)
Chapter > DFCS panel
Chapter > DFCS - Digital Flight Control System
Chapter > TACAN Command panel
Chapter > TACAN Steering
Chapter > JDAM - Joint Direct Attack Munition
Chapter > AN/ALE-47 Panel
Chapter > MDL - AN/ASQ-215 Mission Data Loader
Lesson 01: Keybindings
Before flying the lesson, check & assign all necessary actions and keybindings for the F-14B(U) Pilot, and in case you want to switch seats also for the F-14B(U) RIO! Take special care for bindings that have no clickable control elements in the cockpit!
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Axis Commands
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Pitch | To be assigned |
| Roll | To be assigned |
| Rudder | To be assigned |
| Throttle Left | To be assigned |
| Throttle Right | To be assigned |
| Throttle (both) | Alternatively assign this if you only have one throttle axis available |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Stick
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Trigger | De-assign Spacebar |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Throttle
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Wing Sweep Auto Mode | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Bomb Mode | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Forward | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Aft | To be assigned |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Flight Control
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Flaps Up | Left Shift + F |
| Flaps Down | F |
| Trim Pitch Up | Right Ctrl + . |
| Trim Pitch Down | Right Ctrl + ; |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Gears, Brakes, and Hook
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Speed Brake Extend | Left Ctrl + B |
| Speed Brake Retract | Left Shift + B |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → View Cockpit
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Occupy WSO Seat | 2 |
F-14B(U) RIO → Category → View Cockpit
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Occupy Pilot Seat | 1 |
Lesson 01: Audio & Text
Since the lesson is a first familiarization, you may fly the aircraft totally unhurried. All text is displayed at the top right corner of the screen. The text remains visible on the screen for a maximum of 1000 seconds, until it either disappears after that time, or is replaced by new text. You can access the message log by pressing the ESC key, and then selecting MESSAGES HISTORY anytime.
Lesson 01: Tips & tricks
If you have troubles in flying the aircraft while listening to the audio or reading through the text, you may use the autopilot in attitude hold mode (key-binding "Autopilot toggle", default LAlt + A). Another option would be to use the active pause function of DCS (keybinding "Active Pause", default LWin + PAUSE) ; this stops the aircraft from moving, but the simulation in the background keeps running.
Lesson 02a: F-14B(U) Cold Start Airfield PILOT
Lesson 02a: Introduction
Welcome to the cold & dark startup of the F-14B(U) Tomcat on an airfield! Your aircraft is spawned cold on the apron in Batumi airfield, and you are placed in the PILOT seat. It is not possible to switch seats during the course of the lesson.
Objectives
The instructor will guide you through an extremely abbreviated INTERIOR INSPECTION procedure, the full PRESTART procedure, the full ENGINE START procedure, and the full POSTSTART procedure for land-based operations, until reaching "ready for taxi". You will then have the choice to either taxi & takeoff on your own discretion without guidance, or to end the lesson.
Prerequisites
For the procedures covered in this lesson you do not need experience on the older versions of the Tomcat.
It is recommended that you first glance over the procedures in order to get a first overview. Look into your kneeboard or the pictures in the briefing window. Following the procedures from top to down, you may then read through the respective sections in the aircraft manual for each aircraft system, although this takes a considerable amount of time and is not really required for accomplishing the lesson. Another option is to hop into the jet, start over with the lesson, and in case you are interested in more details on a certain system, open up the in-game manual and read after while going through the procedures.
System tests
As you will notice, many steps during the course of the procedures are system tests. If you don't want to perform them, you may bypass them by pressing SPACEBAR during the explanations. For the purpose of DCS, these tests are in fact not necessary, because in DCS the aircraft is always spawned in a perfect condition. All such steps are introduced with the phrase "SYSTEM TEST" in the on-screen text of the DCS window. Please note that during such steps, certain levers / switches / controls still must be set according to the procedure, so look out for the label "REQUIRED: " in the on-screen text. This means that you have to set the levers / switches / controls to a certain position, but it is not necessary to perform a system test. The reason behind is that systems covered in subsequent steps might need the specific levers / switches / controls set to this very position in order to work properly on their side.
Interaction
Considering you set everything correctly, you can skip instructions by pressing SPACEBAR, although for many steps it's better to listen carefully before taking action!
Duration
Considering you listen to all instructions and perform all system tests carefully, this lesson takes about 30 minutes. If you skip the instructions and leave out all system tests, this lesson takes about 10 minutes.
Lesson 02a: Keybindings
Before flying the lesson, check & assign all necessary actions and keybindings for the F-14B(U) Pilot! Take special care for bindings that have no clickable control elements in the cockpit!
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Axis Commands
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Pitch | To be assigned |
| Roll | To be assigned |
| Rudder | To be assigned |
| Throttle Left | To be assigned |
| Throttle Right | To be assigned |
| Throttle (both) | Alternatively assign this if you only have one throttle axis available |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Stick
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Autopilot Reference / Nosewheel Steering Toggle | N |
| DLC Toggle / Countermeasure Dispense | To be assigned |
| DLC Thumbwheel Forward | To be assigned |
| DLC Thumbwheel Aft | To be assigned |
| Trigger | De-assign Spacebar |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Throttle
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Exterior Lights Master Switch ON | To be assigned |
| Exterior Lights Master Switch OFF | To be assigned |
| Left Engine Cutoff - ON | To be assigned |
| Right Engine Cutoff - ON | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Forward | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Aft | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Auto Mode | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Bomb Mode | To be assigned |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Communications
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Communication Menu | \ |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Flight Control
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Flaps Up | Left Shift + F |
| Flaps Down | F |
| Trim Pitch Up | Right Ctrl + . |
| Trim Pitch Down | Right Ctrl + ; |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Gears, Brakes, and Hook
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Gears Up | Left Shift + G |
| Gears Down | Left Ctrl + G |
| Speed Brake Extend | Left Ctrl + B |
| Speed Brake Retract | Left Shift + B |
| Wheel Brake Both (Gradual) | To be assigned |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Jester AI
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Toggle Menu | A |
| Command 3 | Left Ctrl + 3 |
| Command 4 | Left Ctrl + 4 |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Systems
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Seat Adjustment Up | Left Shift + S |
| Seat Adjustment Down | Left Alt + Left Shift + S |
Lesson 02a: Audio & Text
Always listen carefully to the instructor. Assume that everything he says is important. All text is displayed at the top right corner of the screen. The text remains visible on the screen for a maximum of 1000 seconds, until it either disappears after that time, or is replaced by new text. You can access the message log by pressing the ESC key, and then selecting MESSAGES HISTORY anytime.
Lesson 02a: Tips & tricks
To be filled in once fellow pilots send some feedback ...
Lesson 02b: F-14B(U) Cold Start Carrier PILOT
Lesson 02b: Introduction
Welcome to the cold & dark start up of the F-14B(U) Tomcat on the carrier! Your aircraft is spawned cold on the parking area of the CVN-74, and you are placed in the PILOT seat. It is not possible to switch seats during the course of the lesson.
Objectives
The instructor will guide you through an extremely abbreviated INTERIOR INSPECTION procedure, the full PRESTART procedure, the full ENGINE START procedure, and the POSTSTART procedure for carrier operations until step 26. As you will notice, the procedures are basically the same as in lesson 02a (cold & dark from airfield as pilot), but now steps 27 to 51 are left out now, because they were performed before connecting the catapult. You will then have the choice to either taxi to the ramp, perform all these checks, and then takeoff on your own discretion without guidance, or to end the lesson.
Prerequisites
For the procedures covered in this lesson you do not need experience on the older versions of the Tomcat.
It is recommended that you first glance over the procedures in order to get a first overview. Look into your kneeboard or the pictures in the briefing window. Following the procedures from top to down, you may then read through the respective sections in the aircraft manual for each aircraft system, although this takes a considerable amount of time and is not really required for accomplishing the lesson. Another option is to hop into the jet, start over with the lesson, and in case you are interested in more details on a certain system, open up the in-game manual and read after while going through the procedures.
System tests
As you will notice, many steps during the course of the procedures are system tests. If you don't want to perform them, you may bypass them by pressing SPACEBAR during the explanations. For the purpose of DCS, these tests are in fact not necessary, because in DCS the aircraft is always spawned in a perfect condition. All such steps are introduced with the phrase "SYSTEM TEST" in the on-screen text of the DCS window.
Interaction
Considering you set everything correctly, you can skip instructions by pressing SPACEBAR, although for many steps it's better to listen carefully before taking action!
Planned duration
Considering you listen to all instructions and perform all system tests carefully, this lesson takes about 20 minutes. If you skip the instructions and leave out all system tests, this lesson takes about 10 minutes.
Lesson 02b: Keybindings
Before flying the lesson, check & assign all necessary actions and keybindings for the F-14B(U) Pilot! Take special care for bindings that have no clickable control elements in the cockpit!
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Axis Commands
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Pitch | To be assigned |
| Roll | To be assigned |
| Rudder | To be assigned |
| Throttle Left | To be assigned |
| Throttle Right | To be assigned |
| Throttle (both) | Alternatively assign this if you only have one throttle axis available |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Stick
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Autopilot Reference / Nosewheel Steering Toggle | N |
| DLC Toggle / Countermeasure Dispense | To be assigned |
| DLC Thumbwheel Forward | To be assigned |
| DLC Thumbwheel Aft | To be assigned |
| Trigger | De-assign Spacebar |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Throttle
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Exterior Lights Master Switch ON | To be assigned |
| Exterior Lights Master Switch OFF | To be assigned |
| Left Engine Cutoff - ON | To be assigned |
| Right Engine Cutoff - ON | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Forward | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Aft | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Auto Mode | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Bomb Mode | To be assigned |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Communications
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Communication Menu | \ |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Flight Control
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Catapult Hook Up | U |
| Catapult Salute | Left Shift + U |
| Flaps Up | Left Shift + F |
| Flaps Down | F |
| Trim Pitch Up | Right Ctrl + . |
| Trim Pitch Down | Right Ctrl + ; |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Gears, Brakes, and Hook
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Gears Up | Left Shift + G |
| Gears Down | Left Ctrl + G |
| Hook Extend | Left Ctrl + H |
| Hook Retract | Left Shift + H |
| Speed Brake Extend | Left Ctrl + B |
| Speed Brake Retract | Left Shift + B |
| Wheel Brake Both (Gradual) | To be assigned |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Jester AI
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Toggle Menu | A |
| Command 3 | Left Ctrl + 3 |
| Command 4 | Left Ctrl + 4 |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Systems
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Seat Adjustment Up | Left Shift + S |
| Seat Adjustment Down | Left Alt + Left Shift + S |
Lesson 02b: Audio & Text
Always listen carefully to the instructor. Assume that everything he says is important. All text is displayed at the top right corner of the screen. The text remains visible on the screen for a maximum of 1000 seconds, until it either disappears after that time, or is replaced by new text. You can access the message log by pressing the ESC key, and then selecting MESSAGES HISTORY anytime.
Lesson 02b: Tips & tricks
To be filled in once fellow pilots send some feedback ...
Lesson 03: F-14B(U) Cold Start Carrier RIO
Lesson 03: Introduction
Welcome to the cold & dark start up of the F-14B(U) Tomcat on the carrier! Your aircraft is spawned cold on the parking area of the CVN-74, and you are placed in the RIO seat. It is not possible to switch seats during the course of the lesson.
Objectives
The instructor will guide you through the PRESTART procedure and the POSTSTART procedure for carrier operations, but without actually starting the engines. All RIO systems can be used because ground power and external cooling air are available. Since the back seat doesn't provide primary flight controls, you will then have the choice to either emphasize on the RIO cockpit and the systems (which we highly recommend by the way), or to end the lesson.
Prerequisites
For the procedures covered in this lesson you do not need experience on the older versions of the Tomcat.
It is recommended that you first glance over the procedures in order to get a first overview. Look into your kneeboard or the pictures in the briefing window. Following the procedures from top to down, you may then read through the respective sections in the aircraft manual for each aircraft system, although this takes a considerable amount of time and is not really required for accomplishing the lesson. Another option is to hop into the jet, start over with the lesson, and in case you are interested in more details on a certain system, open up the in-game manual and read after while going through the procedures.
Interaction
Considering you set everything correctly, you can skip instructions by pressing SPACEBAR, although for many steps it's better to listen carefully before taking action!
Planned duration
Considering you listen to all instructions and perform all system tests carefully, this lesson takes about 20 minutes. If you skip the instructions and leave out all system tests, this lesson takes about 10 minutes.
Lesson 03: Documentation
If you feel the need for knowledge, you may read through the following chapters of the manual:
Chapter > External ECS Air Supply
Chapter > Oxygen System
Chapter > ICS - Intercommunications System
Chapter > Fuel System
Chapter > Internal Lighting
Chapter > Master Test Selector
Chapter > Ejection System
Chapter > Canopy
Chapter > Systems Overview
Chapter > Link 4A & C Data Link
Chapter > WCS Power Switch
Chapter > PTID
Chapter > AN/AWG-9 and AIM-54 Cooling
Chapter > EGI ALIGNMENT MODES
Chapter > DTC/MDL
Chapter > CDNU
Chapter > IR/TV Switch
Chapter > NAVIGATION CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
Chapter > AN/ALR-67 RWR
Chapter > DECM Controls and Indicators
Chapter > AN/APX-76 IFF Interrogator
Chapter > Detail Data Display (DDD) and Panel
Chapter > ALE-47
Chapter > BDHI
Chapter > Standby Attitude Indicator
Lesson 03: Keybindings
Before flying the lesson, check & assign all necessary actions and keybindings for the F-14B(U) RIO! Take special care for bindings that have no clickable control elements in the cockpit!
F-14B(U) RIO → Category → Communications
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Communication Menu | \ |
F-14B(U) RIO → Category → Systems
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Seat Adjustment Up | Left Shift + S |
| Seat Adjustment Down | Left Alt + Left Shift + S |
F-14B(U) RIO → Category → Cockpit Mechanics
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Toggle Canopy | Left Ctrl + C |
| Canopy - CLOSE | To be assigned (alternative to Toggle Canopy) |
| Canopy - OPEN | To be assigned (alternative to Toggle Canopy) |
F-14B(U) RIO → Category → Axis Commands
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| HCU Left/Right | To be assigned |
| HCU Up/Down | To be assigned |
F-14B(U) RIO → Category → Hand Control Unit
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| HCU Half Action | Home |
| HCU Full Action | Page Up |
| HCU Offset | To be assigned |
Lesson 03: Audio & Text
Always listen carefully to the instructor. Assume that everything he says is important. All text is displayed at the top right corner of the screen. The text remains visible on the screen for a maximum of 1000 seconds, until it either disappears after that time, or is replaced by new text. You can access the message log by pressing the ESC key, and then selecting MESSAGES HISTORY anytime.
Lesson 03: Tips & tricks
To be filled in once fellow pilots send some feedback ...
Lesson 04: F-14B(U) Basic Navigation
Lesson 04: Introduction
Welcome to the basic navigation flight in the F-14B(U) Tomcat. You aircraft is hot on the parking spot on the airfield in Senaik-Kolkhi, and you are placed in the PILOT seat. It is possible to switch seats during the course of the lesson.
Objectives
The instructor will guide you through the flight through western Georgia.
It first starts with a comparison of the navigations systems of the older and the newer Tomcat variants, followed by an introduction to the waypoint management and the BDHI in the new variant.
The instructor then guides you through some cockpit preparations and will explain the planned route. In order to perform the management of the navigations system and its waypoints, you may decide to work together with Jester, or switch seats to do some Jester work from the rear seat on your own.
The flight takes you through a few waypoints over land, and a visit of the aircraft carrier over sea, using different steering methods, like the EGI GPS/inertial navigation functionality and the TACAN radio navigation system functionality.
Prerequisites
For this flight, you need some experience on any of the older Tomcat variants, at least in terms of taxi, takeoff and cruise.
Interaction
Considering you set everything correctly, you can skip instructions by pressing SPACEBAR, although for many steps it's better to listen carefully before taking action!
Planned duration
Considering you listen to all instructions and approach all navigation points, this flight takes about 30 to 60 minutes, depending on your learning experience and your airspeed.
Lesson 04: Documentation
If you feel the need for knowledge, you may read through the following chapters of the manual:
Chapter > Systems Overview
Chapter > NAV (general)
Chapter > VDIG-R (pilot seat)
Chapter > BDHI (both seats)
Chapter > CDNU (rear seat)
Chapter > PTID (rear seat)
Other stuff
Please review other topics to brush up your knowledge in case necessary:
- Jester wheel handling
- Seat switching
- Basic aircraft handling
- Flight controls
- Wing sweep
- Flaps & slats
- Landing gear
- Nose wheel steering
- Parking brake
- Wheel braking
- Throttle settings
Lesson 04: Keybindings
Before flying the lesson, check & assign all necessary actions and keybindings for the F-14B(U) Pilot, and in case you want to switch seats also for the F-14B(U) RIO! Take special care for bindings that have no clickable control elements in the cockpit!
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Axis Commands
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Pitch | To be assigned |
| Roll | To be assigned |
| Rudder | To be assigned |
| Throttle Left | To be assigned |
| Throttle Right | To be assigned |
| Throttle (both) | Alternatively assign this if you only have one throttle axis available |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Stick
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Autopilot Reference / Nosewheel Steering Toggle | N |
| DLC Toggle / Countermeasure Dispense | To be assigned |
| DLC Thumbwheel Forward | To be assigned |
| DLC Thumbwheel Aft | To be assigned |
| Trigger | De-assign Spacebar |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Throttle
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Exterior Lights Master Switch ON | To be assigned |
| Exterior Lights Master Switch OFF | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Forward | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Aft | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Auto Mode | To be assigned |
| Wing Sweep Bomb Mode | To be assigned |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Communications
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Communication Menu | \ |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Flight Control
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Flaps Up | Left Shift + F |
| Flaps Down | F |
| Trim Pitch Up | Right Ctrl + . |
| Trim Pitch Down | Right Ctrl + ; |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Gears, Brakes, and Hook
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Gears Up | Left Shift + G |
| Gears Down | Left Ctrl + G |
| Speed Brake Extend | Left Ctrl + B |
| Speed Brake Retract | Left Shift + B |
| Wheel Brake Both (Gradual) | To be assigned |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Jester AI
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Toggle Menu | A |
| Command 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 | Left Ctrl + 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → Systems
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Seat Adjustment Up | Left Shift + S |
| Seat Adjustment Down | Left Alt + Left Shift + S |
F-14B(U) Pilot → Category → View Cockpit
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Occupy WSO Seat | 2 |
F-14B(U) RIO → Category → View Cockpit
| Command | Suggested Assignment |
|---|---|
| Occupy Pilot Seat | 1 |
Lesson 04: Audio & Text
Always listen carefully to the instructor. Assume that everything he says is important. All text is displayed at the top right corner of the screen. The text remains visible on the screen for a maximum of 1000 seconds, until it either disappears after that time, or is replaced by new text. You can access the message log by pressing the ESC key, and then selecting MESSAGES HISTORY anytime.
Lesson 04: Tips & tricks
To be filled in once fellow pilots send some feedback ...
F-14BU JDAM PP Mode
F-14BU JDAM TOO Mode
DCS
This chapter contains systems, settings and interfaces specific to the simulation of the Tomcat inside DCS. Refer to the F-14B Upgrade's DCS section for information that exclusively to the F-14B Upgrade.
| Section | Name |
|---|---|
| 1. | Special Options |
| 2. | Mission Editor |
| 3. | Grease Pencil |
| 4. | Virtual Browser |
| 5. | Instant Camera |
| 6. | Jester Set Commands (F-14A/B) |
| 7. | Jester Set Commands (F-14B(U) |
| 8. | Bombing Tool |
| 9. | Kneeboard |
| 10. | Embedded Manual |
| 11. | Character |
Special Options
The Tomcat offers several options that can be set within the Special Option menu in DCS.
Customized Cockpit
Dropdown to select whether customized cockpits are used for the respective models.
For the F-14A (all variants), the custom cockpit folder is located at
C:\Users\John Doe\Saved Games\DCS\Liveries\F14A_Cockpit.
For the F-14B, the custom cockpit folder is located at
C:\Users\John Doe\Saved Games\DCS\Liveries\F14B_Cockpit.
For the F-14B Upgrade, the custom cockpit folder is located at
C:\Users\John Doe\Saved Games\DCS\Liveries\Cockpit_F14BU.
Radio Menu and PTT Behavior
Dropdown to select the behavior of the push to talk bind for the radio.
| Option | Close Menu | Menu must be open | Export Voice |
|---|---|---|---|
| Default | ❌ | ❌ | ✅ |
| Open Menu | ❌ | ✅ | ✅ |
| Hide on Release | ✅ | ❌ | ✅ |
| No Export | ❌ | ❌ | ❌ |
The columns have the following effects:
- Close Menu - when releasing the key, the DCS communication menu is automatically closed
- Menu must be open - the key only works when the DCS communication menu is currently open
- Export Voice - when pressed down, voice is exported to tools like SRS
Repeat RIO weapon type on TID
For easier visibility, since RIO weapon type window is as difficult to read in-game as it was in real life. Shown in A/G mode with pilot weapon selector off. The real F-14 could not repeat RIO weapon wheel on TID.
Require weapon selector press between OFF and GUN
For enhanced realism, pilot weapon selector needs to be pressed while moving between OFF and GUN positions. This may be impractical with many consumer joysticks, hence it is an optional feature.
Use FFB trim implementation
For enhanced realism when using a force feedback device for primary flight control. Shifts FFB stick neutral position to match trim actuator position. This option only has effect when FFB device is detected.
Enable Afterburner Gate
Restricts throttle to MIL range unless AB gate key is pressed. While pressed, full throttle movement into AB range is unrestricted. Once key is released, AB operation continues until throttle is moved back to MIL range. Set MIL throttle detent below.
Automatic External Lights at Carrier Launch
Automatically turns on the external lights when saluting the catapult officer at night, providing a nighttime launch signal.
Emergency Wing Sweep Handle raised condition
Require the Emergency Wing Sweep Handle to be raised before moving it. In reality handle can be moved regardless of its vertical position.
Enable Alternate AOA Buffet
This option enables a more 'realistic' AOA buffet based on F-14 pilot SME feedback.
Tinted Visor Effect
When enabled, moving the pilots helmet visor down adds a graphical effect to help against bright lighting conditions. By default, this option is unchecked.
High Framerate TIS Recordings
Records Tactical Imaging Set video at 30 fps instead of the default 15 fps. This results in smoother video at the cost of larger files and potentially worse performance.
Stick Automatic Hiding
When enabled, this allows for automatic hiding of the stick when the cursor is above it.
Afterburner Detent
Two options to define at which point of the physical hardware throttle input (0 to 100%) the aircraft will light the afterburner.
That is, if set to 80%, the MIL power range of the aircraft will be commanded between 0% and 80% of your physical throttle, while the remaining 20% will control the afterburner range.
The deadzone option can be used to split the points in the range at which the afterburner will be turned on and off. For example, setting 20% for the deadzone and 80% for the detent results in afterburner activation at 82% and deactivation at 78% of throttle input.
Jester AI Contract
Use head movement to select items in Jester Menu
This option, when enabled, allows using your head movement for selection of menu items.
Jester Landing Callouts
This option enables Jester to give callouts to assist during landings.
Switch PD-STT to P-STT lock when going WVR
P-STT is better suited in when close to target but does not allow AIM-54 data link updates. If option is checked Jester will automatically try to switch PD-STT lock to P-STT when close to enemy.
Jester menu camera
This option shows Jester's camera in center of Jester menu.
Jester TID Auto Expand
With this option enabled, Jester automatically expands TID, using the TID EXP option, with overlapping hooked target.
Jester Auto TCS/FLIR VID
When enabled, Jester automatically points the TCS (or LANTIRN in air-to-air) at hooked targets to identify them visually.
Jester Subtitles (Experimental)
Dropdown select to show subtitles for Jester's lines (experimental).
| Option | Subtitles | Portrait |
|---|---|---|
| Off | ❌ | ❌ |
| On, with portrait | ✅ | ✅ |
| On, without portrait | ✅ | ❌ |
Use AI generated female Jester voice conversion (experimental)
The option replaces Jester's voice with an AI voice-converted version that sounds female. These are the original Jester voice recordings (performed by Grayson) run through AI voice conversion - no lines are AI-written or newly generated, it is the same performance converted to a female-sounding voice. May contain occasional AI conversion artifacts.
Jester treats no IFF reply as bandit
When Jester interrogates IFF, a contact that does not reply is normally left as an unknown bogey. With this option, Jester instead flags any contact that fails to reply as hostile (bandit).
💡 A friendly with an inoperative or mis-set transponder, or one out of interrogation range, may be flagged as a bandit.
Jester records gun camera (TIS) by default
When on, the Tactical Imaging Set comes up powered (except on a cold start) and Jester records HUD gun-camera footage automatically when you hold the trigger first detent. Turn off if you do not want gun-camera video recorded by default - you can still switch the TIS on from the cockpit switch or the Jester wheel.
HB UI
Resolution Override
User interface elements, such as the manual, virtual browser and others are scaled and positioned via a fixed resolution that must match the resolution of the in-game surface they are rendered on.
With the option unchecked, this resolution is automatically determined based on screen settings. However, in certain situations, especially when using VR or having a multi-monitor setup, this automatic detection might fail and compute an incorrect resolution.
Should UI elements be misplaced, for example the Jester Wheel not being centered or even cut off, check this setting and edit the resolution manually until the UI is displayed properly.
Offset
Allows to displace the UI horizontally and vertically. Positive values shift it to the right or down, negative values to the left or up.
Normally, this should be kept at the default value of 0 px. However, in certain cases (e.g. when using VR and setting it to render on the LEFT or RIGHT eye, while having the checkbox for "Use DCS System Resolution" not checked) it is possible that the UI gets cut off. This setting then allows to move the UI back into view, but therefore giving up proper alignment on the UI, such as the Jester UI being centered on the screen.
Domain Access
Defines which domains the HB UI is allowed to access.
Full allows for free browsing, allowing to visit any website with the Virtual Browser.
The default option Whitelist defines which sites can be accessed by using a whitelist file. Only domains passing the rules setup in the file are allowed. The default rules are setup to support all HB UI features and a hand full of useful websites for the Virtual Browser, such as YouTube.
This file is automatically created at
C:\Users\John Doe\Saved Games\DCS_F14\hbui_whitelist.txt
when launching the Tomcat for the first time.
💡 Deleting the file will lead to it being recreated on the next launch. That way, one can have it updated to the newest set of rules - should there have been any changes.
Selecting Offline will disable the Virtual Browser and any other HB UI features and elements that require an active online connection.
Language
Dropdown to select the language used for all HB UI elements. Available are:
- English
- Chinese (中文)
- German (Deutsch)
- Korean (한국어)
Affects for example the Jester UI, the Bombing Tool, but also the in-game version of this Manual and more.
Theme
Allows to select which color theme is used by the UI. All UI elements support a light and a dark theme.
The default option AUTO will pick the theme dynamically based on the in-game time. Light during the day and Dark for a night mission.
Mission Editor
The F-14 has many aircraft-specific settings and waypoints that are configured in the Mission Editor.
Additional Aircraft Properties
Aircraft specific options are set up under the Additional Properties for Aircraft page available when setting up an aircraft group containing F-14s.
M-61 Burst Mode
This dropdown allows for changes in the M61's max burst length. The "Manual" option fires until empty.
AN/ALE-39 (AN/ALE-47 for F-14B Upgrade) Loadout
This dropdown allows for changes in the AN/ALE-39 (AN/ALE-47 for F-14B Upgrade) countermeasure loadout.
INS Reference Alignment Stored
This sets whether INS reference is pre-aligned at spawn. This allows for a stored alignment to be completed upon aircraft cold start.
TACAN Channel Preset and Band
This allows the initial TACAN channel and band to be preset.
ILS Channel Preset
This allows the initial ILS channel preset to be set.
KY-28 Encryption Key
This allows the initial KY-28 encryption key to be preset.
Refueling Probe Cover Removed
This option removes the refueling probe cover while loaded in the mission. This option overrides the livery refueling probe cover option.
TCS (F-14A Early and F-14A Late Only)
This dropdown selection, for the F-14A Early and F-14A Late, allows mission editors to select the TCS or select no TCS with ability to select between historic (based on livery) or override.
| Option | Description |
|---|---|
| Historic (based on livery) | Uses the livery's set option |
| On | Enables the TCS and equips chinpod with TCS regardless of livery option |
| Off (Historic Variant) | Disables TCS and equips chinpod based on livery (if TCS was originally on livery, the bulletcover is equipped) |
| Off (Bulletcover Variant) | Disables TCS and equips bulletcover chinpod regardless of livery option |
| Off (Chinpod Variant) | Disables TCS and equips the chinpod without TCS housing regardless of livery option |
Waypoints Types (F-14A/B Only)
As the F-14A/B's navigational system only has three numbered waypoints, most other waypoints are set using Navigation Target Points.
- Waypoints 1–3: Set directly in the mission editor.
- Home Base: Set to the landing waypoint.
- All others: Set by naming Navigation Target Points as below:
| Waypoint | Name |
|---|---|
| Fix Point | FP |
| Initial Point | IP |
| Surface Target | ST |
| Defended Point | DP |
| Hostile Area | HA |
| Datalink Waypoint 1–3 | DLWP1, DLWP2, DLWP3 |
| Datalink Surface Target | DLST |
| Datalink Fixed Point | DLFP |
DTC (F-14B Upgrade Only)
The F-14B Upgrade has its Mission Data Loader integrated into DCS' Mission Editor using the DTC menu. Refer to the Mission Data Loader section on more in-depth how to use MDL with the DTC menu.
Navigation
Refer to the Flight Plan subsection of the MDL section for more information.
JDAM
See the Pre-Planned JDAM Employment section for further information on programming the JDAMs using the DTC menu.
CMDS
See the Programmer section for further information on programming the ALE-47 using the DTC menu.
TIS (Tactical Imaging Set)
Refer to the Fast Tactical Imaging System page for further information on how to use the Tactical Imaging Set.
Ownship Callsign
Callsign for ownship can be changed here. By default, "Use mission callsign", is checked which means the DCS unit name (pilot) set in the mission editor is used.
Send-To Callsigns
The option to disable or enable the ability to auto-add wingmen to send list is provided. Additionally, callsigns can be manually added to the send list.
Grease Pencil
Both crew members can use a grease pencil to draw on the side of their canopy.
The interface can be opened by clicking on the corresponding spot on the right front side of the canopy.
Holding down left click allows drawing, while right click will use the eraser.
After closing the window by clicking on the canopy spot again, the results are rendered on the canopy.
Virtual Browser
To enhance in-flight studies of the aircraft or simply to overcome some downtime, a virtual browser can be opened (by default RCTRL+V).
The browser enables users to
- watch tutorial videos,
- read documentation provided by third parties,
- listen to a music playlist while flying,
- or also playing some browser games and much more.
The UI is embedded in-game, can be resized and moved around. Buttons on the top left corner allow for quick navigation.
💡 To allow free browsing select Full for the Special Option HB UI Domain Access.
Session
Session data is memorized and saved locally in a folder like
C:\Users\John Doe\Saved Games\DCS_F14\cache\
Clearing this folder will reset all browser preferences and settings.
If required, sound level of the browser can be controlled via the volume mixer provided by Windows through the HeatblurUi.exe entry.
Instant Camera
Cameras such as those made by Polaroid were a common sight before the widespread adoption of digital cameras. They were often personally purchased by aircrew for capturing memorable images, but they also served a practical purpose. Instant cameras allowed crews to quickly document subjects such as intercepted aircraft, mission events, and other items of interest without the delay associated with traditional film processing.
In DCS, the instant camera can be opened with a keybind, and the shutter can be activated with a separate keybind. The text below the image can be modified during flight by selecting the text field with the mouse cursor.
💡 Due to current limitations, the Instant Camera cannot be used in VR.
Your Instant Camera shots are stored in the Saved Games/DCS_F14/Instant Camera
directory.
JESTER / ICEMAN SET COMMANDS (F-14A/B)
Published fixed-value commands from 10000 to 10099 for use by the mission
editor (trigger action "X: Set command", see proxy_device.lua). Because
these use fixed values it is not necessary to rebuild Command.h after
adding/changing values in this range.
SET COMMAND can only accept numerical values >= -1 and <= 1. Several
commands below encode an index into that range using the 0.XX convention
(0.01 = item 1, 0.99 = item 99, 1.00 = item 100).
General / Pilot Commands
10000 — Enable ACM guns, air-to-air
1— enables0— disables (default)
10001 — Carrier landing
1— initiates the carrier landing sequence0— (default)
10002 — Ground landing
1— initiates the ground landing sequence0— (default)
10003 — Case 1 recovery
1— initiates a Case 1 recovery0— (default)
10004 — Pilot VSL (Vertical Scan Lock)
1— commands the pilot to attempt a VSL lock0— (default)
10005 — Wings swept
1— sweeps the wings0— (default)
10006 — Air-to-ground mode
1— selects air-to-ground0— (default)
10007 — Parking brake
1— sets the parking brake0— releases (default)
10008 — Radar weight-on-wheels (WOW)
1— WOW asserted0— (default)
Jester LANTIRN / Targeting
10009 — Jester LANTIRN auto designate
1— disables Jester LANTIRN auto designate0— enables Jester LANTIRN auto designate (default)
10010 — Jester silent
1— silences Jester0— Jester will talk again (default)
10011 — Jester pause
1— disables (pauses) Jester0— reactivates Jester (default)
10012 — Force Jester to track a target by unit name
Special command to force Jester to track a specific target using unit name.
Since SET COMMAND only accepts values >= -1 and <= 1, the following rule
is used:
0.01— track unit namedLantirnTarget010.02— track unit namedLantirnTarget02(… continues …)0.99— track unit namedLantirnTarget991.00— track unit namedLantirnTarget1000— resume Jester state to normal operations
10013 — Force Jester to track a zone
Same as 10012, but Jester tracks zones.
0.01— track zone namedLantirnZone010.02— track zone namedLantirnZone02(… continues …)0.99— track zone namedLantirnZone991.00— track zone namedLantirnZone1000— resume Jester state to normal operations
Note: Commands
10012and10013are exclusive. When Jester is tracking a unit using10012, activating10013forces Jester to stop tracking that unit and start tracking a zone, and vice versa. Using0in either command stops tracking both units and zones.
10014 — Manual designate
Jester will designate manually what is under the LANTIRN cross.
Radio / Navigation
10015 — Tune AN/ARC-182 to a selected channel
- Pass the value as
0.XXwhereXXis the two-digit channel number.
10016 — Tune TACAN channel
Construct the value as s0.XXXY, where:
s— optional-sign; use negative values for A/A and positive for T/RXXX— three-digit channel number (keep the leading zeroes for channels lower than 100)Y—0for X-mode,1for Y-mode
Examples:
0.0630— channel 63X, T/R-0.0081— channel 8Y, A/A
10017 — DEST knob
0.1— WP10.2— WP20.3— WP30.4— FP0.5— IP0.6— ST0.7— HB0.8— MAN
10018 — Select waypoint to enter coords from a trigger zone
💡 This command does no action in the cockpit
0.1— WP10.2— WP20.3— WP30.4— FP0.5— IP0.6— ST0.7— HB0.8— MAN
10019 — Enter coords from trigger zone
Enter coords from a trigger zone for the waypoint selected with 10018 (if none
selected, WP1).
0.01—WaypointZone010.02—WaypointZone02- (… continues …)
0.99—WaypointZone99-0.01—GGWZone01(negative values select GGW zones)- (… continues …)
-0.99—GGWZone99
Jester Systems
10020 — WCS switch
0.1— OFF0.2— STBY0.3— ON0.0— return to automatic
10021 — Run RWR BIT
- No value parameter; runs the RWR built-in test.
10022 — TID range knob
0.1— 25 NM0.2— 50 NM0.3— 100 NM0.4— 200 NM0.5— 400 NM0.0— return to automatic
10023 — Jester Eject
- Commands Jester to eject.
Jester Radar / Air-to-Air
10024 — STT target
0.00— stop force STT track0.01—AirTarget010.02—AirTarget02- (… continues …)
0.99—AirTarget99
10025 — Break lock
- Drops the current track.
10033 — Radar azimuth
- Accepts
-1to1.
10034 — Radar elevation
- Accepts
-1to1.
Jester Weapons
10026 — Weapon station state
Format 0.xy:
x— station number (1–8)y— state:0down (safe),1up (selected)
10027 — Weapon wheel option
0.10— MK-81H0.11— MK-81L0.12— MK-82H0.13— MK-82L0.14— MK-83H0.15— MK-83L0.16— MK-840.17— LAU-100.19— CBU-59A0.20— CBU-59B0.21— CBU-59C0.22— MK-20A0.23— MK-20B0.24— MK-20C0.25— MK-450.26— GBU-100.27— GBU-120.28— GBU-160.29— GBU-240.30— BDU-330.31— TALD0.32— SUU-25
10028 — ATTK MODE knob
0.0— CMPTR TGT0.1— CMPTR IP0.2— CMPTR PLT0.3— MAN
10029 — DLVY MODE switches
Format 0.xy:
x—0STP,1RPLy—0SGL,1PRS
10030 — DLVY INTERVAL
Format 0.xy:
x— first rollery— second roller
10031 — DLVY QTY
Format 0.xy:
x— first rollery— second roller
10032 — MSL launch
- Launches the selected missile.
Jester LANTIRN Zoom
10035 — LANTIRN zoom level
0— auto0.33— wide0.66— narrow1.0— expanded
Iceman (AI Pilot) Commands
10080— set heading (absolute)10081— set heading (relative)10082— set speed (absolute)10083— set speed (relative)10084— set altitude (absolute)10085— set altitude (relative)10086— navigate: fly to steerpoint10087— navigate: orbit steerpoint10088— hold current heading/speed/altitude
Sentinel
10099—PROXY_last_command_sentinel(marks the end of the fixed-value range; not a usable command).
JESTER / ICEMAN SET COMMANDS (F-14B(U))
Published fixed-value commands from 10000 to 10099 for use by the mission
editor (trigger action "X: Set command", see proxy_device.lua). Because
these use fixed values it is not necessary to rebuild Command.h after
adding/changing values in this range.
SET COMMAND can only accept numerical values >= -1 and <= 1. Several
commands below encode an index into that range using the 0.XX convention
(0.01 = item 1, 0.99 = item 99, 1.00 = item 100).
General / Pilot Commands
10000 — Enable ACM guns, air-to-air
1— enables0— disables (default)
10001 — Carrier landing
1— initiates the carrier landing sequence0— (default)
10002 — Ground landing
1— initiates the ground landing sequence0— (default)
10003 — Case 1 recovery
1— initiates a Case 1 recovery0— (default)
10004 — Pilot VSL (Vertical Scan Lock)
1— commands the pilot to attempt a VSL lock0— (default)
10005 — Wings swept
1— sweeps the wings0— (default)
10006 — Air-to-ground mode
1— selects air-to-ground0— (default)
10007 — Parking brake
1— sets the parking brake0— releases (default)
10008 — Radar weight-on-wheels (WOW)
1— WOW asserted0— (default)
Jester LANTIRN / Targeting
10009 — Jester LANTIRN auto designate
1— disables Jester LANTIRN auto designate0— enables Jester LANTIRN auto designate (default)
10010 — Jester silent
1— silences Jester0— Jester will talk again (default)
10011 — Jester pause
1— disables (pauses) Jester0— reactivates Jester (default)
10012 — Force Jester to track a target by unit name
Special command to force Jester to track a specific target using unit name.
Since SET COMMAND only accepts values >= -1 and <= 1, the following rule
is used:
0.01— track unit namedLantirnTarget010.02— track unit namedLantirnTarget02(… continues …)0.99— track unit namedLantirnTarget991.00— track unit namedLantirnTarget1000— resume Jester state to normal operations
10013 — Force Jester to track a zone
Same as 10012, but Jester tracks zones.
0.01— track zone namedLantirnZone010.02— track zone namedLantirnZone02(… continues …)0.99— track zone namedLantirnZone991.00— track zone namedLantirnZone1000— resume Jester state to normal operations
Note: Commands
10012and10013are exclusive. When Jester is tracking a unit using10012, activating10013forces Jester to stop tracking that unit and start tracking a zone, and vice versa. Using0in either command stops tracking both units and zones.
10014 — Manual designate
Jester will designate manually what is under the LANTIRN cross.
Radio / Navigation
10015 — Tune AN/ARC-182 to a selected channel
- Pass the value as
0.XXwhereXXis the two-digit channel number.
10016 — Tune TACAN channel
Construct the value as s0.XXXY, where:
s— optional-sign; use negative values for A/A and positive for T/RXXX— three-digit channel number (keep the leading zeroes for channels lower than 100)Y—0for X-mode,1for Y-mode
Examples:
0.0630— channel 63X, T/R-0.0081— channel 8Y, A/A
10017 — DEST knob
0.1— WP10.2— WP20.3— WP30.4— FP0.5— IP0.6— ST0.7— HB0.8— MAN
10018 — Select waypoint to enter coords from a trigger zone
💡 This command does no action in the cockpit
0.1— WP10.2— WP20.3— WP30.4— FP0.5— IP0.6— ST0.7— HB0.8— MAN
10019 — Enter coords from trigger zone
Enter coords from a trigger zone for the waypoint selected with 10018 (if none
selected, WP1).
0.01—WaypointZone010.02—WaypointZone02- (… continues …)
0.99—WaypointZone99-0.01—GGWZone01(negative values select GGW zones)- (… continues …)
-0.99—GGWZone99
Jester Systems
10020 — WCS switch
0.1— OFF0.2— STBY0.3— ON0.0— return to automatic
10021 — Run RWR BIT
- No value parameter; runs the RWR built-in test.
10022 — TID range knob
0.1— 25 NM0.2— 50 NM0.3— 100 NM0.4— 200 NM0.5— 400 NM0.0— return to automatic
10023 — Jester Eject
- Commands Jester to eject.
Jester Radar / Air-to-Air
10024 — STT target
0.00— stop force STT track0.01—AirTarget010.02—AirTarget02- (… continues …)
0.99—AirTarget99
10025 — Break lock
- Drops the current track.
10033 — Radar azimuth
- Accepts
-1to1.
10034 — Radar elevation
- Accepts
-1to1.
Jester Weapons
10026 — Weapon station state
Format 0.xy:
x— station number (1–8)y— state:0down (safe),1up (selected)
10027 — Weapon wheel option
0.10— MK-81H0.11— MK-81L0.12— MK-82H0.13— MK-82L0.14— MK-83H0.15— MK-83L0.16— MK-840.17— LAU-100.19— CBU-59A0.20— CBU-59B0.21— CBU-59C0.22— MK-20A0.23— MK-20B0.24— MK-20C0.25— MK-450.26— GBU-100.27— GBU-120.28— GBU-160.29— GBU-240.30— BDU-330.31— TALD0.32— SUU-25
10028 — ATTK MODE knob
0.0— CMPTR TGT0.1— CMPTR IP0.2— CMPTR PLT0.3— MAN
10029 — DLVY MODE switches
Format 0.xy:
x—0STP,1RPLy—0SGL,1PRS
10030 — DLVY INTERVAL
Format 0.xy:
x— first rollery— second roller
10031 — DLVY QTY
Format 0.xy:
x— first rollery— second roller
10032 — MSL launch
- Launches the selected missile.
Jester LANTIRN Zoom
10035 — LANTIRN zoom level
0— auto0.33— wide0.66— narrow1.0— expanded
Jester Backup (BU) Waypoint / Nav Commands
10036 — Create waypoint from trigger zone
Creates a waypoint from a trigger zone (zone selected first by 10019, or
target with 10046).
0.01–0.99— specific waypoint ID (e.g.0.03= wpt 3)0— last waypoint created by this command>= 1— new waypoint
Also auto-selects the created/updated waypoint (as if
10037was called), so a following command operates on it without an explicit select.
10037 — Select waypoint
Selects which waypoint Jester should perform the following operations on. Do this first, then issue the other commands.
0.01— wpt 10.25— wpt 25 (etc.)0.0— special: the most recently created waypoint through10036
10038 — Set special designation
Sets the special designation for the selected waypoint.
0.0— clear SD0.1— destination0.2— surface target0.3— fixed point0.4— initial point0.5— HA0.6— DP-0.1–-0.7— P1–P7
10039 — Transfer JDAM station
Transfers selected wpt coordinates to a station.
0.0— next selected0.3— station 30.4— station 40.5— station 50.6— station 6
10040 — Set LTS
0— remove LTS1— set LTS
10041 — Hook selected waypoint
1.0— hook selected wp0.0— unhook (if selected)
10042 — Direct-to selected waypoint
1.0— direct to selected wp
10043 — Steering mode
0.0— dest0.33— auto0.66— ofly1.0— man
10044 — BDHI mode
0.0— HUD sync0.1— FP WP (selected with10037)0.3— Launch Point0.4— Target
10045 — TCN / EGI select
0.0— EGI1.0— TCN
10046 — Waypoint from GGW target
Like 10019, but selects the source from a live unit's current position for
10036.
0.01–0.99— unit named"GGWTarget01".."GGWTarget99"(value × 100 = id)
10047 — IZLID point/zone
Jester points his IR target designator at the point selected by 10019 (trigger
zone) or 10046 (GGW target). The value scales the lasing duration:
value × 60= seconds (1.0= 60s)-1— lase until told to stop0— stop immediately
Iceman (AI Pilot) Commands
10080— set heading (absolute)10081— set heading (relative)10082— set speed (absolute)10083— set speed (relative)10084— set altitude (absolute)10085— set altitude (relative)10086— navigate: fly to steerpoint10087— navigate: orbit steerpoint10088— hold current heading/speed/altitude
Sentinel
10099—PROXY_last_command_sentinel(marks the end of the fixed-value range; not a usable command).
Jester v2 Wheel Menu Structure
0. Root Menu
Opening the Jester menu brings up this new layout:
- Press 1: RADIO
- Press 2: AIR TO AIR RADAR
- Press 3: TID & WCS RADAR
- Press 4: AIR TO GROUND WEAPONS
- Press 5: NAVIGATION UTILITY
- Press 6: CMS & RWR DEFENSIVE
- Press 7: TACTICAL IMAGING SET UTILITY
- Press 8: CREW CONTRACT UTILITY
1. Radio Main Menu
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1
- Press 1: AN/ARC-182 (Comm Radio)
- Press 2: DATA LINK
1.1. AN/ARC-182 (Comm Radio)
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1
- Press 1: USE GUARD (243.000)
- Press 2: USE MANUAL
- Press 3: USE CHANNEL
- Press 4: TUNE MANUAL
- Press 5: SELECT CHANNEL
- Press 6: SELECT MODE
- Press 7: TUNE ATC
- Press 8: TUNE TAC
1.1.5. Select Channel
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1 -> Press 5
- Press 1: PREV CHANNEL
- Press 2: NEXT CHANNEL
- Press 3: CHANNELS 1-5
- Press 4: CHANNELS 6-10
- Press 5: CHANNELS 11-15
- Press 6: CHANNELS 16-20
- Press 7: CHANNELS 21-25
- Press 8: CHANNELS 26-30
1.1.5.3. Channels 1-5
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1 -> Press 5 -> Press 3
- Presss 1-5: CH 1 to CH 5
1.1.5.4. Channels 6-10
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1 -> Press 5 -> Press 4
- Presss 1-5: CH 6 to CH 10
1.1.5.5. Channels 11-15
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1 -> Press 5 -> Press 5
- Presss 1-5: CH 11 to CH 15
1.1.5.6. Channels 16-20
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1 -> Press 5 -> Press 6
- Presss 1-5: CH 16 to CH 20
1.1.5.7. Channels 21-25
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1 -> Press 5 -> Press 7
- Presss 1-5: CH 21 to CH 25
1.1.5.8. Channels 26-30
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1 -> Press 5 -> Press 8
- Presss 1-5: CH 26 to CH 30
1.1.6. Select Mode
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 1 -> Press 6
- Press 1: MODE OFF
- Press 2: MODE TR
- Press 3: MODE TR/G
- Press 4: MODE DF
- Press 5: MODE TEST
- Press 6: MODULATION MAN FM
1.2. Data Link Main Menu
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 2
- Press 1: SET MODE
- Press 2: SET FREQUENCY PRESET
- Press 3: SET HOST
1.2.1. Set Mode
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 2 -> Press 1
- Press 1: TACTICAL DATALINK SYSTEM (TADIL-C / Link 4A)
- Press 2: FIGHTER-TO-FIGHTER
- Press 3: OFF
1.2.2. Set Frequency Preset
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 2 -> Press 2
- Press 1: 300.00MHZ (AI F2F)
- Press 2: 300.10MHZ
- Press 3: 300.20MHZ
- Press 4: 300.30MHZ
- Press 5: 300.40MHZ
- Press 6: 300.50MHZ
- Press 7: 300.60MHZ
- Press 8: 300.70MHZ
1.2.3. Set Host
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 1 -> Press 2 -> Press 3
- Press 1-8: Dynamic list of AWACS (e.g., OVERLORD 1-1) or Aircraft Carriers in the mission.
2. Air to Air Radar Main Menu
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2
- Press 1: BEYOND VISUAL RANGE
- Press 2: WITHIN VISUAL RANGE
2.1. Beyond Visual Range
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1
[!WARNING] The Beyond Visual Range menu dynamically shifts its Presss depending on whether the radar is ACTIVE or SILENT. When you command Jester to "Go Silent", the "STT Lock" Press disappears (since it requires an emitting radar), and all other Presss shift up by one slot. This means your macro paths will change depending on the radar state!
State A: Radar is ACTIVE (Default)
- Press 1: STT LOCK
- Press 2: SCAN ELEVATION
- Press 3: SCAN AZIMUTH
- Press 4: TID RANGE
- Press 5: RADAR SETTINGS
- Press 6: WITHIN VISUAL RANGE (Returns to WVR menu)
- Press 7: GO SILENT (Switches to State B)
- Press 8: IFF
State B: Radar is SILENT
- Press 1: SCAN ELEVATION
- Press 2: SCAN AZIMUTH
- Press 3: TID RANGE
- Press 4: RADAR SETTINGS
- Press 5: WITHIN VISUAL RANGE (Returns to WVR menu)
- Press 6: GO ACTIVE (Switches back to State A)
- Press 7: IFF
(Note: The submenu paths below are documented based on the default ACTIVE state. If the radar is silent, subtract 1 from the final Press press for all menus except STT Lock).
2.1.1. STT Lock
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 1
- Press 1: TARGET AHEAD
- Press 2: ENEMY TARGET AHEAD
- Press 3: FRIENDLY TARGET AHEAD
- Press 4: CHOOSE SPECIFIC TARGET
- Press 5: FIRST TWS TARGET
- Press 6: TWS TARGET NUMBER
2.1.2. Scan Elevation
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 2
- Press 1: AUTO EL AND AZ
- Press 2: 15 NM
- Press 3: 20 NM
- Press 4: 30 NM
- Press 5: 40 NM
- Press 6: 50 NM
- Press 7: 75 NM
- Press 8: 100 NM
2.1.3. Scan Azimuth
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 3
- Press 1: CENTER
- Press 2: RIGHT 20
- Press 3: RIGHT 40
- Press 4: RIGHT 55
- Press 5: AUTO EL AND AZ
- Press 6: LEFT 55
- Press 7: LEFT 40
- Press 8: LEFT 20
2.1.4. TID Range
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 4
- Press 1: AUTO
- Press 2: 25 NM
- Press 3: 50 NM
- Press 4: 100 NM
- Press 5: 200 NM
- Press 6: 400 NM
2.1.5. Radar Settings
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 5
- Press 1: AUTO
- Press 2: TRACK WHILE SCAN AUTO
- Press 3: TRACK WHILE SCAN MANUAL
- Press 4: RANGE WHILE SEARCH
- Press 5: TARGET SIZE SWITCH
- Press 6: TARGET ASPECT SWITCH
2.1.5.5. Target Size Switch
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 5 -> Press 5
- Press 1: NORMAL
- Press 2: LARGE
- Press 3: SMALL
2.1.8. IFF
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 8
- Press 1: INTERROGATOR MODE
- Press 2: MASTER MODE
- Press 3: TRANSPONDER MODES
- Press 4: M3 CODE
- Press 5: M1 CODE
2.1.8.1. Interrogator Mode

Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 8 -> Press 1
- Press 1: MODE 4A
- Press 2: MODE 4B
2.1.8.2. Master Mode
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 8 -> Press 2
- Press 1: OFF
- Press 2: STBY
- Press 3: LOW
- Press 4: NORM
- Press 5: EMER
2.1.8.3. Transponder Modes
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 1 -> Press 8 -> Press 3
- Press 1: M1
- Press 2: M2
- Press 3: M3A
- Press 4: MC
- Press 5: M4
2.2. Within Visual Range
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 2 -> Press 2
- Press 1: CANCEL HOT RWS
- Press 2: JETTISON DROP TANKS
- Press 3: BEYOND VISUAL RANGE (Returns to BVR menu)
3. TID & WCS Radar Main Menu
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 3
[!NOTE] Presss 1, 2, and 4 in this menu dynamically toggle their text labels based on their current active state.
- Press 1: EXPAND TID / COLLAPSE TID (Toggle)
- Press 2: ENABLE AUTO EXPAND / DISABLE AUTO EXPAND (Toggle)
- Press 3: TID RANGE (Leads to same submenu as 2.1.4. TID Range)
- Press 4: TID GROUND STABILIZE / TID AIRCRAFT STABILIZE (See 3.4 below)
- Press 5: RADAR SETTINGS (Leads to same submenu as 2.1.5. Radar Settings)
3.4. TID Ground Stabilize
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 3 -> Press 4
(Note: This submenu only opens if Press 4 says "TID GROUND STABILIZE". If the menu currently says "TID AIRCRAFT STABILIZE", clicking Press 4 will instantly toggle it back to the default state without opening a submenu).
- Press 1: 15 S
- Press 2: 30 S
- Press 3: 60 S
- Press 4: 120 S
- Press 5: INDEFINITE
5. Navigation Utility Main Menu
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5
- Press 1: STEERING MODE
- Press 2: SEQUENCING
- Press 3: BDHI STEERING
- Press 4: SELECT DESTINATION WAYPOINT
- Press 5: DIRECT-TO WAYPOINT
- Press 6: SELECT SURFACE TARGET WAYPOINT
- Press 7: FLIGHT PLAN
- Press 8: BULLSEYE / NAV GRID (Toggle)
5.1. Steering Mode
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5 -> Press 1
- Press 1: EGI FLY-TO
- Press 2: DESTINATION
5.2. Sequencing
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5 -> Press 2
- Press 1: AUTO
- Press 2: OVERFLY
- Press 3: MANUAL
5.3. BDHI Steering
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5 -> Press 3
- Press 1: FLY-TO
- Press 2: FP WAYPOINT (Opens Select BDHI Waypoint menu)
- Press 5: HUD SYNC
5.3.2. Select BDHI Waypoint
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5 -> Press 3 -> Press 2
- Presss 1-8: Dynamic list of waypoints (e.g., 01 DEST PRI01, 02 AUTO HB HB, 03 AUTO BE BULLSEYE)
5.4. Select Destination Waypoint
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5 -> Press 4
- Presss 1-8: Dynamic list of waypoints (e.g., 01 DEST PRI01, 02 AUTO HB HB, 03 AUTO BE BULLSEYE)
5.5. Direct-To Waypoint
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5 -> Press 5
- Presss 1-8: Dynamic list of waypoints (e.g., 01 DEST PRI01, 02 AUTO HB HB, 03 AUTO BE BULLSEYE)
5.6. Select Surface Target Waypoint

Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5 -> Press 6
- Presss 1-8: Dynamic list of waypoints (e.g., 01 DEST PRI01, 02 AUTO HB HB, 03 AUTO BE BULLSEYE)
5.7. Flight Plan
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 5 -> Press 7
- Press 1: LOAD FLIGHT PLAN
- Press 2: RELOAD CURRENT FLIGHT PLAN
- Press 3: MANUAL ENTER WAYPOINT (L/L)
- Press 4: MANUAL ENTER WAYPOINT (MGRS)
- Press 5: WAYPOINT FROM MAP
6. CMS & RWR Defensive Main Menu
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 6
- Press 1: CMDS MODE
- Press 2: MANUAL PROGRAM
- Press 3: INHIBITS
- Press 5: RWR DISPLAY TYPE
- Press 6: SET JAMMER XMIT
6.1. CMDS Mode
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 6 -> Press 1
- Press 1: OFF
- Press 2: STANDBY
- Press 3: MANUAL
- Press 4: SEMI
- Press 5: AUTO
- Press 6: BYPASS
6.2. Manual Program
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 6 -> Press 2
- Press 1: PRG 1
- Press 2: PRG 2
- Press 3: PRG 3
- Press 4: PRG 4
6.3. Inhibits
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 6 -> Press 3
- Press 1: INHIBIT CHAFF
- Press 2: INHIBIT FLARE
- Press 3: INHIBIT 01
- Press 4: INHIBIT 02
- Press 5: INHIBIT RWR
- Press 6: INHIBIT MWS
- Press 7: INHIBIT JAMMER
6.5. RWR Display Type
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 6 -> Press 5
- Press 1: NORMAL
- Press 2: AIRBORNE INTERCEPTOR
- Press 3: AAA
- Press 4: UNKNOWN
- Press 5: FRIENDLY
7. Tactical Imaging Set Utility Main Menu
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 7
- Press 1: TURN OFF
- Press 2: SOURCE: [CURRENT] (Opens Recording Source menu)
- Press 3: START RECORDING
- Press 4: SNAP
- Press 5: SEND
7.2. Recording Source
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 7 -> Press 2
- Press 1: PILOT
- Press 2: RIO
- Press 3: RASTER
8. Crew Contract Utility Main Menu
Path: [Jester Menu] -> Press 8
- Press 1: SET INACTIVE (Toggle)
- Press 2: SET NO TALKING (Toggle)
- Press 3: SET EJECT BOTH (Toggle)
- Press 4: DISABLE LANDING CALLOUTS (Toggle)
- Press 5: ENABLE AUTO EXPAND (Toggle)
- Press 6: DISABLE AUTO VID (Toggle)
- Press 7: TREAT NO-REPLY AS BANDIT (Toggle)
Bombing Tool
In the F-14, the Bombing Tool gives the Pilot a simplified method to transfer desired bombing release settings to Jester. The tool is entirely optional to use for the pilot, as the traditional method of transferring weapon release settings via the Jester Wheel works alongside the bombing tool. The tool simplifies the workflow for the Pilot by reducing the time spent in the Jester wheel, if you require multiple release settings to be set.
For the B(U) aircraft variant, the tool also provides a JDAM Manual Release Calculator. This can be used to calculate horizontal RMAX (Maximum Release Range) & TOF (Time of Flight) at different drop parameters, useful in preparing for a TOO JDAM release.
The tool can be accessed with RCtrl+B.
Input
For each release setting, Jester will automatically change the setting once an option is entered.
Attack Mode
- Pilot (PLT)
- Target (TGT)
- Initial Point (IP)
- Manual (MAN)
Electric Fuze Type
- Instantaneous (INST)
- Preset Time Delay 1 (DLY 1)
- Preset Time Delay 2 (DLY 2)
- Air-burst (VT)
- Safe (SAFE)
Mechanical Fuze Type
- Nose
- Nose Tail
Delivery Mode
- Step | Single
- Step | Pairs
- Ripple | Single
- Ripple | Pairs
Ripple Interval
Tells Jester to set the desired bomb release interval in milliseconds (ms). You can set it in 10 ms increments per click.
Ripple Quantity
Tells Jester the desired quantity of bombs to release upon the press of 'weapon release'.
JDAM Manual Release (F-14B Upgrade Only)
Used to calculate horizontal RMAX (Maximum Release Range) & TOF (Time of Flight) at different drop parameters.
JDAM Type
Set to desired JDAM type (drag and glide coefficients are adjusted per JDAM type).
Release Altitude
Enter altitude at which you plan to release the weapon. Values in kft, increment of 5 per click.
Impact Angle
Set desired final weapon impact angle. Currently only 65 degrees modelled & selectable.
Release Aircraft Ground Speed
Enter the planned ground speed for release. Note it is ground speed and NOT IAS or TAS. Increment of 50 knots per click.
Once all parameters are entered, you may click Save to add the entry to the Saved Solutions list, from which you can refer to later during the flight.
💡 In order to close the bombing tool, make sure to first remove keyboard focus from it by clicking anywhere else in the cockpit.
Kneeboard
The kneeboard is present on both Pilot & RIO 3D models, on the left leg. It also remains fully interactive on the 3D model, without the need to open it via the keybind. The Pilot / RIO 3D models have a default keybinding of RSHIFT + P.
In order to cycle kneeboard configurations, the clamp at the top of the kneeboard must be clicked.
Checklist Configuration
The checklists included provides the crew with Normal Procedure, Attack & Emergency Checklists, as well as aircraft reference data. The checklist procedures are an abridged version of the checklists found in the NAVAIR 01-F14AAP-1B NATOPS Pocket Checklist (for the F-14B Upgrade).
The Checklist configuration can be interacted with the mouse in the cockpit. Navigation works as follows:
- Each of the 11 sections can be quickly skipped to from the front contents page by clicking on the right-hand side section list.
- The pages can also be scrolled manually using the arrows on the bottom navigation bar.
- Return to the contents page via the Home icon on the bottom right.
The 2D version of the Checklist configuration has a default keybinding of RCTRL + C.
Clipboard Configuration
The clipboard configuration provides the crew with the familiar DCS kneeboard on the Pilot & RIO models.
Pages can be cycled in desired direction by clicking on the left or right side of the page.
In order to access the clipboard configuration, the clamp at the top of the kneeboard must be clicked. This will cycle through the tool configurations.
Alternatively, you can change pages through using the regular keybinds, default:
- ] - Page Up
- [ - Page Down
The 2D version of the Clipboard configuration has a default keybinding of RSHIFT + K.
💡 In order to close the 2D checklist tool, make sure to first remove keyboard focus from it by clicking anywhere else in the cockpit.
Embedded Manual
This manual is embedded into the game and can be read while flying.
It also offers a way to explain switches in the cockpit directly by opening the manual scrolled right to the spot explaining the corresponding switch.
Controls
The default bind M can be used to toggle the manual. When holding it down while clicking a switch in the cockpit, the manual will automatically open and scroll to the section explaining that switch.
Additionally, the following binds are available as well:
- RSHIFT + M - open the manual
- RCTRL + M - close the manual
- RALT + M - toggle the manual
💡 In order to close the manual, make sure to first remove keyboard focus from it by clicking anywhere else in the cockpit.
Character
Customization
The Pilot and RIO character can be customized through an in-game menu which allows, for example, selecting one of the many flight suit variations. This menu can be entered via an assignable special bind.
The outfit presets can be saved and loaded using the in-game menu. They are
saved locally at C:\Users\John Doe\Saved Games\DCS_F14\character_presets.
Presets already stored in that folder can be loaded using the select preset
dropdown.
The defaults for the currently selected aircraft livery as shown with the
(Livery Default) text next to the customization option. If one desires to
reset their customization back to the livery's defaults, pressing the
Reset to Livery button will reset the Pilot/RIO customization back to the
livery's defaults.
Options
Customization options currently include:
- Facial Hair
- Moustache
- None
- Head
- Male
- Female
- Flight Suit
- Default
- Olive
- Orange
- Blue
- Tan
- Black
- Helmet
- HGU-55
- HGU-33
- Helmet Cover
- None
- M81 Woodland
- M81 Desert - 3 Color
- M81 Desert - 6 Color
- Visor
- Black
- Clear
- Gold
- Yellow
- Mask
- MBU-23
- MBU-12
- Glasses
- None
- Aviators
- Wraparound
Visor and Oxygen Mask Visibility
In addition to the ability to customize the visor and oxygen mask, the visor can be lowered and the oxygen mask can be removed using assignable special binds.
💡 Lowering the visor with the "Tinted Visor Effect" special option enabled will result in the tinted visor effect being shown.
Selfie Mode
To enable great screenshots, a special Selfie Mode can be entered via an assignable special bind.
In this mode, the character model is rendered even though the player is currently in First-Person-View (F1).
The camera can then be moved for example to the front via standard DCS controls:
- RCtrl + RShift + 8 (Numpad): Move up
- RCtrl + RShift + 2 (Numpad): Move down
- RCtrl + RShift + 4 (Numpad): Move left
- RCtrl + RShift + 6 (Numpad): Move right
- RCtrl + RShift + / (Numpad): Move forward
- RCtrl + RShift + * (Numpad): Move aft
The view can be turned back to face the pilot by using LAlt + C and then using the mouse.
Additionally, another special bind exists to freeze the character model movement.
By default, the cameras movement area is restricted to avoid glitching the view
during normal flight (for example when moving the head into a panel during VR).
This restriction can be lifted by editing
<DCS Install Folder>/Mods/aircraft/F14/Entry/Views.lua, allowing moving the
camera anywhere in the cockpit.
Crew Animations
There are several special binds available to the Pilot and RIO for special animations to be played using the character models.
Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| ACL | Automatic Carrier Landing |
| ACLS | Automatic Carrier Landing System |
| ACM | Air Combat Maneuver |
| ACP | Armament Control Panel |
| ACQ | Acquisition |
| ADF | Automatic Direction Finder |
| ADI | Attitude Director Indicator |
| ADL | Armament Datum Line |
| AFCS | Automatic Flight Control System |
| AFTC | Augmenter Fan Temperature Control |
| AHRS | Attitude Heading Reference System |
| AICS | Air Inlet Control System |
| AOA | Angle of Attack |
| APC | Approach Power Compensator |
| ASH | Automatic Stored Heading |
| ATC | Active Transfer Command |
| ATLS | Automatic Thrust Limiting System |
| ATTK | Attack |
| AVTR | Airborne Video Tape Recorder |
| AWL | All-Weather Landing |
B
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| BATR | Bullet at Target Range |
| BDHI | Bearing-Distance-Heading Indicator |
| BIT | Built-in Test |
| BRC | Base Recovery Course |
| BRST | Boresight |
| BRU | Bomb Rack Unit |
C
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| CADC | Central Air Data Computer |
| CAINS | Carrier Aircraft Inertial Navigation System |
| CANTCO | Can't Comply |
| CAP | Computer Address Panel |
| CCIP | Continuously Computed Impact Point |
| CDNU | Control Display Navigation Unit |
| CICU | Computer Integrated Converter Unit |
| CLSN | Collision |
| CM | Continuous Monitor |
| CRS | Course |
| CRT | Cathode Ray Tube |
| CSA | Continuous Semi-Active |
| CSDC | Computer Signal Data Converter |
| CTVS | Cockpit Television Sensor |
| CV | Aircraft Carrier |
| CW | Continuous-Wave |
D
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| DDD | Detail Data Display |
| DDI | Digital Data Indicator |
| DECM | Defensive Electronic Countermeasures |
| DEF PT | Defended Point |
| DES | Designate |
| DEST | Destination |
| DF | Direction Finder |
| DFCS | Digital Flight Control System |
| D/L | Data Link |
| DLC | Direct Lift Control |
| DME | Distance Measuring Equipment |
| DPLR | Doppler |
E
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| ECA | Expanded Chaff Adapter |
| ECM | Electronic Countermeasures |
| ECCM | Electronic Counter-Countermeasures |
| ECMD | Electronic Countermeasures Display |
| ECS | Environmental Control System |
| EGI | Embedded GPS/INS |
| EGT | Exhaust Gas Temperature |
| EIG | Engine Instrument Group |
| ETA | Estimated Time of Arrival |
| EXP | Expand |
F
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| FAR | False Alarm Rate |
| FCLP | Field Carrier Landing Practice |
| FEMS | Fatigue Engine Monitoring System |
| FF | Fuel Flow |
| FLOLS | Fresnel Lens Optical Landing System |
| FLIR | Forward Looking Infrared |
| FMC | F-14 Mission Computer |
| FMR | Frequency Ranging |
| FONO | Firing Order Number |
| FOV | Field of View |
| FRL | Fuselage Reference Line |
| FSK | Frequency-Shift-Keyed |
| FWD | Forward |
| FTI | Fast Tactical Imaging System |
G
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| GACH | Gimbal Angle Crosshair |
| GCI | Ground Controlled Intercept |
| GCS | Gun Control System |
| GGW | GPS Guided Weapon |
| GM | Ground Map |
| GPS | Global Positioning System |
| GSS | Gun Scoring System |
| GT | Ground Track |
H
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| HB | Homebase |
| HCU | Hand Control Unit |
| HDG | Heading |
| HOJ | Home-on-Jam |
| HOST | Hostile |
| HPRF | High Pulse Repetition Frequency |
| HRWS | Hot Range While Search |
| HSD | Horizontal Situation Display |
| HSI | Horizontal Situation Indicator |
| HUD | Heads-up Display |
I
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| IAS | Indicated Airspeed |
| ICLS | Instrument Carrier Landing System |
| ICS | Intercommunications |
| IFF | Identification Friend or Foe |
| IFR | Instrument Flight Rules |
| IFT | In-Flight Training |
| ILS | Instrument Landing System (ICLS) |
| IMN | Indicated Mach Number |
| IMU | Inertial Measurement Unit |
| INS | Inertial Navigation System |
| IP | Initial Point |
| IR | Infrared |
| IRAT | IR Angle Tracking |
| ITER | Improved Triple Ejector Rack |
| ITS | Integrated Trim System |
J
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| JAM | Jamming |
| JAT | Jam Angle Track |
K
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| KCAS | Knots Calibrated Airspeed |
| KTS | Knots |
L
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| LAR | Launch Acceptable Region |
| LCD | Liquid Crystal Display |
| LCOS | Lead Computing Optical Sight |
| LOS | Line of Sight |
| LPRF | Low Pulse Repetition Frequency |
| LSO | Landing Signal Officer or "Paddles" |
| LTE | Launch-to-Eject |
| LTS | LANTIRN Targeting System |
M
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| M | Mach |
| MA | Missile Alert |
| MAD | Magnetic Azimuth Detector |
| MAG VAR | Magnetic Variation |
| MAN | Manual |
| MAND | Mandatory |
| MDIG | Multipurpose Display Indicator Group |
| MDL | Mission Data Loader |
| MEC | Main Engine Control |
| MIL | Military |
| ML | Missile Launch |
| MLC | Mainlobe Clutter |
| MLG | Main Landing Gear |
| MOAT | Missile on Aircraft Test |
| MMGS | Multiple Mode Gun Sight |
| MRL | Manual Rapid Lockon |
| MSL | Mean Sea Level |
N
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| NAV GRID | Navigation Command and Control Grid |
| NBR | Number |
| NFO | Naval Flight Officer |
| NFOV | Narrow Field of View |
| NM | Nautical Miles |
| NOZ | Nozzle |
| NTDS | Naval Tactical Data System |
O
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| OBC | On-Board Check |
P
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| Paddles | See LSO |
| PAL | Pilot Automatic Lockon |
| PCD | Precision Course Direction |
| PD | Pulse Doppler |
| PDCP | Pilot Display Control Panel |
| PDRSL | Pulse Doppler Radar Slaved |
| PDS | Pulse Doppler Search |
| PDSTT | Pulse Doppler Single Target Track |
| PH | AIM-54 Phoenix Missile |
| PLM | Pilot Lockon Mode |
| PMDIG | Programmable Multiple Display Indicator Group |
| PRF | Pulse Repetition Frequency |
| PRI | Primary |
| PRSL | Pulse Radar Slaved |
| PS | Pulse Search |
| PSTT | Pulse Single Target Track |
| PT | Point |
| PTID | Programmable Tactical Information Display |
Q
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| QADL | Cue-to-ADL |
| QDES | Cue-to-Designate |
| QHUD | Cue-to-HUD |
| QSNO | Cue-to-snowplow |
| QWP | Cue-to-waypoint |
R
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| RACH | Radar Angle Crosshair |
| RDR | Radar |
| RDROT | Radar on Target |
| RECON | Reconnaissance |
| RIO | Radar Intercept Officer |
| RNG | Range |
| RNGRT | Range Rate |
| ROT | Range on Target |
| RTGS | Real-Time Gun Sight |
| RWS | Range While Search |
| RWR | Radar Warning Receiver |
S
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| SAM | Surface to Air Missile |
| SAS | Stability Augmentation System |
| SAT | Simultaneous Alignment and Test |
| SCP | Sensor Control Panel |
| SD/A | Sample Data/Active |
| SEAM | Sidewinder Expanded Acquisition Mode |
| SINS | Ship Inertial Navigation System |
| SP | AIM-7 Sparrow Missile |
| ST | Surface Target |
| STAB | Stabilization |
| STAB AUG | Stability Augmentation |
| STBY | Standby |
| STC | Sensitivity Time Control |
| STT | Single Target Track |
| SW | AIM-9 Sidewinder Missile |
T
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| TACAN | Tactical Air Navigation |
| TARPS | Tactical Air Reconnaissance Pod System |
| TAS | True Airspeed |
| TCS | Television Camera Set |
| TDS | Tactical Data System |
| TER | Triple Ejector Rack |
| TGT | Target |
| THRLD | Threshold |
| TID | Tactical Information Display |
| TIT | Turbine Inlet Temperature |
| TREL | Time-to-Release |
| TTG | Time-to-Go |
| TUIR | Time Until in Range |
| TUMR | Time Until Maximum Range |
| TUOR | Time Until Optimum Range |
| TWS | Track While Scan |
| TWSA | Track While Scan Automatic |
| TWSM | Track While Scan Manual |
U
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| UHF | Ultra High Frequency |
| UTC | Coordinated Universal Time |
V
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| Vc | Closing Velocity Rate |
| vC | Computed MAG VAR |
| VDI | Vertical Display Indicator |
| VDIG | Vertical Display Indicator Group (HUD & VDI) |
| VEC | Vector |
| VFR | Visual Flight Rules |
| VHF | Very High Frequency |
| VID | Visual Identification |
| vM | Manual MAG VAR |
| VMCU | Voltage Monitor Control Unit |
| VSL | Vertical Scan Lockon |
| VTR | Video Tape Recorder |
W
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| WCS | Weapon Control System |
| WFOV | Wide Field of View |
| WILCO | Will Comply |
| WOD | Wind over the Deck |
| WOW | Weight on/off Wheels |
Y
| Abbreviation | Definition |
|---|---|
| YY | Geographic Reference Point for NAV GRID |
Tutorials
Pilot Cockpit Overview
RIO Cockpit Overview
Pilot Cold Start
Front Seat - Startup, Taxi, Takeoff with Jester (Short)
Back Seat - RIO Startup (4 different ways)
Maneuvering and Flight Characteristics
Air to Air Refueling
Front Seat - ACM - Radar Acquisition Modes
Back Seat - RIO NAV GRID Tutorial
Back Seat - RIO AWG-9 Tutorial
Back Seat - RIO IFF Tutorial
CVW-11: DCS F-14B Tomcat RIO School
Front Seat - Weapons - AIM-9 Sidewinder
Front Seat - Weapons - Zuni Rockets with Jester
Imprint
Heatblur Simulations™
Ulica Wrzosowa 11, 72-602, Świnoujście, Poland
Contact: support@heatblur.se
The Heatblur F-14 Team
Nicholas Dackard, Creative Director and Lead Artist
Daniel Malmquist, Lead Engineer (Flight Dynamics and JESTER-AI)
Bert van Leeuwen, Senior Programmer (Weapons, Radar, Systems and Multi-crew)
Krzysztof Sobczak, Senior Programmer (Systems, Avionics, RWR and Radios, Nav and
LANTIRN)
Andrew O'Donnell, Senior Programmer (Flight Dynamics, Systems and Engines)
Aleksander Studen-Kirchner, Producer (QA, Content and Director JESTER-AI)
Johan Malmquist - Lead Research and Lead Author F-14A/B Manual
Andreas Sandin - Lead Design, Web-Design and Liveries
Adrian Caparzo, Video Editing and Trailers
Grayson Frohberg, Voice of the JESTER-AI
Post Release
Daniel Tischner, Senior Programmer (UI, Systems and AI)
Dominik Głowacki, Senior Programmer (Systems, Avionics, AI)
Szymon Skarzyński, Senior Programmer (Systems, Avionics, AI)
Phil Jones, Senior Programmer, (A-6E AI)
Joshua Nelson, Programmer (Weapons)
Yannis Leon Bößmann, Programmer (Cockpit Tools)
Nicola Faggiani, Artist, 3D Model
Davi Bernardino, Artist, 3D Model and Textures
Ben Mährlein, Liveries and Art
Kenneth Ellis, Research
Daria Kurhuzova, Administrative Assistant
The Heatblur F-14B(U) Team
Nicholas Dackard, Lead Artist; Creative Director
Daniel Malmquist, Lead Engineer; Project Lead
Aleksander Studen-Kirchner, Lead Producer; Content Director
Dominik Głowacki, Senior Programmer (Systems, Avionics, AI)
Szymon Skarzyński, Senior Programmer (Systems, Avionics, AI)
Daniel Tischner, Senior Programmer (UI, Systems and AI)
Adam Conway, Programmer (Jester, Cockpit Tools)
Davi Bernardino, Artist, 3D Model and Textures
Nicola Faggiani, Artist, 3D Model
Moritz Kroner, Lead Research, Lead Author F-14B(U) Manual and Art
Andreas Sandin, Lead Design, Web-Design and Liveries
Nate Williams, Mission Designer and Artist
Baltic Dragon, Campaign and Training Missions
TOViper, Training Missions
Ben Mährlein, Liveries and Art
Adrian Caparzo, Video Editing and Trailers
Grayson Frohberg, Voice of the JESTER-AI
Kelly Sandin, Female JESTER AI Voice Source
Daria Kurhuzova, Administrative Assistant